Bid Document 122

Madhya Pradesh Urban Development Company Limited

(Government of Madhya Pradesh, Urban Development and Housing Department)
E-PROCUREMENT BIDDING DOCUMENT
NIT No. MPUDC/KfW/ 2018/2646 Dated 13-06-2018
SURVEY, REVIEW THE DESIGNS, REDESIGN WHERE NECESSARY AND

BUILD SEWAGE COLLECTION AND CONVEYANCE SYSTEM, SEWAGE
TREATMENT AND DISPOSAL SYSTEM OF BARWANI NAGAR PALIKA,
DISTRICT BARWANI OF MADHYA PRADESH AND OPERATE AND
MAINTAIN THE BUILT SYSTEM FOR 10 YEARS
(Bid No. 122)
A sub component of
Madhya Pradesh Urban Sanitation and Environment Programme (MPUSEP)
proposed with the assistance of KfW Development Bank
First Floor, MP Rajya Krishi and Gramin Sahkari Bank,

8 Jail Road, Arera Hills, Bhopal, Madhya Pradesh 462011
Phone No. 91-755-2763060, 61, E-mail- einc@mpudc.co.in, mapursep@gmail.com
Page 1 of 7

INVITATION FOR BIDS (IFB)

THROUGH
E-PROCUREMENT SYSTEM
Page 2 of 7

M.P. URBAN DEVELOPMENT COMPANY LIMITED, BHOPAL, M.P.

(DEPARTMENT OF URBAN DEVELOPMENT AND HOUSING, GOVERNMENT OF MADHYA PRADESH)
MADHYA PRADESH URBAN SANITATION AND ENVIRONMENT

PROGRAMME

DISTRICT BARWANI OF MADHYA PRADESH AND OPERATE AND
MAINTAIN THE BUILT SYSTEM FOR 10 YEARS
E-Procurement Notice/Invitation for Bids (Bid No. 122)
NIT No. MPUDC/KfW/ 2018/2646 Dated 13-06-2018
1. The Government of Madhya Pradesh (GoMP) through Government of India has

signed for a loan (BMZ No. 201365170) from the KfW Development Bank
towards the cost of MADHYA PRADESH URBAN SANITATION AND
ENVIRONMENT PROGRAMME (MPUSEP) and intends to apply a portion of
proceeds of this loan towards Package 2 “SURVEY, REVIEW THE
DESIGNS, REDESIGN WHERE NECESSARY AND BUILD SEWAGE
COLLECTION AND CONVEYANCE SYSTEM, SEWAGE
TREATMENT AND DISPOSAL SYSTEM OF BARWANI NAGAR
PALIKA, DISTRICT BARWANI OF MADHYA PRADESH AND
OPERATE AND MAINTAIN THE BUILT SYSTEM FOR 10 YEARS” and
cover eligible payments under the contracts for construction of works as detailed
below. The operation and maintenance cost shall be borne by the GoMP.
2. Bidding will be conducted through International Competitive bidding

procedures as specified in the KfW’s Procurement Guidelines: “Guidelines for
Procurement of Goods, Works and associated Services in Financial Cooperation
Page 3 of 7

with Partner Countries” and is open to all bidders from eligible source countries
as defined in the Procurement Guidelines. Bidders from India should, however
be registered with the Central Registration System of Government of Madhya
Pradesh; or registered with any other State Government/Government of India, or
any State/Central Government undertakings in the appropriate category as
prescribed under this contract invitation. However, Bidders not registered with
any of the specified authorities are also eligible to participate in the process.
Such bidders will be required to register with any one specified authority before
signing the agreement, in case the bidder wins the bid. Bidders are advised to
note the minimum qualification criterion specified in ITB section 1 of the
Instructions to Bidders to qualify for the award of the Contract.
3. Engineer-In-Chief, M.P. Urban Development Company Limited invites Bids in

electronic tendering system for the works "Survey, Review The Designs,
Redesign Where Necessary And Build Sewage Collection And Conveyance
System, Sewage Treatment And Disposal System Of Barwani Nagar Palika,
District Barwani Of Madhya Pradesh And Operate And Maintain The Built
System For 10 Years" detailed in the table below:
Package Name of Work Bid Security Cost of Bid Period of

No. Document Completion (days)
02 (a) Survey, Review the design, INR 5,000,000 INR 50,000 730
redesign where necessary and Or US$ Or
build Sewage Collection and 83,300* US$ 830
conveyance system, Sewage
Treatment and Disposal system of
BARWANI
(b) Operation and maintenance 3650
for 10 years after
commissioning of scheme
including complaint redressal
*Note: 1 US$ is considered as INR 60
4. The Bidder must submit Bid for the complete scope of the works contained in
the above table. Bidders submitting the Bid for only one component (Design-
Build or Operation and Maintenance) shall be rejected.
Page 4 of 7

5. The Bid document is available on-line and Bids are to be submitted on-line
through the e-procurement portal http://mpeproc.gov.in. Bids submitted
manually will not be accepted. The Bidders would be required to register in the
website. For submission of Bids, the Bidders are required to have Digital
Signature Certificate (DSC) from one of the authorized certifying authorities.
6. Aspiring Bidders who have not obtained the user id and password for
participating in e-procurement may obtain the same by registering in the web-
site http://mpeproc.gov.in. The requirements to register with the e-procurement
portal are available on the website indicated.
7. The Bidders are required to submit (a) receipt of online payment towards the
cost of Bid Document (b) original bid security in approved form and (c) original
notarized power of attorney as per the provisions of ITB section 2.1 (2) 3.5(1)
and 3.7, to the Engineer-In-Chief, M.P. Urban Development Company Ltd. on
or before the date and time of opening of Part I – Technical Bid, either by
registered post or by hand, failing which the bids will be declared non-
responsive.
8. Kindly note:
(i) The above documents shall be submitted in one envelope. The Bidders
shall not write their name or addresses on this envelope.
(ii) The number mentioned on acknowledgement of on-line submission of the
Bid by the Bidder shall be mentioned on envelope containing the
documents as detailed above.
(iii) Cost of Bid document as given in table in point no. 3 above to be paid
On-line.
Page 5 of 7

9. A pre-bid meeting will be held as scheduled in BDS/ ITB 2.8(1) and (2) at the
office of Engineer-In-Chief M.P. Urban Development Company Limited, 8, Jail
Road, Arera Hills, Bhopal to clarify the issues and answer the questions on any
matter that may be raised at that stage as stated in ITB section 2.5 of the Bidding
document.
10. Other details can be seen in the Bidding documents. The owner shall not be held
liable for any delays due to the e-procurement systems failure beyond its
control. Even though the e-procurement system will attempt to notify the
Bidders of any Bid updates, the owner shall not be liable for any information not
received by the Bidder. It is the Bidder’s responsibility to verify the website for
the latest information related to tender.
--sd--
Engineer in Chief
Madhya Pradesh Urban Development Co. Ltd.,
Bhopal, Madhya Pradesh, India
Phone No. 91-755-2763060, 61,
E-mail- einc@mpudc.co.in, mapursep@gmail.com
Page 6 of 7

MADHYA PRADESH URBAN SANITATION AND ENVIRONMENT PROGRAMME

(KfW BANK FUNDED)
Invitation for Bids under International Competitive Bidding
NIT No. MPUDC/KfW/ 2018/2646 Dated 13.06.2018
Madhya Pradesh Urban Development Company Limited invites Bids (to be submitted in the
e-Procurement Portal) for the following works:
Package 1: Survey, Review the Designs, Redesign where necessary and Build Sewage
Collection and Conveyance System, Sewage Treatment and Disposal System
of Hoshangabad Nagar Palika, District Hoshangabad of Madhya Pradesh and
Operate and Maintain the Built System for 10 Years (Second Call)
Collection and Conveyance System, Sewage Treatment and Disposal
System of Barwani Nagar Palika, District Barwani of Madhya Pradesh
and Operate and Maintain the Built System for 10 Years.
of Sendhwa Nagar Palika, District Barwani, of Madhya Pradesh and Operate
and Maintain the Built System for 10 Years.
of Narsinghpur Nagar Palika, District Narsinghpur of Madhya Pradesh and
Operate and Maintain the Built System for 10 Years
of Mandla Nagar Palika, District Mandla of Madhya Pradesh and Operate and
Maintain the Built System for 10 Years
Detailed Invitation for Bid with all relevant information is available on
http://www.mpeproc.gov.in/mpudc as Bid No. 121, 122, 123, 125 and 126 respectively. Bidding
Documents are also available online.
The Bid document is available online from 15-06-2018, 17:30 hrs. The deadline for
online submission of bids is 30-07-2018, 14.00 hrs. The bids will be opened on 30-07-2018 at
16:00 hours.
Bidders are advised to note the minimum qualification criteria specified in the bidding
documents. Interested bidders may participate in the bidding process as per instructions given
in the bidding documents.
--sd--
Engineer in Chief
Madhya Pradesh Urban Development Co. Ltd.,
Bhopal, Madhya Pradesh, India
Phone No. 91-755-2763060, 61
Phone No. 91-755-2763060, 61

Page 7 of 7

Volume 1 – ITB
SURVEY, REVIEW THE DESIGNS, REDESIGN WHERE NECESSARY AND BUILD
SEWAGE COLLECTION AND CONVEYANCE SYSTEM, SEWAGE TREATMENT
AND DISPOSAL SYSTEM OF BARWANI NAGAR PALIKA, DISTRICT BARWANI
OF MADHYA PRADESH AND OPERATE AND MAINTAIN THE BUILT SYSTEM
FOR 10 YEARS
VOLUME 1 INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS (ITB)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section 1. Introduction 4
1.1 Source of Funds and Scope of Work 4
1.2 Eligible Bidders 4
1.3 Eligible Material, Equipment and Services 6
1.4 Qualification of the Bidder 6
1.5 Joint Ventures 9
1.6 Corrupt and Fraudulent Practices 11
Section 2. The Bidding Documents 11

2.1 Content of Bidding Documents 11
2.2 Clarification of Bidding Documents 12
2.3 Site Visit 13
2.4 Data Room and Background Information 13
2.5 Pre-Bid Meeting 13
2.6 Amendment of Bidding Documents 14
2.7 Contacts with the Owner for the Purpose of Clarification 14
2.8 Information Provided by the Owner/Bidders Due Diligence 14
2.9 Timetable 15
Section 3. Preparation of Bids 15

3.1 Language of Bid 15
3.2 Documents Comprising the Bid 15
3.3 Technical Bid – Bidder’s Bid Form and Qualification Information 17
3.4 Technical Bid – Technical and Staffing Information 17
3.5 Technical Bid – Bid Security 19
3.6 Technical Section – Joint Venture Documents and Requirement 20
3.7 Technical Bid – Power of Attorney 20
3.8 Financial Bid – Bidder’s Bid Forms 20
3.9 Financial Bid – Bidders Prices Schedule 20
3.10 Financial Section – Bid Currencies 23
3.11 Bidding of Alternatives Not to be Considered 23
3.12 Period of Validity of Bid 23
3.13 Declaration of Undertaking 23
3.14 Cost of Bidding 24
Section 4. Submission of Bids 24

4.1 Electronic Submission of Bids 24
4.2 Deadline for Submission of Bids 24
4.3 Late Bids 24
4.4 Modification and Withdrawal of Bids 24
Section 5. Bid Opening and Evaluation 25

5.1 Online Opening of Bid by Owner 25
5.2 Clarification of Bids 26
5.3 Preliminary Examination of Bids 26
5.4 Technical Evaluation 26
5.5 Financial Evaluation 28
5.6 Contacting the Owner 28
Madhya Pradesh Urban Sanitation and Environmental Programme Page 2 of 98

Section 6. Award of Contract 28

6.1 Award Criteria 28
6.2 Owner’s Right to Accept or Reject and Waive Irregularities 29
6.3 Notification of Award 29
6.4 Signing the Form of Contract 29
6.5 Performance Security 30
6.6 Failure to Sign the Form of Contract or Provide the Performance Security 30
6.7 Adjudicator 30
6.8 Corrupt or Fraudulent Practices 30
Section 7. Bid Data Sheet 33
Annex A– BIDDER’S BID FORMS 45
Annex B – THE DRAFT CONTRACT 82
Annex C – CONTRACT PRICE SCHEDULE 90

Section 1. Introduction
1.1 Source of (1) The Borrower named in the Bid Data Sheet has signed for a loan
Funds and (hereafter called “loan”) from the Kreditanstalt für Wiederaufbau
Scope of Work (KfW) towards the cost of the project named in the Bid-data sheet.
The Borrower intends to apply a portion of the proceeds of this
loan to eligible payments under the contract for which these
Bidding Documents are issued. Bidders shall note that the
Borrower and the Owner named in the Bid Data Sheet may be the
same entity.
(2) Payment by the Bank will be made only at the request of the
Borrower and upon approval by the Bank, in accordance with the
terms and conditions of the loan agreement, and will be subject in
all respects to the terms and conditions of that agreement. The
loan agreement prohibits a withdrawal from the loan account for
the purpose of any payment to persons or entities, or for any
import of Plant and Equipment, if such payment or import, to the
knowledge of the Bank, is prohibited by a decision of the United
Nations Security Council taken under Chapter VII of the Charter
of the United Nations. No party other than the Borrower shall
derive any rights from the loan agreement or have any claim to the
loan proceeds.
(3) The scope of works is as stated in the Bid Data Sheet.
1.2 Eligible (1) This Invitation for Bids, issued by the Owner named in the Bid
Bidders Data Sheet, is open to all Bidders from the eligible countries. All
countries shall be eligible countries except if the country of origin
is ruled out by sanctions issued by the UN Security Council or
sanctions issued by the European Union, the Development
Government or the Government of India.
All Bidders shall provide in Bidder’s Bid forms and qualification
information, a statement that the Bidder is not associated, nor has
been associated in the past, directly or indirectly, with the
Consultant or any other entity that has prepared the design,
specifications, and other documents for the project or being
proposed as project manager for the Contract. A firm that has been
engaged by the Borrower to provide Consulting Services for
preparation or supervision of the works, and any of its affiliates,
shall not be eligible to Bid.
Government owned enterprises in the owner’s country may only
participate if they are legally and financially autonomous, operate
under commercial law and are not a dependent agency of the
borrower or the sub-borrower.

(2) The Bidder shall not have a conflict of interest. Any Bidder found
to have a conflict of interest shall be disqualified. A Bidder may
be considered to have a conflict of interest for the purpose of this
bidding process, if the Bidder:
• directly or indirectly controls, is controlled by or is under common
control with another Bidder; or
• receives or has received any direct or indirect subsidy from
another Bidder; or
• has the same legal representative as another Bidder; or
• has a relationship with another Bidder, directly or through
common third parties, that puts it in a position to influence the bid
of another Bidder, or influence the decisions of the Owner
regarding this bidding process; or
• Participates in more than one bid in this bidding process.
Participation by a Bidder in more than one Bid will result in the
disqualification of all Bids in which such Bidder is involved.
However, this does not limit the inclusion of the same
subcontractor in more than one bid; or
• any of its affiliates participated as a consultant in the preparation
of the design or technical specifications of the works that are the
subject of the bid; or
• any of its affiliates has been hired (or is proposed to be hired) by
the Owner or Borrower as Engineer for the Contract
implementation; or
• would be providing goods, works, or non-consulting services
resulting from or directly related to consulting services for the
preparation or implementation of the project specified in ITB 1.1
that it provided or were provided by any affiliate that directly or
indirectly controls, is controlled by, or is under common control
with that firm; or
• has a close business or family relationship with a professional
staff of the Borrower (or of the project implementing agency, or of
a recipient of a part of the loan) who: (i) are directly or indirectly
involved in the preparation of the bidding documents or
specifications of the contract, and/or the bid evaluation process of
such contract; or (ii) would be involved in the implementation or
supervision of such contract unless the conflict stemming from
such relationship has been resolved in a manner acceptable to the
Bank throughout the procurement process and execution of the
contract.

1.3 Eligible (1) For the purposes of these Bidding Documents, the words “Plant
Material, and Equipment” and “Services” shall be construed in accordance
Equipment and with the respective definitions given to them in the Contract.
Services
(2) All Plant and Equipment to be supplied and installed and Services
carried out under the Contract may have their origin in any
country, as defined in KfW’s Procurement Guidelines and subject
to Instructions to Bidders (“ITB”) Section 1.3(3), and all
expenditures made under the Contract will be limited to such
Plant and Equipment and Services.
(3) For purposes of this ITB Section 1.3, “origin” means the place
where the Plant and Equipment or component parts thereof are
mined, grown, or produced. Plant and Equipment are produced
when, through manufacturing, processing or substantial and major
assembling of components, a commercially recognized product
results that is substantially different in basic characteristics or in
purpose or utility from its components.
(4) The origin of the Plant and Equipment and Services is distinct
from the nationality of the Bidder.1.3.2
1.4 Qualification (A) General

of the Bidder (1) Evaluation will be based on Bidders meeting all the following
minimum pass-fail criteria regarding their general design, build,
operation and maintenance experience and Sewage Collection and
Treatment system experience, financial position, personnel
capabilities and other relevant information as demonstrated by the
Bidders’ responses in the Qualification Information Forms that
they submit attached to their Bids.
(2) Bidders may submit the Bid either as:
(a) A stand-alone firm, company, legal entity formed as per the
applicable law; or
(b) A joint venture up to a maximum of 3 members
Provided that they meet the requirements of the Qualification
Documents.
(B) Subcontracting
The bidder can sub-contract maximum up to 25% of the total
contract value.
(1) Sub contractor’s qualification may be added to the Bidders
qualification only if the subcontractors and sub-consultants are
nominated in the bid. For the purposes of ITB 1.4 H, Bidders may
nominate personnel of subcontractors and sub-consultants to fill
the key positions listed in the BDS (Bid Data Sheet).
(2) The Bidder shall provide a detailed list of all nominated

subcontractors and sub-consultants and a record of their

experience and qualifications in the applicable Information Forms.
The Bidder under the Contract shall be prohibited from entering
into a sub-contract/s that will result in the Bidder exceeding the
maximum percentage of subcontracting and sub-consulting
permitted by the Owner, as set out in the BDS.
(3) The Owner may require the Bidders to provide more information
about sub-Contractor and sub-consultants nominated in their Bid.
If the owner determines that any nominated sub-Bidder or sub-
consultant is ineligible or unsuitable to carry out the assigned task,
the Owner may reject the bid.
(4) Bidders will not be permitted to change the subcontractors and
sub-consultants nominated in their Bid without the prior written
consent of the Owner. The Owner shall not unreasonably withhold
such consent.
(C) Bidder’s Responsibility
After award of the Contract, the subcontracting of any part of the
work (within the prescribed limit), except for those subcontractors
and sub consultants nominated in the Bid, shall require the prior
written consent of the Owner. Notwithstanding such consent, the
Bidder shall remain responsible for the acts, defaults, and neglects
of all subcontractors and sub consultants during Contract
implementation.
(D) General Design Experience
The Bidder shall provide evidence that:
(a) it has been actively engaged in designing, building, operating,
managing and maintaining civil works facilities, for at least the
period as stated in BDS; and,
(b) It has generated an average annual turnover, in respect of
designing, building, operating, managing and maintaining civil
works facilities during the period stated in the BDS that is greater
than the amount stated in BDS.
The average annual turnover is defined as the total payment
received for general design and construction work and work
related to designing, building, operating, managing and
maintaining civil works facilities by the firm or firms comprising
the Bidder, divided by the number of years stated in BDS.
(E) Particular Sewage Collection and Treatment Experience
(1) The Bidder shall provide evidence that
(i) it has successfully carried out the number and type of
Sewage Collection and Treatment projects or assignments

stated in BDS within the period stated in the respective

contracts. The projects or assignments may have been
executed by the Bidder as prime Bidder, or as a member of
a joint venture, or as a sub-Bidder or sub-consultant who
must provide its contribution proportion as JV
partner/subcontractor/sub consultant, with references being
submitted to confirm satisfactory performance
Documentary evidence;
(ii) Completion certificate issued by the Owner in case of
Completed work has to be submitted along with the bid. In
no case, the Letter of Acceptance shall be taken as
document for calculation of financial capability as well as
work experience.
(2) For the purpose of demonstrating its experience in accordance
with ITB 1.4 D (a), the Bidder, including a joint venture partner,
may include the experience of the nominated sub-Bidders also.
(F) Financial Capabilities
(1) The Bidder shall demonstrate sufficient financial resources,
usually comprising of Working Capital supplemented by credit
line statements or overdraft facilities, liquid assets, unencumbered
real assets and others independent of any contractual advance
payment, sufficient to meet the cash flow requirements for the its
current contract commitments, and the subject contract in the
event of stoppage, start-up, or other delays in payment, of the
minimum estimated amount as stated in the BDS, net of the
Bidders’ commitments for other contracts.
(2) The Bidder shall also demonstrate, to the satisfaction of the
Owner, that it has adequate sources of finance to meet the cash
flow requirements on works currently in progress and for future
contract commitments as stated in the BDS.
(3) The Bidder’s audited balance sheets or, if not required by the laws
of the Bidder’s country, other financial statements acceptable to
the Owner, for the last five years shall be submitted and must
demonstrate the current soundness of the Bidder’s financial
position and indicate its prospective long-term profitability. If
deemed necessary by the Owner, the Owner shall have the
authority to make inquiries with the Bidder’s bankers.
(G) Critical Construction Equipment
Each Bidder shall demonstrate the availability (either owned or
leased) of the key and critical equipment for work as specified in
the BDS.
(H) Personnel Capabilities

The Bidder shall supply general information on the management

structure of the firm, and shall make provision for suitably
qualified personnel to fill the key positions listed in the BDS, as
required during Contract implementation. The Bidder shall supply
information on a candidate for each key position, who shall meet
the experience requirements specified. The Bidder may nominate
personnel of subcontractors and sub consultants to fill key
positions listed in the BDS.
(I) Litigation History and Legal Matters
The Bidder shall provide accurate information about pending
litigation with respect to contracts completed or ongoing under its
execution over the last five years. A consistent history of awards
against the Bidder or any Partner of a joint venture may result in
rejection of the Bid.
1.5 Joint Ventures (A) Eligibility

If the Bidder comprises a number of firms (maximum 3)
combining their resources as a joint venture, the entity
constituting the joint venture and the individual participants in the
joint venture shall meet the requirements of ITB 1.2 above.
(B) Qualification Criteria
(1) Each partner of a joint venture Bidder shall provide the
information set out in ITB 1.5 B (2) and (3) as it applies to the
participant’s own firm.
(2) For the purpose of satisfying the qualification criteria set out in
ITB 1.4 the following data of each participant in the joint venture
may be added together to meet qualifying criteria:
(a) General design, building, operating, managing and
maintaining civil works facilities as stated in ITB
section 1.4 D (a);each joint venture member must meet
a minimum of 60% of the requirement;
(b) average annual turnover as stated in ITB Section 1.4 D (b);
(provided any one Partner meets minimum 51% of the
requirements, and each of the other Partners meets at least
26% of the requirement; and
(c) Particular Sewage Collection and Treatment experience as
stated in ITB Section 1.4 E; and
(d) Personnel capabilities as stated in ITB 1.4 H.
(3) For the purpose of satisfying the qualification criteria set out in
Section 1.4, Joint Venture participants must satisfy the following
qualification criteria as set out in ITB 1.5 (B) (3) (c) individually:

(a) Financial soundness as stated in ITB 1.4 F (1)

(b) adequate sources to meet financial commitments as set out
in Section ITB 1.4F(2); and
(c) Legal disclosure as stated in ITB 1.4.1.
(4) The Bidder shall include all information in respect of joint venture
participants that is required to meet the qualification criteria in
Section 1.4, in accordance with ITB 1.5 B, in the Bid.
(C) Lead Partner
One of the joint venture Partners who is responsible for
performing a key function in contract management or in executing
a major component of the proposed Contract shall be nominated
as being in charge during the qualification and bidding process
periods and, in the event of a successful bid, during Contract
execution (the “Lead Partner”). The Lead Partner shall meet at
least 51% of the qualification criteria as defined in ITB 1.5 (B) (3)
(b). The Lead Partner shall be authorized to incur liabilities and
receive instructions for and on behalf of any and all partners of the
joint venture. This authorization shall be evidenced by the
submission of a power of attorney signed by legally authorized
signatories of each of the joint venture Partners as part of the Bid.
(D) Participant Limitation and Joint Venture Company
The maximum number of members in a JV is limited to three (3).
(E) Joint and Several Liability
All participants of the joint venture shall be legally liable, jointly,
severally, during the bidding process and for the execution of
Contract in accordance with the Contract terms, and a statement to
this effect shall be included in the authorization required under
ITB 1.5 C.
(F) Joint Venture Agreement
A letter of intent to execute a Joint Venture agreement (“JVA”) in
the event of a successful bid shall be signed by all participants and
submitted with the Bids. Pursuant to ITB 1.5 C to E, the letter of
intent shall include, among other things, description of the
objectives of joint venture, the proposed management structure,
the contribution of each participant to the joint venture operations,
the commitment of the participants to the joint and several
liability for performance of Contract, recourse of sanctions within
the joint venture in the event of default or withdrawal of any
participant, and arrangements for providing the required
indemnities.

1.6 Corrupt and (1) The Bank requires compliance with its procurement guidelines in
Fraudulent regard to corrupt and fraudulent practices as set forth in ITB. In
Practices further pursuance of these procurement guidelines, Bidders shall
permit and shall cause its agents (whether declared or not), sub-
contractors, sub-consultants, service providers, or suppliers and
any personnel thereof, to permit the Bank to inspect all accounts,
records and other documents relating to any prequalification
process, bid submission, and contract performance (in the case of
award), and to have them audited by auditors appointed by the
Bank.
Section 2. The Bidding Documents

2.1 Content of 2.1.1 The nature of the service area, the services, the site and facility
Bidding that are to be designed, built, managed, operated and maintained
Documents by the Bidder, the procedures that are to be followed during the
bidding process and the contract terms and technical requirements
are prescribed in the Bidding Documents. The Bidding
Documents consist of:
Volume 1
(a) The Instructions to Bidders (ITB);
(b) The Bid Data Sheet (BDS);
(c) Annex A to the Bidding Documents – Forms
(i) Bidder’s Bid Form;
(ii) Bidder’s Price Schedules;
(iii) Form of Bid Security/ Bid Bond
(iv) Form of Performance Security;
(v) Form of Bank Guarantee – Advance Payment;
(vi) Format of Curriculum Vitae for Proposed Key Staff;
(vii) Form for Clarification Questions; and
(viii) Declaration of Undertaking;
(d) Annex B to the Bidding Documents – the Draft Contract
(e) Annex C to the Bidding Documents – Bidder’s Price Schedules
and Indicative Bill of Quantities
Volume 2
(f) The General Conditions of Contract:
(i) General Conditions of the Contract; and

(ii) Appendices to the General Conditions,

Appendix 1: Special Conditions of Contract
Appendix 2: Terms and Procedures of Payment
Appendix 3: Price Adjustment
Volume 3
(g) Technical Specifications
Annex 1 Layout Sewerage Network
Annex 2 Layout Houseconnections
Annex 3 Layout STP
Annex 4 P&ID STP
Annex 5 Indicative BoQ
Annex 6 Draft EMP
Annex 7 Indicative Project Implementation Plan
Annex 8 Detailed Project Report (DPR)
Volume 4
(h) Operation and Maintenance Services Agreement
(i) Addenda to the documents listed in ITB Section 2.1.1(a) to (h), if
any are issued by the Owner.
2.1.2 The documents listed in ITB Section 2.1.1 (a) to (i) are
collectively the “Bidding Documents”. The Bidding document is
available online on the website http://www.mpeproc.gov.in. The
cost of the Bid document is to be paid online. The Bidder is also
required to pay portal charges which are nominal.
2.1.3 Each Bidder shall examine all instructions, terms and conditions,
forms, specifications and other information contained in the
Bidding Documents. If the Bidder, fails to provide all
documentation and information required by the Bidding
Documents; or submits a Bid which is not substantially responsive
to the terms and conditions of the Bidding Documents, such action
is at the Bidder’s risk and the Owner may determine that the Bid
is non-responsive to the Bidding Documents and may reject it.
2.2 Clarification of The electronic bidding system provides for online clarifications. A
Bidding prospective bidder requiring any clarification may notify online or
Documents through email einc@mpudc.co.in and/or mapursep@gmail.com,
the authority inviting the bid. The authority inviting bid will
respond to any request(s) for clarification received up to the date
of pre-bid meeting or earlier than 15 days of due date for bid

submission. Description of clarification sought and the response

of the authority inviting the bid will be uploaded for information
of the public or other bidders without identifying the source of
request for clarification. Queries for clarifications sent to the
Owner through any other means shall not be responded to by the
Owner.
2.3 Site Visit 2.3.1 Each Bidder is advised to visit and inspect the site of the proposed
Sewage Collection and Treatment facility (the “Site Visit”) and its
surroundings and obtain for itself on its own responsibility all
information that may be necessary for preparing the Bid and
entering into the Contract. The Owner will schedule a time on or
after the date set out in the timetable specified in the Bid Data
Sheet and develop a procedure for Bidders to conduct a Site Visit.
The costs of visiting the site shall be at the Bidder’s own expense.
2.3.2 Each Bidder and any of its personnel or agents will be granted
permission by the Owner to enter upon its premises and lands for
the purpose of such a Site Visit, but only upon the express
condition that the Bidder, its personnel and agents will release and
indemnify the Owner, the Borrower and their personnel and
agents from and against all liability in respect thereof and will be
responsible for death or personal injury, loss of or damage to
property and any other loss, damage, costs and expenses incurred
as a result of the Site Visit.
2.4 Data Room 2.4.1 Unless otherwise stated in the Bid Data Sheet, the Owner will
and establish a data room (the “Data Room”) with a collection of
Background relevant data to be accessible to Bidders or their representatives
Information from the date set out in the timetable specified in the Bid Data
Sheet until the deadline for submission of Bids (the “Submission
Deadline”), in accordance with a schedule established by the
Owner as per link provided in the BDS.
2.4.2 The Owner may provide prospective Bidders with a separate
background information document (the “Background Information
Document”) if indicated in the Bid Data Sheet. The Background
Information Document is not a Bidding Document.
2.5 Pre-Bid 2.5.1 Each prospective Bidder is invited to attend a Pre-Bid Meeting,
Meeting which will take place at the venue and time stipulated in the BDS.
While attendance at the Pre-Bid Meeting is not mandatory,
Bidders are strongly encouraged to attend it. The purpose of the
Pre-Bid Meeting is to clarify issues and answer questions on any
matter that may be raised at the meeting. The prospective Bidder
is requested to submit any questions online through the e-
tendering portal https://www.mpeproc.gov.in up to the Pre-Bid
Meeting. It may not be practicable at the meeting to answer

questions received late, but questions and responses will be

transmitted as indicated hereafter. Minutes of the Pre-Bid
Meeting, including the text of questions raised (without
identifying the source of inquiry) and the responses given will be
uploaded on the website https://www.mpeproc.gov.in. Any
modification of the bidding documents listed in ITB Section 2.1.1
(a) to (e) which may become necessary as a result of the pre-bid
meeting shall be made by the Owner exclusively through the issue
of an Addendum/Corrigendum pursuant to ITB Section 2.6 & not
through the minutes of the pre-bid meeting. The Minutes of the
Pre-Bid Meeting, reply to the queries and corrigendum if any will
also be uploaded on the website specified above.
2.6 Amendment of 2.6.1 At any time prior to the Submission Deadline, the Owner may, for
Bidding any reason, whether at its own initiative, or in response to a
Documents clarification requested by a prospective Bidder, amend the
Bidding Documents by addendum/corrigendum which shall be
published on the e-procurement portal. No other communications
of any kind whatsoever, including, without limitation, the minutes
of the Pre-Bid Meeting or the Response to Questions Document,
shall modify the Bidding Documents.
2.6.2 Addenda, if any, will be uploaded on the e-procurement portal
only and it will be binding on all Bidders. It is the Bidder’s
responsibility to check the e-procurement portal for any update.
2.6.3 In order to afford prospective Bidders reasonable time in which to
take the amendment into account in preparing their Bids, the
Owner may, at its discretion, extend the Submission Deadline, by
uploading a Corrigendum on the e-procurement portal.
2.7 Contacts with 2.7.1 The electronic bidding system provides for submission of any
the Owner for queries from the bidders only through the e-Procurement Portal.
the Purpose of Therefore, a prospective bidder requiring any clarifications shall
Clarification follow the procedure specified in ITB 2.2.1.
2.8 Information 2.8.1 Each Bidder is solely responsible for conducting its own
Provided by independent research, due diligence, and any other work or
the investigations and for seeking any other independent advice
Owner/Bidders necessary for the preparation of Bids, negotiation of agreements,
Due Diligence
and the subsequent delivery of all services to be provided by the
Bidder that has been successful in the bidding process (the
“Successful Bidder”).
2.8.2 No representation or warranty, express or implied, is made and no
responsibility of any kind is accepted by the Owner or its
advisors, employees, consultants or agents, for the completeness
or accuracy of any information contained in the Bidding
Documents or the Response to Questions Document, or provided
during the bidding process or during the term of the Contract. The

Owner and its advisors, employees, consultants and agents shall

not be liable to any person or entity as a result of the use of any
information contained in the Bidding Documents or the Response
to Questions Document, or provided during the bidding process or
during the term of the Contract.
2.8.3 Bidders shall not rely on any oral statements made by the Owner
or its advisors, employees, consultants or agents.
2.8.4 All Bidders shall, prior to submitting their Bid, review all
requirements with respect to corporate registration and all other
requirements that apply to companies that wish to conduct
business in the Owner’s country. The Bidders are solely
responsible for all matters relating to their legal capacity to
operate in the jurisdiction to which this bidding process applies.
2.9 Timetable 2.9.1 The estimated timetable, from the issuance of the Bidding
Documents to the identification by the Owner of the Successful
Bidder and the execution of the Contract, is set out in the Bid Data
Sheet.
2.9.2 The Owner may, in its sole discretion and without prior notice to
the Bidders, amend the estimated timetable specified in the Bid
Data Sheet. Bidders shall not rely in any way whatsoever on the
estimated timetable specified in the Bid Data Sheet and the Owner
shall not incur any liability whatsoever arising out of amendments
to the estimated timetable. The Owner shall give notice of
timetable changes, if any, by addenda specified in Section 2.6 (2).
Section 3. Preparation of Bids

3.1 Language of 3.1.1 The Bid prepared by the Bidder, all correspondence and
Bid documents related to the Bid exchanged by the Bidder and the
Owner and the bidding process shall be written in the language
specified in the Bid Data Sheet, provided that any printed
literature furnished by the Bidder may be written in another
language, as long as such literature is accompanied by a
translation of its pertinent passages in the language specified in
the Bid Data Sheet, in which case, for purposes of interpretation
of the Bid, the translation shall govern.
3.2 Documents 3.2.1 Each Bidder shall submit only one Bid which shall consist of:
Comprising the (a) Part I - Technical Bid which contains the following:
Bid
(i) The Technical Bid Submission Form and
Qualification information form required by ITB
Section 3.3;
(ii) The Technical and staffing Information required by
ITB Section 3.4;

(iii) the Bid Security required by ITB Section 3.5;

(iv) where applicable, the joint venture documents
required by ITB Section 3.6;
(v) the power of attorney required by ITB Section 3.7;
Madhya Pradesh Urban Sanitation And Environment
Programme
(vi) a signed Declaration of Undertaking required by ITB
Section 3.13 ;
(b) Part II ––Financial Bid shall consist of:
The Financial Bid submission Form and the Price schedules
completed in accordance with ITB Section 3.8 and 3.9
The documents and details mentioned in ITB section 3.2 (1) Part 1
above shall be submitted online on website http://mpeproc.gov.in.
Details and process of online submission of the tender and
relevant documents are given in the website mentioned above.
The above are to be submitted in the manner as prescribed below:
3.2.2 Scanned copies of the following documents shall be uploaded on
the website www.mpeproc.gov.in in the appropriate place, as part
I - Technical Bid.
(a) Bid Security in specified form required by ITB section 3.5;
(b) Evidence of access to line of credit required by ITB section
1.4 (F) (1);
(c) Joint Venture agreement, in case of joint Venture required
by ITB Section 3.7;
(d) Power of attorney required by ITB section 3.7;
(e) Any other documents specified in BDS.
3.2.3 Scanned copies of the following should be uploaded after
converting the same to PDF, as part I – Technical Bid:
(a) Certificates showing details of similar nature of works,
work in hand and machineries owned or possessed or hired;
(b) Annual Turnover Certificate from Chartered Accountant for
the last five financial years forms with breakup of civil
works and total works for each financial years required by
ITB section 1.4 (F) (3);
(c) Similar nature of works executed required by ITB Section
1.4 (D) and (E);
(d) Critical Equipment/Machineries owned/brought on hire

required by ITB Section 1.4 (G)

(e) Project Manager and other Key Personnel with adequate
experience as required by ITB Section 1.4 (H)
3.2.4 Submission of Original Documents: The Bidders are required to
submit (a) original bid security in approved form and (b) original
notarized power of attorney as per provisions of ITB Section 2.1
(2), 3.5 (1) and 3.7 to the office specified in the Bid Data Sheet,
on or before the date and time of the opening of Part I – Technical
Bid, either by registered post or by hand, failing which the bids
will be declared non-responsive.
The Bidders who qualify for second stage of bid, will have to
submit all the original documents, except for the financial quote,
within five working days, unless mentioned otherwise, from the
date on which such Bidder is informed. The owner shall be
informing the Bidders through e-mail. Failure in submission of
original documents within stipulated time period will
automatically disqualify such Bidders. Those Bidders who submit
the financial quote in hard copy will also be automatically
disqualified.
3.3 Technical Bid – 3.3.1 In the Technical Bid, each Bidder shall provide a completed
Bidder’s Bid Technical Bid Submission Form contained in the Bidding
Form and Documents.
Qualification
Information (i) Each Bidder shall provide detailed information listing all
commissions and gratuities, if any paid or to be paid by the
Bidder to the agents relating to this Bid or the Contract if
the Bidder is awarded the Contract. The Bidder shall list the
name and address of any agents, the amount and currency
paid or to be paid to the agents and the purpose of the
commission or gratuity. If no such commissions and
gratuities have been paid, the Bidder shall provide this
information in Technical Bid submission Form.
(ii) In the Technical Bid, Bidders shall provide Qualification
information as specified in ITB section 1.4 and 1.5.
3.4 Technical Bid – The Technical Bid shall consist of the following sub-parts in the
Technical and following order:
Staffing
A. An Executive Summary of the Technical Section;
Information
B. A design-build work plan including a detailed program
timetable (the “Design-Build Work plan”) setting out the
manner in which the Bidder proposes to carry out the
design-build services as defined in the Draft Contract (the
“Design-Build Services”) and meet the design-build
technical standards in accordance with the Technical

Specifications to the General Conditions.

C. (i) A section entitled “Required Plant and Equipment
and Bidder’s Equipment” which consists of a list of major
Plant and Equipment required and Bidder’s Equipment
(Design-Build) and Bidder’s Equipment (Operations).
(ii) A section on “Operation Plan” as detailed in BDS.
D. A detailed staffing plan (the “Staffing Plan”) setting out the
Bidder’s proposed staffing arrangements for the carrying
out of the Design-Build and Operations Services. The
Staffing Plan shall be divided into the following sections:
a A section entitled the “Staffing Chart” for the
Design-Build and Operations Services and consisting
of a chart setting out a list of all proposed Key-Staff,
the role of each position, the duration of existence of
the position, and the location of the staff person
filling the position during the periods of assignment
to carry out the Design-Build and Operations
Services;
b a section entitled “Summary of Staff Qualifications”
which consists of a summary table setting out,
i. the Key Staff positions, the names of the
Bidder’s employees who will occupy the Key
Staff positions; and
ii. all proposed positions for the Bidder’s
Personnel and the qualifications, years of
experience and areas of expertise, including a
clear indication of the expertise that the staff
will provide consistent with the requirements
set out in the BDS-ITB 1.4 (H); and
c a section entitled, “Curriculum Vitae” which contains
the signed curriculum vitae for each of the Key Staff,
in the format set out in Annex A to the Bidding
Documents;
E. A list of all nominated subcontractors and sub-consultants
and a detailed description of the services to be carried out or
the Plant and Equipment to be provided by the nominated
subcontractors and sub-consultants. The Bidder shall
provide the name and nationality of all nominated
subcontractors and sub-consultants. The Bidder shall ensure
that all nominated subcontractors and sub-consultants
comply with ITB Section 1.3. The Bidder shall not exceed
the maximum percentage of subcontracting and sub-

consulting set out in ITB 1.3.
3.5 Technical Bid – (1) In the Technical Bid, the Bidder shall furnish, as part of its Bid, a
Bid Security Bid security in the amount stipulated in the Bid Data Sheet in the
currency of the Owner’s country.
(2) The Bid Security shall, at the Bidder’s option, be in the form of a
Bank Guarantee or a fixed deposit issued by a Nationalized or
Scheduled Bank located in India in favour of the Managing
Director, Madhya Pradesh Urban Development Company and
payable at Bhopal. If the institution issuing the security is located
outside the country of the Borrower, it shall have a correspondent
financial institution located in the country of the Borrower to
make it enforceable. The format of the bank guarantee provided
by a Bidder shall be in accordance with the form of Bid Security
contained in Annex A to the Bidding Documents. The Bidder
shall ensure that the Bid Security remains valid for a period of 45
days after the end of the original Bid Validity Period, as defined in
ITB Section 3.12(1), and 45 days after any extension subsequently
requested by the Owner in accordance with ITB Section 3.12(2).
The bid security of a Joint Venture must define as “Bidder” all
Joint Venture Partners and list them in the following manner:
“a Joint Venture consisting of ‘.......’, ‘..........’ and ‘............’.
(3) Any Bid not accompanied by an acceptable Bid Security shall be
rejected by the Owner as being non-responsive. The Bid Security
of a joint venture must be in the name of all of the participants in
the joint venture submitting the Bid.
(4) The Owner will return the Bid Securities of the unsuccessful
Bidders as promptly as possible, but not later than 45 days after
the expiration of the Bid Validity Period.
(5) The Bid Security of the Successful Bidder will be returned when
the Bidder has signed the Form of Contract pursuant to ITB
Section 6.4 and has provided the required performance security as
set out in the Contract and ITB Section 6.5.
(6) The Bid Security may, in the discretion of the Owner, be
forfeited:
(a) if the Bidder withdraws its Bid during the Bid Validity
Period; or
(b) in the case of the Successful Bidder, if the Successful Bidder
fails to, within the specified time limit,:
(i) to execute the Form of Contract in accordance with ITB Section 6.4;
or
(ii) to furnish the performance security to the Owner in accordance with

ITB Section 6.5.
3.6 Technical (1) Each Joint Venture Bidder shall submit, as Part of the Technical
Section – Joint Bid, a written commitment, in the form of a letter duly executed
Venture Documents by an authorized officer of each joint venture participant, which,
and Requirement
(i) confirms each joint venture participant’s commitment to the
joint venture and acceptance of the joint venture
arrangements described in the Bid in accordance with ITB
Section 3.6 (iii);
(ii) Confirms each joint venture participant’s willingness to
provide a joint and several guarantee to the Owner to
underwrite the performance of the joint venture in respect
of the Contract; and
(iii) identifies which joint venture participant,
(a) Will assume the leading role on behalf of the other joint
venture participants; and
(b) Will have the authority to commit all joint venture
participants.
(iv) A copy of the Joint Venture Agreement entered into by the
Partners (JV Participants) shall be submitted with the bid;
or a Letter of Intent to execute a Joint Venture Agreement
in the event of a successful bid shall be signed by all
partners and submitted with the bid together with a copy of
the proposed Agreement.
(v) If the Successful Bidder is a Joint Venture Bidder to whom
the Contract is awarded, each partner of the Joint venture
shall sign and execute the contract with the Owner and shall
be jointly and severally responsible to Owner for the
performance of the contract.
3.7 Technical Bid – Each Bidder shall provide, as Part of the Technical Bid, a written
Power of and duly notarized power of attorney demonstrating the authority
Attorney of the person or persons signing of the Bid which shall bind the
Bidder for the full length of the Bid Validity Period.
3.8 Financial Bid – (1) In Financial Bid, each Bidder shall provide a completed Financial
Bidder’s Bid Bid Submission Form contained in the Bidding Documents.
Forms
(2) Each Bidder shall submit completed and properly executed Price
Schedules in the forms contained in Bidding Documents. Bidders
shall complete the Price Schedules in full and shall not amend or
change the form in any way.
3.9 Financial Bid – 3.9.1 Bidders shall quote their Bid Price for the entire facility and all of
Bidders Prices the services on a “single responsibility” basis such that the total
Schedule Bid Price covers all of the Bidder’s obligations mentioned in or to

be reasonably inferred from the Bidding Documents in respect of

the design, manufacture, including procurement and
subcontracting, if any, delivery, construction, installation and
completion of the facility and the performance of the Services as
set out in the Draft Contract. This includes all requirements under
the Bidder’s responsibilities for testing, pre-commissioning and
commissioning of the site and facility, the acquisition of all
permits, approvals and licenses, the design, building, operation,
maintenance and training services, and such other items and
services as may be specified in the Bidding Documents, all in
accordance with the requirements of the General Conditions of the
Contract.
3.9.2 For the purpose of submitting Bids, Bidders should note that the
Bid Price shall include all kinds of taxes, duties, levies or charges
of the Owner’s country in accordance with the Contract. However,
the Bidder may take into consideration any tax / duty exemptions,
reductions available in the Owner’s country (Refer format for
declaration for excise duty). The owner, at the request, of the
Bidder shall provide the required certification to avail such
benefits. However, if the Bidder fails to get the benefit of
exemption, the owner shall not be responsible in any manner and
shall not make any extra payment to the Bidder.
3.9.3 In the Price Schedules, Bidders shall give the required details and
a breakdown of their prices as follows:
(a) Design-Build Period: Design-Build Services shall be quoted
separately and shall include a fixed price for all labour,
Bidder’s Equipment (Design-Build), temporary works,
consumables and all matters and things of whatsoever
nature, including preparation of the Design-Build
Documents and carrying out the building responsibilities,
where identified in the Bidding Documents, as necessary
for the proper execution of the Design-Build Services in
accordance with the Contract; and
(b) Operation and Maintenance Period: Operation and
Maintenance price for the ten years shall be quoted in two
parts: a Fixed O&M Fee for each year of the Operation and
Maintenance Period, which will include all elements of (i):
manpower costs (ii): establishment (incl. vehicles) and
administrative costs; and (iii):repair and maintenance costs;
and a Variable O&M Fee, which shall cover all elements of
(i): energy costs and (ii): cost of chemicals and other
consumables substantially incurred in the treatment of
sewage. The bidder is required to quote based on Base Date
which is the date 20 days prior to bid submission. These

prices will be subject to contract price adjustment as per

Appendix 5 to the GCC.
3.9.4 Prices quoted by the Bidder shall be fixed during the Bidder’s
performance of the Contract and shall not be subject to change on
any account, except in accordance with the price adjustment
provisions set out in the Contract. A Bid submitted with an
adjustable price quotation where firm price is the basis, such bids
shall be treated as non-responsive and shall be rejected.
3.9.5 Bidders are strongly encouraged to review GC Section 5.6 and the
Appendix 2 to the GCC “Terms and Procedures of Payment” prior
to completing their Price Schedules and submitting their Bid
Prices.
The Bidder shall furnish along with his bid a declaration regarding
customs/excise duty exemption for materials/ Construction
equipment bought for the work in the Declaration Format
provided in Annex A to the bidding documents.
Where the Bidder has quoted taking into account such benefits, he
must give all information required for issue of Project Authority/
Payment/Other certificates in terms of the Export Import Policy or
Central Excise Notification and Customs Notification of the
Government of India as perform stipulated in Annex A to the
bidding documents. In case the Bidder has not provided the
required information or has indicated to be furnished later on in
the Declaration Format; the same shall be construed that the
goods/equipment for which certificate is required is Nil.
To the extent the Owner determines the quantities indicated
therein are reasonable, the certificates will be issued and no
subsequent changes will be permitted. The certificate will be
issued within 60 days of signing of the contract for material,
equipment and machinery.
Where such certificates are issued by the Owner, excise duty will
not be reimbursed separately.
If the Bidder has considered the customs/excise duty exemption
for materials/equipment to be procured, the Bidder shall confirm
and certify that the Owner will not be required to undertake any
responsibilities of the Government of India Scheme for the said
exemptions being available during the contract execution, except
issuing the required certificates.
Bids which do not conform to the above provisions or any
condition by the Bidder which makes the bid subject to
availability of deemed export benefits or compensation on (a)
withdrawal of or (b) any variations to the deemed export benefits

scheme, will make the bid non-responsive and hence rejected.

Any delay in procurement of the goods/equipment/machinery as a
result of the above shall not be entertained as a reason for granting
any extension of time.
3.10 Financial Bidders may quote their price in the Indian Rupees only and all
Section – Bid payments shall be made in Indian Rupees
Currencies
3.11 Bidding of (1) The Bidders shall base their Bids on the terms and conditions of
Alternatives the Bidding Documents and, without limiting the generality of the
Not to be foregoing, shall,
Considered
(a) submit their prices based on the terms and conditions in the
Bidding
(b) submit their Bids based on the assumption that the final
Contract will be the same as the Draft Contract and shall
not base their Bids on the premise that they may be able to
change the Draft Contract;
(2) No Bidder shall submit a Bid that contains statements that are
inconsistent with the Bidding Documents.
(3) A Bidder shall not submit a Bid that proposes an arrangement
between the Owner and the Bidder which, in the discretion of the
Owner, is different than the arrangement set out in the Bidding
Documents (an “Alternative Bid”). The Owner intends to enter
into a contract to design, build and operate a Sewage collection
and Treatment facility based on the terms and conditions of the
Bidding Documents. If a Bidder submits an Alternative Bid it will
be returned to the Bidder and will not be considered, in any way,
by the Owner.
3.12 Period of (1) Bids shall remain valid for the period named in the Bid Data Sheet
Validity of Bid after the Submission Deadline or any extension thereof prescribed
by the Owner for the receipt of Bids, pursuant to ITB Section 3.12
(2) (the “Bid Validity Period”). A Bid valid for a shorter period
shall be rejected by the Owner as being non-responsive.
(2) In exceptional circumstances, the Owner may solicit the Bidders’
consent to an extension of the Bid Validity Period. The request
and responses thereto shall be made in writing and sent by air
mail, courier or fax. If a Bidder accepts to prolong the Bid
Validity Period, the Bid Security shall also be suitably extended.
A Bidder may refuse the request without forfeiting its Bid
Security. A Bidder granting the request will not be required nor
permitted to modify its Bid, except as provided in ITB Section
4.4.
3.13 Declaration of The bidders and contractors, suppliers and consultants shall sign a

Undertaking Declaration of Undertaking as attached to these tender documents.
3.14 Cost of Bidding The Bidder shall bear all costs associated with the preparation and
submission of its bid, and the Owner will in no case be
responsible for these costs, regardless of the conduct or outcome
of the bidding process.
Section 4. Submission of Bids

4.1 Electronic (1) The Bidder shall submit online two separate files marked as Part I:
Submission of Technical Bid and Part II: Financial Bid. The contents of the
Bids Financial bid shall be as specified in ITB 3.2.
(2) All the documents are required to be signed digitally by the
Bidder.
(3) After electronic online bid submission, the system generates a
unique bid identification number which is time stamped. This
shall be treated as acknowledgement of bid submission.
4.2 Deadline for (1) Bids must be received by the Owner online, and in hard copy of
Submission of Technical bid only, at the address specified in the Bid Data Sheet,
Bids not later than the time and date stated in the Bid Data Sheet as the
Submission Deadline.
(2) The Owner may, at its discretion, extend the Submission Deadline
by amending the Bidding Documents in accordance with ITB
Sections 2.6 and 2.9.2, in which case all rights and obligations of
Owner and Bidders will thereafter be subject to the Submission
Deadline as extended.
4.3 Late Bids The electronic bidding system would not allow any late
submission of bids after due date and time as per server time,
pursuant to ITB Section 4.2.
The original copies of required documents as in ITB 3.2 (4) shall
also be submitted within the specified otherwise the Bidder shall
become non responsive.
4.4 Modification (1) The Bidder may modify their Bids online before the deadline
and prescribed in ITB Section 4.2.
Withdrawal of
(2) For bid modification and consequential re-submission, the Bidder
Bids
is not required to withdraw his bid submitted earlier.
(3) Once withdrawn, the system shall not allow resubmission of the
same bid.
(4) No Bid may be modified or withdrawn in the interval between the
Bid Submission Deadline and the expiration of the original period
of Bid Validity specified in ITB Section 3.12 above or as
extended pursuant to ITB Section 2.6 and 2.9.2 in the e-
procurement system. If a Bidder does the same through any other

medium, then it may result in the forfeiture of the Bid security

pursuant to Section 3.5.
Section 5. Bid Opening and Evaluation

5.1 Online (1) The Owner inviting bids or its authorized representatives will
Opening of Bid open the Bids online on the date mentioned in the BDS and this
by Owner could be viewed by the Bidders online. In the event of the
specified date for opening of bids being declared a holiday for the
Owner, the bids will be opened at the appointed time on the next
working day.
(2) The Part I – Technical Bid will be opened first.
(3) In all the cases the amount of Bid security, cost of bid documents,
and validity of the bid shall be scrutinized. Thereafter, the
Bidder’s name and such other details as the Owner may consider
appropriate, will be notified as Part I bid opening summary by the
authority inviting bids at the time of online opening.
(4) The Owner shall prepare minutes of the Bid opening including
the information disclosed in accordance with ITB Sections 5.1(3)
and upload the same for viewing online.
(5) Evaluation of Part I of bids with respect to bid security,
qualification information and other information furnished in Part I
of the bid in pursuant to ITB section 3.2 (1) (a), shall be taken up
and completed, and a list will be drawn up of the qualified Bidders
whose Part II of bids will be eligible for opening.
(6) The result of evaluation of Part I of the Bids shall be made public
on e-procurement following which there will be a period of 5
working days during which any Bidder may submit a complaint
which shall be considered for resolution before opening of Part II
(Financial Bid) of the bid. Any complaint shall be dealt with in
accordance with complaint handling protocol as available on e-
procurement portal of http:// www.mpeproc.gov.in. Where only
one bid is submitted, the stand still period does not apply.
(7) The Owner shall inform, the Bidders, who have qualified during
evaluation of Part I of bids, of the date, time of online opening of
Part II of the bid.
(8) The Part II – Financial Bid of only those Bidders will be opened
online, who have qualified in Part I of the bid. The Bidder’s
names, the Bid prices, the total amount of each bid, and such other
details as the Owner may consider appropriate will be notified
online by the Owner at the time of bid opening. Any bid price,
which is not declared and recorded, will not be taken into account
in Bid evaluation.

(9) The Owner shall prepare minutes of online opening of Pat II of

Bids and upload the same for viewing online.
5.2 Clarification of During Bid evaluation, the Owner may, at its discretion, ask the
Bids Bidder for a clarification of its Bid. The request for clarification
and the response shall be in writing, and no change in the price or
substance of the Bid shall be sought, offered or permitted.
5.3 Preliminary (1) The Owner will examine each Bid to determine whether it is
Examination of complete, whether any computational errors have been made,
Bids whether required securities have been furnished, whether the
documents have been properly signed, and whether the Bid is
generally in order.
(2) In the online electronic bidding system, the total bid price is
worked out automatically be the system on the basis of the rates
quoted online by the bidders in the BOQ and shall be considered
as binding upon the bidder.
(3) The Owner may waive any minor informality, nonconformity or
irregularity in a Bid that does not constitute a material deviation,
and that does not prejudice or affect the relative ranking of any
Bidder as a result of the technical and price evaluation pursuant to
ITB Sections 5.4 and 5.5.
(4) Prior to the detailed evaluation, the Owner will determine whether
each Bid is of acceptable quality, is complete and is substantially
responsive to the Bidding Documents. For purposes of this
determination, a substantially responsive Bid is one that conforms
to all the terms, conditions and specifications of the Bidding
Documents without material deviations, objections,
conditionality’s or reservations. A material deviation, objection,
conditionality or reservation is one,
(a) that affects in any substantial way the scope, quality or
performance of the contract;
(b) that limits in any substantial way, inconsistent with the
Bidding documents, the Owner’s rights or the Successful
Bidder’s obligations under the contract; or
(c) whose rectification would unfairly affect the competitive
position of other Bidders who are presenting substantially
responsive Bids.
(5) If a Bid is not substantially responsive, it will be rejected by the
Owner, and may not subsequently be made responsive by the
Bidder by correction of the nonconformity. The Owner’s
determination of a Bid’s responsiveness is to be based on the
contents of the Bid itself without recourse to extrinsic evidence.
5.4 Technical (1) The Owner will evaluate and compare only the Bids determined to

Evaluation be substantially responsive pursuant to ITB Sections 5.3.

(2) The Owner will carry out a detailed evaluation of the Technical
Sections previously determined to be substantially responsive in
order to determine on a pass/fail basis whether the technical
aspects are in accordance with the requirements set forth in the
Bidding Documents. Bidders acknowledge that, in order to reach
such a determination, the Owner will examine and analyze the
technical aspects of each Bid on the basis of the information
supplied by Bidders, taking into account the completeness,
consistency and level of detail of the following factors:
(a) with respect to the Design-Build Work plan,
(i) the Bidder’s ability to demonstrate how it will meet
the Owner’s project objective and requirements, the
technical standards and the Environmental
Management Plan; and
(ii) the soundness of the proposed methodology and
approach, and the extent to which the Design-Build
Work plan demonstrates an understanding of the
local conditions and specific project requirements;
(b) with respect to the Operations Work plan,
(i) the extent to which the Operations Work plan
addresses all of the Operations Services that are to be
provided in accordance with the Contract;
(ii) the soundness of the proposed methodology and
approach, and the extent to which the Operations
Work plan demonstrates an understanding of the
local conditions and specific project requirements;
and
(iii) the Bidder’s ability to demonstrate how it will meet
the technical standards; and
(c) with respect to the Staffing Plan,
(i) the qualifications and competence of the Key Staff;
and
(ii) the overall quality of the Staffing Plan, including the
depth and organizational strength demonstrated by
the Plan and the extent to which it meets the expertise
requirements reflected in the Design Build
Specifications and the Operation and Maintenance
specifications.
(3) For the purpose of ITB Section 5.4 (2) (c) (ii), the evaluation of
the overall quality of the Staffing Plan shall be based on,

(a) the clarity, comprehensiveness and level of detail of the

Staffing Plan;
(b) The extent to which the Staffing Plan addresses the specific
Services that are required by the Design-Build and
Operations and Maintenance Services Appendices to the
General Conditions.
5.5 Financial (1) The Owner shall examine each Bidder’s Financial Section to
Evaluation determine whether such Financial Section is complete and
substantially responsive to the Bidding Documents.
(2) The Financial Sections, which are substantially responsive to the
Bidding Documents, shall be ranked from lowest to highest based
on the Bid Price. For the purposes of comparing the Bidders’
Financial Sections only, the Owner shall evaluate the Bid Prices
as per the criteria set out in the Bid Data Sheet. The actual total
amount paid for the Operations Services will depend upon the
actual number of months of operations carried out by the Bidder
prior to the End Date.
5.6 Contacting the (1) From the time of bid opening to the time of Contract award, if any
Owner Bidder wishes to contact the Owner, it must do so in writing.
(2) Any effort by a Bidder to influence the Owner, its advisors,
employees, consultants or agents, in the Owner’s Bid evaluation,
Bid comparison, or Contract award decision may, in the discretion
of the Owner, result in rejection of the Bidder’s Bid.
Section 6. Award of Contract

6.1 Award Criteria 6.1.1 Subject to ITB Section 6.2, the Owner will award the Contract to
the Bidder whose Bid has been determined, by the technical and
price evaluation, to be substantially responsive, has received a
“pass” in the technical evaluation, and has the lowest evaluated
Bid Price.
The Owner will sign two separate agreements (1) covering Part A
i.e. Design, build and commission of facilities (First Agreement)
funded by KfW; and (2) covering Part B services of ten years
O&M (Second Agreement) funded by MPUDC. Both the
Agreements will have cross fall breach clauses which give the
Owner to terminate both the agreements as if they are integral to
each other with remedies as available to the Owner under each
agreement. Each agreement will be secured by its own
performance guarantee and will contain provisions that in case of
encashment of performance guarantee of one agreement, the
performance security of the other agreement becomes
automatically encashable at the discretion of the owner. The
Owner at its discretion may declare the First agreement as

complete and take over the facilities without affecting the

performance of the second agreement. Both the agreements may
have different effective date as decided by the Owner while
entering the contracts.
6.2 Owner’s Right (1) The Owner reserves the right to,
to Accept or (a) accept any Bid;
Reject and
Waive (b) reject any Bid;
Irregularities
(c) annul the bidding process and reject all Bids;
(d) annul the bidding process and commence a new process;
and
(e) Waive irregularities, minor informalities, or minor non-
conformities which do not constitute material deviations in
the submitted Bids from the Bidding Documents, at any
time prior to the award of the Contract without incurring
any liability to the affected Bidder or Bidders and without
any obligation to inform the affected Bidder or Bidders of
the grounds for the Owner’s actions.
(2) Nothing in ITB Section 6.2(1) is intended to permit the Owner to
refuse to provide reasons for rejection to an unsuccessful Bidder
6.3 Notification of Prior to the expiration of the Bid Validity Period, the Owner shall
Award notify the Successful Bidder in writing by email and post that its
Bid has been accepted by the Owner (the “Notification of
Award”). The effectiveness of the Contract shall be as of the date
of the Owner’s signing of the Contract contingent on final
approval by the Bank.
6.4 Signing the (1) At the same time as the Owner sends the Successful Bidder the
Form of Notification of Award, the Owner shall send the Successful
Contract Bidder,
(a) a Form of Contract; and
(b) The other Contract Documents.
(2) No later than 15 days after the Successful Bidder’s receipt of the
Notification Award, the Form of Contract and the other Contract
Documents pursuant to ITB Sections 6.3 and 6.4(1), the
Successful Bidder shall sign and date the Form of Contract and
initial each page of the Contract and return them to the Owner.
(3) The website has provision to display the details of award of
contract. The Owner shall publish on the website the result
identifying the bid and the following information: (a) name of
each Bidder who submitted the bid; (b) bid prices as announced
online during the bid opening of Part II of each bids; (c) name and
evaluated prices of each bid; (d) name of Bidders whose bids were

rejected during evaluation of either Part I or Part II of the bids and

the reasons for their rejection; and (e) name of the winning
Bidder, the price offered and summary scope of the contract
awarded.
6.5 Performance No later than 15 days after the Successful Bidder’s receipt of the
Security Notification of Award, the Successful Bidder shall provide the
Owner with the performance security in the amount given in the
Bid Data Sheet and in the substance and form set out in Annex A
or in another form approved by the Owner.
6.6 Failure to Sign If the Successful Bidder fails to comply with the provisions of
the Form of ITB Sections 6.4(2) or 6.5, this failure shall constitute sufficient
Contract or grounds for annulment of the award and forfeiture of the Bid
Provide the Security, and in which event the Owner may make the award to
Performance
the next lowest evaluated Bidder or call for new bids.
Security
6.7 Adjudicator The Owner proposes that the person named in the Bid Data Sheet
be appointed as Adjudicator under the contract, at a fee per sitting
stated in the Bid Data Sheet. A description of the expenses that
would be considered reimbursable is attached to the Bid Data
Sheet. If a Bidder does not accept the Adjudicator proposed by the
Owner, it should so state in its Bid Form and make a
counterproposal of an Adjudicator and a fee per sitting. If, on the
day the Form of Contract is signed, the Owner and the Bidder
have not agreed on the appointment of the Adjudicator, the
Adjudicator shall be appointed, at the request of either party, by
the Appointing Authority specified in the Special Conditions of
Contract.
6.8 Corrupt or The Employer and the contractors, suppliers or consultants must
Fraudulent observe the highest standard of ethics during contract procurement
Practices and performance.
The bidders and contractors, suppliers and consultants shall sign a
Declaration of Undertaking as attached to these bidding
documents and will permit the Bank to inspect their accounts and
records relating to the procurement and performance of the Bank-
financed contracts, and to have them audited by auditors
appointed by the Bank.
The Bank shall have the right to take any action it deems
appropriate to check that these ethics rules are observed and
reserves, in particular, the rights to:
a) reject a proposal for a contract award if it is established that
during the selection process the bidder that is recommended
for the award has been convicted of corruption, directly or
by means of in view of being awarded the Contract;

b) declare mis-procurement when it is established that, at any

time, the Employer, the contractor, the supplier, the
consultant or its representatives have engaged in acts of
corruption, fraud or anti-Competitive practices during the
contract procurement or performance without the Employer
having taken appropriate action in due time satisfactory to
the Bank to remedy the situation, including
By failing to inform the Bank at the time they knew of such
practices.
For the purposes of this provision, the terms set forth below are
defined as follows:
a) Corruption of a public officer means:
1.1 The act of promising, offering or giving to a public officer, directly
or indirectly, an undue advantage of any kind for himself or for
another person or entity, for such public officer to act or refrain from
acting in his official capacity; or
1.2 The act by which a public officer solicits or accepts, directly or
indirectly, an undue advantage of any kind for himself or for another
person or entity, for such public officer to act or refrain from acting
in his official capacity.
b) A "public officer" shall be construed as meaning
1.3 any person who holds a legislative, executive, administrative or
judicial mandate (within the State of the Employer) regardless of
whether that person was nominated or elected, regardless of the
permanent or temporary, paid or unpaid nature of the position and
regardless of the hierarchical level the person occupies;
1.4 Any other person who performs a public function, including fora
State institution or a State-owned company, or who provides a
public service;
1.5 Any other person defined as a public officer by the national laws of
the Employer.
c) Corruption of a private person means:
1.6 The act of promising, offering or giving to any person other than a
public officer, directly or indirectly, an undue advantage of any kind
for himself or for another person or entity, for such person to
perform or refrain from performing any actin breach of its legal,
contractual or professional obligations;
Or
1.7 the act by which any person other than a public officer solicits or
accepts, directly or indirectly, an undue advantage of any kind for
himself or for another person or entity, for such person to perform or

refrain from performing any act in breach of its legal, contractual or

professional obligations.
d) Fraud means any dishonest conduct (act or omission), whether
or not it constitutes a criminal offence, deliberately intended
to deceive others, to intentionally conceal items, to violate
or vitiate consent, to circumvent legal or regulatory
requirements and/or to violate internal rules in order to
obtain illegitimate benefits.
e) Anti-competitive practices means:
1.8 Any concerted or implied practices which have as their objector
effect the prevention, restriction or distortion of competition within a
market place, especially where they
(i) limit access to the market place or free exercise of
competition by other undertakings,
(ii) Prevent free, competition-driven price determination
by artificially causing price increases or
decreases,
(iii) Restrict or control production, markets, investments
or technical progress; or
(iv) Divide up market shares or sources of supply.
1.9 Any abuse by one undertaking or a group of undertakings which
hold a dominant position on an internal market or on a substantial
part of it.
1.10 Any practice whereby prices are quoted or set unreasonably low,
the object of which is to eliminate an undertaking or any of its
products.

Section 7. Bid Data Sheet

The following bid-specific data for the facility and services to be procured shall amend or
supplement the provisions in the Instructions to Bidders (ITB). Whenever there is a conflict, the
provisions herein shall prevail over those in the ITB.
ITB
SECTION REQUIRED INFORMATION
ITB 1.1(1) Name of the Borrower: Government of Madhya Pradesh through

Government of India
ITB 1.1(3) Scope of Works:
(a) Part - A
Survey, Review the designs, Redesign where necessary and build Sewerage
Collection, Sewage Treatment and Disposal System of Barwani Nagar
Palika, District Barwani of Madhya Pradesh
(b) Part -B
Operation and Maintenance of Sewerage Collection, Sewage Treatment
and Disposal System including complaint redressal for 10 years after
commissioning of system.
ITB 1.2 Owner: M P Urban Development Company Ltd., through its Managing
Director
Owner’s Adress: First Floor, MP Rajya Krishi and Gramin Sahkari Bank, 8
Jail Road, Arera Hills, Bhopal, Madhya Pradesh 462011
ITB 1.2 List of Ineligible Countries:
All countries shall be eligible countries except if the country of origin is
ruled out by sanctions issued by the UN Security Council or sanctions issued
by the European Union, the Development Government or the Government of
India.
ITB 1.4 B (1) The nominated sub-contractor/consultant must have relevant experience of
construction / operation work of the component for which the sub-
contractor is nominated by the Bidder. Similar works successfully
completed in last seven (07) years from the date of Invitation of bid and
at least one of them having at least 50% capacity of the component
stipulated under this bid will only be considered for this purpose.
ITB 1.4 B (2) The total subcontracting/sub consulting shall not exceed 25% of the total
contract amount.
ITB 1.4 (D) General Design, Build, Operations and Maintenance Experience
ITB 1.4 (D)
NOT APPLICABLE
(a)
ITB 1.4 (D) Required Annual Turnover:

(b) The average annual turnover is defined as the total of certified payment
certificates for works in progress or completed by the firm or firms
comprising the Bidder over the previous five financial years, i.e 2013-14 to
2017-18, divided by five. Financial turnover of previous years shall be
given weightage of 6% per year based on rupee value to bring them to 2017-
18 price level.
The Bidder should have generated a minimum average annual turnover
during the above period greater than the equivalent of INR 710 million (9.5
million Euro or 11.83 million US$) at 2017-18 price level.
1 EURO=INR 75
1 USD = INR 60
ITB 1.4 (E) Particular Sewage Collection and Treatment experience

ITB 1.4 E (1) Time period: Last Seven (7) years i.e., from the date of Bid Invitation.
1. Experience in procuring, constructing, testing to appropriate standards, and
commissioning of:
(a) at least one single contract of Similar work with a minimum total
contract value of INR 500 million (Euro 6.67 million or US$ 8.33 million)
OR
(b) at least two single contracts of Similar Works, each of the contract value
not less than INR 337 million (Euro 4.47 million or US$ 5.58 million)
OR
at least three single contracts of Similar works, each of contract value not less
than INR 210 million (Euro 2.80 million or US$ 3.50 million)
2. “Similar work” means the Construction, Testing, Commissioning

work related to Sewerage Collection System & conveyance OR Sewage
Treatment i.e.,
(i) Sewage Treatment Plant (STP) / ETP/ WWTP/CETP
OR
(ii) Sewerage collection network.
2(a) In case the bidder has not submitted any project including the
construction of STP/ETP/WWTP/ CETP as part of his qualifying
contracts under ITB 1.4(E)(1), then the bidder must use a sub-
contractor having experience for the STP. This sub-contractor must
have completed at least one STP of capacity (50% of the capacity of the
STP in the BoQ, i.e., 9 / 2 = 4.50 MLD), where his portion of the work
was greater than 50%.
2(b) In case the bidder has not submitted any project including the
construction of sewerage collection & conveyance as part of his
qualifying contracts under ITB 1.4(E)(1), then the bidder must
nominate a sub-contractor with previous experience in construction of
sewerage collection & conveyance that meets 50% of the qualifying
criteria under ITB 1.4(E)(1).

3. For ascertaining the value of successfully executed works in support of

experience of the bidder in 1(a) or 1(b) or 1(c), the original cost of work shall
be adjusted as per increase in Wholesale Price Index (WPI) as given by
Reserve Bank of India (RBI), from the date of work order of the subjected
work to bring it to the year 2017-18 level (31st March 2018). The certificate
of the Chartered Accountant be produced for cost adjustment.
4. The works for which the experience has been claimed for eligibility, must
have been completed within the last seven (07) years from the date of
Invitation of bid. The work experience submitted should accompany
with the certification from the owner otherwise the poject / work
experience shall not be considered eligible for evaluation.
5. Specific experience in the following aspects of Sewerage:

5.1 Design Services: Design of a Sewage Collection System and Sewage
Treatment and Disposal Facility
(May be met by subcontractor or sub-consultant. A Memorandum of
Agreement (MOA) with sub contactor/ sub consultant is required to be
submitted with the bid)
5.2 Operations and Maintenance: At least one year (over the last seven
years from the date of invitation of bid) of experience in operations and
management of the Sewage Collection and conveyance system and the
Sewage Treatment Plant. The bidder is required to produce evidence of
having experience in the capacity of contractor/ sub-contractor or
management contractor with prime contractual responsibility. The bidder
can meet this criteria through a nominated sub-contractor. A
Memorandum of Agreement (MOA) with sub contactor is required to be
submitted with the bid.
5.3 In case, the bidder opts to engage a technology provider for Treatment
of Sewage, the bidder is required to submit the detailed qualifications of the
technology provider with specific reference to the treatment technology
intended to be adopted. The technology provider must have an experience
of minimum 5 years in designing the proposed technology and should
produce a client’s (in India) certificate of successful execution and
operation. The bidder is also required to submit a Memorandum of
Agreement with the technology provider to enter into an agreement with the
bidder for the whole period of contract including design build and at least
initial 3 years of O&M period.

ITB 1.4 Financial Capabilities

(F) (1) and  Liquid assets and/or availability of credit facilities of no less than INR 171
(2) million (2.3 million Euro or 2.9 million US$). (Credit lines/letter of
credit/certificates from Banks for meeting the funds requirement etc.)
 Minimum required Cash Flow amount in INR 86 million (1.1 million Euro
or 1.4 million US$).
Criteria Compliance Requirements Documents

Joint Venture
Single Submission
Requirement All Partners Each One
Entity Require-ments
Combined Partner Partner
The Bidder must
demonstrate that it has the
financial resources to
meet:
(a) its current contract must meet not applicable must meet not Form 4C - 4
commitments, as defined require- require-ment applica-ble
in FIN-4 (Total Financial ment for its own
Requirements for Current contractual
Contract Commitments), commit-ments
plus
(b) the requirements must meet must meet must meet must eet Form 4C
for the Subject Contract of require- require-ment twenty- five forty and Form
INR [77] Seventy Seven ment percent. [25%] percent 4D
million. (A) [40%]
(B)
ITB 1.4 Availability of Critical Equipment

(G) S. Type of Equipment and Output Max Age in years as No.
No. on 1/01/18
1 Concrete Mixer 6.8 Cum/Hr 3 2
2 Access to RMC Plant RMC 20-30 Cum/Hr 5 2
3 Vibrator 2800 rpm 2 4
4 Compressor 50-150 cfm 5 1
5 Crane (1.5 MT to 2.5 MT) 5 2
6 Truck/Tractor with trailer 5 2
7 JCB 56 KW 5 2
8 Rock Breaker 5 1
9 Hydraulic Excavator 5 2
10 Light Vehicles 3 2
The above will be mandatory for submission and the Contractor shall be required
to have the equipment available for the works. However, it will not form basis for
responsiveness of the bidder.
ITB 1.4 Personnel Capabilities

(H)
Suitably qualified personnel to fill the following key positions, with the specified
minimum years of experience of similar works in that position
# Key Personnel Qualification and Experience No.

Design Stage
ME Civil + 10 years exp. In PHE
1 Project Manager 1
works
Design Engineer ME Civil +10Year Experience in
2 1
(Structural) structure designing
Design Engineer (Sewerage ME Environment Engineering+ 10

3 1
and Sewage Treatment) years Exp.
Design Engineer ME Mechanical Engineering+ 10 years

4 1
(Mechanical) Exp.
Design Engineer ME Electrical Engineering+ 10 years

5 1
(Electrical) Exp.
ME Process Engineering+ experience

6 Process Engineer of at least 2 projects in process design 1
of wastewater treatment units
ME Hydraulic Engineering+
experience of at least 2 projects in
7 Hydraulic Engineer 1
hydraulic calculation of wastewater
treatment units
ME / M.Sc. Environment + 5 years of

8 Environmental Specialist 1
experience in sewerage system
9 Surveyor Dip. Civil + 8 years exp. 4
Construction Stage
B.E. Civil + 10 years exp. In PHE

10 Project Manager 1
works
B.E. Mech/Elec. + 8 years Exp. in PHE
11 Deputy Project Manager 2
works
B.E. Civil + 4 years exp./ Diploma in

12 Site Engineer (Civil) 4
civil 8 Years Exp. in PHE works
B.E. Mechanical/Electrical + 3 years

Site Supervisor
13 Exp /Diploma in Mechanical/Electrical 2
(Electrical/Mechanical)
+10 years Exp.
B.E. Civil + 2 years Exp. Or Dip Civil

14 Site Supervisor (civil) 8
+ 10 years exp.
BE (Instrumentation) + 5 years
15 Engineer (SCADA) 2
experience in SCADA
1
ME/M. Sc. Environment+ 5 years
16 Environment Engineer (Part
relevant Exp
time)
B.E. Civil + 5 years Exp in quality
17 Quality Control Engineer 2
control

Foreman for sewer laying ITI trained or more with 10 years

18 2
and testing relevant experience
Foreman for installation of ITI trained or more with 10 years

19 2
house connections relevant experience
The bidder is required to provide essential details of all the experts
required as above.
The bidder is also required to submit the staffing plan considering

following Key staff for Operation and Maintenance services:
Sl.
Key Personnel Qualification No.
No.
1 O&M Manager (Sewerage) B.E. Civil + 8 years exp. In PHE works 1
Graduate in business mgmt. with 3
Customer Relations
2 years experience in customer services 2
Manager
of any utility services
3 Supervisor (Civil) Dip. (Civil) + 5 years Experience 2
Supervisor / Technician
4 (Electrical/ Instrumentation Dip. Mech/Elec + 5 years Experience 2
& Mechanical)
5 Water Quality Analyst M.Sc. Chemistry + 3 years exp 2
Diploma in Civil/Mech./Elec. Engg.
Sewage Treatment Plant
6 With experience in STP operation for a 2
Supervisor
minimum of 5 yrs
ITI trained with 10 years relevant
7 Foreman for connections 2
experience
ITB 2.1(2) The cost of the bid document along with the system generated portal charges as
per IFB. The bidder shall upload the receipt along with the bid submission.
The bidders are advised to visit the site and locations before the pre bid meeting
ITB 2.3 with prior intimation. The bidders may contact Barwani Nagar Palika or PIU of
MPUDC at Indore if they need any assistance. However, it is advisable that the
bidders shall visit the sites during working hours.
ITB 2.4 Data Room is www.mpudc.co.in
ITB 2.5 Venue and time of pre-bid meeting:
M.P. Urban Development Company Ltd.,
First Floor, MP Rajya Krishi and Gramin Sahkari Bank,
8 Jail Road, Arera Hills, Bhopal, Madhya Pradesh 462011
Refer Estimated Time Table (ITB 2.9(1) and (2))
ITB 2.9(1)
and (2) The estimated timetable is:
Issue of Bidding Documents:
4.1 14-06-2018
15-06-2018,
10:30 hrs to 29-
4.2 Period of availability of Bid Document on website 07-2018, 17:30
http://mpeproc.gov.in hrs
30-06-2018 at
4.3 Pre-Bid Meeting 12:00 hrs
4.4 Last Day for Bidders to Submit online clarifications on 06-07-2018,
Bidding documents 17:30 hrs

Deadline for online Submission of Bids (Submission 30-07-2018,

4.5
Deadline) 14:00 hrs

30-07-2018,
Online Opening of Technical Bids
4.6 16:00 hrs
Deadline for submission of original documents referred to 30-07-2018,
4.7
in ITB 3.2 (4) 15:30 hrs

07-08-2018,
Online-opening of Financial Bids (tentative)
4.8 15:00 hrs
ITB 3.1 Language of Bid is English.
ITB 3.2.4 Original documents, namely (a) original bid security (b) original notarized power
of attorney and (c) Original Declaration of Undertaking, signed by all Joint
Venture Partners should reach the Owner at the address mentioned below on or
before the date and time of opening of Part I Technical Bid, specified in BDS ITB
5.1 (1)
Engineer In Chief, MP Urban Development Company Limited, First Floor, MP
Rajya Krishi and Gramin Sahkari Bank, 8 Jail Road, Arera Hills, Bhopal, Madhya
Pradesh 462011 (India)
ITB 3.4 B The bidder is required to submit the following with the bid:
(i) Detailed work implementation plan for the Sewage Treatment Plant. The work
implementation plan for STP shall include the details of proposed technology,
various works involved including components from the inlet chamber up to the
disposal units of effluent including details on infrastructure required at the STP
site for Reuse.
(ii) Proposal for keeping the sewerage system reasonably clean from deposition
and clogging and identify the infrastructure needed for which Detailed design and
implementation plan for the Flushing system for the sewerage.
(iii) The Implementation plan of sewer network, procurement of
vehicles/equipments as per requirement, house connections in detail supported
with the Bar Chart.
(iv) a design-build work plan for the design and construction period indicating the
periods required for:
 surveys (topographic, geotechnical, customer door-to-door, etc);
 design (preliminary, civil, mechanical, electrical, process);
 design review;
 construction and testing of sewerage network and pumping stations;
 construction and commissioning of STP;
 ‘Final connection’ of HSC;
 Testing of STP;
ITB 3.4 C The Operations Plan shall include:
(ii) 1. Program, strategy and Staffing pattern for effective operations, maintenance
and monitoring of the Sewage Collection and Treatment system, including
effluent testing plan, flushing arrangements, attending to problems of sewer
network, Intermediate Pumping Stations and STP.
2. Strategy and staffing pattern for Grievance Redressal System Management
3. Duty Schedule of O&M.

ITB
3.4(e)(ii)( Language capabilities for Bidder’s Personnel: Hindi and English
B)
ITB 3.5(1) Amount of Bid Security:
As stated in the Invitation for Bids (IFB).
In case of Joint Venture, the Bid Security is to be submitted by the Joint Venture
Partners jointly. However, the Bid Security submitted by the lead partner of JV is
also acceptable.
Bank details for Bank Guarantee
Account Holder: Madhya Pradesh Urban Development Co. Ltd.
Bank Name and Branch: Central Bank of India, Arera Hills, Bhopal
Account No. 3529995368
IFSC: CBIN0283312
ITB 3.9.2 The bidder shall have to quote rates and prices and the Total Bid Price inclusive
and ITB of all duties, royalties, levies and taxes as of the date 28 days prior to the deadline
3.9.3 for submission of bids except Goods and Services Tax (GST). The amount of
applicable GST will be reimbursed to the Contractor. Import duties shall be part
of the Contract Price and will not be reimbursed separately. The owner shall not
pay any further duties, taxes, royalties and levies except for GST.
ITB 3.9.5 The contract Price shall be inclusive of all duties, royalties, levies and taxes as of
the date 28 days prior to the deadline for submission of bids except Goods and
Services Tax (GST). The amount of applicable GST will be reimbursed to the
Contractor. Import duties shall be part of the Contract Price and will not be
reimbursed separately. The owner shall not pay any further duties, taxes, royalties
and levies except for GST. The contract price must be inclusive of the import duty
and all other taxes except GST. The contractor shall submit the details of import
duty with each bill though it will not be reimbursable.
The Exemptions as per the National Policies will only be applicable. At present,
no excise exemption is applicable. However, in case such exemptions are applied
due to change in policies, and such exemption is given to the contractor, same
shall be transferred to the owner.
ITB 3.12 Bid Validity Period:
(1) 180 days (One Hundred Eighty Days)
ITB 4.2 Online Bid Submission Deadline:
(1) Refer Estimated Time Table (ITB 2.9(1) and (2)). However, if there is any delay
due to unforeseen circumstances, the Bidders will be informed in due time.
ITB 5.1 Date and time of Online opening of Technical Bids:
(1) Refer Estimated Time Table (ITB 2.9(1) and (2))
ITB 5.1 Opening of Financial Bids:
(5) Refer Estimated Time Table (ITB 2.9(1) and (2)). However, if there is any delay
due to unforeseen circumstances, the Bidders will be informed in due time.
ITB 5.5
(2) Financial Evaluation:
The total Bid price shall be evaluated by determining the NPV of Design-Build

price (Part A), NPV of Fixed O&M Price (Part B), NPV of Variable O&M Price-
Energy (Part C), and NPV of Variable O&M Price-Consumables (Part D) as per
details given below and then adding these NPV components.
1. The quoted Design –Build price would be apportioned between year 1 and, 2,
in the proportion of 40% and 60% respectively; and the NPV of Design-Build
Price will be discounted using the rate indicated in (5) below.
2. The bidder is required to quote the Fixed O&M price and Variable O&M Price
per cubic meter for year 3 which is the defect liability period, and for each of the
subsequent years of the Operations and Maintenance Period
3. For arriving at the NPV of Fixed O&M Price, the quoted annual price will be
discounted using the rate indicated in (5) below.
4. For arriving at the Variable O&M Price-Energy, i.e., total Energy price for
each year, the quoted annual price will be discounted using the rate indicated in
(5) below
For arriving at the Variable O&M Price-Consumables, the quoted annual price
will be discounted using the rate indicated in (6) below.
For the purposes of evaluation (i) an inflation of 5% will be applied on quoted
prices for Fixed O & M Price and Variable O & M Price for consumables from
Year 2 onwards (ii) the annual price will be discounted using the rate indicated in
(6) below.
5. The Net Present Value would be calculated using a discounting rate of 6% per
annum.
For arriving at the O&M price for each year (respectively starting from the year
of commissioning), the quantity of sewage (in MLD) assumed at
a): STP at the start of each year for ten years of the O&M Period is:
5.80 6.09 6.38 6.67 6.96 7.24 7.53 7.82 8.11 8.40
b): MPS at the start of each year for 10 years of the O&M Period is:
5.80 6.09 6.38 6.67 6.96 7.24 7.53 7.82 8.11 8.40
c): IPS-1 at the start of each year for 10 years of the O&M Period is:
0.88 0.92 0.96 1.00 1.04 1.09 1.13 1.17 1.21 1.25
d): IPS-2 at the start of each year for 10 years of the O&M Period is:
3.12 3.27 3.43 3.58 3.73 3.89 4.04 4.19 4.35 4.50
The procedure for evaluating the Bid price is illustrated in the table below,
Annual (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

Row Yr from Design Fixed O&M Variable Variable Dis- Net

No. Effective Build Price O&M O&M Price- count Present
date of Price (Part B) Price- Consumables Factor Value
contract (Part A) Energy (Part D)
(Part C)
1 Year 1 0.40* A 0.9434 [ (2) + (3) +
(4) + (5)] *
(6)
2 Year 2 0.60* A 0.8900 [ (2) + (3) +
(4) + (5)] *
(6)
3 Year 3 FF1*(1.05)^3 D1*(1.05)^3 0.8396 [ (2) + (3) +
VFE1 (4) + (5)] *
(6)
4 Year 4 FF2*(1.05)^4 D2*(1.05)^4 0.7921 [ (2) + (3) +
VFE2 (4) + (5)] *
(6)
5 Year 5 FF3*(1.05)^5 D3*(1.05)^5 0.7473 [ (2) + (3) +
VFE3 (4) + (5)] *
(6)
6 Year 6 FF4*(1.05)^6 D4*(1.05)^6 0.7050 [ (2) + (3) +
VFE4 (4) + (5)] *
(6)
7 Year 7 FF5*(1.05)^7 D5*(1.05)^7 0.6651 [ (2) + (3) +
VFE5 (4) + (5)] *
(6)
8 Year 8 FF6*(1.05)^8 D6*(1.05)^8 0.5919 [ (2) + (3) +
VFE6 (4) + (5)] *
(6)
9 Year 9 FF7*(1.05)^9 D7*(1.05)^9 0.5584 [ (2) + (3) +
VFE7 (4) + (5)] *
(6)
10 Year 10 FF8*(1.05)^10 D8*(1.05)^10 0.5268 [ (2) + (3) +
VFE8 (4) + (5)] *
(6)
11 Year 11 FF9*(1.05)^11 D9*(1.05)^11 0.4970 [ (2) + (3) +
VFE9 (4 + (5)] *
(6)
12 Year 12 FF10*(1.05)^12 D10*(1.05)^12 0.4688 [ (2) + (3) +
VFE10 (4) + (5)] *
(6)
Where:
FF1, FF2, FF3 – FF10 represent the annual Fixed O & M Fee quoted for each
year of O & M Period;
VFE1, VFE2, VFE3 – VFE10 represents the quoted Variable O&M Fee (Energy)
for yr.1, yr.2, yr.3 – yr.10 of the Operations’ and Maintenance Period
respectively, being of sum of quoted Variable O&M Fee (Energy) for the STP,
MPS, IPS-1, IPS-2 and IPS-3, as computed and aggregated from tables in Bill No.
13, Annexure 3C. The fee is based on the energy consumed per cum @ INR 5 per
kwh. The total fee per annum shall be arrived at by multiplying the fee per cum
with the annual quantity of the treated water as given above.
D1, D2, D3 – D10 represent the quoted annual Variable O&M Fee-Consumables
for yr.1, yr.2, yr.3 – yr.10 of the Operations and Maintenance Period respectively.

The bidder is required to quote the annual cost of consumables for the capacities
of STP as given at S.No. 5 above.
NPV of Part A is the sum of Row numbers 1, 2 and 3 of the Net Present Value
column in the table above
NPV of Part B, Part C and Part D is the sum of Row numbers 4 to 13 of the Net
Present value columnin the table above.
Note: The above procedure is only for the purpose of evaluation and comparison
of the Bid prices. Payments for Design-Build and operation and maintenance
services will, however, be in accordance with provisions contained in Contract.
ITB 6.5 Amount of Performance Security:
Performance Security has to be furnished in two parts:
a) Performance security for 5% of the total Design Build price valid up to 180
days beyond the defects liability period of three year after completion of first
agreement shall be furnished to the Managing Director, Madhya Pradesh Urban
Development Company Limited, Bhopal in the format prescribed in the form of
Bank Guarantee within 15 days after the receipt of notification of award and
before signing of the Contract agreement; and
b) Performance security for 10% of the total Operations and Maintenance price
valid up to 180 days beyond the completion of second Agreement, shall be
furnished to the Managing Director, Madhya Pradesh Urban Development
Company Limited, Bhopal in the format prescribed in the form of Bank
Guarantee within 15 days in advance of the completion of and commissioning of
the works and before issuance of the completion certificate of the Design –Build
of the Sewerage Collection, Sewage Treatment and Disposal System.
However, this is further clarified that the Performance Security for Design Built
work shall only be released after submission of the Performance Security of
Operation and Maintenance Part.
c) The Performance Security shall be denominated in the types and proportions
of the currencies in which the Contract Price is payable, or in a freely
convertible currency acceptable to the Owner. The Performance Security shall
be in the form of an unconditional guarantee from any scheduled Bank in India
and if the Bank issuing the Performance Security is located outside India, it shall
have a correspondent Scheduled Bank in the territory of India to make it
enforceable.
d) The Performance Security for the design build period shall be returned after
successful completion of third year of O&M period. The Performance Security
for O&M period shall be returned in installments as given in Appendix 1 to
GCC.
ITB 6.7 Name of the Adjudicator proposed by the Owner:
MP Urban Development Company Ltd. shall appoint a single member Dispute
Adjudication Board. The DAB shall comprise one member selected by the
Contractor from the list of potential members, which shall be made available by

the Employer within thirty (30) days from the issuance of the Letter of
Acceptance.
Fee for the Adjudicator INR 5,000 (INR Five Thousand Only) per sitting (per
day) plus reimbursable expenses as per actuals.

VOLUME 1 BIDDER’S BID FORMS
Annex A– BIDDER’S BID FORMS

Table of Forms:
- BIDDER’S BID FORMS
- FORMS OF SECURITIES

BIDDER’S BID FORMS
Part I: Technical
• Technical Bid Submission Form
• Declaration of Undertaking
• Qualification Information
• Design Build Work Plan
• Operations and Maintenance Work Plan
Part II: Financial

• Financial Bid Submission Form

BIDDER’S BID FORM – PART I
TECHNICAL BID SUBMISSION FORM

Date:
Loan/Credit No:
Contract No:
To:
Managing Director,
Madhya Pradesh Urban Development Company Limited,
Bhopal
Dear Sir,
Having examined the Bidding Documents, the receipt of which is hereby
acknowledged, we, the undersigned, offer to bid for:
(a) Survey, Review the Designs, Redesign Where Necessary and Build Sewage
Collection Network and Sewerage Treatment Scheme For BARWANI Town,
BARWANI District Of Madhya Pradesh
(b) Operation and maintenance of the Sewage Collection and Treatment system
including complaint redress after commissioning of system for next 10 (ten) Years
and perform the work under the above-named Contract in full conformity with the
said Bidding Documents for the sum stated in our separate Financial Bid.
We undertake, if our bid is accepted, to commence the work and to achieve
Completion within the respective times stated in the Bidding Documents. We
understand that for the purposes of funding and ease of operation, you will award us
two separate contracts, one covering the Part A funded by KfW and another contract
covering Part B of O&M contracts for subsequent period of ten years covering
MPUDC funding.
We understand that construtions of the contracts as above does not dilute our single
resource responsibility for all three parts of the scope.
If our Bid is accepted, we undertake to provide the Performance Security in the form,
in the amounts, and within the times specified in the Bidding Documents.
We accept the appointment of the one member adjudication board from the panel of
MPUDC.
The bid and your written acceptance of it shall constitute a binding contract between
us. We understand that you are not bound to accept the lowest or any Bid you
receive.

We hereby certify that we have taken steps to ensure that no person acting for us or
on behalf will engage in bribery.
We also undertake that, in competing for (and, if the award is made to us, in
executing) the above contract, we will strictly observe the laws against fraud and
corruption in force in India namely “Prevention of Corruption Act 1988”.
Commissions or gratuities, if any, paid or to be paid by us to agents relating to this
Bid, and to contract execution if we are awarded the contract, are listed below:
Name and address of agent Amount Purpose of Commission or

Gratuity
(if none, state “none”)

We hereby confirm that this Bid complies with the Eligibility, Bid Validity and Bid
Security required by the Bidding documents.
Yours faithfully,
Authorized Signature:
Name and Title of Signatory : _________________

Name of Bidder : _________________
Address : _________________

Declaration of Undertaking
We underscore the importance of a free, fair and competitive procurement process

that precludes abusive practices. In this respect we have neither offered nor granted
directly or indirectly any inadmissible advantages to any public servant or other
person nor accepted such advantages in connection with our bid, nor will we offer or
grant or accept any such incentives or conditions in the present procurement process
or, in the event that we are awarded the contract, in the subsequent execution of the
contract. We also declare that no conflict of interest exists in the meaning of the kind
described in the corresponding Guidelines.
We also underscore the importance of adhering to environmental and social
standards in the implementation of the project. We undertake to comply with
applicable labour laws and the Core Labour Standards of the International Labour
Organization (ILO) as well as national and applicable international standards of
environmental protection and health and safety standards.
We will inform our staff about their respective obligations and about their obligation
to fulfil this declaration of undertaking and to obey the laws of the country of India.
We also declare that our company/all members of the consortium has/have not been
included in the list of sanctions of the United Nations, nor of the EU, nor of the
Development Government, nor in any other list of sanctions and affirm that our
company/all members of the consortium will immediately inform the client and KfW
if this situation should occur at a later stage.
We acknowledge that, in the event that our company (or a member of the
consortium) is added to a list of sanctions that is legally binding on the client and/or
KfW, the client is entitled to exclude our company/the consortium from the
procurement procedure and, if the contract is awarded to our company/the
consortium, to terminate the contract immediately if the statements made in the
Declaration of Undertaking were objectively false or the reason for exclusion occurs
after the Declaration of Undertaking has been issued.
Place Date Name of Company
Signature(s)

QUALIFICATION INFORMATION
1. General Information [ref. ITB Section 1.4 (A)]

All individual firms and each participant in a joint venture submitting the bids are
required to complete the information in this form. Nationality information should be
provided for all Bidders that are partnerships or individually owned firms.
If the Bidder proposes to use nominated subcontractors or sub-consultants, the
following information should also be supplied for the subcontractor(s) and sub-
consultant(s).
1. Name of firm
2. Head office address
3. Telephone Contact
4. Fax Telex
5. Place of in Council / registration Year of in Council / registration
6. Nationality of owners
Name Nationality
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1. To be completed by all owners of partnerships or individually owned firms.

2. General Design, Build, Operation and Maintenance Experience Information

(Ref. ITB Section 1.4 (D) (a))
All individual firms and all participants of a joint venture are requested to complete
the information in this form with regard to their experience in designing, building,
operating, managing and maintaining facility
Name of Bidder or participant of a joint venture
Description of Contract with its Capacity
Name of Joint Venture Participant Responsible
Name of City
Country
Population served
Contract Role (joint venture participant, subcontractor, sub consultant, lead, etc.)
and percentage share in the total contract
Nature, role and extent of participation (describe fully)
Date of contract commencement:

Date of contract termination:
Contract value (INR):
Individual for reference:
Address:
Telephone:
Fax for reference:

2 (A) General Turnover Information (ref. Appendix to ITB Section 1.4)

operating, managing and maintaining civil works facilities. The information supplied
should be the annual turnover and net worth of the Bidder (or each member of a joint
venture) in terms of the amounts billed to clients for each year for work in progress
or completed. The annual periods should be complete financial years or calendar
years, before the date of submission of Bids.
Use a separate sheet for each participant of a joint venture.
Bidders should not enclose testimonials, certificates, and publicity material with their
Application as they will not be taken into account in the evaluation of qualifications.
Annual turnover data (civil works facilities only)

Year Turnover (amounts billed to clients)
[Year]
[Year]
[Year]
[Year]
[Year]

2(B) Joint Venture Summary
Names of all participants of a joint venture
Lead Participant
Participant
Participant
Total value of annual turnover relating to designing, building, operating, managing

and maintain civil works facilities at the end of the period reported.

Participant Information [Year] [Year] [Year] [Year] [Year]
Form 2(A)
page no.
Totals
Bidders shall append to Form 2B:

(a) A document confirming the percentage shareholding of each joint venture
participant in the company to be established; and
(b) A description of the role and responsibility of each joint venture participant.
(Bidders shall make the precise role of each joint venture participant clear in this
description).
Bidders are reminded to submit the appropriate powers of attorney as required by
ITB Section 1.5 (C) and to provide all other information required in the powers of
attorney (see ITB Section 1.5, in particular Sections C, E and F).

3 (A) Designing a Sewerage Collection, Sewage Treatment and Disposal System

[ref. ITB Section 1.4 (E)]
Description of Contract
Name of Place
Country
Population served

Address:
Telephone:
Fax for reference:
Provide a complete description of the services provided under this contract

demonstrating that the definition of a Sewage Collection and Treatment system in
ITB Section 1.4 (E) has been met.

3 (B) Construction of a Sewage Collection and Treatment Scheme [ref. ITB

Section 1.4 (E)]
Description of Contract
Name of Place
Country
Population served

Address:
Telephone:
Fax for reference:


3 (C) Operation and Maintenance of a Sewerage Collection, Sewage Treatment

and Disposal System [ref. ITB Section 1.4 (E)]
Description of Measurement and Billing and Revenue Collection Systems
Name of Place
Country
Population served

Address:
Telephone:
Fax for reference:


3 (D) Contract Value Information [ref. ITB Section 1.4 (E)]

operating, managing and maintaining Sewage Collection and Treatment systems.
Use a separate sheet for each participant of a joint venture.
Bidders should not enclose client’s certificates with their Bid as they will be taken
into account in the evaluation of qualifications.
Year Turnover (amounts billed to clients)

[Year]
[Year]
[Year]
[Year]
[Year]

4. Financial Capabilities [ref. ITB Section 1.4 (F)]

Bidders, including each partner of a joint venture, shall provide financial information
to demonstrate they meet the requirements stated in the ITB. Each participant of a
joint venture shall complete this form. If necessary, separate sheets shall be used to
provide complete banker information. A copy of the audited balance sheets shall be
attached.
Banker
Name of banker
Address of banker
Amount of available cash credit facility:
Telephone
Contact name and title
Fax
Telex
Summarize actual assets and liabilities for the previous five calendar years. Based
upon known comments, summarize projected assets and liabilities for the next two
calendar years, unless the withholding of such information by stock market listed
public companies can be substantiated by the Bidder.

SAMPLE FORMAT FOR EVIDENCE OF ACCESS TO OR AVAILABILITY

OF CREDIT FACILITIES
BANK CERTIFICATE
This is to certify that M/s……………………………is a reputed company with a

good financial standing.
If the contract for the work, namely………………………………….. [Funded by the

KfW] is awarded to the above firm, we shall be able to provide overdraft/credit
facilities to the extent of INR.……….. to meet their working capital requirements for
executing the above contract.
Signature
Name of Bank
Senior Bank Manager
Address of the Bank
* Change the text as follows for Joint Venture:
This is to certify that M/s. ………………. Who has formed a JV with M/s.
…………….. and M/s.…………………… for participating in this bid, is a reputed
company with a good financial standing.
If the contract for the work, namely …………………………… [funded by the KfW]
is awarded to the above Joint Venture, we shall be able to provide overdraft/credit
facilities to the extent of INR ……….. to M/s. ………….. to meet the working
capital requirements for executing the above contract.
This should be given by the JV members in proportion to their financial
participation.]

Form 4 (B): Availability of Financial Resources [ref. ITB Section 1.4 (F)]
Bidders must demonstrate sufficient financial resources, usually comprising of Working

Capital supplemented by credit line statements or overdraft facilities and others to meet the
Bidder’s financial requirements for
(a) its current contract commitments, and

(b) the subject contract.
In case of joint ventures, each Joint Venture Partner must fill out this form separately and
provide the Joint Venture Partner name below:
Joint Venture Partner: ___________________
Financial Resources
No. Source of financing Amount (INR equivalent)
1 Working Capital (to be taken from FIN-1)
2 Credit Linea
3 Other Financial Resources
Total Available Financial Resources
a
To be substantiated by a letter from the bank issuing the line of credit.(sample format
given with form 4(A))

Form 4 (C): Financial Requirements for Current Contract Commitments [ref. ITB
Section 1.4 (F)]
Bidders (or each Joint Venture partner) should provide information on their current
commitments on all contracts that have been awarded, or for which a letter of intent or
acceptance has been received, or for contracts approaching completion, but for which an
unqualified, full completion certificate has yet to be issued.
In case of joint ventures, each Joint Venture Partner must fill out this form separately and
provide the Joint Venture Partner name below:
Joint Venture Partner: ___________________
Current Contract Commitments

Employer’s Contract Outstanding Remaining
Monthly Financial Resources
No Name of Contact Completion Contract Contract
Requirement
. Contract (Address, Value Period in
Date (X / Y)
Tel, Fax) (X) months (Y)
Total Monthly Financial Requirement for Current Contract INR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Commitments

Form 4(D): Compliance Check of Financial Resources [ref. ITB Section 1.4 (F)]
Form: For Single Entities

Total Available Total Monthly Available
Financial Financial Financial ≥ Requirementa
For Single Resources from Requirement Resources net
Entities: Form 4 B for Current of CCC
(C) Contract (C-D)
Commitments
(CCC) from
Form-4C
(D)
100% of
Requirement
≥ from 1.4 F(1)
_______________ ____________ _____________ ____________
____ ___ ___ ___ ____________
(Name of Bidder) ___
Form : For Joint Ventures

Total Available Total Monthly Available
Financial Financial Financial ≥ Requirementa
For Joint Resources from Requirement Resources net
Ventures: Form-4B for Current of CCC
(C) Contract (C-D)
Commitments
(CCC) from
Form-4C
(D)
One Partner:
B(%) of
≥ Requirement
_______________ ____________ ____________ ____________
____ ___ ___ ___ ____________
(Name of Partner)
Each (Other)
Partner:
A(%) of
≥ Requirement
_______________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________
____ ___ ___ ___
(Name of Partner
1)
A(%) of
≥ Requirement
_______________ ____________ ____________ ____________
____ ___ ___ ___ ____________

(Name of Partner
2)
A(%) of
≥ Requirement
_______________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________
____ ___ ___ ___
(Name of Partner
3)
100% of
All partners ∑ (C-D)b = ≥ Requirement
combined from ITB/BDS
____________ 1.4 (F)
___
____________
___
- Note -
Form 4D is made available for use by the bidder as a self-assessment tool, and by the
employer as evaluation work sheet, to determine compliance with financial resources.
a
Requirement for the subject contract is defined in ITB/BDS 1.4(F). Value A is the
required percentage of the subject contract, which each partner must meet; and value B
is the required percentage of the subject contract, which one partner must meet. A and B
values are defined in BDS/ITB 1.4(F).
b
Σ (C – D) = sum of available financial resources net of current contract commitments
(CCC) for all partners.

5. Personnel Capabilities [ref. ITB Section 1.4 (H)]

For specific positions noted below, Bidders must provide the names of a candidate
qualified to meet the specified requirements stated for each position. The data on
their experience should be supplied on separate sheets using one Form (5A) for each
candidate.
Bidders may propose alternative management and implementation arrangements
requiring different key personnel, whose experience records should be provided.
N° Title of position* Name of candidate

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
*As listed in BDS 1.4 (H)

5 (A) Candidate Summary [ref. ITB Section 1.4 (H)]
Date: [insert day, month, year]

Project No. and title: [insert number and title]
Page [insert page number] of [insert total number] pages
Name of Bidder
Position
Personnel Name Date of birth

information
Professional qualifications
Present Name of employe

employment
Address of employe
Telephone Contact (manager / personnel officer)
Fax E-mail
Job title Years with present employer
[Summarize professional experience over the last 20 years, in reverse chronological order. Indicate
particular technical and managerial experience relevant to the project.]
From To Company / Project / Position / Relevant technical and management

experience

HISTORICAL CONTRACT NON-PERFORMANCE[ref. ITB Section 1.4(I)]
In case a prequalification process was conducted this form should be used only if the
information submitted at the time of prequalification requires updating
[The following table shall be filled in for the Applicant and for each member of a Joint Venture.]
Bidder’s Name: [insert full name]

Date: [insert day, month, year]
Joint Venture Member Name: [insert full name]
Project No. and title: [insert number and title]
Page [insert page number] of [insert total number] pages
Non-Performed Contracts in accordance with ITB Section 1.4 (I)

 Contract non-performance in accordance with Appendix to ITB Section 1.4 (I).
 Contract non-performance did not occur during the [number] years as specified in ITB Section
1.4 (I).
 Contract(s) not performed during the [number] years as specified in ITB Section 1.4 (I)
Year Non- Contract Identification Total Contract
performed Amount (current
portion of value, currency,
contract exchange rate
and EUR €
equivalent)
[insert [insert amount Contract Identification: [indicate complete contract [insert amount]
year] in %] name/number and any other identification]
Name of Employer: [insert full name]
Address of Employer: [insert full address]
Reason(s) for non performance: [indicate main
reasns]
Pending Litigation, in accordance with Section 1.4 (I)
 No pending litigation in accordance with Appendix to ITB Section 1.4 (I).
 Pending litigation in accordance with Appendix to ITB Section 1.4 (I), indicated below.

Year of Amount in Contract Identification Total

dispute dispute Contract
(currency) Amount
Contract Identification: _________
Name of Employer: ____________
Address of Employer: __________
Matter in dispute: ______________
Party who initiated the dispute: ____
Status of dispute: ___________

DESIGN BUILD WORK PLAN [ref. ITB Section 3.4 B and BDS 3.4B]
[In the present section Bidders shall provide a detailed design-build work plan
including a detailed program timetable ( the “Design Build Work Plan”), setting out
the manner in which the Bidder proposes to carry out the design-build work as
defined in the Volume 3 – Technical Specifications and meet the design build
specifications ( the “Scope of Work ”).]
The Design-Build Work plan shall be divided into the following sections:
(i) a section entitled “Drawing” which consists of conceptual drawings that are
sufficiently detailed to communicate the Bidder’s design intent for all components of
the proposed Sewage Collection and Treatment system and the site.
The conceptual drawings shall include the following:
(A) A site plan showing all proposed works listed in the Bid Documents;
(B) a detailed narrative in support of the conceptual drawings setting out the
Bidder’s plan for compliance with the Design-Build Specifications, to include
construction quality assurance and control;
(C) a detailed program and schedule setting out the proposed sequence of
works to be undertaken, including estimated start date, finish date and time
allocations for individual components of the works, proposed resources to be
allocated and the identification of all the milestones, including the submission
of schematic design documents, design development documents, the Design-
Build Documents and the commissioning of individual components of the
project; and
(D) An itemized lists of the principal codes of practice and standards
proposed to be used for the Design-Build Work; and
(ii) A section entitled “Plant and Equipment and Bidder’s equipment” which
consists of a list of major Plant and Equipment with the Bidder as given in ITC/BDS
1.4
Prior to drawings up the Design Build Work Plan and Conceptual Design it is
imperative that the Bidders familiarize themselves with the Owner’s available
background surveys, maps and sketch designs.
(iii) all other requirements listed under BDS – ITB - 3.4 B which are not included in
the above submissions

OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE WORK PLAN [ref. ITB Section 3.4 C

(ii)]
[In the present section Bidders shall provide a detailed work plan ( the “Operations
Work plan”), setting out the manner in which the Bidder proposes to carry out the
operation of the project as set out in the Volume 4 – Operations and Maintenance
Services Agreement and meet the Operations and Maintenance Specifications.]
The Operations Work plan shall be divided into the following sections:
(i) a section entitled “Operations Start-up” which provides an outline contents and
overview of the Bidder’s proposed plans and program, including staffing, for
operational start-up of the Sewage Collection and Treatment system after
commissioning; and
(ii) a section entitled “Operations Plan” which provides an outline contents and
overview of the Bidder’s proposed plans and programs, including staffing for
Sewage Collection, Conveyance and Treatment system operation, including the items
listed in the Bid Data Sheet

KEY PERSONNEL INFORMATION [ref. ITB Section 3.4 D]
[In the present section Bidders shall provide a detailed staffing plan ( the “Staffing
Plan”) setting out the Bidder’s proposed staffing arrangements for the carrying out
of the Volume 3 – Technical Specifications; and Volume 4 – Operations and
Maintenance Services Agreement.]
The Staffing Plan shall be divided into the following sections:
(i) A section entitled the “Staffing chart for the Design-Build Services” and
consisting of a chart setting out a list of all proposed Key Staff, the role of each
position, the duration of existence of the position, and the location of the staff person
filling the position during the period of assignment to carry out the Design-Build
Services;
(ii) A section entitled the “Staffing Chart for Operations and Maintenance Services”
and consisting of a chart setting out a list of all proposed Key Staff, the role of each
position, the duration of existence of the position, and the location of the staff person
filling the position during the period of assignment to carry out the Operations and
Maintenance Services;
(iii) a section entitled “Summary of Staff Qualifications” which consists of a
summary table setting out,
(A) for the Key Staff positions, the name of the Bidder’s employees who
will occupy the Key Staff positions; and
(B) all proposed positions for the Key Staff and the qualifications, years of
experience and areas of expertise, including a clear indication of the expertise
that the staff will provide consistent with the requirements set out in the BDS-
ITB 1.4 (H); and
(iv) a section entitled, “Curriculum vitae” which contains the signed curriculum
vitae for each of the Key Staff, in the format set out in Annex A to the Bidding
Documents;

FORMAT OF CURRICULUM VITAE (CV) FOR PROPOSED KEY STAFF
The comprehensive Curricula Vitae of the definitely assigned personnel shall be presented in
the form as shown below:
1. Proposed position:
2. N a m e o f Firm:
3. Family name:
4. First names:
5. Date of birth:
6. Nationality:
7. Civil status:
8. Education:
Institution
Date: from (month/year) to (month/year)
Degree(s) or Diploma(s) obtained
9. Language skills, mark 1 (worst) to 5 (best) for competence:
Language Reading Speaking Writing
10. Memberships of professional bodies:

11. Other skills:
12. Work experience (summary of particular qualifications and skills):
13. Regional experience/Experiences in foreign countries:
Country Date: from (month/year) to (month/year)
14. Professional experience record (projects):

Name of project
Location
Company
Position held
Value of project
Brief description
Use more boxes as appropriate.

15. Certification:
I, the undersigned, certify that to the best of my knowledge and belief, these data
correctly describe me, my qualifications, and my experience. I also certify that I have
only given permission for my CV to be included in the Bid submitted by
[Fill in name of Bidder here.]
Date:
[Signature of staff member and authorized representative of the firm]

Day/Month/Year
Full name of staff member:

Full name of authorized representative:

CONTRACTOR’S BID FORM: PART II

FINANCIAL BID SUBMISSION FORM

Description of the Works:
(a) Part-A: SURVEY, REVIEW THE DESIGNS, REDESIGN WHERE
NECESSARY AND BUILD SEWAGE COLLECTION AND CONVEYANCE
SYSTEM, SEWAGE TREATMENT AND DISPOSAL SYSTEM OF BARWANI
NAGAR PALIKA, DISTRICT BARWANI OF MADHYA PRADESH
(b) Part-B: OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF THE SEWAGE
COLLECTION AND CONVEYANCE SYSTEM, SEWAGE TREATMENT AND
DISPOSAL SYSTEM BUILT UNDER Part A TO MEET THE PERFROMANCE
STANDARDS SPECIFIED FOR NEXT TEN YEARS
To: The Managing Director
Address: MPUDC, Beej Bhawan, Mother Theresa Road, Arera Hills, Bhopal,
Dear Sir,
We having examined the bidding documents including addendum/corrigendum, we
offer to execute the works described above in accordance with the Conditions of
Contract, Specifications, Drawings and Bill of Quantities accompanying this Bid for
the Contract Price is quoted as under:
Part A- Design and Build Price in INR in million (A)
No. Component Price INR in million
1. Total Bid Price STP (Bill No. 6)
2. Total Bid Price Network, incl. IPSs and MPS,
surveys and investigations, designs and
drawings, electrical and mechanical parts etc
3. Implementation of Environmental and Socail
Safeguards (Bill No. 10)
Total Design-Build Price:
Amount in Words:
Operation and Maintenance Price for 10 years in INR in million (All prices are
based on Base Date)
PART DETAILS Price INR in million
B Fixed O&M Price ( Bill No.12)
C Variable O&M Price (Energy) (Bill No.
13)
D Variable O&M Price (Consumables)
(Bill No. 14)
Note:

 For arriving at the total Variable O&M price (Energy and Consumables)
for each year, the quantity of sewage assumed at IPS1, IPS2, IPS 3, MPS
and STP at the start of the year for ten years of the O&M Period is as
indicated in BDS – ITB 5.5(2)
 Assumed quantity of sewage is only for the purpose of evaluation and
comparison of the Bid prices. Payments for Design-Build and Operation
and Maintenance services will, however, be in accordance with provisions
contained in Contract.
Lump-sum cost for the Bid = A + B + C+D =

Irrespective of indicating the Contract Prices for each part separately, we understand
that the scope of works is for the composite works covering all the parts and the
above is done for the purposes of funding requirements of KfW and GoMP.
This Bid and your written acceptance of it shall constitute a binding contract between
us. We understand that you are not bound to accept the lowest or any Bid you
receive.
We hereby certify that we have taken steps to ensure that no person acting for us on
our behalf will engage in bribery.
We also undertake that, in competing for (and, if the award is made to us, in
executing) the above contract, we will strictly observe the laws against fraud and
corruption in force in India namely “Prevention of Corruption Act, 1988”.
We hereby confirm that this Bid complies with the Eligibility, Bid Validity and Bid
Security required by the Bidding documents.
Yours faithfully,
Authorized Signatory: _________________

Name and Title of Signatory: _________________
Name of Contractor: _________________
Address: _________________

FORM OF BID SECURITY (BANK BOND)
Address of guarantor bank:

…………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………….
Address of beneficiary (contracting agency):

………………………………………………………………….
…………………………………………………………………..
We, the undersigned ……………………….. (Guarantor), in order to enable

…………………………….. to bid for ………………………………….. (project,
object of contract), hereby irrevocably and independently guarantee to pay to you an
amount up to a total of...........................................................................waiving all
objections and defences.
We shall effect payments under this guarantee on your first written demand, which
must be accompanied by your confirmation that you have accepted the above-
mentioned bid and that the firm …………………………………………. is no longer
prepared to abide by this bid.
This guarantee shall expire no later than …………………………………….
By this date we must have received any claims for payment by letter or encoded
Telecommunication.
It is understood that you will return this guarantee to us on expiry or after payment of
the total Amount to be claimed hereunder.
This guarantee is governed by the laws of ……………………….
............................................................. ..................................................
Date
Signature and Seal of Guarantor

FORM OF PERFORMANCE SECURITY

(Separate Bonds to be given for Agreement A and B)

…………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………….
………………………………………………………………….
…………………………………………………………………..
On ......................................you concluded with................................................. ("Contractor")
a contract for ................................................................. (project, object of contract) at a price
of .................................................................
In accordance with the provisions of the contract the Contractor is obligated to provide a
performance bond for … % of the contract price.
We, the undersigned ……………………….. (Guarantor), waiving all objections and
defences under the aforementioned contract, hereby irrevocably and independently guarantee
to pay on your first written demand an amount up to a total of.......................................... (in
words:..............................................................) against your written declaration that the
Contractor has failed to duly perform the aforementioned contract.
In the event of any claim under this guarantee, payment shall be effected to Managing
Director, Madhya Pradesh Urban Development Co. Limited (project-executing
agency/purchaser).
telecommunication.
It is understood that you will return this guarantee to us on expiry or after payment of the
total amount to be claimed hereunder.
........................................................... .................................................
Place,
Date
Guarantor

FORM OF BANK GUARANTEE – ADVANCE PAYMENT

…………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………….
………………………………………………………………….
…………………………………………………………………..
On ......................................you concluded with ................................................. ("Contractor")
a contract for ................................................................. (project, object of contract) at a price
of .................................................................
In accordance with the provisions of the contract the Contractor receives an advance
payment in the amount of …………………….., which represents ……………… % of the
order value.
We, the undersigned ……………………….. (Guarantor), waiving all objections and
defences under the aforementioned contract, hereby irrevocably and independently guarantee
to pay on your first written demand any amount advanced to the Contractor up to a total of
....................................... (in words:................................................................................)
against your written declaration that the Contractor has failed to duly perform the
aforementioned contract.
This guarantee shall come into force and effect as soon as the advance payment has been
credited to the account of the Contractor.
In the event of any claim under this guarantee, payment shall be effected to
Managing Director, Madhya Pradesh Urban Development Co. Limited (contracting
agency/project-executing agency).
telecommunication.
It is understood that you will return this guarantee to us on expiry or after payment of the
total amount to be claimed hereunder.
........................................................... .................................................
Place, date Guarantor

Form for Clarification Questions
Clarification Questions
Contractor’s
Name:
Contractor’s Date
Address: Submitted:
Item No. Section Page Section or Question/Query/Clarification/

Reference No. Clause Ref Comment
1
2
3
4
5
6

SURVEY, REVIEW THE DESIGNS, REDESIGN WHERE NECESSARY

AND BUILD SEWAGE COLLECTION AND CONVEYANCE SYSTEM,
SEWAGE TREATMENT AND DISPOSAL SYSTEM OF BARWANI NAGAR
PALIKA, DISTRICT BARWANI OF MADHYA PRADESH AND OPERATE
AND MAINTAIN THE BUILT SYSTEM FOR 10 YEARS
(Declaration regarding customs/excise duty exemption for materials/ Construction
equipment bought for the work)
(Contractor’s Name and Address)

To: ………………………
(Name of the Owner)

Dear Sir:
Re: [Name of Work] …………………………
- Certificate for Import/Procurement of Goods/Construction Equipment -
Dear Sir:
1. We confirm that we are solely responsible for obtaining customs /excise duty
waiver which we have considered in our bid and in case of failure to receive such
waivers for reasons whatsoever, the Owner will not compensate us separately.
2. We are furnishing below the information required by the Owner for issue of the
necessary certificates in terms of the Government of India Central Excise
Notification no. …….. and Customs Notification no
3. The goods/construction equipment for which certificates are required as under,
Items Make Capacity Quantity Value State Remarks
Brand (where whether it regarding
Name applicable) will be justification
procured for the
locally or quantity
imported and their
[if so from usage in
which works
country]
Goods
A
Construction Equipment
A
B

Items Make Capacity Quantity Value State Remarks

Brand (where whether it regarding
Name applicable) will be justification
procured for the
locally or quantity
imported and their
[if so from usage in
which works
country]
C
4. We agree that no modification to the above list is permitted after bids are
opened.
5. We agree that the certificate will be issued only to the extent considered
reasonable by the Owner for the work, based on the Bill of Quantities and the
construction programme and methodology as furnished by us along with the Bid.
6. We conform that the above goods will be exclusively used for the construction
of the above work and construction equipment will not be sold or otherwise disposed
off in any manner for a period of 5 years from the date of acquisition.
Date: ___________________________ (Signature)

__________________________
Place: ___________________________ (Printed Name)

_______________________
(Designation) ________________________
(Common Seal) ______________________

VOLUME 1 DRAFT CONTRACT
Annex B – THE DRAFT CONTRACT

Table of Forms:
- Form of Contract
- General Conditions of Contract
- Appendices to the General Conditions

FORM OF CONTRACT
THIS First Agreement is made and entered into this ____ day of _______, 2018
Between Managing Director, Madhya Pradesh Urban Development Company
Limited, Madhya Pradesh, a company incorporated under the laws of India and
having its principal place of business at First Florr, MP Rajya Krishi and Gramin
Sahkari Bank, 8 Jail Road, Arera Hills, Bhopal (hereafter the “Owner”)
– and –
[Name of Contractor Company] incorporated under the laws of [place of in Council]
with its principal place of business at [Address of the Contractor]
(hereafter the “Contractor”)
– and –
[Name of the Contractor’s Parent Company or any other entities the Owner may be
required to be parties to the Contract]
WHEREAS:
1. The Owner has the jurisdiction to enter into the Contract, as defined in Section
1.1 below, pursuant to the Applicable Law;
2. The Owner has received all requisite approvals necessary and has conformed
with all requisite laws in accordance with the Applicable Law to permit the Owner to
enter into the Contract;
3. The Owner desires to engage the Contractor to SURVEY, REVIEW THE
DISPOSAL SYSTEM OF BARWANI, DISTRICT BARWANI OF MADHYA
PRADESH
4. The Contractor has represented to the Owner that it has the skills and ability to
TREATMENT AND DISPOSAL SYSTEM OF BARWANI, DISTRICT
BARWANI OF MADHYA PRADESH in an economical and effective manner with
reduced cost and increased profitability and agrees to do so upon and subject to the
terms and conditions of the Contract Documents;
5. The Contractor responded to the Bidding Documents No. …….. with Addenda/
Amendments organized by the MPUDC and was selected as the recommended
Contractor to fulfill the Design-Build Services (FIDIC Yellow Book) set out in the
Technical Specification;

6. The Contractor has the corporate capacity and authority to enter into the
Contract; and
7. The Contractor’s parent company [or shareholders of a joint venture company]
has guaranteed the Contract as provided in the Contract and accepted that the Owner
is entering into two contracts for the composite scope of works covering PART A,
and PART B and that breach in one contract will be considered a breach in other
contract. The Owner at its discretion may seek remedies from the provisions of both
the contracts enforce its rights to payments under any contract including encashment
of performance securities of both the contracts;
NOW THEREFORE, in consideration of the mutual covenants and Agreements

hereinafter set forth, the Owner and the Contractor agree as follows:

FORM OF CONTRACT
THIS Second Agreement is made and entered into this ____ day of _______, 2018
Between Managing Director, Madhya Pradesh Urban Development Company
Limited, Madhya Pradesh, a company incorporated under the laws of India and
having its principal place of business at First Floor, MP Rajya Krishi and Gramin
Sahkari Bank, 8 Jail Road, Arera Hills, Bhopal (hereafter the “Owner”)
– And –
[Name of Contractor Company] incorporated under the laws of [place of in Council]
with its principal place of business at [Address of the Contractor]
(Hereafter the “Contractor”)
– And –
[Name of the Contractor’s Parent Company or any other entities the Owner may be
required to be parties to the Contract]
WHEREAS:
1. The Owner has the jurisdiction to enter into the Contract, as defined in Section
1.1 below, pursuant to the Applicable Law;
2. The Owner has received all requisite approvals necessary and has conformed
with all requisite laws in accordance with the Applicable Law to permit the Owner to
enter into the Contract;
3. The Owner desires to engage the Contractor to OPERATE AND MAINTAIN
THE SYSTEM BUILT SEWAGE COLLECTION AND CONVEYANCE
SYSTEM, SEWAGE TREATMENT AND DISPOSAL SYSTEM OF BARWANI,
DISTRICT BARWANI OF MADHYA PRADESH FOR 10 YEARS.
4. The Contractor has represented to the Owner that it has the skills and ability to
OPERATE AND MAINTAIN THE BUILT SYSTEM FOR TEN (10) YEARS in an
economical and effective manner with reduced cost and increased profitability and
agrees to do so upon and subject to the terms and conditions of the Contract
Documents;
5. The Contractor responded to the Bidding Documents No. …….. with Addenda/
Amendments organized by the MPUDC and was selected as the recommended
Contractor to fulfill the Design-Build and Operating Services set out in the Technical
Specifications;
6. The Contractor has the corporate capacity and authority to enter into the
Contract; and
7. The Contractor’s parent company [or shareholders of a joint venture company]
has guaranteed the Contract as provided in the Contract and accepted that the Owner

is entering into two contracts for the composite scope of works covering PART A,
and PART B and that breach in one contract will be considered a breach in other
contract. The Owner at its discretion may seek remedies from the provisions of both
the contracts enforce its rights to payments under any contract including encashment
of performance securities of both the contracts;
NOW THEREFORE, in consideration of the mutual covenants and Agreements

hereinafter set forth, the Owner and the Contractor agree as follows:

ARTICLE 1 – CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
1.1 Contract Documents
This Contract to SURVEY, REVIEW THE DESIGNS, REDESIGN WHERE

SYSTEM, SEWAGE TREATMENT AND DISPOSAL SYSTEM OF BARWANI
NAGAR PALIKA, DISTRICT BARWANI, MADHYA PRADESH AND
OPERATE AND MAINTAIN THE BUILT SYSTEM FOR 10 YEARS between the
Owner and the Contractor (the “Contract”) consists of the following documents
(collectively, the “Contract Documents”), and each of the following shall be read and
construed as an integral part of the Contract:
(a) Form of Contract;
(b) Special Conditions of Contract (Appendix 1 to the General Conditions of
Contract);
(c) General Conditions of Contract; and
(d) Remaining appendices to the General Conditions of Contract.
(e) The Employer’s Requirements
(f) The completed Schedules
(g) The Contractor’s Proposal
(h) Declaration of Undertakings
1.2 Order of Precedence

(1) In the event of any ambiguity or conflict between the Contract Documents
listed in Section 1.1 of this Form of Contract, the order of precedence shall be the
order in which the Contract Documents are listed in Section 1.1 of this Form of
Contract.
(2) Notwithstanding Section 1.2(1) of this Form of Contract and any other term or
condition in the Contract Documents, if any statement or provision in General
Conditions of Contract, is not consistent with or conflicts with any other term or
condition in the remainder of the Contract Documents, the remainder of the Contract
Documents shall govern.
(3) For the purposes of funding and convenience of operation, two separate
contracts are being entered in: First Contract covering to SURVEY, REVIEW THE
DISPOSAL SYSTEM OF BARWANI NAGAR PALIKA, DISTRICT BARWANI
OF MADHYA PRADESH and Second contract for O&M for ten subsequent years,

however, it is expressly understood that the contract documents are one composite
document for the entire scope of works and applies to both the contracts.
1.3 Definitions
(1) Capitalized words and phrases used herein shall have the same meanings as are
described to them in the General Conditions of Contract and Appendices to the
General Conditions of Contract.
ARTICLE 2 –CONTRACTOR’S COMPENSATION AND TERMS OF

PAYMENT
2.1 Contractor’s Compensation

The Owner hereby agrees to pay to the Contractor the Contract Price, in
consideration of the performance by the Contractor of its obligations hereunder, and
the Contract Price is: [Insert amount inwards and figures].
Note that the Design-Build Price (for Design-Build Services) will be for a total
amount while the Operations and Maintenance Payments (for Operations and
Maintenance Services) will be an amount for each month the Contractor operates the
New Facility, as specified in the Contractor’s Price Schedules or such other sums as
may be determined in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Contract.
2.2 Terms of Payment

The terms and procedures of payment by which the Owner will compensate the
Contractor are set out in the General Conditions of the Contract.
ARTICLE 3 – EFFECTIVE DATE AND STARTING DATES
3.1 Effective Date and Starting Date

The Effective Date, the Design-Build Starting Date and Operations and Maintenance
Starting Date for the Contract are as below.
Effective Date: The date of signing the agreement
Design-Build Starting Date: not later than 14 days from the Effective
Date
Operations & Maintenance Starting Date: the date on which the completion
certificate on Design and Build service is issued by the Engineer in Chief

IN WITNESS WHEREOF the Owner and the Contractor have caused this Form of
Contract to be duly executed by their duly authorized representatives.
EXECUTED as of the date first written above.
[OWNER]
By: ____________________________________
Name: ____________________________________
Title: ____________________________________
Witness: ____________________________________
[THE CONTRACTOR]
By: ____________________________________
Name: ____________________________________
Title: ____________________________________
Witness: ____________________________________
[PARTNER(S) OF THE CONTRACTOR]

By: ____________________________________
Name: ____________________________________
Title: ____________________________________
Witness: ____________________________________

Annex C – CONTRACT PRICE SCHEDULE
CONTRACTOR'S PRICE SCHEDULE
FOR A CONTRACT TO

FOR 10 YEARS

PREAMBLE TO THE PRICE SCHEDULES
1.0 General
1.1 The Price Schedules are divided into separate Schedules as follows:
Schedule 1 Price Schedule
1.2 The Price Schedules do not give a full description of the Plant and Equipment,
Contractor’s Equipment (Operations) and Contractor’s Equipment (Design-Build) to
be supplied and the Services to be performed under each item. Contractors are deemed
to have read the Draft Contract, including the Technical Specifications Appendix
consisting of the Design-Build Services Appendix and Operations and Maintenance
Services Appendix, and other sections of the Bidding Documents to ascertain the full
scope of the requirements of the Contract included in each item prior to filling in the
prices. The entered prices are deemed to include the full scope as aforesaid, including
overheads and profit.
1.3 If Contractors are unclear or uncertain as to the scope of any item, they shall seek
clarification in accordance with the Instructions to Contractors in the Bidding
Documents prior to submitting their Bid.
1.4 The bidders are required to complete and submit the schedules contained in Annex 5
of Volume 3 -Specifications. The totals shall be carried forward to the Table in
Schedule 1 below.
2.0 Pricing
2.1 Prices shall be filled in indelible ink, and any alterations necessary due to errors shall
be initialed by the Contractor. As specified in the Bid Data Sheet, prices shall be fixed
and firm for the duration of the Contract, except as adjusted in accordance with the
Contract.
2.2 The Bid Price shall be quoted in the manner indicated and in the currencies specified
in the Instructions to Contractors in the Bidding Documents. For each item,
Contractors shall complete each appropriate column in the respective Schedules,
giving the price breakdown as indicated in the Schedules. Prices given in the
Schedules against each item shall be for the scope covered by that item as detailed in

the Draft Contract or elsewhere in the Bidding Documents.
2.3 The Owner will make payments to the Contractor in INR and the currency(ies)
indicated under each respective item.
2.4 When requested by the Owner for the purposes of making payments or part payments,
valuing changes or evaluating claims, or for such other purposes as the Owner may
reasonably require, the Contractor shall provide the Owner with a breakdown of any
composite or lump sum items included in the Schedule.
2.5 The Contract Price is inclusive of all duties, royalties, levies and taxes as of the date
28 days prior to the deadline for submission of bids except Goods and Services Tax
(GST). The owner shall not be liable for any duties, taxes (except GST) royalties and
levies.
2.6 The amount of applicable Goods & Services Tax (GST) will be paid separately to the
Contractor with each bill at the time of payment.
(C) 3.0 Adjustments to Price
The rules relating to adjustments to the Bid Price, if any, are set out in the Appendix 3,
Section 1 to the GCC.

Schedule 1: Price Schedule

FOR 10 YEARS
BARWANI
Bill Amount in
S.No. Name
No. INR
1 1 Survey and Investigation
2 2 Design Review and Design and Drawings
3 3 Establishment of Grievance Redress System
4 4 Pumping mains and Collection networks
5 5 Flushing Arrangements and Inspection vehicle
6 6 Sewage Treatment Plant
7 7 Raw sewage pumping station (Intermediate)
8 8 Construction of MPS
9 9 Pumping and Electro-Mechanical Equipment and Electrification
10 10 Implementation of Environmental and Social Safeguards
Sub Total
Bill No. 1 to 10 (COST OF WORKS)
(A)
11 Provisional Sum for design build period
11.1 5000000
Restoration of structures and utilities damaged during construction
11.2 Implementation of Environmental and Social Management Measures 5000000

other than those covered in Bill No. 10
11.3 Provision for Statutory Permissions 2500000
Total (B) (Bill No. 11.1 to 11.2 12500000
Total of A+B for Design Build period
12 12 Fixed O&M Fee for 10 years’ Operation and Maintenance
13 13 Variable O&M Fee (Energy) for 10 years’ Operation and Maintenance

Variable O&M Fee (Consumables) for 10 years’ Operation and

14 14
Maintenance
Sub Total
Bill No. 12 to 14
(C)
15 Provisional Sum (O&M period)
Extension of network and connections in areas beyond the scope defined

15.1 5000000
in this contract
Sub Total
5000000
(D)
Total of C+D for O&M period
GRAND TOTAL EXCLUDING PROVISIONAL SUM (A+C) 0
GRAND TOTAL INCLUDING PROVISIONAL SUM (A+B+C+D)
Bill 12: Contractor Fixed O&M Fee for 10 years’ Operation and Maintenance
– to include all elements of (a): manpower costs (b): establishment (incl. vehicle) costs and
administrative costs (c) repair and maintenance costs for operation and maintenance of all
components of the sewerage system. All Prices to be based on Base Date.
Year of Quoted Fixed Operation and Maintenance

operations
Network IPS MPS STP Total
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Total
Note:
a. The Bidder shall provide with his bid, calculations showing total land requirement for
Pumping Stations etc.
b. The bidder shall furnish break-up of the O&M prices as under for each year along
with the respective calculation sheets in support of the Part B (lump-sum) prices
quoted in the Table above.

[i] O&M charges for as applicable for each size of sewerage line separately on per
Km basis; [ii]O&M charges for the each set of pumping stations; and
[iii]O&M charges for other as sets, if any.
c. The break-up of charges quoted by the bidder (Operator) shall be basis for
determining the variation in the O&M payments for any period during which the
scope of O&M services of the Operator is varied by the Owner owing to variation in
the lengths of sewerage lines and number of pumping stations to be operated and
maintained during the contract term, (Please refer Article 2 of Schedule 6 to the
contract relating to Terms and procedure of Payment.)
d. The Bidder shall provide along with the price schedule a separate table giving details
of taxes, duties, levies and other applicable taxes considered by him and included in
the prices offered under Part-A&Part-B.Service Tax shall not be included in the
prices and the same shall be paid separately by the Owner, if applicable, against
proof of applicability and payment.

Bill No. 13: Contractor Variable O&M Fee (Energy) for 10 years’ Operation and Maintenance, Barwani
Energy cost is calculated @Rs 5 /kwH
Component Year of operations
S.No. of Sub Description
Project 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 TOTAL
Pumping
water
Quantity in 0.88 0.92 0.96 1.00 1.04 1.09 1.13 1.17 1.21 1.25
MLD (as
given in BDS)
Water
Quantity in 321200 336206 351211 366217 381222 396228 411233 426239 441244 456250
1 IPS 1 CUM/ annum
Energy of
sewage
pumped &

treated
(KW/cum)
Cost / annum
Pumping
water
Quantity in 3.12 3.27 3.43 3.58 3.73 3.89 4.04 4.19 4.35 4.50
MLD (as
given in BDS)
Water
Quantity in 1138800 1194767 1250733 1306700 1362667 1418633 1474600 1530567 1586533 1642500
2 IPS 2 CUM/ annum
Energy of
sewage
pumped &
treated
(KW/cum)
Cost / annum
Pumping
water
3 MPS ( 9 MLD)
Quantity in
5.80 6.09 6.38 6.67 6.96 7.24 7.53 7.82 8.11 8.40
MLD (as

given in BDS)
Water
Quantity in 2117000 2222444 2327889 2433333 2538778 2644222 2749667 2855111 2960556 3066000
CUM/ annum
Energy of
sewage
pumped &

treated
(KW/cum)
Cost / annum
Pumping
water
Quantity in 5.80 6.09 6.38 6.67 6.96 7.24 7.53 7.82 8.11 8.40
MLD (as
given in BDS)
Water
Quantity in 2117000 2222444 2327889 2433333 2538778 2644222 2749667 2855111 2960556 3066000
4 STP (9 MLD) CUM/ annum
Energy of
sewage
pumped &
treated
(KW/cum)
Cost / annum
TOTAL
Bill No. 14: Contractor Variable O&M Fee (consumables, chemicals, POL and tests) for 10 years’ Operation and Maintenance, Barwani
Component Year of operations
S.No. Description
of sub project 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 TOTAL

Sewerage
Cost of
Network,SPS
1 consumables
and STP
(Rs/annum)
complete
Water Quantity in
Cum/ annum
2117000 2222444 2327889 2433333 2538778 2644222 2749667 2855111 2960556 3066000
STP Cost per /cum (as
2
(Chemicals) quoted by bidder)

Cost of chemicals
(Rs per annum)
Quantity of dry
sludge in cum 31755 33337 34918 36500 38082 39663 41245 42827 44408 45990
Sludge
Disposal at a
3 Cost per cum
distance of
2.5 km Total Cost for
sludge disposal
Total (A)
Cost of No. Of
Unit Unit rate
conducting tests tests
4 Tests Effluent for heavy
40 each
metals (quarterly)
Influent sewage
120 each
monthly
Total (B)
Grand Total

Volume 2 – GCC
FOR 10 YEARS
VOLUME 2 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT (GCC)

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. ARTICLE 1 - CONTRACT AND INTERPRETATION 6

1.1 Definitions 6
1.2 Contract Documents 10
1.3 Interpretation 11
1.3.1 Language 11
1.3.2 Singular or Plural 11
1.3.3 Headings 11
1.3.4 Persons 11
1.3.5 Incoterms 11
1.3.6 Entire Agreement 12
1.3.7 Amendment 12
1.3.8 Number of Days 12
1.3.9 Independent Contractor 12
1.3.10 Joint Venture or Consortium 12
1.3.11 Non-waiver 13
1.3.12 Severability 13
1.3.13 Country of Origin 13
1.3.14 Survival of Obligations 14
1.4 Notice 14
1.5 Governing Law 14
1.6 Settlement of Disputes 14
1.6.1 Adjudicator 14
1.6.2 Arbitration 15
1.6.3 Obligations During Arbitration 16
1.7 Assignment 16
1.8 Contract Records, Accounting and Auditing 16
1.8.1 Contract Records 16
1.8.2 Accounting 17
1.8.3 Auditing the Contractor’s Own Accounts and the Contract Records 17
1.8.4 Contractor’s Audited Accounts 18
1.8.5 Bank Audit 18
1.9 Contractor’s Claims During the Design-Build Period 18
2. ARTICLE 2 – CONTRACT TERMS, TIMING AND COMPLETION 20

2.1 General 20
2.1.1 Effectiveness of Contract 20
2.1.2 Expiration of Contract 20
2.1.3 Commencement of Services 20
2.2 Design-Build Period and New Operations Period 20
2.3 Design-Build Period – Commencement, Delays and Suspension 21
2.3.1 Commencement of the Design-Build Services 21
2.3.2 Time for Completion 21
2.3.3 Design-Build Time Schedule 21
2.3.4 Extension of the Time for Completion 22
2.3.5 Rate of Progress 22
2.3.6 Delay of Completion – Liquidated Damages – Delay 23
2.3.7 Design-Build Period – Special Operations Requirements 23
2.4 New Operations Period 24
2.4.1 Commencement of the Operations – Services 24
2.4.2 Services After the End Date 24
2.4.3 Extension of the Contract 24


3. ARTICLE 3 – OBLIGATIONS OF THE CONTRACTOR 25

3.1 General – Services, Standards of Performance 25
3.2 Law Governing Services 25
3.3 Conflict of Interest 25
3.4 Plant and Equipment, Contractor’s Equipment (Design-Build) and Operations
Equipment (Operations) 26
3.5 Site Information and Investigation 26
3.6 Access to the Site and New Facility 27
4. ARTICLE 4 – OBLIGATIONS OF THE OWNER 29

4.1 Owner’s Assistance to the Contractor 29
4.2 Access to the Site and New Facility 29
4.3 Reviews and Approvals of Submissions 30
5. ARTICLE 5 – CONTRACT PRICE AND PAYMENT 31

5.1 Contract Price 31
5.2 Terms of Payment 32
5.3 Performance Incentive Compensation 32
5.4 Liquidated Damages – Operations 32
5.5 Securities 32
5.5.1 Performance Security 32
5.5.2 Advance Payment Guarantee 33
5.6 Taxes and Duties 33
6. ARTICLE 6 – COPYRIGHT – DESIGN-BUILD DOCUMENTS 34

6.1 Copyright – Design-Build Documents 34
6.2 Confidentiality 34
7. ARTICLE 7 – CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION AND SUPERVISION

DURING THE DESIGN-BUILD AND NEW OPERATIONS PERIODS 36
7.1 General 36
7.2 Contract Supervision 36
7.2.1 Supervision during the Design-Build Period and O&M Period 36
7.2.2 Project Manager’s Duties and Authority 36
7.2.3 Delegation by the Project Manager 37
7.2.4 Instructions of the Project Manager 37
7.2.5 Replacement of the Project Manager 38
7.2.6 Determinations by the Project Manager 38
8. ARTICLE 8 – REPRESENTATIVES, STAFF AND

SUBCONTRACTING 39
8.1 Representatives 39
8.1.1 Owner’s Representative 39
8.1.2 Contractor’s Representative 39
8.2 Contractor’s Superintendence 40
8.3 Contractor’s Personnel 41
8.4 Replacement of Contractor’s Personnel 42
8.5 Existing Staff 42
8.6 Subcontractors 42
9. ARTICLE 9 – LIABILITY AND RISK DISTRIBUTION 43


9.1 Defect Liability 43

9.2 Limitation of Liability 44
9.3 Transfer of Ownership and Existing Equipment and Materials 45
9.3.1 Transfer of Ownership 45
9.3.2 Existing Equipment and Materials 45
9.4 Care of the Site and New Facility 46
9.5 Indemnification 47
9.6 Insurance 48
9.7 Unforeseeable Physical Conditions 50
9.8 Force Majeure 51
9.9 War Risks 52
9.10 Change in Laws and Regulations 54
9.11 Patent Indemnity 54
9.11.1 Indemnity by Contractor 54
9.11.2 Notice of Claim 54
9.11.3 Indemnity by Owner 55
9.12 Functional Guarantees 55
10. ARTICLE 10 – CHANGE IN CONTRACT ELEMENTS 56

10.1 Change to the Design-Build Services 56
10.1.1 Introducing a Change 56
10.1.2 Changes Originating from Owner 56
10.1.3 Changes Originating from Contractor 58
10.1.4 Payment in Applicable Currencies 58
10.1.5 Design-Build Period 58
10.2 Change to the Operations and Maintenance Services 58
11. ARTICLE 11 – SUSPENSION AND TERMINATION 59

11.1 Suspension 59
11.1.1 Suspension by the Owner 59
11.1.2 Suspension by the Contractor 59
11.2 Termination 60
11.2.1 Termination for Owner’s Convenience 60
11.2.2 Payment upon Termination by the Owner for Convenience 61
11.2.3 Termination for Contractor’s Default 62
11.2.4 Payment upon Termination for Contractor’s Default 63
11.2.5 Termination by Contractor 64
11.2.6 Payment upon Termination by Contractor 65
11.2.7 General Provisions – Termination 66
APPENDIX 1: SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT 68
APPENDIX 2: TERMS AND PROCEDURES OF PAYMENT 80
APPENDIX 3: CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT 90


1. ARTICLE 1 - CONTRACT AND INTERPRETATION
1.1 Definitions
Unless the context otherwise requires, the following terms wherever used in this
Contract have the following meanings:
“Adjudicator” means the person that is named in the SCC;
“Applicable Law” means the laws and any other instruments having the force of law in
the Country specified in the SCC, as they may be issued and in force from time to time,
including any decree of the President or government of the Country;
“Appointing Authority” is the authority specified in the SCC;
“Authorities” means the Owner and the Country as specified in the SCC;
“Background Information Document” means the Background Information Document
provided to the Contractor by the Owner during the bidding process that preceded this
Contract;
“Bank” means the Kreditanstalt für Wiederaufbau (“KfW”);
“Bidding Documents” means the documents issued by the Owner in respect of the
bidding process for the selection of a Contractor to design, build and operate the New
Facility and to perform the Services;
“Capital Investment Program” means the capital investment program of the Owner, if
any, referred to in OMSA Section 10.2(2);
“Change” is defined in GC Section 10.1.1(1);
“Change Order” is defined in GC Section 10.1.2(4);
“Completion” means that the New Facility and all Design-Build Services have been
completed operationally and structurally and put in a tight and clean condition in
accordance with the Technical Standards Appendix, and the Contractor is entitled to
have a Completion Certificate issued in respect of the New Facility, or part thereof, in
accordance with DBSA Section 6.2;
“Completion Certificate” means a certificate issued by the Project Manager in
accordance with DBSA Section 6.2;
“Contingency Fund” means the fund established pursuant to OSA Section 10.1.2(1);
“Contracts” means the agreement between the Owner and the Contractor which consists
of the Contract Documents consisting of Design – Build Phase and Operations and
Maintenance Phase; for the funding requirements and convenience in operation, two
separate agreements on single source responsibility will be envisaged.
“Contract Documents” means the Form of Contract, General Conditions, and all
appendices to the General Conditions as set out in GC Section 1.2;
“Contract Price” is defined in Section 2.1 of the Form of Contract;


“Contract Records” is defined in GC Section 1.8.1(1);

“Contract Term” means the term of the Contract, including any renewals approved by
the Owner, commencing on the Effective Date and continuing to, and including, the End
Date;
“Contractor” means the Sewage Collection and Treatment contractor and Contractor
retained by the Owner to carry out the Services and is the Party named as the Contractor
in the Form of Contract;
“Contractor’s Equipment (Design-Build)” means all machinery, apparatus, vehicles and
other equipment required for the execution and completion of the Design-Build Services
and the remedying of any defects, but does not include material, machinery, apparatus
and other equipment forming part of the Plant and Equipment of the New Facility;
“Contractor’s Equipment (Operations)” means all things of any kind whatsoever,
including the equipment, materials, supplies, vehicles and consumables required to
operate, maintain and repair the Site and New Facility;
“Contractor’s Personnel” is defined in GC Section 8.3(1);
“Contractor’s Representative” is defined in GC Section 8.1.2(1);
“corrupt practice” means the offering, giving, receiving or soliciting of anything of
value to influence the action of a public official in the procurement process or in
contract execution;
“Costs” means all expenditures reasonably incurred, or to be incurred, by the
Contractor including overhead but excluding profit;
“Country” means the country specified in the SCC;
“Country of Origin” means the countries and territories eligible under the rules of the
Kreditanstalt für Wiederaufbau as defined under KfW’s Procurement Guidelines;
“Consumers” mean all persons to whom the Contractor provides Sewage Collection and
Treatment services, including those customers in existence as of the New Operations
Starting Date and persons who become customers after the New Operations Starting
Date;
“Data Room” means the data room which may be established by the Owner in the
bidding process as set out in the Bidding Documents;
“DBSA Section” means Design-Build Services Appendix Section;
“Defect Liability Period” means the period of validity of the warranties given by the
Contractor during which the Contractor is responsible for defects with respect to the
New Facility, or the relevant part thereof, as set out in GC Section 9.1(2);
“Design-Build Documents” means the plans, specifications, designs, models, electronic
models and other documents and materials relating to the design and construction of the
Site and New Facility as may be set out or contemplated in the Design-Build Services
Appendix or agreed to by the Parties from time to time during the Contract Term;
“Design-Build Period” is defined in GC Section 2.2(a);


“Design-Build Services” means the design-build services to be performed by the

Contractor as contemplated by the General Conditions and the Design-Build Services
Appendix;
“Design-Build Starting Date” is defined in GC Section 2.1.3(1);
“Effective Date” means the date on which this Contract comes into force and effect
pursuant to GC Section 2.1.1;
“End Date” is defined in GC Section 2.1.2;
“Engineer” means the engineer retained by the Owner to supervise the Contractor, in
accordance with the Contract Documents, in carrying out the Design-Build Services or
O&M services or any other services as notified from time to time ;
“Existing Equipment and Materials” is defined in GC Section 9.3.2(1);
“Existing Facility” means the operational Sewage Collection and Treatment facility on
the Site as it exists, if any, on the Design-Build Starting Date;
“Existing Operations Services” is defined in DBSA Section 4.1;
“Extension Date” is defined in GC Section 2.4.3;
“Force Majeure” is defined in GC Section 9.8(1);
“Fraudulent practice” means a misrepresentation of facts in order to influence a
procurement process or the execution of a contract to the detriment of the Owner, and
includes collusive practice among Contractors, prior to or after bid submission designed
to establish bid prices at artificial non-copetitive levels and to deprive the Owner of the
benefits of free and open competition.
“GC Section” means General Conditions Section;
“including” means including without limitation and “includes” means includes without
limitation, unless expressly stated otherwise;
“Liquidated Damages – Delay” is defined in GC Section 2.3.6(2);
“Manager” is defined in GC Section 8.2(3);
“Monthly Operations Payment” is defined in Section 1.4 of the Terms and Procedures of
Payment Appendix;
“New Facility” means the Sewage Collection and Treatment scheme designed and built
by the Contractor pursuant to this Contract;
“New Operations Period” is defined in GC Section 2.2(b);
“New Operations Starting Date” is defined in GC Section 2.1.3(2);
“Nominated Subcontractor” is any person or entity to which the Contractor, at the time
of bidding, has nominated to subcontract or sub consult any part of the Services in
accordance with the provisions of GC Section 8.6, including any person or entity
engaged for the supply of any Plant and Equipment, Contractor’s Equipment (Design-
Build) or Contractor’s Equipment (Operations) or for the provision of any Services;


“Operational Acceptance” means the acceptance by the Owner of the New Facility, or
part thereof, in accordance with DBSA Section 7.3;
“Operations Services” means the Operations Services to be performed by the Contractor
as contemplated by the General Conditions and the Operations Services Appendix;
“OSA Section” means Operations Services Appendix Section;
“Owner” means the Party named as Owner in the Form of Contract;
“Owner’s Representative” is defined in GC Section 8.1.1(1);
“Parent” means the parent company of the Contractor, if any;
“Party” means the Owner or the Contractor, as the case may be, and “Parties” means
both of them;
[Note: If a Parent signs the Contract, the Parent will be included in the definition of
“Parties”.]
“Performance Incentive Compensation” is defined in GC Section 5.3;
“Performance Security” is defined in GC Section 5.5.1(1);
“Plant and Equipment” means the permanent plant, equipment, machinery, apparatus,
articles and things of all kinds to be provided and intended to permanently form or
forming part of the New Facility;
“Provisional Sum” means a sum (if any) which is specified in the Contract as a
provisional sum, for the execution of any part of the Works or for the supply of Plant,
Materials or services under Sub-Clause 5.1(4).
“Services” means the Design-Build Services and the Operations Services to be
performed by the Contractor as set out in the General Conditions and the Appendices to
the General Conditions;
“Shareholder” means any of the shareholders of the joint venture company if the
Contractor is a joint venture company;
“Site” means the physical area as set out in the Site Appendix identified for the location
of the New Facility;
“Site Information” is defined in GC Section 3.5(1);
“Subcontract” means any contract, whether written or verbal, entered into by the
Contractor and a Subcontractor for the performance of any part of the Services;
“Subcontractor” means any person or entity to which the Contractor subcontracts or sub
consults any part of the Services in accordance with the provisions of GC Section 8.6,
including any person or entity engaged for the supply of any Plant and Equipment,
Contractor’s Equipment (Design-Build) or Contractor’s Equipment (Operations) or for
the provision of any Services;
“Submission Deadline” means the date for the submission of bids, as stated or awarded
by the Bidding Documents;


“Subsequent Contractor” means the Contractor that is to assume the provision of the
Services upon termination or completion of the Contract and may include one of the
Authorities;
“Taxes” is defined in GC Section 5.6;
“Technical Standards” is defined in the Technical Standards Appendix;
“Tests on Completion” means those tests set out in Volume 3- Technical Specifications
Section 3.7.2 (Pre commissioning Tests) and 3.7.2 ( Guarantee tests);
“Third Party” means any person or entity other than the Parties;
“Time for Completion” is defined in GC Section 2.3.2;
“Time Schedule” is defined in GC Section 2.3.3(1);
“Transition Assistance” is defined in GC Section 2.4.2;
“TSA Section” means Technical Standards Appendix Section;
“Unforeseeable” means not reasonably foreseeable on the Submission Deadline by an
experienced Contractor that conducted or should have conducted the inspections and
examinations or who knew or should have known the information described in GC
Section 3.5; and
“War Risks” is defined in GC Section 9.9(1).
1.2 Contract Documents
Subject to the Form of Contract provisions, all documents forming part of the Contract,
and all parts thereof, are intended to be correlative, complementary and mutually
explanatory. The Contract shall be read as a whole. The following appendices which are
incorporated by reference into the Contract shall be referred to as follows:
Volume 1: Instruction to Bidders
Volume 2: General Conditions of Contract
Volume 3: Technical Specifications
Annex 2 Layout Houseconnections
Annex 3 Layout STP
Annex 4 P&ID STP
Annex 6 Draft EMP
Annex 8 Detailed Project Report
Volume 4: The Operation and Maintenance Services Agreement


1.3 Interpretation
1.3.1 Language
(1) All Contract Documents, all correspondence and communications to be given,

and all other documentation to be prepared and supplied under the Contract shall be
written in the language specified in the SCC and the Contract shall be construed and
interpreted in accordance with that language.
(2) If any of the Contract Documents, correspondence or communications are
prepared in any language other than the governing language under GC Section 1.3.1(1),
the translation of such documents, correspondence or communications into the
governing language shall prevail in matters of interpretation.
1.3.2 Singular or Plural
The singular shall include the plural and the plural shall include the singular except
where the context otherwise requires.
1.3.3 Headings
The headings in the Contract Documents are included for ease of reference and shall
neither constitute a part of the Contract nor affect its interpretation.
1.3.4 Persons
Words importing persons or entities shall include firms, Councils and government
entities.
1.3.5 Incoterms
Unless inconsistent with any provision of the Contract, the meaning of any trade term
and the rights and obligations of the Parties thereunder shall be prescribed by the latest
version of Incoterms.
Incoterms means international rules for interpreting trade terms published by the
International Chamber of Commerce (latest edition), 38 Cours Albert 1er, and 75008
Paris, France.


1.3.6 Entire Agreement
This Contract constitutes the entire agreement between the Owner and the Contractor
with respect to the subject matter of the Contract and supersedes all communications,
negotiations and agreements, whether written or oral, made by the Parties with respect
thereto made prior to the date of the Contract.
1.3.7 Amendment
No amendment or other variation of the Contract shall be effective unless it is in

writing, is dated, expressly refers to the Contract and is signed by a duly authorised
representative of each Party to the Contract.
1.3.8 Number of Days
Except as expressly stated to the contrary elsewhere herein, in computing the number of
days for the purposes of the Contract all days shall be counted, including Saturdays,
Sundays and legal holidays in the Country, provided, however, that if the final day of
any period shall fall on a Saturday, Sunday, or legal holiday in the Country, then the
final day shall be deemed to be the next day which is not a Saturday, Sunday or legal
holiday in the Country.
1.3.9 Independent Contractor
(1) The Contractor shall be an independent contractor in its performance of the

Contract. The Contract does not create any agency, partnership, joint venture or other
joint relationship between the Owner and the Contractor or its Shareholders.
(2) Subject to the provisions of the Contract, the Contractor shall be solely
responsible for the manner in which the Contract is performed. All employees, agents,
representatives or Subcontractors engaged by the Contractor in connection with the
performance of the Contract shall be under the complete control of the Contractor and
shall not be deemed to be employees of the Owner, and nothing contained in the
Contract, or in any Subcontract awarded by the Contractor, shall be construed to create
any contractual relationship or legal obligation between the Contractor’s employees,
agents, representatives or Subcontractors and the Owner.
1.3.10 Joint Venture or Consortium
(1) If the Contractor consists of a joint venture company of more than one person, the
Shareholders hereby authorize the representative named in the SCC to act on their
behalf in exercising all the Shareholders’ and Contractor’s rights and obligations toward
the Owner under this Contract, including the receiving of approvals, consents, orders,


certificates, instructions and payments from the Owner, amendment of the Contract and
in all other matters under the Contract, including the settlement of disputes.
(2) If the Contractor is a joint venture company of two or more persons, each
Shareholder of the joint venture company and its parent companies, shall be jointly and
severally bound to the Owner for the fulfillment of the provisions of the Contract by the
Contractor. Claims against the parent companies or the Shareholders as the case may be
shall be subject to any legal defenses available to the Contractor, and to any limits on
the liability of the Contractor including those set out in GC Section 9.2.
(3) The composition, shareholding, control or constitution of the Contractor shall be
in accordance with the Contractor’s Bid and shall not be altered without the prior
consent of the Owner.
(4) The Shareholders shall maintain the type and amount of equity set out in the SCC.
1.3.11 Non-waiver
(1) Subject to GC Section 1.3.11(2), no relaxation, waiver, forbearance, delay or

indulgence by either Party in enforcing any of the terms and conditions of the Contract
or the granting of time by either Party to the other shall prejudice, affect or restrict the
rights of that Party under the Contract, nor shall any waiver by either Party of any
breach of Contract operate as waiver of any subsequent or continuing breach of
Contract.
(2) To be a valid waiver, any waiver of a Party’s rights, powers or remedies under the
Contract shall,
(a) be in writing;
(b) be dated and signed by the Owner’s or Contractor’s Representative,
whichever is granting such waiver; and
(c) specify the right, power or remedy being waived and the extent to which
it is being waived.
1.3.12 Severability
If any provision or condition of the Contract is prohibited or rendered invalid or

unenforceable, such prohibition, invalidity or unenforceability shall not affect the
validity or enforceability of any other provisions and conditions of the Contract.
1.3.13 Country of Origin
“Origin” means the place where the materials, equipment and other supplies for the New
Facility are mined, grown, produced or manufactured, and from which the services are
provided.


1.3.14 Survival of Obligations
Upon the termination or expiration of the Contract pursuant to the Contract, all rights
and obligations of the Parties hereunder shall cease, except those noted in the SCC.
1.4 Notice
(1) All notices to be given under the Contract shall be in writing and shall be sent by
personal delivery, courier or facsimile to the address for notice of the relevant Party as
set out in the SCC and the following provisions apply:
(a) Any notice sent by facsimile shall be confirmed by the sender no later
than two days after dispatch by a notice sent by courier;
(b) Any notice sent by courier shall be deemed to have been delivered 10
days after dispatch. In proving the fact of dispatch, it shall be sufficient to show
that the envelope containing such notice was properly addressed, with proper
payment for the courier, and conveyed to the courier service for transmission; and
(c) Any notice delivered personally or sent by facsimile shall be deemed to
have been delivered on the date of dispatch.
(2) A Party may change its address for notice pursuant to this Contract by giving the
other Party notice of change in accordance with this GC Section 1.4.
(3) The Contractor’s address for the purpose of giving notice pursuant to this GC
Section 1.4 shall be in the Country named in the SCC.
(4) Notices shall be deemed to include any approvals, consents, instructions, orders,
certificates and similar communications to be given under the Contract.
1.5 Governing Law
This Contract, its meaning and interpretation, and the relation between the Parties shall
be governed by the Applicable Law in India.
1.6 Settlement of Disputes
1.6.1 Adjudicator
(1) If any dispute of any kind whatsoever arises between the Owner and the
Contractor in connection with or arising out of the Contract including,
(a) any question regarding the existence, validity or termination of the
Contract; and


(b) any matter related to the performance of the Services,

the Parties shall seek to resolve any such dispute or difference by mutual consultation. If
the Parties fail to resolve such a dispute or difference by mutual consultation, the dispute
shall be referred in writing, by either the Contractor or the Owner, to the Adjudicator
with a copy to the other Party or Parties.
(2) GC Section 1.6.1(1) shall apply,
(a) during the execution of the Services and after the completion of the
Services; and
(b) Before and after the termination, abandonment or breach of the Contract.
(3) The Adjudicator shall give its decision in writing to both Parties no later than 30
days after the referral of a dispute. If the Adjudicator has rendered its decision within
the 30 day time limit, and no notice of intention to commence arbitration has been given
by either the Owner or the Contractor prior to the expiration of 60 days after the
reference of the dispute to the Adjudicator, the Adjudicator’s decision shall become
final and binding upon the Owner and the Contractor. Any decision that has become
final and binding shall be implemented by the Parties forthwith.
(4) The Adjudicator shall be paid a fee at the rate specified in the SCC plus
reasonable expenditures incurred in the execution of its duties as Adjudicator, and these
costs shall be divided equally between the Owner and the Contractor.
(5) If the Adjudicator resigns or dies, or the Owner and the Contractor agree that the
Adjudicator is not fulfilling its functions in accordance with the provisions of the
Contract, a new Adjudicator shall be jointly appointed by the Owner and the Contractor.
If the Owner and the Contractor cannot agree on a new Adjudicator within 30 days after
the resignation, death or removal of the existing Adjudicator, the new Adjudicator shall
be appointed at the request of either Party by the Appointing Authority specified in the
SCC.
1.6.2 Arbitration
(1) If either the Owner or the Contractor is dissatisfied with the Adjudicator’s
decision, or if the Adjudicator fails to give a decision within 30 days after a dispute
being referred to it, then either the Owner or the Contractor may, within 60 days after
such reference, give notice to the other Party, with a copy for information to the
Adjudicator, of its intention to commence arbitration, as hereinafter provided, as to the
matter in dispute, and no arbitration in respect of this matter may be commenced unless
such notice is given.
(2) Any dispute in respect of which a notice of intention to commence arbitration has
been given, in accordance with GC Section 1.6.2(1), shall be finally settled by
arbitration.
(3) Arbitration proceedings shall be conducted in accordance with the rules of
procedure designated in the SCC.


1.6.3 Obligations During Arbitration
Notwithstanding any reference to the Adjudicator or arbitration herein,

(a) the Parties shall continue to perform their respective obligations under the
Contract unless they otherwise agree; and
(b) The Owner shall pay the Contractor any monies due to the Contractor.
1.7 Assignment
(1) The Contractor shall not assign to any Third Party the Contract, or any part
thereof, or any right, benefit, obligation or interest therein or thereunder without the
prior consent of the Owner, which consent may not be unreasonably withheld.
(2) The Contractor may assign, absolutely or by way of charge, any monies due and
payable to it or that may become due and payable to it under the Contract.
(3) To be a valid assignment which has been approved by the Owner pursuant to GC
Section 1.7(1), the assignment must,
(a) be in writing;
(b) be dated and signed by the Owner’s Representative; and
(c) state the specific details of the assignment.
1.8 Contract Records, Accounting and Auditing
1.8.1 Contract Records
(1) Except as provided in GC Section 6.1, all data, information, documentation,

account, plans, programs, reports, surveys and guidelines of any kind whatsoever (the
“Contract Records”) prepared by the Contractor in performing the Services shall
become and remain the property of the Owner and the Contractor shall deliver all
Contract Records and a detailed inventory of those Contract Records to the Owner no
later than the date of termination or expiration of the Contract, except in respect of such
Contract Records that are required to be delivered at an earlier date.
(2) The Contract Records shall include,
(a) information of any kind whatsoever related to the finances, revenues or
expenditures of the Owner’s operations;
(b) all files, documents, plans, drawings, specifications, notes, minutes of
meetings and minutes of conversations;
(c) all the plans, programs, reports, surveys and guidelines prepared by the
Contractor in carrying out the Operations Services;


(d) the accounts of the Sewage Collection and Treatment operations at the
New Facility;
(e) all manuals, reports, condition surveys, safety records, audit records,
inventories, laboratory test results, procurement records, customer information,
financial information, financial statements, invoices, accounting records,
subcontracts and personnel records; and
(f) The Design-Build Documents, whether stored in hard copy or
electronically.
(3) The Contractor shall provide the Owner with unrestricted access to the Contract
Records during the term of the Contract, including the right to make and retain
copies.
(4) The Contractor may retain a copy of the Contract Records but shall not use them
for purposes unrelated to this Contract without the prior approval of the Owner.
This GC Section 1.8.1(4) does not in any way relieve the Contractor of its
obligation of confidentiality pursuant to GC Section 6.2.
(5) Except as provided in GC Section 6.1, the Contractor acknowledges that the
Owner, as owner of the Contract Records, may deal with the Contract Records in
any way it determines, including making the Contract Records publicly available
and making those available to prospective Contractors who may be involved in
the process to select a Subsequent Contractor.
1.8.2 Accounting
The Contractor shall keep accurate and systematic accounts in respect of the Services
and the Contract in accordance with internationally accepted accounting principles.
1.8.3 Auditing the Contractor’s Own Accounts and the Contract Records
(1) The Owner may, in its sole discretion, audit,

(a) the Contractor’s own accounts, financial information, financial statements
and technical information at any reasonable time and with 24 hour notice to the
Contractor; and
(b) the Contract Records and Design-Build Documents at any reasonable
time and without notice to the Contractor,
in respect of any matters related to the Contract.
(2) The Owner may complete the audit or audits itself or may retain an independent
auditor, at the Owner’s expense, to complete the audit or audits.


1.8.4 Contractor’s Audited Accounts
The Contractor shall submit to the Owner, no later than 90 days after the end of the
Contractor’s fiscal year, the annual audited accounts of its own finances for each of the
Contractor’s fiscal years that occur during the Contract Term.
1.8.5 Bank Audit
The Bank may, in its sole discretion, inspect or audit the Contractor’s accounts,
financial information, financial statements and technical information in respect of any
matters related to the Contract at any reasonable time and without notice to the
Contractor and may have the audit carried out by auditors appointed by the Bank.
1.9 Contractor’s Claims During the Design-Build Period
(1) If the Contractor considers itself to be entitled to any extension of the Time for
Completion or any additional payment, under any section related to the Design-Build
Services of these General Conditions, the Contractor shall give notice to the Project
Manager, describing the event or circumstance giving rise to the claim. The notice shall
be given as soon as practicable, but no later than 30 days, after the Contractor becomes
aware, or should have become aware, of the event or circumstance.
(2) If the Contractor fails to give notice of a claim within such period of 30 days, the
Time for Completion shall not be extended, the Contractor shall not be entitled to
additional payment, and the Owner shall be discharged from all liability in connection
with the claim. Otherwise, the following provisions of this GC Section 1.9 shall apply.
(3) The Contractor shall also submit any other notices related to the Design-Build
Services which are required by the Contract, and supporting particulars for the claim,
that are relevant to such event or circumstance.
(4) The Contractor shall keep such contemporary records as may be necessary to
substantiate any claim related to the Design-Build Services, either on the Site or at
another location acceptable to the Project Manager. Without admitting the Owner’s
liability, the Project Manager may, after receiving any notice under this GC Section 1.9,
monitor the record-keeping or instruct the Contractor to keep further contemporary
records. The Contractor shall permit the Project Manager to inspect all these records,
and shall, if instructed, submit copies to the Project Manager.
(5) No later than 42 days after the Contractor became aware, or should have become
aware, of the event or circumstance giving rise to the claim, or within such other period
as may be proposed by the Contractor and approved by the Project Manager, the
Contractor shall send to the Project Manager a fully detailed claim which includes full
supporting particulars of the basis of the claim and of the extension of time or additional
payment claimed. If the event or circumstance giving rise to the claim has a continuing
effect,


(a) this fully detailed claim shall be considered as interim;

(b) the Contractor shall send further interim claims at monthly intervals,
giving the accumulated delay or amount claimed, and such further particulars as
the Project Manager may reasonable require; and
(c) The Contractor shall send a final claim no later than 30 days after the end
of the effects resulting from the event or circumstance, or within such other
period as may be proposed by the Contractor and approved by the Project
Manager.
(6) No later than 42 days after receiving a claim or any further particulars supporting
a previous claim, or within such other period as may be proposed by the Project
Manager and approved by the Contractor, the Project Manager shall respond with
approval, or with disapproval and detailed comments. The Project Manager may also
request any necessary further particulars, but shall nevertheless give his response on the
principles of the claim within such time.
(7) Each invoice sent by the Contractor shall include such amounts for any claim as
have been reasonably substantiated as due under the relevant provision of the Contract.
Unless and until the particulars supplied are sufficient to substantiate the whole of the
claim, the Contractor shall only be entitled to payment for such part of the claim as it
has been able to substantiate.
(8) The Contractor shall proceed in accordance with GC Section 7.2.6 to request,
(a) an extension, if any, of the Time for Completion before or after its expiry
in accordance with GC Section 2.3.4; or
(b) an additional payment, if any, to which the Contractor believes it is
entitled under the Contract.
(9) The requirements of this GC Section 1.9 are in addition to those of any other
provision which may apply to a claim. If the Contractor fails to comply with this or
another provision in relation to any claim, any extension of or additional payment shall
take account of the extent, if any, to which the failure has prevented or prejudiced
proper investigation of the claim, unless the claim is excluded under GC Section 1.9(2).
(10) This GC Section 1.9 shall apply only in respect of the Design-Build Services
excluding the Existing Operations Services.


2. ARTICLE 2 – CONTRACT TERMS, TIMING AND COMPLETION
2.1 General
2.1.1 Effectiveness of Contract
The Form of Contract shall be signed by the Contractor, the Parent and the
Shareholders, if the Contractor is a joint venture company, prior to its signing by the
Owner. The Contract shall come into force and effect on the date the Form of Contract
is signed by the Owner (the “Effective Date”).
2.1.2 Expiration of Contract
This Contract shall terminate on either,

(a) the specified number of months after the New Operations Starting Date named in
the SCC;
(b) the Extension Date pursuant to GC Section 2.4.3; or
(c) the date of Contract termination pursuant to GC Section 11.2, (the “End Date”),
whichever is applicable.
2.1.3 Commencement of Services
(1) Unless otherwise stated in the SCC, the Design-Build Starting Date shall be no
later than 15 days after the Effective Date and the Owner shall give the Contractor
at least seven days prior notice of the Design-Build Starting Date.
(2) The “New Operations Starting Date” shall be the date of the Operational
Acceptance Certificate.
2.2 Design-Build Period and New Operations Period
The Contract Term shall be divided into two periods as follows:

(a) the period commencing on the Effective Date and ending on the day immediately
prior to the New Operations Starting Date (the “Design-Build Period”); and
(b) The period commencing on the New Operations Starting Date and ending on the
End Date (the “New Operations Period”).


2.3 Design-Build Period – Commencement, Delays and Suspension
2.3.1 Commencement of the Design-Build Services
The Contractor shall commence the Design-Build Services no later than the Design-
Build Starting Date, and shall then proceed with the Design-Build Services with due
expedition and without delay.
2.3.2 Time for Completion
The Contractor shall complete the scope of services interalia covering Design Build
Services and O&M in accordance with the time for completion set out in the SCC
(“Time for Completion”).
2.3.3 Design-Build Time Schedule
(1) The Contractor shall submit a detailed time programme (the “Time Schedule”) to
the Project Manager no later than 30 days after the Design-Build Starting Date. The
Contractor shall also submit a revised Time Schedule whenever the previous Time
Schedule is inconsistent with actual progress or with the Contractor’s obligations. Each
Time Schedule shall include a description of,
(a) the order in which the Contractor intends to carry out the Design-Build
Services, including the anticipated timing of each stage of design, Design-
Build Documents, procurement, manufacture, inspection, delivery to the
Site, construction, erection, testing and commissioning;
(b) the periods for review and any other submissions, approvals and consents
specified in the Contract;
(c) the sequence and timing of inspections and tests specified in the Contract;
(d) the scheduled Time for Completion, the planned Time for Completion
and the planned New Operations Starting Date;
(e) all major events and activities in the production of Design-Build
Documents; and
(f) all major phases and milestones of the Design-Build Services.
(2) The Project Manager shall review each Time Schedule and provide comments to
the Contractor as to whether the Time Schedule complies with the Contract. If the
Project Manager fails to provide such comments prior to the expiration of 15 days after
receiving a Time Schedule, the Contractor shall proceed in accordance with the Time
Schedule, subject to its other obligations under the Contract. The Contractor shall be
entitled to rely upon the Time Schedule when planning its activities.
(3) The Contractor shall promptly give notice to the Project Manager of specific
probable future events or circumstances which may adversely affect the Design-Build


Services or delay the execution of the Design-Build Services. The Project Manager may
require the Contractor to submit an estimate of the anticipated effect of the future event
or circumstances, or a proposal under GC Section 10.1.3.
(4) If, at any time, the Project Manager gives notice to the Contractor that a Time
Schedule fails, to the extent stated, to comply with the Contract or to be consistent with
actual progress and the Contractor’s stated intentions, the Contractor shall submit a
revised Time Schedule to the Project Manager in accordance with this GC Section 2.3.3.
2.3.4 Extension of the Time for Completion
(1) The Time for Completion shall be extended if the Contractor is delayed or
impeded in the performance of Services by reason of any of the following:
(a) Change, unless the Parties have already agreed to an adjustment to the
Time for Completion as part of the applicable Change;
(b) an occurrence of Force Majeure as provided in GC Section 9.8,
Unforeseeable physical conditions as provided for in GC Section 9.7, or
loss or damage as a result of the occurrences set out in GC Section 9.4(2);
(c) any suspension order given by the Owner pursuant to GC Section 11.1.1;
(d) any change in the Applicable Law in accordance with GC Section;
(e) any default or breach of the Contract by the Owner or any activity, act or
omission of any other contractors employed by the Owner; or
(f) any other matter specifically mentioned in the Contract;
(g) by such period as shall be fair and reasonable in all the circumstances and
as shall fairly reflect the actual delay or impediment sustained by the
Contractor.
(2) The Contractor shall submit, to the Project Manager, any notice of a claim for an
extension of the Time for Completion in accordance with GC Section 10.1.3.
(3) The Contractor shall, at all times, use reasonable efforts to minimize any delay in
the performance of its obligations under the Contract.
2.3.5 Rate of Progress
(1) If, at any time, the Contractor’s progress in respect of the Design-Build Services,
(a) is too slow to complete the Design-Build Services in accordance with the
Time for Completion; or
(b) has fallen, or will fall, behind the current Time Schedule
other than as a result of a cause listed in GC Section 2.3.4, then the Project Manager
may instruct the Contractor to submit a revised Time Schedule and supporting report


describing the revised methods which the Contractor proposes to adopt in order to
expedite progress and complete the Design-Build Services.
(2) Unless the Project Manager notifies otherwise, the Contractor shall adopt the
revised methods referred to in GC Section 2.3.5(2), which may require increases in,
(a) the working hours or in the numbers of Contractor’s Personnel, or both;
or
(b) Plant and Equipment,
at the risk and cost of the Contractor. If these revised methods cause the Owner to incur
additional costs, the Contractor shall, subject to GC Section 1.9, pay these costs to the
Owner, in addition to delay damages, if any, under GC Section 2.3.6.
2.3.6 Delay of Completion – Liquidated Damages – Delay
(1) The Contractor guarantees that it shall attain Completion of the New Facility (Part
A) and provide O&M as specified in Part B and Part C in accordance with the Time for
Completion specified in the SCC and GC Section 2.3.2 or in accordance with an
extension of the Time for Completion granted to the Contractor in accordance with GC
Section 2.3.4.
(2) If the Contractor fails to attain Completion of the scope of services within the
Time for Completion, or any extension thereof in accordance with GC Section 2.3.4, the
Contractor shall pay to the Owner liquidated damages in the amount specified in the
SCC (“Liquidated Damages – Delay”). The aggregate amount of Liquidated Damages –
Delay shall in no event exceed the amount specified as “Maximum” in the SCC. The
Owner may terminate the Contract pursuant to GC Section 11.2.3 if the Contractor
reaches the “Maximum” level for Liquidated Damages – Delay.
(3) The payment or payments by the Contractor of Liquidated Damages – Delay shall
completely satisfy the Contractor’s obligation to attain Completion of the New Facility
within the Time for Completion or any extension thereof pursuant to GC Section 2.3.4.
(4) The payment or payments by the Contractor of Liquidated Damages – Delay shall
not in any way relieve the Contractor of its obligations to complete the New Facility or
any other obligations and liabilities of the Contractor under the Contract.
(5) If the Contractor attains Completion of the New Facility before the Time for
Completion or any extension thereof pursuant to GC Section 2.3.4, and if the Owner
intends to pay a bonus to the Contractor for early completion, the amount of the bonus is
as set out in the SCC. The aggregate amount of such bonus shall in no event succeed the
amount specified as “Maximum” in the SCC.
2.3.7 Design-Build Period – Special Operations Requirements
Unless otherwise stated in the SCC, the Contractor shall carry out the Existing
Operations Services for the Existing Facility as set out in Section 4.1 of the Design-


Build Services Appendix during the Design-Build Period commencing on the Design-
Build Starting Date. GC Sections 2.3.1 to 2.3.6 do not apply to the Existing Operations
Services.
2.4 New Operations Period
2.4.1 Commencement of the Operations – Services
The Contractor shall commence the Operations Services no later than the New
Operations Starting Date and shall then proceed with the Operations Services with due
exception and without delay.
2.4.2 Services After the End Date
The Contractor, upon written request by the Owner no later than 60 days prior to the
End Date of the Operations Contract, shall provide assistance to the Owner, at no cost to
the Owner, during a transitional period of up to 60 days after the End Date (the
“Transition Assistance”). The purpose of the Transition Assistance is to ensure a smooth
transition between the Contractor and a Subsequent Contractor of the New Facility. The
Transition Assistance shall be related to only transition services and shall not be the full
range of Services as set out in the Operations Services Appendix.
2.4.3 Extension of the Contract
If both Parties agree, this Contract may be extended for a period of up to 5 years after
the End Date of Operations Contract. The Owner shall notify the Contractor no later
than 6 months prior to the End Date if it wishes to enter into negotiations in order to
extend the duration of the Contract. The Contractor must respond within one month if it
is willing for further extensions and terms and conditions for such extension. The
contractor may also refuse to further extensions at its discretion. The date on which the
Contract is to expire as a result of an extension shall be the Extension Date.


3. ARTICLE 3 – OBLIGATIONS OF THE CONTRACTOR
3.1 General – Services, Standards of Performance
The Contractor shall,

(a) perform the Existing Operations Services as set out in the Design-Build Services
Appendix;
(b) perform the Design-Build Services set out in the Design-Build Services
Appendix;
(c) perform the Operations Services set out in the Operations Services Appendix; and
(d) perform the Services in accordance with the Technical Standards set out in the
Technical Standards Appendix, all with due care and diligence in accordance with the
Contract.
3.2 Law Governing Services
The Contractor shall comply with the Applicable Law and shall ensure that the
Contractor’s Personnel and Subcontractors comply with the Applicable Law. The
Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner from and against any and all
liabilities, damages, claims, fines, penalties and expenses of whatever nature arising or
resulting from violation of the Applicable Law by the Contractor, the Contractor’s
Personnel the Subcontractors and the Subcontractors’ personnel.
3.3 Conflict of Interest
(1) The compensation of the Contractor pursuant to GC Article 5 shall constitute the
Contractor’s sole compensation in connection with this Contract and, except as provided
in GC Article 5, the Contractor shall not accept for its own benefit any trade
commission, discount or similar payment in connection with activities pursuant to this
Contract or in the discharge of its obligations hereunder, and the Contractor shall use its
best efforts to ensure that the Contractor’s Personnel, Subcontractors, and the
Subcontractors’ employees and agents, similarly shall not receive any such additional
remuneration.
(2) The Contractor, Subcontractors and any entity affiliated with the Contractor or the
Subcontractors, shall be disqualified, during the Contract Term from providing goods,
works or services, other than the Services, with respect to,
(a) the goods, works and services purchased from the Contingency Fund; and
(b) the Capital Investment Program.
(3) The Contractor, Contractor’s Personnel, Subcontractors and the employees and
affiliates of the Subcontractors shall not engage, either directly or indirectly, in any


business or professional activities which would conflict with the activities assigned to
them under this Contract.
(4) The Contractor and its Shareholders shall not participate in any discussions or
work and shall not provide any services or advice to the Owner related to,
(a) except with respect to their responsibilities as set out in the Operations
Services Appendix, institutional restructuring or reorganization of the
Owner or a utility or department of the Owner;
(b) the development or review of bidding documents to retain any Subsequent
Contractor; or
(c) the preparations for the procurement process to retain any Subsequent
Contractor.
(5) Failure of the Contractor or the Shareholders to comply with this GC Section
in addition to constituting a breach of this Contract, may result in the disqualification of
the Contractor and the Shareholders from bidding in the procurement process to retain
any Subsequent Contractor.
3.4 Plant and Equipment, Contractor’s Equipment (Design-Build) and Operations

Equipment (Operations)
(1) Any Plant and Equipment, Contractor’s Equipment (Design-Build) and

Contractor’s Equipment (Operations) that will be incorporated in or be required for the
Site and New Facility or the Operation Services shall have their origin as specified
under GC Section 1.1 (“Country of Origin”).
(2) The Contractor shall prepare a list of all Contractor’s Equipment (Design-Build)
and Contractor’s Equipment (Operations) (the “Contractor’s Equipment Lists”). The
Contractor shall update the Contractor’s Equipment Lists on an annual basis and shall
provide the updated Contractor’s Equipment Lists to the Owner no later than 30 days
after the end of each of the Contractor’s fiscal years during the Contract Term.
3.5 Site Information and Investigation
(1) The Contractor acknowledges that the Owner made available to the Contractor,
during the bidding process, either directly or by placing the data in the Data Room and
Background Information Document, all available data on hydrological and sub-surface
conditions of the Site, and studies on environmental impact that had been obtained by or
on behalf of the Owner from investigations in anticipation of the Design-Build and
Operations Services (the “Site Information”). The Contractor shall be responsible for
interpreting all data about the Site that is provided to it by the Owner.
(2) The Contractor shall be deemed to have inspected and examined the Site, its
surroundings, the Site Information and other available information, and to have satisfied
itself before entering into the Contract, as to,


(a) the form and nature of the Site, including the sub-surface conditions;
(b) the applicable hydrological, hydro geological and climatic conditions;
(c) the extent and nature of the work, Plant and Equipment, Contractor’s
Equipment (Design-Build) and Contractor’s Equipment (Operations)
necessary for the execution and completion of the Services, and the
remedying of any defects; and
(d) the Contractor's requirements for access to the Site, accommodation,
personnel, power, transport, water and other services.
(3) The Contractor shall be deemed to have obtained all necessary information as to
risks, contingencies and all other circumstances that may influence or affect the
performance of its obligations under the Contract.
(4) To the extent the Contractor did not make any of the interpretations,
investigations or examinations, or did not satisfy itself, or did not obtain such
information as called for in this GC Section 3.5, the Contractor represents and warrants
that it is willing to assume and does hereby assume responsibility for any and all loss
and damage from any cause whatsoever which the Contractor’s interpretations,
investigations, examinations and obtaining of information may have avoided and agrees
to indemnify the Owner from all risk thereof and from conditions arising or developing
in the course of performing the Services which may make the performance of the
Services more onerous and more expensive to fulfill or perform than was contemplated
on the Effective Date. Notwithstanding anything in the Contract to the contrary, the
Contractor acknowledges and declares that in entering into the Contract it did not and
does not rely upon any information or report provided by or on behalf of the Owner or
its agents, representatives or employees.
3.6 Access to the Site and New Facility
(1) The Contractor shall, during both the Design-Build Period and the New
Operations Period, provide free and open access to the Site, the Existing Facility and the
New Facility at the Owner’s request. The Owner shall make reasonable efforts to
provide reasonable notice to the Contractor prior to the Owner’s access but such notice
is not mandatory. The Owner’s representative on the Site, the Existing Facility or at the
New Facility shall observe all safety and health regulations and reasonable instructions
of the Contractor.
(2) The Contractor shall give all reasonable access to any other contractors employed
by the Owner on or near the Site to carry out their work.
(3) If the Contractor makes available to other contractors any roads or ways the
maintenance for which the Contractor is responsible, permits the use by such other
contractors of the Contractor’s Equipment (Design-Build) and Contractor’s Equipment
(Operations), or provides any other service of whatsoever nature for such other
contractors, the Owner shall fully compensate the Contractor for any loss or damage
caused or occasioned by such other contractors in respect of any such use or service, and


shall pay to the Contractor reasonable remuneration for the use of such equipment or the
provision of such services.
(4) The Contractor shall also arrange to perform its work so as to minimize, to the
extent possible, interference with the work of other contractors. The Project Manager or
MPUDC, as applicable, shall determine the resolution of any difference or conflict that
may arise between the Contractor and other contractors and the workers of the Owner in
regard to their work.
(5) The Contractor shall notify the Project Manager or Madhya Pradesh Urban
Development Company Limited, Bhopal, as applicable, promptly of any defects in the
other contractors’ work that come to its notice, and that could affect the performance of
the Services by the Contractor. The Project Manager or Madhya Pradesh Urban
Development Company Limited, Bhopal, as applicable, shall determine the corrective
measures, if any, required to rectify the situation after inspection of the Site, the Existing
Facility and the New Facility. Decisions made by the Project Manager or Engineer-in-
Chief, Madhya Pradesh Urban Development Company Limited, Bhopal, as applicable,
shall be binding on the Contractor.


4. ARTICLE 4 – OBLIGATIONS OF THE OWNER
4.1 Owner’s Assistance to the Contractor
The Owner shall use reasonable efforts to,

(a) provide the Contractor, Subcontractors and Contractor’s Personnel with work
permits and such other documents as shall be necessary to enable the Contractor,
Subcontractors or Contractor’s Personnel to perform the Services;
(b) facilitate the prompt clearance through customs of any property required for the
Services and of the personal effects of the Contractor’s Personnel and their
eligible dependents; and
(c) issue to officials, agents and representatives of the Owner all such instructions as
may be necessary or appropriate for the prompt and effective implementation of
the Services.
(d) appoint Project Implementation Unit to supervise the works and act on behalf of
the owner, wherever needed. Project Manager of the PIU shall be the Project
Manager for the project during design –built period as well as during the
operation –maintenance period. The Contractor shall be directly responding to the
PIU under intimation to Engineer-in-Chief, MPUDC. PIU shall also co-ordinate
between the Contractor and MPUDC as well as the BNP.
(e) Appoint a Project Management Consultant (PMC) to support and assist the PIU
and MPUDC in various tasks related to the project. The PMC will assist the PIU
and MPUDC in managing various project related tasks including daily
supervision of works on site and evaluation of drawings and designs submitted by
the Contractor for approval.
(f) appoint an engineer and his team from the Barwani Nagar Palika to involve in
supervision and assistance of PIU during operation and maintenance period. The
Engineer deputed by the BNP will be the part of the team witnessing the
Commissioning of the project and during pipe leakage tests.
4.2 Access to the Site and New Facility
(a) The Owner shall be responsible for acquiring and providing legal and physical
possession of the Site and access thereto and for providing possession and access
to all other areas reasonably required for the proper execution of the Contract
including all requisite rights of way. The Owner shall provide the Contractor, free
of charge, full possession of the Site, the Existing Facility and the New Facility
during the term of the Contract and within the period specified in SCC.
(b) The Project Implementation Unit (PIU) will be responsible for executing the
above tasks on behalf of the owner. The PIU will co-ordinate with Barwani NP
and ensure that all lands are made available to the Contractor within stipulated
time period.


4.3 Reviews and Approvals of Submissions
(1) Except as otherwise provided in the Contract, if the Contractor shall submit any
plan, report or other documentation to the PIU in writing under intimation to the
Engineer-in-Chief, MPUDC. In case the MPUDC or the Project Manager is
required to approve that submission, the Project Manager will check the
document with the help of Project Monitoring Consultant and submit the same to
Engineer-in-Chief, Madhya Pradesh Urban Development Company Limited,
Bhopal for approval. In case of any comment, the PIU shall provide written
comment on the Contractor’s submission no later than 14 days after the day of
submission by the Contractor. The Engineer-in-Chief, MPUDC shall be giving
approval or comment, if any, within seven days of receipt of such
recommendation by the PIU.
(2) If the Project Manager or Engineer-in-Chief, Madhya Pradesh Urban
Development Company Limited, Bhopal, as applicable, fails to approve or refuses
to approve the Contractor’s submission in accordance with GC Section 4.3(1), the
Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing that it has not received a response to
its submission.
(3) If the Project Manager or Engineer-in-Chief, Madhya Pradesh Urban
Development Company Limited, Bhopal, as applicable, fails to respond to the
Contractor’s written notification pursuant to GC Section 4.3(2) within 21 days
after the receipt by the Project Manager or Engineer-in-Chief, Madhya Pradesh
Urban Development Company Limited, Bhopal, as applicable, of the Contractor’s
written notification, the Contractor’s submission shall be deemed to be approved.


5. ARTICLE 5 – CONTRACT PRICE AND PAYMENT
5.1 Contract Price
(1) The Contract Price shall be as specified in the Form of Contract.

(2) Unless indicated otherwise in the SCC, the Contract Price shall be,
(a) firm lump sum in respect of the Design-Build Services; and
(b) monthly rate in respect of the Operations Services, consisting of a fixed
portion and a flexible portion depending on the performance figures
following Vol.4 Appendix 4
not subject to any alteration, except in the event of a Change to the Design-Build
Services in accordance with GC Section 10.1 or a change to the Operations Services in
accordance with GC Section 10.2 or as otherwise provided in the Contract Price
Adjustment Appendix.
(3) Subject to GC Section 9.7, the Contractor shall be deemed to have satisfied itself
as to the correctness and sufficiency of the Contract Price, which shall, except as
otherwise provided for in the Contract, cover all its obligations under the Contract,
including all costs and expenses for the design and building of the New Facility and the
operation of the New Facility and the Existing Facility.
(4) Provisional Sums: The total sum paid to the Contractor shall include only such
amounts, for the work, supplies or services to which the Provisional Sum relates, as the
Project Manager shall have instructed. For each Provisional Sum, the Project Manager
may instruct:
(a) work to be executed (including Plant, Materials or services to be supplied) by
the Contractor and valued under Sub-Clause 9.7; and/or
(b) Plant, Materials or services to be purchased by the Contractor, from a
nominated Subcontractor (as defined in Clause 1.1 [Nominated
Subcontractors]) or otherwise; and for which there shall be included in the
Contract Price:
(i) the actual amounts paid (or due to be paid) by the Contractor, and
(ii) a sum for overhead charges and profit, calculated as a percentage of
these actual amounts by applying the relevant percentage rate (if any)
stated in the appropriate Schedule. If there is no such rate, the
percentage rate stated in the Contract Data shall be applied.
(iii) The Contractor shall, when required by the Project Manager, produce
quotations, invoices, vouchers and accounts or receipts in
substantiation.


5.2 Terms of Payment
(1) The Contract Price shall be paid as specified in the corresponding Terms and
Procedures of Payment Appendix to the Contract Agreement. The procedures to
be followed in making application for and processing payments shall be those
outlined in the same Appendix.
(2) No payment made by the Owner herein shall be deemed to constitute acceptance
by the Owner of the New Facility or any part thereof.
(3) In the event that the Owner fails to make any payment by its respective due date
or within the period set forth in the Contract, the Owner shall pay to the
Contractor interest on the amount of such delayed payment at the rate shown in
the SCC and as specified in the SCC for the period of delay until payment has
been made in full, whether before or after judgment or arbitrage award.
(4) The currency in which payments are made to the Contractor under this Contract
shall be specified in the SCC, subject to the general principle that payments will
be made in the currency or currencies in which the Contract Price has been stated
in the Contractor’s Bid.
(5) All payments shall be made in the currency or currencies specified in the
corresponding Terms and Procedures of Payment Appendix pursuant to GC
Section 5.2(3).
5.3 Performance Incentive Compensation
If the Owner intends to pay the Contractor performance incentive compensation, the
Owner will pay such compensation at the end of the New Operations Period and in
accordance with the Performance Incentive Compensation Appendix.
5.4 Liquidated Damages – Operations
The Contractor shall pay the Owner liquidated damages for failure to meet Technical
Standards as set out in the SCC.
5.5 Securities
5.5.1 Performance Security
(1) The Contractor and, if applicable, its Parent and Shareholders shall each provide a
security for the Contractor’s proper performance of the Contract to the Owner no
later than the date specified in the Bidding Documents (the “Performance
Security”).
(2) The Performance Security shall be,
(a) in the amount specified in the SCC;
(b) denominated in the currency or currencies of the Contract, or in a freely
convertible currency acceptable to the Owner; and


(c) shall be in the form specified in the Bidding Documents or in another

form approved by the Owner.
(d) The Performance Security is a bank guarantee and shall be issued by a
scheduled commercial bank located in the Country;
(3) The Performance Security shall be valid until 180 days after the End Date, or any
extension to the End Date or as stated in the SCC.
(4) The Owner shall return the Performance Security no later than 45 days after
completion of Defect Liability Period after Design Build works and submission of
performance security for Operation and Maintenance or as stated in the SCC.
(5) The Owner shall return the performance security for operation and maintenance in
annual installments after the expiry of each year starting from the end of third
year and upto the expiry of 8th year each @ 5% part of the total performance
security, 10% after the expiry of ninth year and remaining shall be released on the
completion of O&M period of 10 years within 180 days of completion of the
O&M period.
5.5.2 Advance Payment Guarantee
(1) The Contractor shall provide an advance payment bond to ensure that in case the
services are not performed the contracting agency will be refunded the advance
payment which it has made. The amount of the advance payment bond equals the
advance payment calculated in accordance with the Terms and Procedures of
Payment Appendix and in the same currency or currencies.
(2) The advance payment security shall be in the form provided in the Bidding
Documents or in another form approved by the Owner. The amount of the
advance payment security may be progressively reduced pro rata as provided for
in the Terms and Procedures of Payment Appendix and in accordance with the
value of the supplies and works provided.
(3) The advance payment security shall be returned to the Contractor immediately
after its expiration.
5.6 Taxes and Duties
(1) Except as otherwise specifically provided in the Contract, the Contractor shall
bear and pay all taxes, duties, levies and charges (the “Taxes”) assessed on the
Contractor, its Subcontractors or their employees by all municipal, state or
national government authorities in connection with the Services in and outside of
the Country.
(2) If any tax exemptions, reductions, allowances or privileges may be available to
the Contractor/Owner in the Country, the Owner shall use reasonable efforts to
enable the Contractor to benefit from any such tax savings to the maximum
allowable extent. (Refer Declaration regarding customs/excise duty exemption for
materials/ Construction equipment bought for the work)


6. ARTICLE 6 – COPYRIGHT – DESIGN-BUILD DOCUMENTS
6.1 Copyright – Design-Build Documents
(1) As between the Parties, the Owner shall retain the copyright and other intellectual
property rights in the Design-Build Documents made by or on behalf of the
Contractor.
(2) The Contractor shall be deemed, by signing the Contract, to give the Owner a
non-terminable, transferable, non-exclusive, royalty-free license to copy, use and
communicate the Design-Build Documents, including making and using
modifications of them. This license shall,
(a) apply throughout the actual or intended working life, whichever is longer,
of the relevant parts of the Site, Existing Facility or New Facility;
(b) entitle any person in proper possession of the relevant part of the Site,
Existing Facility or New Facility to copy, use and communicate the
Design-Build Documents for the purposes of completing, managing,
operating, maintaining, altering, adjusting, repairing and demolishing the
Existing Facility or the New Facility;
(c) in the case of Design-Build Documents which are in the form of computer
programs and other software, permit their use on any computer on the
Site, Existing Facility or at the New Facility and other places as
envisaged by the Contract, including replacements of any computers
supplied by the Contractor; and
(d) entitle the Owner to make the Design-Build Documents available for
inspection by a prospective Contractor who may be involved in the
process to select a Subsequent Contractor.
(3) The Contractor shall not, without the Owner’s consent, use, copy or communicate
the Design-Build Documents to a Third Party by, or on behalf of, the Owner for
purposes other than those permitted under GC Section 6.1(2).
6.2 Confidentiality
(1) The Contractor shall keep confidential and shall not, without the written consent
of the Owner, divulge to any Third Party any documents, data or other
information arising directly or indirectly from the performance of Services under
the Contract, whether such information has been furnished prior to, during or
following termination of the Contract. Notwithstanding this GC Section 6.2(1),
the Contractor may furnish to its Subcontractors such documents, data and other
information to the extent required for the Subcontractors to perform their work
under the Contract, in which event the Contractor shall obtain from such
Subcontractors an undertaking of confidentiality similar to that imposed on the
Contractor under this GC Section 6.2(1).


(2) The Contractor shall not use such documents, data and other information received
from the Owner for any purpose other than the Services as are required for the
performance of the Contract. The Contractor shall not publish, permit to be
published, or disclose any particulars of the Services, Site, Existing Facility or
New Facility in any trade or technical paper or advertising materials without the
prior written consent of the Owner.
(3) The obligations of the Contractor under GC Sections 6.2(1) and 6.2(2), shall not
apply to that information which,
(a) now or hereafter enters the public domain through no fault of the
Contractor;
(b) can be proven to have been possessed by the Contractor at the time of
disclosure and which was not previously obtained, directly or indirectly,
from the Owner; or
(c) otherwise lawfully becomes available to the Contractor from a Third
Party that has no obligation of confidentiality.


7. ARTICLE 7 – CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION AND SUPERVISION

DURING THE DESIGN-BUILD AND NEW OPERATIONS PERIODS
7.1 General
The Parties acknowledge that two separate approaches to contract administration and
supervision will be in place during the Contract Term as follows:
(a) from the Effective Date until the New Operations Starting Date, the Design-Build
Supervision approach will be put in place by the Owner; and
(b) from the New Operations Starting Date until the End Date, the Operations
Supervision approach will be put in place by the Owner.
7.2 Contract Supervision
7.2.1 Supervision during the Design-Build Period and O&M Period
Supervision during the Design-Build Period and O&M Period will be done by Project
Manager of PIU of MPUDC and shall apply during the complete contract period of 84
months.
7.2.2 Project Manager’s Duties and Authority
(1) The Owner shall appoint the Project Manager (PIU) who shall be responsible for
day to day contract management and supervision during the Contract Period. The
Project Manager’s staff shall include suitably qualified engineers and other
professionals who are competent to carry out these duties.
(2) The Project Manager shall have no authority to amend the Contract.
(3) Except as specifically provided otherwise in the Contract, the Project Manager
may exercise the authority attributable to the Project Manager as specified in or
necessarily to be implied from the Contract. The Owner undertakes not to impose
further constraints on the Project Manager’s authority, except as agreed with the
Contractor.
(4) If the Project Manager is obligated to obtain the approval of the Owner before
exercising a specific authority, these restrictions shall be set out in the SCC.
(5) Except as otherwise stated in the Contract,
(a) if the Project Manager carries out duties or exercises authority, specified
in or implied by the Contract, the Project Manager shall be deemed to act
for the Owner;
(b) the Project Manager has no authority to relieve any Party of any duties,
obligations or responsibilities under the Contract; and


(c) any approval, check, certificate, consent, examination, inspection,

instruction, notice, proposal, request, test or similar act by the Project
Manager, including absence of disapproval, shall not relieve the
Contractor from any responsibility it has under the Contract, including
responsibility for errors, omissions, discrepancies and non-compliances.
7.2.3 Delegation by the Project Manager
(1) The Project Manager may from time to time assign duties and delegate authority
to assistants, and may also revoke such assignment or delegation. These assistants
may include a resident engineer, or independent inspectors appointed to inspect or
test items of Plant or Equipment. The assignment, delegation or revocation shall
be in writing and shall not take effect until copies have been received by both
Parties. Unless otherwise agreed by both Parties, the Project Manager shall not
delegate the authority to determine any matter in accordance with GC Section
7.2.6.
(2) Assistants shall be suitably qualified persons, who are competent to carry out
these duties and exercise this authority, and who are fluent in the language for
communications defined in GC Section 1.3.1.
(3) Each assistant, to whom duties have been assigned or authority has been
delegated, shall only be authorized to issue instructions to the Contractor to the
extent defined by the delegation. Any approval, check, certificate, consent,
examination, inspection, instruction, notice, proposal, request, test, or similar act
by an assistant, in accordance with the delegation, shall have the same effect as
though the act had been an act of the Project Manager. However,
(a) any failure to disapprove any work or Plant and Equipment shall not
constitute approval, and shall therefore not prejudice the right of the
Project Manager to reject the work or the Plant and Equipment; and
(b) if the Contractor questions any determination or instruction of an
assistant, the Contractor may refer the matter to the Project Manager, who
shall promptly confirm, reverse or vary the determination or instruction.
7.2.4 Instructions of the Project Manager
(1) The Project Manager may issue to the Contractor, at any time during the Design-
Build Period, instructions which may be necessary for the execution of the
Design-Build Services and the remedying of any defects, all in accordance with
the Contract. The Contractor shall only take instructions from the Project
Manager, or from an assistant to whom the appropriate authority has been
delegated under GC Section 7.2.3. If an instruction constitutes a Change, GC
Section 10.1 shall apply.


(2) The Contractor shall comply with the instructions given by the Project Manager
or delegated assistant, on any matter related to the Contract. These instructions
shall be given in writing.
7.2.5 Replacement of the Project Manager
If the Owner intends to replace the Project Manager, the Owner shall, not less than 15
days before the intended date of replacement, give notice to the Contractor of the name,
address and relevant experience of the intended replacement Project Manager. The
Owner shall not replace the Project Manager with a person against whom the Contractor
raises reasonable objection by notice to the Owner, with supporting particulars.
7.2.6 Determinations by the Project Manager
(1) Whenever the Contract provides that the Project Manager shall proceed in
accordance with this GC Section 7.2.6 to agree or determine any matter, the
Project Manager shall consult with each Party in an endeavour to reach
agreement. If agreement is not achieved, the Project Manager shall make a fair
determination in accordance with the Contract, taking due regard of all relevant
circumstances.
(2) The Project Manager shall give notice to the Parties of each agreement or
determination, with supporting particulars. Each Party shall give effect to each
agreement or determination unless and until revised under GC Section 1.9.


8. ARTICLE 8 – REPRESENTATIVES, STAFF AND SUBCONTRACTING
8.1 Representatives
8.1.1 Owner’s Representative
(1) During the contract, the Owner’s Representative shall be the Project Manager of
respective Project Implementation Unit (hereinafter called “PIU”); and
(2) The Owner shall name its representative, no later than 14 days after the Effective
Date for the Design Build period;
(3) The Owner may change its representative from time to time and shall give notice
of the change without delay. The Owner shall not change its representative at a
time and in such a manner as to impede the progress of either the Design-Build
Services or the Operations Services.
(4) The Owner’s Representative shall represent and act for the Owner at all times
during the performance of the Contract. All notices, instructions, orders,
certificates, approvals and all other communications under the Contract by the
Owner shall be given by the PIU or the MPUDC, as applicable, except as herein
otherwise provided.
(5) All notices, instructions, information and other communications given by the
Contractor to the Owner under the Contract shall be given to the PIU, except as
herein otherwise provided.
8.1.2 Contractor’s Representative
(1) If the Contractor’s representative is not named in the SCC, the Contractor shall
name its representative (the “Contractor’s Representative”) no later than 14 days
after the Effective Date and shall request the Owner to approve the proposed
Contractor’s Representative. If the Owner makes no objection to the proposed
Contractor’s Representative, the Contractor’s Representative shall be deemed to
have been approved.
(2) If the Owner objects to the proposed Contractor’s Representative before the
expiration of 14 days after the proposal, the Contractor shall propose a
replacement no later than 14 days after receiving the Owner’s objection and
reasons for the objection and GC Section 8.1.2(1) shall apply to the proposed
replacement.
(3) The Contractor’s Representative shall represent and act for the Contractor at all
times during the performance of the Contract. All notices, instructions, orders,
certificates, approvals and all other communications under the Contract by the
Contractor shall be given by the Contractor’s Representative, except as herein
otherwise provided.


(4) All notices, instructions, information, and other communications given by the
Owner to the Contractor under the Contract shall be given to the Contractor’s
Representative as established pursuant to this GC Section 8.1.2.
(5) The Contractor shall not revoke the appointment of the Contractor’s
Representative without the Owner’s prior written consent, which shall not be
unreasonably withheld. If the Owner consents thereto, the Contractor shall
appoint some other person as the Contractor’s Representative, pursuant to the
procedure set out in this GC Section 8.1.2.
(6) The Contractor’s Representative may, subject to the approval of the Owner,
which shall not be unreasonably withheld, at any time delegate to any person any
of the powers, functions and authorities vested in him or her. Any such delegation
may be revoked at any time. Any such delegation or revocation shall be subject to
a prior notice signed by the Contractor’s Representative, and shall specify the
powers, functions and authorities thereby delegated or revoked. No such
delegation or revocation shall take effect unless and until a copy thereof has been
delivered to the Owner and the Project Manager or Managing Director, Madhya
Pradesh Urban Development Company Limited, Bhopal, as applicable.
(7) Any act or exercise by any person of powers, functions and authorities so
delegated to him or her in accordance with GC Section 8.1.2(6) shall be deemed
to be an act or exercise by the Contractor’s Representative.
8.2 Contractor’s Superintendence
(1) Throughout the term of the Contract, the Contractor shall provide all necessary
superintendence to plan, arrange, direct, manage, inspect and test the Services.
(2) Superintendence shall be given by a sufficient number of persons having adequate
knowledge of the language for communications as set out in the SCC and of the
operations to be carried out, including the methods and techniques required, the
hazards likely to be encountered and methods of preventing accidents, for the
satisfactory and safe execution of the Services.
(3) The Contractor’s Representative shall appoint a suitable person as construction or
operations manager as applicable (the “Manager”). The Manager shall supervise
all work done at the Site, Existing Facility and New Facility by the Contractor
and shall be present at the Site, Existing Facility or New Facility through normal
working hours except when on leave, sick or absence connected with the proper
performance of the Contract. Whenever the Manager is absent from the Site,
Existing Facility or New Facility, a suitable person shall be appointed to act as his
or her deputy.


8.3 Contractor’s Personnel
(1) The Contractor shall provide and employ on the Site for the performance of the
Services such skilled, semi-skilled and unskilled labour as is necessary for the
proper and timely execution of the Contract (the “Contractor’s Personnel”). The
Contractor is encouraged to use local labour that has the necessary skills. The
Contractor shall provide all expertise needed to carry out the Services including
the expertise listed in the Contractor’s Expertise Appendix.
(2) Unless otherwise provided in the Contract, the Contractor shall be responsible for
the recruitment, employment, transportation, accommodation and catering of all
labour, local or expatriate, required for the execution of the Contract and for all
payments in connection therewith.
(3) The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all necessary permits from the
appropriate authorities for the entry of all labour and personnel to be employed on
the Site into the Country.
(4) The Contractor shall at its own expense provide the means of repatriation to all of
its and its Subcontractor’s personnel employed on the Contract at the Site to their
various home countries. It shall also provide suitable temporary maintenance of
all such persons from the cessation of their employment on the Contract to the
date programmed for their departure. In the event that the Contractor defaults in
providing such means of transportation and temporary maintenance, the Owner
may provide the same to such personnel and recover the cost of doing so from the
Contractor.
(5) The Contractor shall at all times during the progress of the Contract use its best
endeavors to prevent any unlawful, riotous or disorderly conduct or behaviour by
or amongst its employees and the labour of its Subcontractors.
(6) The Contractor shall, in all dealings with its labour and the labour of its
Subcontractors currently employed on or connected with the Contract, pay due
regard to all recognized festivals, official holidays, religious or other customs and
all local laws and regulations pertaining to the employment of labour.
(7) The Contractor shall be well conversed with the Local Labour Laws and shall
obey all the provisions of it. Defiance of labour laws may cause penalty or even
blacklisting of the Contractor. The Contractor shall keep the Owner indemnified
in case any action is taken against the Owner by the competent authority on
account of contraventions including amendments. If the Owner is caused to pay
or reimburse, such amounts as may be necessary to cause or observe, or for non-
observance of the provisions stipulated in the notifications/bye
laws/Acts/Rules/regulations including amendments, if any, on the part of the
Contractor, the Owner shall have the right to deduct any money due to the
Contractor including his amount of performance security.


8.4 Replacement of Contractor’s Personnel
The PIU or the MPUDC, as applicable, may require the Contractor to remove and
replace any member of the Contractor’s Personnel who,
(a) persists in any misconduct or lack of care;
(b) carries out duties incompetently or negligently;
(c) fails to comply with any provision of the Contract; or
(d) persists in any conduct which gives the Owner reasonable cause to be dissatisfied
with him or her.
8.5 Existing Staff
If the Contractor is obliged to retain staff employed by the Owner as stated in the SCC,
it shall do so in accordance with the Existing Staff Appendix.
8.6 Subcontractors
(1) The Contractor shall not enter into any contract or contracts that will result in the
Contractor exceeding the maximum percentage of subcontracting permitted by the
Owner in respect of the Design-Build Services and the Operations Services, as set
out in the Bidding Documents.
(2) Except with respect to the Subcontractors named in the Contractor’s Bid, the
Contractor shall not enter into a contract with any Subcontractor without the prior
consent of the Owner.
(3) The Contractor shall be responsible for the observance by Subcontractors of the
terms and conditions of the Contract and shall ensure that all relevant terms of the
Contract are included in the Contractor’s contracts with Subcontractors.
(4) Subcontracting by the Contractor shall not relieve the Contractor of any of its
obligations under the Contract and the Contractor shall be responsible for the acts,
omissions and defaults of all Subcontractors, and the Subcontractors, employees,
agents and sub-subcontractors, as fully as if they were acts, omissions or defaults
of the Contractor or the Contractor’s Personnel.


9. ARTICLE 9 – LIABILITY AND RISK DISTRIBUTION
9.1 Defect Liability
(1) The Contractor warrants that the Site and New Facility or any part thereof shall be
free from defects in the design, engineering, materials and workmanship of the
Plant and Equipment supplied and of the work executed.
(2) The Defect Liability Period shall be 12 months from the date of Operational
Acceptance of the New Facility unless specified otherwise in the SCC.
(3) If during the Defect Liability Period any defect should be found in the design,
engineering, materials and workmanship of the Site, New Facility or Plant and
Equipment supplied or of the work executed by the Contractor, the Contractor
shall promptly, in consultation and agreement with the Owner regarding
appropriate remedying of the defects, and at its cost, repair, replace or otherwise
make good, as the Contractor shall, at its discretion, determine, such defect as
well as any damage to the New Facility caused by such defect. The Contractor
shall not be responsible for the repair, replacement or making good of any
defector of any damage to the New Facility arising out of or resulting from
normal wear and tear.
(4) The Contractor’s obligations under this GC Section 9.1 shall not apply to,
(a) any designs, specifications or other data designed, supplied or specified
by or on behalf of the Owner; and
(b) any other materials supplied or any other work executed by or on behalf
of the Owner, except for the work executed by the Owner under GC
Section 9.1(10).
(5) The Owner shall give the Contractor a notice stating the nature of any such defect
together with all available evidence thereof, promptly following the discovery
thereof. The Owner shall give all reasonable opportunity for the Contractor to
inspect any such defect.
(6) The Owner shall give the Contractor all necessary access to the New Facility and
the Site to enable the Contractor to perform its obligations under this GC Section
9.1.
(7) The Contractor may, with the consent of the Owner, remove from the Site any
Plant and Equipment, Contractor’s Equipment (Design-Build) and Contractor’s
Equipment (Operations) or any part of the New Facility that are defective if the
nature of the defect, or any damage to the New Facility caused by the defect, is
such that repairs cannot be expeditiously carried out at the Site.
(8) If the repair, replacement or making good is of such a character that it may affect
the efficiency of the New Facility or any part thereof, the Owner may give to the
Contractor a notice requiring that tests of the defective part of the New Facility
shall be made by the Contractor immediately upon completion of such remedial
work, whereupon the Contractor shall carry out such tests.


(9) If such part fails the tests, the Contractor shall carry out further repair,
replacement or making good, as the case may be, until that part of the New
Facility passes such tests. The tests shall be agreed upon by the Owner and the
Contractor.
(10) If the Contractor fails to commence the work necessary to remedy such defect or
any damage to the New Facility caused by such defect within a reasonable time,
which shall in no event be considered to be less than 15 days, the Owner may,
following notice to the Contractor, proceed to do such work, and the reasonable
costs incurred by the Owner in connection therewith shall be paid to the Owner
by the Contractor or may be deducted by the Owner from any monies due the
Contractor or claimed under the Performance Security.
(11) If the New Facility or any part thereof cannot be used by reason of such defect or
making good of such defect, the Defect Liability Period of the New Facility or
such part, as the case may be, shall be extended by a period equal to the period
during which the New Facility or such part cannot be used by the Owner because
of any of the aforesaid reasons.
(12) Except as provided in GC Sections 9.1 and 9.5, the Contractor shall be under no
liability whatsoever and howsoever arising, and whether under the Contract or at
law, in respect of defects in the New Facility or any part thereof, the Plant and
Equipment, design or engineering or work executed that appear after Completion
of the Site, the New Facility or any part thereof, except where such defects are the
result of the gross negligence, fraud, criminal or willful action of the Contractor.
(13) The Contractor shall also provide an extended warranty for any such component
of the New Facility and during the period of time as may be specified in the SCC.
Such obligation shall be in addition to the Defect Liability Period specified under
GC Section 9.1(2).
9.2 Limitation of Liability
Except in cases of criminal negligence or willful misconduct,

(a) the Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner in contract, tort, or otherwise, for
any indirect or consequential loss or damage, loss of use, loss of production, or
loss of profits of interest costs, provided that this exclusion shall not apply to any
obligation of the Contractor to pay liquidated damages to the Owner; and
(b) the aggregate liability of the Contractor to the Owner, whether under the Contract,
in tort or otherwise, shall not exceed the aggregate of the total Contract Price
(including the Monthly Operations Payment times the original estimate of months
during the New Operations Period) and the total available Performance Incentive
Compensation, provided that this limitation shall not apply to any obligation of
the Contractor to indemnify the Owner with respect to patent infringement.


9.3 Transfer of Ownership and Existing Equipment and Materials
9.3.1 Transfer of Ownership
(1) Ownership of the Plant and Equipment, including spare parts, to be imported into
the Country shall be transferred to the Owner upon delivery at the Site.
(2) Ownership of the Plant and Equipment procured in the Country shall be
transferred to the Owner when the Plant and Equipment are brought on to the Site.
(3) Ownership of any Plant and Equipment in excess of the requirements of the New
Facility shall revert to the Contractor upon Completion of the New Facility or
such earlier time if the Owner and the Contractor agree that the Plant and
Equipment in question are no longer required for the New Facility.
(4) Subject to GC Section 9.3.1(5), ownership of the Contractor’s Equipment
(Design-Build) and Contractor’s Equipment (Operations), including spare parts,
shall remain with the Contractor or its Subcontractors.
(5) The Owner may, in its sole discretion, purchase as of the End Date any of the
Contractor’s Equipment (Operations), including spare parts, at the fair market
value of such Contractor’s Equipment (Operations) as determined by an
independent valuator and the Contractor shall transfer ownership and possession
of such Contractor’s Equipment (Operations) to the Owner as of the End Date.
(6) Notwithstanding the transfer of ownership of the Plant and Equipment, the
responsibility for care and custody of the Plant and Equipment, Contractor’s
Equipment (Design-Build) and Contractor’s Equipment (Operations), together
with the risk of loss or damage thereto, shall remain with the Contractor pursuant
to GC Section 9.4 until the End Date.
9.3.2 Existing Equipment and Materials
(1) The Owner shall transfer the care, control and responsibility for all existing
equipment, materials, supplies and consumables, if any, used to operate and
maintain the Existing Facility (the “Existing Equipment and Materials”) to the
Contractor on the Design-Build Starting Date at no cost to the Contractor.
(2) The Contractor shall, no later than 15 days after the Design-Build Starting Date
prepare a list of the Existing Equipment and Materials and submit it to the Owner
for its review and approval. The Contractor shall update the list of Existing
Equipment and Materials annually and submit it to the Owner for its review and
approval.
(3) The Contractor shall return all Existing Equipment and Materials on the list, as
updated, to the Owner on the End Date in the same condition as they were
transferred to the Contractor, except for reasonable wear and tear and at no cost to
the Owner.


9.4 Care of the Site and New Facility
(1) Except as provided in GC Sections 9.9 and 9.4(2), the Contractor shall be
responsible for the care and custody of the Site, Existing Facility and New
Facility or any part thereof until the End Date and shall make good at its own cost
any loss or damage that may occur to the Site, Existing Facility or New Facility
from any cause whatsoever during such period. The Contractor shall also be
responsible for any loss or damage to the Site, Existing Facility or New Facility
caused by the Contractor or its Subcontractors in the course of any work carried
out, pursuant to GC Section 9.1.
(2) If any loss or damage occurs to the Site, Existing Facility or New Facility or any
part thereof by reason of,
(a) Insofar as they relate to the Country, nuclear reaction, nuclear radiation,
radioactive contamination, pressure wave caused by aircraft or other
aerial objects, or any other occurrences that an experienced contractor or
Contractor could not reasonably foresee, or if reasonably foreseeable
could not reasonably make provision for or insure against, insofar as such
risks are not normally insurable on the insurance market and are
mentioned in the general exclusions of the policy of insurance, including
War Risks, taken out under GC Section 9.6;
(b) any use or occupation by the Owner or any Third Party, other than a
Subcontractor, authorized by the Owner of any part of the Site, Existing
Facility or New Facility; or
(c) any use of or reliance upon any design, data or specification provided or
designated by or on behalf of the Owner, or any such matter for which the
Contractor has disclaimed responsibility herein, the Owner shall pay to
the Contractor all sums payable in respect of the Site, Existing Facility or
New Facility executed, notwithstanding that the same be lost, destroyed
or damaged. If the Owner requests the Contractor in writing to make good
any loss or damage to the Existing Facility or New Facility thereby
occasioned, the Contractor shall make good the same at the cost of the
Owner in accordance with GC Section 10.1. If the Owner does not
request the Contractor in writing to make good any loss or damage to the
New Facility thereby occasioned, the Owner shall either request a change
in accordance with GC Section 10.1, excluding the performance of that
part of the New Facility thereby lost, destroyed or damaged, or, where the
loss or damage affects a substantial part of the New Facility, the Owner
shall terminate the Contract pursuant to GC Section 11.2.1.
(3) The Contractor shall be liable for any loss of or damage to any Contractor’s
Equipment (Design-Build), Contractor’s Equipment (Operations) or any other
property of the Contractor used or intended to be used for purposes of the Site,
Existing Facility or the New Facility, except where such loss or damage arises by
reason of any of the matters specified in GC Sections 9.4(2) (b) and 9.9.


(4) With respect to any loss or damage caused to the New Facility or any part thereof,
the Contractor’s Equipment (Design-Build) or the Contractor’s Equipment
(Operations) by reason of any of the matters specified in GC Section 9.9(1), the
provisions of GC Section 9.9(3) shall apply.
9.5 Indemnification
(1) Subject to GC Section 9.5(5), the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless
the Owner and its employees and officers from and against any and all suits,
actions or administrative proceedings, claims, demands, losses, damages, costs,
and expenses of whatsoever nature, including attorney’s fees and expenses, in
respect of the death or injury of any person or loss of or damage to any property,
arising in connection with the Contractor’s performance of the Services and by
reason of the negligence of the Contractor or its Subcontractors, or their
employees, officers or agents, except any injury, death or property damage caused
by the negligence of the Owner, its contractors, employees, officers or agents.
(2) If any proceedings are brought or any claim is made against the Owner that might
subject the Contractor to liability under GC Section 9.5(1), the Owner shall
promptly give the Contractor a notice thereof and the Contractor may at its own
expense and in the Owner’s name conduct such proceedings or claim and any
negotiations for the settlement of any such proceedings or claim.
(3) If the Contractor fails to notify the Owner prior to the expiration of 30 days after
receipt of a notice given pursuant to GC Section 9.5(2) that it intends to conduct
any such proceedings or claim, then the Owner shall be free to conduct the same
on its own behalf. Unless the Contractor has so failed to notify the Owner within
the 30 day period, the Owner shall make no admission that may be prejudicial to
the defense of any such proceedings or claim.
(4) The Owner shall, at the Contractor’s request, provide all available assistance to
the Contractor in conducting such proceedings or claim, and shall be reimbursed
by the Contractor for all reasonable expenses incurred in so doing.
(5) The Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor and its employees,
officers and Subcontractors from any liability for loss of or damage to property of
the Owner that is caused by fire, explosion or any other perils, in excess of the
amount recoverable from insurances procured under GC Section 9.6, provided
that such fire, explosion or other perils were not caused by any act or omission of
the Contractor.
(6) The Party entitled to the benefit of an indemnity under this GC Section 9.5 shall
take all reasonable measures to mitigate any loss or damage which has occurred.
If the Party fails to take such measures, the other Party’s liabilities shall be
correspondingly reduced.


9.6 Insurance
(1) To the extent specified in the SCC, the Contractor shall, at its own expense, take
out and maintain in effect or cause to be taken out and maintained in effect,
during the performance of the Contract, the insurances set forth below in the sums
and with the deductibles and other conditions specified in the SCC. The identity
of the insurers and the form of the policies shall be subject to the prior approval of
the Owner who shall not unreasonably withhold such approval. The Contractor
shall submit appropriate certificates of insurance demonstrating that the
Contractor has met its obligations pursuant to this GC Section 9.6 to the Owner
no later than the Effective Date.
(a) Cargo Insurance During Transport
Covering loss or damage, occurring while in transit from the Contractor’s or
Subcontractor’s works or stores until arrival at the Site, to the Plant and
Equipment, Contractor’s Equipment (Design-Build) and Contractor’s Equipment
(Operations), including spare parts therefore;
(b) Installation All Risks Insurance
Covering physical loss or damage to the New Facility at the Site occurring prior
to the Completion of the New Facility, with an extended maintenance coverage
for the Contractor’s liability in respect of any loss or damage occurring during the
Defect Liability Period while the Contractor is on the Site for the purpose of
performing its obligations during the Defect Liability Period;
(c) Third Party Liability Insurance
Covering bodily injury or death suffered by Third Parties, including the Owner’s
personnel, and loss of or damage to property occurring in connection with the
Services;
(d) Professional Liability Insurance
Covering loss or damage by reason of professional negligence in the design,
construction and operation of the Site and New Facility;
(e) Automobile Liability Insurance
Covering use of all vehicles used by the Contractor or its Subcontractors, whether
or not owned by them, in connection with the Services and execution of the
Contract;
(f) Workers’ Compensation
In accordance with the requirements of the Applicable Law;
(g) Owner’s Liability
In accordance with the requirements of the Applicable Law; and
(h) Other Insurance
Such other insurance as may be set out in the SCC.


(2) The Owner shall be named as co-insured under all insurance policies taken out by
the Contractor pursuant to GC Section 9.6(1), except for the Third Party Liability,
Workers’ Compensation and Owner’s Liability Insurances, and the Contractor’s
Subcontractors shall be named as co-insureds under all insurance policies taken
out by the Contractor pursuant to GC Section 9.6(1), except for the Cargo
Insurance During Transport, Workers’ Compensation and Owner’s Liability
Insurances. All insurers’ rights of subrogation against such co-insureds for losses
or claims arising out of the performance of the Contract shall be waived under
such policies.
(3) The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner certificates of insurance, or copies of
the insurance policies, as evidence that the required policies are in full force and
effect. The certificates shall provide that no less than 21 days’ notice shall be
given to the Owner by insurers prior to cancellation or material modification of a
policy.
(4) The Contractor shall ensure that, where applicable, the Subcontractors take out
and maintain in effect adequate insurance policies for their employees and
vehicles and for work executed by them under the Contract, unless such
Subcontractors are covered by the policies taken out by the Contractor.
(5) If the Contractor fails to take out or maintain in effect the insurances referred to in
GC Section 9.6(1), the Owner may take out and maintain in effect any such
insurances and may from time to time deduct from any amount due the Contractor
under the Contract any premium that the Owner shall have paid to the insurer, or
may otherwise recover such amount as a debt due from the Contractor.
(6) Unless otherwise provided in the Contract, the Contractor shall prepare and
conduct all and any claims made under the policies affected by it pursuant to this
GC Section 9.6, and all monies payable by any insurers shall be paid to the
Contractor. The Owner shall give to the Contractor all such reasonable assistance
as may be required by the Contractor. With respect to insurance claims in which
the Owner’s interest is involved, the Contractor shall not give any release or make
any compromise with the insurer without the prior consent of the Owner.
(7) When each insurance premium has been paid, the Contractor shall submit a copy
of receipts to the Owner and shall notify the Owner’s Representative that it has
done so.
(8) The Contractor shall comply with the conditions stipulated in each of the
insurance policies. The Contractor shall make no material alteration to the terms
of any insurance without the prior approval of the Owner. If an insurer makes, or
purports to make, any such alteration, the Contractor shall notify the Owner
immediately.
(9) Nothing in this GC Section 9.6 limits the obligations, liabilities or responsibilities
of the Contractor, under the other terms of the Contract or otherwise. Any
amounts not insured or not recovered from the insurers shall be borne by the
Contractor.


9.7 Unforeseeable Physical Conditions
(1) In this GC Section 9.7, “physical conditions” means natural physical conditions
and man-made and other physical obstructions and pollutants, which the
Contractor encounters at the Site when performing of the Design-Build Services,
including sub-surface and hydrological conditions but excluding climatic
conditions.
(2) If the Contractor encounters adverse physical conditions which it considers to
have been Unforeseeable, the Contractor shall give notice to the Project Manager
as soon as practicable.
(3) The Contractor’s Notice pursuant to GC Section 9.7(2) shall describe the physical
conditions, so that they can be inspected by the Project Manager, and shall set out
the reasons why the Contractor considers them to be Unforeseeable. The
Contractor shall continue performing the Design-Build Services, using such
proper and reasonable measures as are appropriate for the physical conditions,
and shall comply with any instructions which the Project Manager may give. If an
instruction constitutes a Change GC Section 10.1.3 shall apply.
(4) If and to the extent that the Contractor encounters physical conditions which are
Unforeseeable, gives the notice required by GC Section 9.7(2), and suffers delay
or incurs Cost due to these conditions, the Contractor shall be entitled subject to
GC Section 1.9 to,
(a) an extension of time for any such delay, if completion is or will be
delayed, under GC Section 2.3.4; and
(b) payment of any such Cost, which shall be included in the Contract
Price.
(5) After receiving such notice and inspecting or investigating these physical
conditions, the Project Manager shall proceed in accordance with GC Section
7.2.6 to agree or determine,
(a) whether and to what extent these physical conditions were
Unforeseeable; and
(b) the amount of delay or Cost, if any, pursuant to GC Section 9.7(4).
(6) Before additional Cost is finally agreed or determined under GC Section 9.7(5),
the PIU, pursuant to GC Section 7.2.6, may also review whether other physical
conditions were more favorable than could reasonably have been foreseen when
the Contractor submitted the Bid. If and to the extent that these more favorable
conditions were encountered, the PIU may proceed in accordance with GC
Section 7.2.6 to agree or determine the reductions in Cost which were due to these
conditions, which may be included, as deductions, in the Contract Price. The net
effect of all adjustments under GC Section 9.7(4) (b) and all these reductions, for
all the physical conditions encountered on the Site, shall not result in a net
reduction in the Contract Price.


(7) The Project Manager may take account of any evidence of the physical conditions
foreseen by the Contractor when submitting the Bid, which may be made
available by the Contractor, but shall not be bound by any such evidence.
9.8 Force Majeure
(1) “Force Majeure” shall mean any event,

(a) beyond the reasonable control of the Owner or of the Contractor, as the
case may be; and
(b) which is unavoidable notwithstanding the reasonable care of the Party
affected.
(2) Force Majeure shall include the events listed below in this GC Section 9.8(2) if
the conditions set out in GC Section 9.8(1)(a) and (b) are satisfied:
(a) war, hostilities or warlike operations, whether a state of war be declared
or not, invasion, act of foreign enemy and civil war;
(b) rebellion, revolution, insurrection, mutiny, usurpation of civil or military
government, conspiracy, riot, civil commotion and terrorist acts;
(c) confiscation, nationalization, mobilization, commandeering or requisition
by or under the order of any government or de jure or de facto authority
or ruler or any other act or failure to act of any local state or national
government authority;
(d) strike, sabotage, lockout, embargo, import restriction, port congestion,
lack of usual means of public transportation and communication,
industrial dispute, shipwreck, shortage or restriction of power supply,
epidemics, quarantine and plague;
(e) earthquake, landslide, volcanic activity, fire, flood or inundation, tidal
wave, typhoon or cyclone, hurricane, storm, lightning, or other inclement
weather condition, nuclear and pressure waves or other natural or physical
disaster; and
(f) shortage of labour, materials or utilities where caused by circumstances
that are themselves Force Majeure.
(3) If the Parties are prevented, hindered or delayed from or in performing any of
their obligations under the Contract by an event of Force Majeure, then it shall
notify the other in writing of the occurrence of such event and the circumstances
thereof within 14 days after the occurrence of such event.
(4) The Party who has given such notice shall be excused from the performance or
punctual performance of its obligations under the Contract for so long as the
relevant event of Force Majeure continues and to the extent that such Party’s
performance is prevented, hindered or delayed. The Time for Completion shall be
extended in accordance with GC Section 2.3.4(1) for events of Force Majeure
during the Design-Build Period. If the Time for Completion is extended in


accordance with GC Section 2.3.4(1), the End Date shall be extended for a period
of time equal to the period of time during which the relevant event of Force
Majeure continued.
(5) The Party or Parties affected by the event of Force Majeure shall use reasonable
efforts to mitigate the effect thereof upon its or their performance of the Contract
and to fulfill its or their obligations under the Contract, but without prejudice to
either Party’s right to terminate the Contract under GC Sections 9.8(7) and 9.9(6).
(6) No delay or non-performance by either Party hereto caused by the occurrence of
any event of Force Majeure shall,
(a) constitute a default or breach of the Contract; or
(b) subject to GC Sections 9.4(2), 9.9(3) and 9.9(5), give rise to any claim for
damages or additional Cost occasioned thereby, if and to the extent that
such delay or non-performance is caused by the occurrence of an event of
Force Majeure.
(7) If the performance of the Contract is substantially prevented, hindered or delayed
for a single period of more than 60 days or an aggregate period of more than 120
days on account of one or more events of Force Majeure during the term of the
Contract, the Parties will attempt to develop a mutually satisfactory solution,
failing which either Party may terminate the Contract by giving a notice to the
other, but without prejudice to either Party’s right to terminate the Contract under
GC Section 9.9(6).
(8) In the event of termination pursuant to GC Section 9.8(7), the rights and
obligations of the Owner and the Contractor shall be as specified in GC Sections
11.2.1(2) and 11.2.2(1).
(9) Notwithstanding GC Section 9.8(6), Force Majeure shall not apply to any
obligation of the Owner to make payments to the Contractor herein.
9.9 War Risks
(1) “War Risks” shall mean any event specified in GC Section 9.8(2)(a) and (b) and
any explosion or impact of any mine, bomb, shell, grenade or other projectile,
missile, munitions or explosive of war, occurring or existing in or near the
Country.
(2) Notwithstanding anything contained in the Contract, the Contractor shall have no
liability whatsoever for or with respect to,
(a) destruction of or damage to the Site and Plant and Equipment or any part
thereof;
(b) destruction of or damage to property of the Owner or any Third Party; or
(c) injury or loss of life,


if such destruction, damage, injury or loss of life is caused by any War Risks, and
the Owner shall indemnify and hold the Contractor harmless from and against any
and all claims, liabilities, actions, lawsuits, damages, costs, charges or expenses
arising in consequence of or in connection with the same.
(3) If the Site, Existing Facility, New Facility or any Plant and Equipment,
Contractor’s Equipment (Design-Build), Contractor’s Equipment (Operations) or
any other property of the Contractor used or intended to be used for the purposes
of the Services sustains destruction or damage by reason of any War Risks, the
Owner shall pay the Contractor for,
i. any part of the New Facility or the Plant and Equipment so destroyed or
damaged, to the extent not already paid for by the Owner;
ii. replacing or making good any Contractor’s Equipment (Design-Build),
Contractor’s Equipment (Operations) or other property of the Contractor
so destroyed or damaged; and
iii. so far as may be required by the Owner, and as may be necessary for
completion of the Services, replacing or making good any such
destruction or damage to the Site, Existing Facility, New Facility or the
Plant and Equipment or any part thereof.
(4) If the Owner does not require the Contractor to replace or make good any such
destruction or damage to the Site, Existing Facility or New Facility, the Owner
shall either request a Change in accordance with GC Section 10.1 excluding the
performance of that part of the Existing Facility or New Facility thereby
destroyed or damaged or, where the loss, destruction or damage affects a
substantial part of the Site, Existing Facility or New Facility, shall terminate the
Contract, pursuant to GC Section 11.2.1.
(5) Notwithstanding anything contained in the Contract, the Owner shall pay the
Contractor for any increased Costs that are in any way attributable to, consequent
on, resulting from, or in any way connected with any War Risks, if the Contractor
notifies the Owner in writing of any such increased Cost as soon as practicable.
(6) If, during the term of the Contract, any War Risks occur that financially or
otherwise materially affect the execution of the Contract by the Contractor, the
Contractor shall use its reasonable efforts to execute the Contract with due and
proper consideration given to the safety of its and its Subcontractors’ personnel
engaged in the work on the Services. If the execution of the Services becomes
impossible or is substantially prevented for a single period of more than 60 days
or an aggregate period of more than 120 days on account of any War Risks, the
Parties will attempt to develop a mutually satisfactory solution, failing which
either Party may terminate the Contract by giving a notice to the other.
(7) In the event of termination pursuant to GC Section 9.9(4) or 9.9(6), the rights and
obligations of the Owner and the Contractor shall be as specified in GC Section
11.2.1(2) and 11.2.2(1).


9.10 Change in Laws and Regulations
If, after a date which 30 days is prior to the Submission Deadline in the Bidding
Documents, in the Country, any law, regulation, ordinance, order or by-law having the
force of law is enacted, promulgated, abrogated or changed, which shall be deemed to
include any change in interpretation or application by the competent authorities, that
subsequently affects the costs and expenses of the Contractor or the Time for
Completion, the Contract Price shall be correspondingly increased or decreased, or the
Time for Completion shall be reasonably adjusted to the extent that the Contractor has
thereby been affected in the performance of any of its obligations under the Contract.
Notwithstanding the foregoing, such additional or reduced costs shall not be separately
paid or credited if the same has already been accounted for in the Contract Price
adjustment provisions where applicable, in accordance with the SCC.
9.11 Patent Indemnity
9.11.1 Indemnity by Contractor
The Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and its employees and
officers from and against any and all suits, actions or administrative proceedings,
claims, demands, losses, damages, costs, and expenses of whatsoever nature, including
attorney’s fees and expenses, which the Owner may suffer as a result of any
infringement or alleged infringement by the Contractor, Subcontractors, or their
employees, agents, or representatives, of any patent, utility model, registered design,
trademark, copyright or other intellectual property right registered or otherwise existing.
9.11.2 Notice of Claim
(1) If any proceedings are brought or any claim is made against the Owner arising out
of the matters referred to in GC Section 9.11.1, the Owner shall promptly give the
Contractor a notice thereof, and the Contractor may at its own expense and in the
Owner’s name conduct such proceedings or claim and any negotiations for the
settlement of any such proceedings or claim.
(2) If the Contractor fails to notify the Owner no later than 30 days after receipt of
such notice that it intends to conduct any such proceedings or claim, then the
Owner shall be free to conduct the same on its own behalf. Unless the Contractor
has so failed to notify the Owner no later than the 30 day period, the Owner shall
make no admission that may be prejudicial to the defense of any such proceedings
or claim.
(3) The Owner shall, at the Contractor’s request, give all available assistance to the
Contractor in conducting such proceedings or claim, and shall be reimbursed by
the Contractor for all reasonable expenses incurred in so doing.


9.11.3 Indemnity by Owner
The Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor and its employees, officers
and Subcontractors from and against any and all suits, actions or administrative
proceedings, claims, demands, losses, damages, costs, and expenses of whatsoever
nature, including attorney’s fees and expenses, which the Contractor may suffer as a
result of any infringement or alleged infringement by the Owner of any patent, utility
model, registered design, trademark, copyright or other intellectual property right
registered or otherwise existing at the Effective Date arising out of or in connection with
any design, data, drawing, specification, or other documents or materials provided or
designed by or on behalf of the Owner.
9.12 Functional Guarantees
(1) The Contractor guarantees that during the Tests and Inspection as set out in these
tender documents the New Facility and all parts thereof shall attain the effluent
parameters as specified in Vol. 1, Technical Specificationes, Chapter 4.1, subject
to and upon the conditions therein specified.
(2) If, for reasons attributable to the Contractor, the minimum level of the Functional
Guarantees are not met either in whole or in part, the Contractor shall at its cost
and expense make any such changes, modifications or additions to the New
Facility or any part thereof as may be necessary to meet at least the minimum
level of the Functional Guarantees. The Contractor shall notify the Owner upon
completion of the necessary changes, modifications or additions, and shall request
the Owner to repeat the applicable Tests and Inspection until the minimum level
of the Functional Guarantees has been met. If the Contractor eventually fails to
meet the minimum level of Functional Guarantees, the Owner may consider
termination of the Contract, pursuant to GC Section 11.2.3.
(3) If, for any reasons attributable to the Contractor, the Functional Guarantees are
not attained either in whole or in part, but the minimum level of the Functional
Guarantees is met, the Contractor shall, at the Contractor’s option, either
(a) make such changes, modifications or additions to the New Facility or any
part thereof that are necessary to attain the Functional Guarantees at its
cost and expense, and shall request the Owner to repeat the Tests and
Inspection; or
(b) pay liquidated damages to the Owner in respect of the failure to meet the
Functional Guarantees in accordance with the provisions of SCC.
(4) The payment of liquidated damages under GC Section 9.12(3) up to the limitation
of liability specified in the SCC, shall completely satisfy the Contractor’s
guarantees under GC Section 9.12(3), and the Contractor shall have no further
liability whatsoever to the Owner in respect thereof.


10. ARTICLE 10 – CHANGE IN CONTRACT ELEMENTS
10.1 Change to the Design-Build Services
10.1.1 Introducing a Change
(1) Subject to GC Sections 10.1.2(6) and 10.1.2(10), the Owner shall have the right to
propose, and subsequently require, that the Project Manager order the Contractor
from time to time during the performance of the Contract to make any change,
modification, addition or deletion to, in or from the Design-Build Services (the
“Change”), provided that such Change falls within the general scope of the
Design-Build Services and does not constitute unrelated work and that it is
technically practicable, taking into account both the state of advancement of the
Design-Build Services and the technical compatibility of the Change envisaged
with the nature of the Design-Build Services as specified in the Contract.
(2) The Contractor may from time to time during its performance of the Contract
propose to the Owner, with a copy to the Project Manager, any Change that the
Contractor considers necessary or desirable to improve the quality, efficiency or
safety of the Design-Build Services. The Owner may at its discretion approve or
reject any Change proposed by the Contractor.
(3) Notwithstanding GC Section 10.1.1(1) and 10.1.1(2), no change made necessary
because of any default of the Contractor in the performance of its obligations
under the Contract shall be deemed to be a Change, and such change shall not
result in any adjustment of the Contract Price or the Time for Completion.
(4) The procedure on how to proceed with and execute Changes is specified in GC
Section 10.1.2 and 10.1.3, and the Project Manager shall provide Contractor with
further details and sample forms on the Change procedures prior to the Design-
Build Starting Date.
10.1.2 Changes Originating from Owner
(1) If the Owner proposes a Change pursuant to GC Section 10.1.1(1), it shall send to
the Contractor a “Request for Change Proposal,” requiring the Contractor to
prepare and furnish to the Project Manager as soon as reasonably practicable a
“Change Proposal,” which shall include the following:
(a) brief description of the Change;
(b) effect on the Time for Completion;
(c) estimated cost of the Change; and
(d) effect on any other provisions of the Contract.
(2) Prior to preparing and submitting the Change Proposal, the Contractor shall
submit to the Project Manager an “Estimate for Change Proposal,” which shall be
an estimate of the cost of preparing and submitting the Change Proposal.


(3) Upon receipt of the Contractor’s Estimate for Change Proposal, the Owner shall,
(a) accept the Contractor’s estimate with instructions to the Contractor to
proceed with the preparation of the Change Proposal;
(b) advise the Contractor of any part of its Estimate for Change Proposal that
is unacceptable and request the Contractor to review its estimate; or
(c) advise the Contractor that the Owner does not intend to proceed with the
Change.
(4) Upon receipt of the Owner’s instruction to proceed under GC Section 10.1.2(3)
(a) (the “Change Order”), the Contractor shall, with proper expedition, proceed
with the preparation of the Change Proposal, in accordance with GC Section
10.1.2(1).
(5) The pricing of any Change shall, as far as practicable, be calculated in accordance
with the prices included in the Contract. If such prices are inequitable, the Parties
thereto shall agree on specific rates for the valuation of the Change.
(6) If, before or during the preparation of the Change Proposal, it becomes apparent
that the aggregate effect of compliance therewith and with all other Change
Orders that have already become binding upon the Contractor under this GC
Section 10.1 would be to increase or decrease the Contract Price by more than 10
per cent, the Contractor may give a written notice of objection thereto prior to
furnishing the Change Proposal. If the Owner accepts the Contractor’s objection,
the Owner shall withdraw the proposed Change and shall notify the Contractor in
writing thereof.
(7) The Contractor’s failure to object pursuant to GC Section 10.1.2(6) shall neither
affect its right to object to any subsequent requested Changes or Change Orders
herein, nor affect its right to take into account, when making such subsequent
objection, the percentage increase or decrease in the Contract Price that any
Change not objected to by the Contractor represents.
(8) Upon receipt of the Change Proposal, the Owner and the Contractor shall
mutually agree upon all matters therein contained. No later than 14 days after
such agreement, the Owner shall, if it intends to proceed with the Change, issue
the Contractor with a Change Order.
(9) If the Owner decides not to proceed with the Change for whatever reason, it shall
notify the Contractor prior to the expiration of 14 days after the agreement on the
Change. Under such circumstances, the Contractor shall be entitled to
reimbursement of all costs reasonably incurred by it in the preparation of the
Change Proposal, provided that these do not exceed the amount given by the
Contractor in its Estimate for Change Proposal submitted in accordance with GC
Section 10.1.2(2).
(10) If the Owner and the Contractor cannot reach agreement on the price for the
Change, an equitable adjustment to the Time for Completion, or any other matters
identified in the Change Proposal, the Owner may nevertheless instruct the


Contractor to proceed with the Change by issue of a “Pending Agreement Change

Order.”
(11) Upon receipt of a Pending Agreement Change Order, the Contractor shall
immediately proceed with effecting the Changes covered by such Order. The
parties shall thereafter attempt to reach agreement on the outstanding issues under
the Change Proposal.
(12) If the Parties cannot reach agreement prior to the expiration of 60 days after the
date of issue of the Pending Agreement Change Order, then the matter may be
referred to the Adjudicator in accordance with the provisions of GC Section 1.6.1.
10.1.3 Changes Originating from Contractor
(1) If the Contractor proposes a Change pursuant to GC Section 10.1.1(2), the

Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager written “Application for Change
Proposal,” giving reasons for the proposed Change and including the information
specified in GC Section 10.1.2(1).
(2) Upon receipt of the Application for Change Proposal, the Parties shall follow the
procedures outlined in GC Sections 10.1.2(8) and 10.1.2(10). If the Owner
chooses not to proceed, the Contractor shall not be entitled to recover the costs of
preparing the Application for Change Proposal.
10.1.4 Payment in Applicable Currencies
If the Contract provides for payment of the Contract Price in more than one currency,
then whenever a Change is agreed, approved or determined pursuant to GC Section
10.1.2 or 10.1.3, the amount payable in each of the applicable currencies shall be
specified. For this purpose, reference shall be made to the actual or expected currency
proportions of the Cost of the Change, and to the proportions of various currencies
specified for payment of the Contract Price.
10.1.5 Design-Build Period
GC Sections 10.1.1 to 10.1.4 shall apply during only the Design-Build Period.
10.2 Change to the Operations and Maintenance Services
a. Except as specifically provided in GC Section 10.2(2) or elsewhere in the

Contract, the Contractor shall make no claim whatsoever for any adjustment to
the Contract Price during the New Operations Period.
b. The Contractor or the Owner may request an adjustment to the Monthly
Operations Payment in accordance with the SCC. The Contractor shall submit a
request for an adjustment pursuant to this GC Section 10.2 to the MPUDC
Managing Director.


11. ARTICLE 11 – SUSPENSION AND TERMINATION
11.1 Suspension
11.1.1 Suspension by the Owner
(1) The MPUDC, as applicable, by notice to the Contractor, can order the Contractor
to suspend performance of any or all of its obligations under the Contract. Such
notice shall specify the obligation of which performance is to be suspended, the
effective date of the suspension and the reasons therefor. The Contractor shall
thereupon suspend performance of such obligation, except those obligations
necessary for the care or preservation of the Site, Existing Facility or New
Facility, until ordered in writing to resume such performance by the MPUDC, as
applicable.
(2) If, by virtue of a suspension order given by MPUDC, as applicable, other than by
reason of the Contractor’s default or breach of the Contract, the Contractor’s
performance of any of its obligations is suspended for an aggregate period of
more than 90 days, then at any time thereafter and provided that at that time such
performance is still suspended, the Contractor may give a notice to the MPUDC,
requiring that the Owner shall, no later than 30 days after the Owner’s receipt of
the notice, order the resumption of such performance or request and subsequently
order a Change in accordance with GC Section 10.1, excluding the performance
of the suspended obligations from the Contract.
(3) If the Owner fails to order the resumption of performance in accordance with GC
Section 11.1.1(2), the Contractor may, by a further notice to the MPUDC, elect to
treat the suspension, where it affects a part only of the Services, as a deletion of
such part in accordance with GC Section 10.1 or, where it affects the whole of the
Services, as termination of the Contract pursuant to GC Section 11.2.1.
11.1.2 Suspension by the Contractor
(1) If, the Owner has,

(a) failed to pay the Contractor any sum due under the Contract within the
period specified in the Contract;
(b) failed to approve any invoice or supporting documents without just cause
under the Contract; or
(c) has committed a substantial breach of the Contract,
The Contractor may give a notice to the Owner that requires payment of such
sum, with interest thereon as stipulated in GC Section 5.2(3) requires approval of
an invoice or supporting documents, or specifies a breach and requires the Owner
to remedy the same, as the case may be.


(2) If the Owner fails to pay the sums required by the Contractor in accordance with
GC Section 11.1.2(1) or fails to remedy the breach or take steps to remedy the
breach no later than 14 days after receipt of the Contractor’s notice, then the
Contractor may, upon giving 14 days’ notice to the Owner, suspend performance
of all or any of its obligations under the Contract, or, in the case of the Design-
Build Services, reduce the Contractor’s rate of progress.
(3) If the Contractor is unable to carry out any of its obligations under the Contract
for any reason attributable to the Owner, including the Owner’s failure to provide
possession of or access to the Site or other areas in accordance with GC Section
4.2, then the Contractor may, upon giving 14 days’ notice to the Owner, suspend
performance of all or any of its obligations under the Contract, or, in the case of
the Design-Build Services, reduce the Contractor’s rate of progress.
(4) If the Contractor’s performance of its obligations is suspended or the rate of
progress is reduced pursuant to this GC Section 11.1.2, then the Time for
Completion shall be extended in accordance with GC Section 2.3.4, and
additional Costs incurred by the Contractor as a result of such suspension or
reduction shall be paid by the Owner to the Contractor in addition to the Contract
Price, except in the case of suspension order or reduction in the rate of progress
by reason of the Contractor’s default or breach of the Contract.
During the period of suspension, the Contractor shall not remove from the Site or
New Facility any Plant and Equipment, Contractor’s Equipment (Design-Build),
Contractor’s Equipment (Operations), or any part of the New Facility, without the
prior written consent of the Owner.
11.2 Termination
11.2.1 Termination for Owner’s Convenience
(1) The Owner may at any time terminate the Contract for any reason by giving the
Contractor a notice of termination that refers to this GC Section 11.2.1(1).
(2) Upon receipt of the notice of termination under GC Section 11.2.1(1),
(a) the Contractor shall, either immediately or upon the date specified in the
notice of termination,
(i) cease all further work, except for such work as the Owner may
specify in the notice of termination for the sole purpose of
protecting that part of the Facility already executed, or any work
required to leave the Site in a clean and safe condition;
(ii) terminate all Subcontracts; and
(iii) remove all Contractor’s Equipment (Design-Build) and, except if the
Owner asserts its rights pursuant to GC Section 9.3.1(5), Contractor’s
Equipment (Operations) from the Site, repatriate the Contractor’s
Personnel and its Subcontractors’ personnel from the Site, remove from


the Site any wreckage, rubbish and debris of any kind, and leave the
whole of the Site in a clean and safe condition; and
(b) the Contractor, subject to the payment specified in GC Section 11.2.2,
shall,
(i) deliver to the Owner the parts of the New Facility executed by the
Contractor up to the date of termination; and
(ii) deliver to the Owner all the Contract Records, including the
Design-Build Documents, prepared by the Contractor or its
Subcontractors as at the date of termination.
11.2.2 Payment upon Termination by the Owner for Convenience
(1) Upon termination of this Contract pursuant to GC Section 11.2.1, the Owner shall
make only the following payments to the Contractor,
(a) any portion of the Contract Price payable to the Contractor for Services
satisfactorily performed prior to the date of termination and calculated as
set out in GC Section 5.2;
(b) the Costs reasonably incurred by the Contractor in the removal of the
Contractor’s Equipment (Design-Build) and, except if the Owner asserts
its rights pursuant to GC Section 9.3.1(5), Contractor’s Equipment
(Operations) from the Site and in the repatriation of the Contractor’s
Personnel and its Subcontractors’ personnel;
(c) any amounts required to be paid by the Contractor to its Subcontractors in
connection with the termination of any Subcontracts, including any
reasonable cancellation charges;
(d) the reasonable Costs incurred by the Contractor in protecting the Site,
Existing Facility and New Facility and leaving the Site in a clean and safe
condition pursuant to GC Section 11.2.1(2)(a)(i); and
(e) the reasonable Cost of satisfying all other obligations, commitments and
claims that the Contractor may in good faith have undertaken with Third
Parties in connection with the Contract and that are not covered by GC
Section 11.2.2(1).
(2) The Contractor acknowledges that the only payments to be made to the
Contractor on termination by the Owner are set out in this GC Section 11.2.2. The
Contractor shall not make a claim for lost or foregone profits, revenues,
consequential damages or any other costs, damages, expenses or losses of any
kind as a result of or in connection with the termination of this Contract.


11.2.3 Termination for Contractor’s Default
(1) The Owner, without prejudice to any other rights or remedies it may possess, may
terminate the Contract forthwith in the following circumstances, by giving a
notice of termination and its reasons therefore to the Contractor, referring to this
GC Section 11.2.3(1):
(a) If the Contractor becomes bankrupt or insolvent, has a receiving order
issued against it, compounds with its creditors, or, if the Contractor is a
Council, a resolution is passed or order is made for its winding up, other
than a voluntary liquidation for the purposes of amalgamation or
reconstruction, a receiver is appointed over any part of its undertaking or
assets, or if the Contractor takes or suffers any other analogous action in
consequence of debt;
(b) If the Contractor assigns or transfers the Contract or any right or interest
therein in violation of the provision of GC Section 1.7; or
If the Contractor, in the judgment of the Owner has engaged in corrupt or
fraudulent practices in competing for or in executing the Contract for the
purpose of this GC Section 11.2.3(1)I,
(2) If the Contractor,
a) has abandoned or repudiated the Contract;
b) has without valid reason failed to commence work on the Site, Existing
Facility or New Facility promptly or has suspended, other than pursuant
to GC Section 11.1.1(2), the progress of Contract performance for more
than 30 days after receiving a written instruction from the Owner to
proceed
c) persistently fails to carry out the Services in accordance with the Contract
or persistently neglects to carry out its obligations under the Contract
without just cause; or
d) refuses or is unable to provide sufficient materials, services, labour or
personnel to perform the Services
then the Owner may, without prejudice to any other rights it may possess under
the Contract, give a notice to the Contractor stating the nature of the default and
requiring the Contractor to remedy the same. If the Contractor fails to remedy or
to take steps to remedy the same within 14 days after its receipt of such notice,
then the Owner may terminate the Contract forthwith by giving a notice of
termination to the Contractor that refers to this GC Section 11.2.3(2)3) Upon
receipt of the notice of termination under GC Sections 11.2.3(1) or 11.2.3(2) the
Contractor shall, either immediately or upon such date as is specified in the notice
of termination,
i. cease all further work, except for such work as the Owner may specify in
the notice of termination for the sole purpose of protecting that part of the
Site, Existing Facility and New Facility already executed, or any work


required to leave the Site, Existing Facility and New Facility in a clean
and safe condition;
ii. terminate all Subcontracts;
iii. deliver to the Owner the parts of the New Facility executed by the
iv. deliver to the Owner all Contract Records, including the Design-Build
Documents, prepared by the Contractor or its Subcontractors as of the
date of termination
(3) The Owner may enter the New Facility and upon the Site, expel the Contractor,
and, if the New Facility is not completed, the Owner may complete the Facility
itself or by employing any Third Party at the risk and cost of the Contractor. The
Owner may take over and use and with an indemnification by the Owner for all
liability including damage or injury to persons arising out of the Owner’s use of
such equipment, any Contractor's Equipment (Design-Build) and Contractor's
Equipment (Operations) owned by the Contractor and on the Site in connection
with the Existing Facility and New Facility for such reasonable period as the
Owner considers expedient for the completion of the New Facility. Upon
completion of the New Facility or at such earlier date as the Owner thinks
appropriate, the Owner shall give notice to the Contractor that such Contractor’s
Equipment (Design-Build) and, except if the Owner asserts its rights pursuant to
GC Section 9.3.1(5), Contractor’s Equipment (Operations) will be returned to the
Contractor at or near the Site and shall return such Contractor’s Equipment
(Design-Build) and Contractor’s Equipment (Operations) to the Contractor in
accordance with such notice. The Contractor shall thereafter without delay and at
its cost remove or arrange removal of the same from the Site.
11.2.4 Payment upon Termination for Contractor’s Default
(1) If the Contract is terminated pursuant to GC Section 11.2.3 and, subject to GC

Section 11.2.4(2), the Contractor shall be entitled to be paid,
(a) any portion of the Contract Price payable to the Contractor for Services
satisfactorily performed prior to the date of termination;
(b) the value of any unused or partially used Plant and Equipment on the Site,
except to the extent that such Plant and Equipment have already been paid
for by the Owner; and
(c) the Costs, if any, incurred by the Contractor in protecting the Site and
New Facility and in leaving the Site in a clean and safe condition
pursuant to GC Section 11.2.3(3)(a).
Any sums due the Owner from the Contractor accruing prior to the date of
termination shall be deducted from the amount to be paid to the Contractor under
this Contract.


(2) If the Owner completes the New Facility pursuant to GC Section 11.2.3(4), the
cost of completing the New Facility by the Owner shall be determined, and, if the
sum that the Contractor is entitled to be paid, pursuant to GC Section 11.2.4(1),
plus the reasonable costs incurred by the Owner in completing the New Facility,
exceeds the Contract Price, the Contractor shall be liable for such excess as
follows;
(i) if such excess is greater than the sums due the Contractor under GC
Section 11.2.4(1), the Contractor shall pay the balance to the Owner; or
(ii) if such excess is less than the sums due the Contractor under GC Section
11.2.4(1), the Owner shall pay the balance to the Contractor.
(3) The Parties shall agree in writing on the computation described in GC Section
11.2.4(2) and the manner in which any sums shall be paid.
11.2.5 Termination by Contractor
(1) If,
(a) the Owner has,
(i) failed to pay the Contractor any sum due under the Contract
within the specified period, has failed to approve any invoice or
supporting documents without just cause pursuant to the
corresponding Terms and Procedures of Payment Appendix, or
commits a substantial breach of the Contract, the Contractor may
give a notice to the Owner that requires payment of such sum,
with interest thereon as stipulated in GC Section 5.2(3), requires
approval of such invoice or supporting documents, or specifies
the breach and requires the Owner to remedy the same, as the
case may be; and
(ii) failed to pay such sum together with such interest, failed to
approve such invoice or supporting documents or give its reasons
for withholding such approval, failed to remedy the breach or
take steps to remedy the breach no later than 14 days after receipt
of the Contractor’s notice; or
(b) the Contractor is unable to carry out any of its obligations under the
Contract for any reason attributable to the Owner, including the Owner’s
failure to provide possession of or access to the Site or other areas,
then the Contractor may give a notice to the Owner thereof, and if the
Owner has failed to pay the outstanding sum, to approve the invoice or
supporting documents, to give its reasons for withholding such approval,
or to remedy the breach no later than 30 days after receipt of such notice,
or if the Contractor is still unable to carry out any of its obligations under
the Contract for any reason attributable to the Owner no later than 30 days
after receipt of the notice, the Contractor may, by a further notice to the


Owner referring to this GC Section 11.2.5(1), forthwith terminate the

Contract.
(2) The Contractor may terminate the Contract forthwith by giving a notice to the
Owner to that effect, referring to this GC Section 11.2.5(2),
(a) if the Owner becomes bankrupt or insolvent;
(b) has a receiving order issued against it, or compounds with its creditors;
(c) being a Council, if a resolution is passed or order is made for its winding
up, other than a voluntary liquidation for the purposes of amalgamation or
reconstruction; or
(d) a receiver is appointed over any part of its undertaking or assets, or if the
Owner takes or suffers any other analogous action in consequence of
debt.
(3) If the Contract is terminated under GC Section 11.2.5(1) or 11.2.5(2), then,
(a) the Contractor shall immediately,
(i) cease all further work, except for such work as may be necessary
for the purpose of protecting that part of the Site, Existing Facility
and New Facility already executed, or any work required to leave
the Site in a clean and safe condition; and
(ii) terminate all Subcontracts; and
(b) the Contractor, subject to the payment specified in GC Section 11.2.6,
shall
(i) deliver to the Owner the parts of the New Facility executed by the
(ii) deliver to the Owner all Contract Records, including the Design-
Build Documents, in existence as of the date of termination
(4) Termination by the Contractor pursuant to this GC Section 11.2.5 is without
prejudice to any other rights or remedies of the Contractor that may be exercised
in lieu of or in addition to rights conferred by this GC Section 11.2.5.
11.2.6 Payment upon Termination by Contractor
If the Contract is terminated under GC Sections 11.2.5(1) or 11.2.5(2), the Owner shall
pay to the Contractor all payments specified in GC Section 11.2.2(1), and reasonable
compensation for all loss, except for loss of profit, or damage sustained by the
Contractor arising out of, in connection with or in consequence of such termination.


11.2.7 General Provisions – Termination
(1) In this GC Section 11.2, the expression “New Facility executed” shall include all
work executed, Services provided, and all Plant and Equipment acquired, or subject to a
legally binding obligation to purchase by the Contractor and used or intended to be used
for the purpose of the performing the Services, up to and including the date of
termination.
(2) In this GC Section 11.2, in calculating any monies due from the Owner to the
Contractor, account shall be taken of,
(a) any sum previously paid by the Owner to the Contractor under the Contract,
including any advance payment paid pursuant to the Terms and Procedures of
Payment Appendix;
(b) any sum owing by the Contractor to the Owner under the Contract, including
Liquidated Damages – Delay or liquidated damages calculated pursuant to GC
Section 5.4.

VOLUME 2 SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT (SCC)

APPENDIX 1 SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT TO GENERAL

CONDITIONS
FOR THE CONTRACT
FOR
DISTRICT BARWANI OF MADHYA PRADESH AND OPERATE AND MAINTAIN
THE BUILT SYSTEM FOR 10 YEARS


APPENDIX 1: SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT
SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT (SCC)
The following Special Conditions of Contract (SCC) shall supplement the General
Conditions. Whenever there is a conflict, the provisions herein shall prevail over those
in the General Conditions. The corresponding article and section numbers of the General
Conditions are indicated in parentheses.
1. Definitions (GC Section 1.1)

Country: The country is India.
2. Language (GC Section 1.3.1(1))

The language is English.
3. Shareholder’s Representative (GC Section 1.3.10(1))

NA
4. Shareholder’s Equity (GC Section 1.3.10(4))

NA
5. Survival of Obligations (GC Section 1.3.14)

Upon termination or expiration of the Contract, the following rights and obligations of
the Parties survive:
(a) Such rights and obligations as may have accrued or to which the Parties may be
entitled on the date of termination, and any rights which a Party may have under
Applicable Law;
(b) The Contractor’s obligations with respect to Contract Records, accounting and
auditing set out in GC Section 1.8;
(c) The Contractor’s obligations with respect to Transition Assistance set out in GC
Section 2.4.2;
(d) The Parties’ rights and obligations with respect to copyright set out in GC Section
6.1;


(e) The Contractor’s obligations of confidentiality as set out in GC Section 6.2;

(f) The Parties’ rights and obligations with respect to defect liability set out in GC
Section 9.1; and
(g) The Parties’ rights and obligations with respect to indemnification set out in GC
Section 9.5.
6. Notice (GC Section 1.4)

The Owner’s address for notice is:
The Engineer in Chief

M.P. Urban Development Company Ltd.
1st Floor, Rajya Krishi and Gramin Sahkari Bank
8 Jail Road, Arera Hills
Bhopal, Madhya Pradesh 462011
E-mail: einc@mpudc.co.in
The Contractor’s address for notice is:
[Name, address, telephone and facsimile numbers]
7. Adjudicator (GC Section 1.6.1(1))

Address: To be given after the selection of Adjudicator by the contractor from the
panel of MPUDC.
8. Appeal Against the Adjudicator’s decision (GC section 1.6.1(3))

If the Adjudicator has rendered its decision within the 30 day time limit, and no notice
of intention to commence arbitration has been given by either the Owner or the
Contractor prior to the expiration of 30 days after the reference of the dispute to the
Adjudicator, the Adjudicator’s decision shall become final and binding upon the Owner
and the Contractor. Any decision that has become final and binding shall be
implemented by the Parties forthwith.
9. Adjudicator’s Fee (GC Section 1.6.1(4))

The Adjudicator will be paid a fee of INR5,000/- (INR Five thousand only) per sitting
(per day) plus reimbursable expenses as on actuals. This fee will be paid by the
contractor and owner equally (i..e. 50% of the fee is to be paid by contractor and 50%
by the owner)


10. Appointing Authority for New Adjudicator (GC Section 1.6.1(5))

The Appointing Authority is: Managing Director through Engineer-in-Chief, MPUDC.
The panel of adjudicators prepared by MPUDC shall be shared with the contractor. The
contractor shall be free to choose any of the adjudicators in the panel. However, in case
the contractor doesn’t agree to any of the adjudicators in the panel of MPUDC, the
MPUDC shall appoint an adjudicator in mutual consent with the contractor.
11. Rules of Procedure for Arbitration Proceedings (GC Section 1.6.2(3))

11.1 For a foreign Contractor:
In the case of a dispute between the Employer and the Contractor, the dispute shall be
settled by international arbitration conducted in accordance with the ICC. The
arbitration procedure shall be administered by the ICC International Court of
Arbitration.
Place of arbitration: [should be in a neutral venue (i.e., not in the Purchaser’s country)]
11.2 For a Local Contractor:
All disputes arising in connection with the Contract shall be finally settled under the
Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996. The venue will be Bhopal, Madhya Pradesh,
India and arbitration shall be conducted in the language for communications defined in
GC Clause 1.3.1.
12: End Date (GC Section 2.1.2(a))

For the purposes of GC Section 2.1.2(a), the applicable date shall be 144 months after
the Effective Date.
13. Design-Build Starting Date (GC Section 2.1.3(1))

The Design-Build Starting Date shall be no later than 14days after the Effective Date.
13.1 Conditions Precedent

The Contract shall come into force and be binding on the Parties from the date of its
execution (Effective Date). Provided that, the term of this Contract shall be deemed to
commence on the date when all the conditions precedent specified in this Clause 13
have been either satisfied or waived in accordance with the provisions hereof (Design
Build Starting Date).
13.1.1 Following are the Conditions Precedent to be fulfilled by the Contractor

a) Provide a list of its key Design- Build staff, as identified in the Bid, being
available and ready to commence work in the Sewage Collection and Treatment Area.


The Key Personnel as listed in Schedule 1.4 (H) may not be changed. However, in the
event that a change in a nominated Key Personnel is inevitable, this shall be subject to
the prior written approval of the MPUDC. Provided that, the person who replaces any
member of the Key Personnel shall have at least equivalent or higher experience and
qualifications as the original member of the Key Personnel who is being so replaced.
13.1.2 Following are the Conditions Precedent to be fulfilled by the SNP and BNP
and / or MPUDC:
a) from the Effective Date, provide the Contractor access to the Sewage Collection
and Treatment Area to facilitate the Contractor to meet review and design obligations in
accordance with the requirements of the Project;
b) obtain environment clearances required for construction of Sewage Treatment
Plant; and hand over free of encumbrances all land required for all other components of
the Sewage Collection and Treatment system
13.2 Fulfilment of Conditions Precedent

The Parties will fulfil their respective Conditions Precedent as set forth hereinabove
within 4 weeks from the Effective Date. Provided that the Parties may, by mutual
agreement, extend the time period, up to an aggregate period of 6 (six) weeks from the
Effective Date, for compliance of any of the Conditions Precedent.
Each Party shall promptly inform the other Party when any Condition Precedent for
which it is responsible has been satisfied.
13.3 Waiver of Conditions Precedent

Upon request by the Party responsible for fulfillment of a particular Condition Precedent
in writing, the other Party may at its sole discretion waive, in writing, the performance
by the Party of any of its Conditions.
14. Time for Completion (GC Section 2.3.2)

The Design-Build Phase shall be completed within 24 months and Operations and
Maintenance Phase shall be for 120 months. The total Contract Period shall be for 144
months.
15. Delay of Completion - Liquidated Damages (GC Section 2.3.6(2))

In the event that the Contractor fails to complete the performance of the Design-Build
Services by the Time for Completion, the Contractor shall pay Liquidated Damages –
0.05% per day of each corresponding payment milestone based on the approved Work
Plan for Design-Build Phase.


16. Maximum Liquidated Damages (GC Section 2.3.6(2))

The Maximum Liquidated Damages – maximum amount of liquidated damages for the
whole of the works is 10(ten) percent of final contract price of the respective agreement
(Part A or Part B).
17. Bonus (GC Section 2.3.6(5))

There will be no bonus for early completion of Design Built Period.
18. Design-Build Period – Special Operations Requirements (GCSection 2.3.7)

There is no existing sewerage facility at town level. However, there are some existing
septic tanks which will get connected to the network and some which will need to be
covered under septage management. The Contractor is not required to operate any
sewerage facility, if any existing, during Design Build Period.
19. Access to the Site (GC Section 4.2)

The site will be handed over to the contractor at least 15 days before the commencement
of construction at relevant site. The contractor is required to make suitable arrangements
to secure the site till the construction is complete.
20. Contract Price (GC Section 5.1)

Contract Price Adjustment Provision for Design-Build Phase is as specified below:
a. Variation in quantity - The details given in the BoQ Appendix are based on
surveys and investigations conducted by the owner. However, the Contractor shall
submit his bid after detailed assessment of site conditions and other related conditions,
especially for IPS and STP, and based on his own assessment the contractor shall
confirm the quantities. Hence, variation in quantities for any item shall not be
admissible except for pipes. However, in exceptional circumstances or due to change of
scope or locations or other changes by the owner, after submission of the details by the
Contractor, which will have an impact on the price, variation may be considered. In such
case, the PMCwill verify the Contractor’s submission and a decision based on the
findings of the PMC and PIU will be taken by the Engineer-in-Chief, MPUDC.
b. Variation in quantities as mentioned in the price bid, beyond 10% for any type of
pipe diameter would be adjusted as per pre-determined rates provided in the bid
documents. Diameter of pipes as mentioned in the price bid will remain unchanged. Pipe
lengths would be measured.


c. Variation in price –No variation in price shall be applicable during design build
period. Variation in Price shall be adjusted on the running bills during Operation and
Maintenance Period. The work plan showing different milestones to be completed in the
design-build phase should be as per the bid documents. No variation shall be adjusted on
the running bills related to milestones to be completed within design built period, if such
milestones or parts thereof are completed after stipulated design built period, unless the
Owner has authorized an extension of time due to force majeure or the reasons not
attributable to the Contractor.
The Contract Price adjustment provisions for Design-Build should follow the
procedures under GCC Section 10 for the Operations and Maintenance phase as per the
Volume 4.
21. Terms of Payment – Interest (GC Section 5.2(3))
For the purposes of GC Section 5.2(3) and the Terms and Procedures of Payment
Appendix, the interest rate that will apply to amounts owed in local currency, is 4 (Four)
percent per year for the period of delay until payment has been made in full. In case, the
owner has any objection on the bill, the owner shall ask for a clarification from the
Contractor within 10 days of receipt of the bill. The contractor shall reply within 7 days
of receipt of such query from the owner. However, if the owner is not satisfied with the
reply, the owner shall notify the contractor within 7 days of receipt of the answer.
The request of interest on the delayed payment will only be considered:
a) for the time period beyond the period given in the bid document
b) if the contractor has given a satisfactory reply to the queries of the owner.
22. Currency (GC Section 5.2(4))

The currency(ies) and their proportion for Payments shall be made as per the Accepted
Contract Amount in the Letter of Acceptance.
23. Performance Incentive Compensation (GC Section 5.3)

Not Applicable.
24. Liquidated Damages – Operations (GC Section 5.4)

Not Applicable. However payment during Operations is linked to certain Performance
standard as detailed in Fourth Schedule of OMSA.
25. Performance Security (GC Section 5.5.1(2)(a))
(a) The Contractor shall initially provide a Performance Security in the amount of 5
(five) percent of the Design-Build Price valid upto 180 days beyond defect liability
period (completion of third year of the O&M period); and


(b) The Contractor shall also provide a Performance Security in the amount of 10
(ten) percent of the Operations and Maintenance Price (valid up to 180 days beyond the
O&M period of 10 years) for the full Operations and Maintenance Period at least 15
days in advance of the completion and commissioning of the works as per the DBSA,
otherwise 5% performance security pursuant to ITB Section 6.5 of Design Build phase
and 5 % Retention Money amount pursuant to Clause 1.2 of Appendix–2 - Terms and
Procedures of Payment of Design Build phase shall be forfeited.
(c) The Performance Security provided for Design and Build phase shall be released
no later than 90 days after the expiry of defect liability period (completion of third year
of the O&M period). Hold back amount (Retention money) pursuant to Clause 1.2 of
Appendix–2 - Terms and Procedures of Payment of Design Build phase shall be paid no
later than 90 days after the expiry of the fifth year of the O&M period.
(d) The Performance Security submitted by the Contractor for O&M period shall be
released in installments-- After the expiry of each year starting from the end of fifth year
and up to the expiry of 8th year each @ 5% part of the total performance security for
O&M, 10% after the expiry of ninth year and remaining shall be released on the
completion of O & M period of 10 years. The instalments will be released within 90
days of expiry of stated period and the last instalment shall be released within 120 days
of the expiry of O&M period and transfer of assets as desired under the contract.
(e) Any additional performance security due to unbalanced bid will have to be
provided by the contractor before signing the agreement and such performance security
shall be released only after the completion of the O&M period.
26. Taxes and Duties (GC Section 5.6)
The contract Price shall be inclusive of all duties, royalties, levies and taxes as of the
date 28 days prior to the deadline for submission of bids except Goods and Services Tax
(GST). The amount of applicable GST will be reimbursed to the Contractor. Import
duties shall be part of the Contract Price and will not be reimbursed separately. The
owner shall not pay any further duties, taxes royalties and levies except for GST. The
contract price must be inclusive of the import duty and all other taxes except GST. The
contractor shall submit the details of import duty with each bill though it will not be
reimbursable.
27. The Project Manager shall be the Project Manager of the Project
Implementation Unit of MPUDC (PIU) for the Contract period.
The PIU shall obtain the approval of the Owner before exercising its authority in the
following circumstances:
(a) approving assignment of the Contract, or any part thereof, under GC Section 1.7;
(b) determining an extension of the Time for Completion under GC Section 2.3.4;
(c) certifying additional costs determined under GC Sections 1.9(8)(b) or 9.7; and
(d) issuing a Change Order under GC Section 10.1.2, except:
(i) in an emergency situation, as reasonably determined by the PIU; or
(ii) if such Change Order would increase the Contract Price by more than 1%.


28. Contractor’s Representative (GC Section 8.1.2(1))

The Contractor’s Representative is: ______________________
29. Existing Staff (GC Section 8.5)

Contractor is not obliged to retain owner's staff.
30. Maximum Percentage of Subcontracting (GC Section 8.6(1))

25%
31. Defect Liability Period (GC Section 9.1(2))

The Defect Liability Period shall be 36 months from the date of commissioning.
The Contractor, as part of his contractual obligations, shall create the following
Funds:
- The Asset Replacement Fund to ensure the necessary funding to facilitate the
timely replacement or renewal of major items of plant during the operation phase.
- The Maintenance Replacement Fund, being security for the procuring entity, by
withholding money from the Contractor to ensure that he carries out essential
maintenance required under the Contract.
32. Insurance (GC Section 9.6)
The contractor is required to insure for the following
Title Construction period Operations Period
Contractor 1. Contractors all risk insurance 1. Insurance for third party
procured policy liability
insurance 2. Insurance for third party 2. Insurance for claims for
liability personal injury or death for
3. Insurance for contractors Contractor's employees
equipment 3. Insurance for machinery
4. Insurance for workers of breakdown
the contractors 4. Insurance for equipment and

assets of Contractor for all
5. Professional Liability risks.
Insurance of 20% of the
5. All risk insurance for STP,
contract amount including
capex but excluding Provisional all SPS and Customer Care
Sum Centers
Minimum cover shall be for replacement cost of assets. The Insurance policy shall be
endorsed in the joint names of the Owner and Contractor.


33. Changes to Design-Build Services and Operations and Maintenance Services

(GC Section 10.1and 10.2)
a. The Contractor shall be responsible for provision of house sewer connections, and
related assets to enable excess connections up to 5% of the number of connections
within the project area as specified in Appendix 3C of the GC, provided that the design
capacity of STP and related infrastructure is not exceeded. Such connections shall be
deemed to be part of the scheme and the Contractor shall be responsible for providing
service as per the conditions of the Contract.
b. In case new areas are to be added or if the number of connections to be added are
beyond 5% of the connections or 10% of the sewerage network as specified in Appendix
3, the Contractor shall be responsible for preparing a detailed cost estimate which will
be verified by the PIU with the help of Barwani NP. The Owner and Contractor shall
mutually agree on a price for additional Design-Build component as also for Operation
Services for such additional connections.
c. The provision for Contract Price Adjustment, as specified in Appendix 3 shall be
applicable to Operations and Maintenance Services.
34. Payment upon Termination for Contractor’s Default (GC 11.2.4 (2))
Penalty shall be levied on the contractor which includes
a. forfeiture of Retention Money, and
b. 20% of the value of work not completed as estimated by the Owner, and
c. Liquidated damages as per section 2.3.6 of GC and 15 and 16 of SCC, or
Performance Guarantee including Additional Performance Guarantee, if any, as per
clause 5.5.1 of GC, whichever is higher
(i) if the above penalty in total is greater than the sums due the Contractor under GC
Section 11.2.4(1), the Contractor shall pay the balance to the Owner; or
(ii) if such penalty in total is less than the sums due the Contractor under GC Section
11.2.4(1), the Owner shall pay the balance to the Contractor.
35. Corrupt and Fraudulent Practices

The Employer and the contractors, suppliers or consultants must observe the highest
standard of ethics during contract procurement and performance.
The bidders and contractors, suppliers and consultants shall sign a Declaration of
Undertaking as attached to these Particular Conditions and will permit the Bank to
inspect their accounts and records relating to the procurement and performance of the
Bank-financed contracts, and to have them audited by auditors appointed by the Bank.
The Bank shall have the right to take any action it deems appropriate to check that these
ethics rules are observed and reserves, in particular,the rights to:


a) reject a proposal for a contract award if it is established that during the selection
process the bidder that is recommended for the award has been convicted of corruption,
directly or by means of in view of being awarded the Contract;
b) declare misprocurement when it is established that, at any time,the Employer, the
contractor, the supplier, the consultant or its representatives have engaged in acts of
corruption, fraud or anti-competitive practices during the contract procurement or
performance without the Employer having taken appropriate action in due time
satisfactory to the Bank to remedy the situation, including by failing to inform the Bank
at the time they knew of such practices.
For the purposes of this provision, the terms set forth below are defined as follows:
a) Corruption of a public officer means:
• the act of promising, offering or giving to a public officer, directly or indirectly, an
undue advantage of any kind for himself or for another person or entity, for such
public officer to act or refrain from acting in his official capacity; or
• the act by which a public officer solicits or accepts, directly or indirectly, an undue
advantage of any kind for himself or for another person or entity, for such public
officer to act or refrain from acting in his official capacity.
b) A "public officer" shall be construed as meaning
• any person who holds a legislative, executive, administrative or judicial mandate
(within the State of the Employer) regardless of whether that person was nominated
or elected, regardless of the permanent or temporary, paid or unpaid nature of the
position and regardless of the hierarchical level the person occupies;
• any other person who performs a public function, including fora State institution or
a State-owned company, or who provides a public service;
• any other person defined as a public officer by the national laws of the Employer.
c) Corruption of a private person means:
• the act of promising, offering or giving to any person other than a public officer,
directly or indirectly, an undue advantage of any kind for himself or for another
person or entity, for such person to perform or refrain from performing any actin
breach of its legal, contractual or professional obligations; or
• the act by which any person other than a public officer solicits or accepts, directly or
indirectly, an undue advantage of any kind for himself or for another person or
entity, for such person to perform or refrain from performing any act in breach of its
legal, contractual or professional obligations.
d) Fraud means any dishonest conduct (act or omission), whether or not it constitutes a
criminal offence, deliberately intended to deceive others, to intentionally conceal items,
to violate or vitiate consent, to circumvent legal or regulatory requirements and/or to
violate internal rules in order to obtain illegitimate benefits.
e) Anti-competitive practices means:


• any concerted or implied practices which have as their objector effect the
prevention, restriction or distortion of competition within a marketplace, especially
where they
(i) limit access to the marketplace or free exercise of competition by other undertakings,
(ii) prevent free, competition-driven price determination by artificially causing price
increases or decreases,
restrict or control production, markets, investments or technical progress; or
(iv) divide up market shares or sources of supply.
• any abuse by one undertaking or a group of undertakings which hold a dominant
position on an internal market or on a substantial part of it.
• any practice whereby prices are quoted or set unreasonably low, the object of which
is to eliminate an undertaking or any of its products.

VOLUME 2 CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT

APPENDIX 2 TO THE GENERAL CONDITIONS
FOR A CONTRACT
TO


APPENDIX 2: TERMS AND PROCEDURES OF PAYMENT
SECTION-1 Terms of Payment

(A) General
In accordance with the provisions of GC Section 5.2, the Owner shall pay the Contractor
in the manner and at the times set out in this Terms and Procedures of Payment
Appendix. The Milestone payments would be based on the certification by the Project
Manager. The payments for Operation and Maintenance Services shall be paid by
MPUDC based on verification/confirmation of performance indicators by Project
Manager of the concerned PIU.
All the payments shall be recommended by the Project Manager of PIUto State level
PMU of MPUDC. The PIU shall get the opinion of PMC before recommending for
payment to MPUDC.
(B) Advance Payment

Advance payment as an interest free loan for mobilization and cash flow support
for a maximum amount equal to 10% of the design-build price stipulated in the contract
shall be paid to the Contractor against ‘Bank guarantee for Advance Payment, for the
same amount in two installments as under subject to the provisions of this contract.
(i) 5 % within 30 days of effective date of contract.
(ii) 5 % on mobilization at the site including setting up of the Contractor’s office,
deployment of manpower and machinery and equipment for the contract and with the
full satisfaction of the Project Manager.
The advance payment made to the Contractor shall be recovered by the owner at the rate
of 15% of the each running bill amount from each bill to design build services submitted
by the Contractor for the payment till the entire amount of advance payment has been
recovered, always provided that the advance shall be completely repaid prior to the
expiry of the original time for completion.
(C) Payment of Design-Build Price

(a) The Contractor shall submit invoices for progressive payment for design build
services as per prices listed in Contractor’s Price Schedule Appendix on completion of
specified milestones given in item- wise break-up of payment schedule tabulated below.

Bill Description of BOQ item Performance level of works % payment Time

period
No.
from
effective
date
1 1.1 Topographical survey work On completion of detailed field Nil 60 days
using Total Station, preparation survey works and submission of
and finalization of survey the final report thereof
drawings, maps and CADD files,
On approval of the relevant 100% 120 days
preparation of working drawing
detailed design and drawings
Total 100%
1.2 Conducting customer door to door On completion of detailed 70% 60 days
survey for establishing the household survey works and
location, type of property, number submission of the final
of households, families, report thereof
population, use of water,
After the connections are done 30% 730 days
methodology of sewage disposal
and linking it with customer ledger as per the final report at the end
of Design Build period
Total 100%
1.3 Geotechnical Investigations On completion of detailed Nil 45 days
including Standard Penetration investigations and submission
Test, Cohesive Property and Angle of the final report thereof
of Repose (Cᶲ) and other relevant
investigations for STP and SPS,
and pipe alignment if required. detailed design and drawings
Total 100%
1.4 Testing Raw Sewage Quality to On submission of the report Nil 60 days
confirm treatability
detailed design and drawings
Total 100%
2 (a) Design of the IPS/SPS, On approval from MPUDC of the 80% 120 days
submission of design and detailed design and drawings
drawings after getting approval including technical specification
from Government Engineering of works for the complete project.
College/IIT/NIT
On proven consistency of the 20% 730 days
(b) Design of all the STPs, design throughout the Design-
submission of design and Build period. (After
drawings after getting approval commissioning and testing of the
from Government Engineering whole system)
College/IIT/NIT Total 100%
(c) Design Review, Design of

Pumping Main submission of
design and drawings after getting
approval from Government
Engineering College/IIT/NIT
(d) Design Review, Design of
pumps at SPS and STP,
submission of design and
drawings, getting approval from
Government Engineering College/
IIT/NIT
(e) Design Review, Design of


period
No.
from
effective
date
Sewage Collection network,
manholes, submission of
design and drawings, getting
approval from Government
Engineering College/IIT/NIT
3 Develop and establish customer On submission and approval of 100% 250 days
grievance redress system, the report
suggest improvements in the
On establishment of Grievance 100% 500 days
existing systems
Redress System and centers
4A, GRAVITY SEWER LAYING and On supply and delivery of pipe 60% of the The work
4E, invoice value is to be
4F, PUMPING /RISING MAINS: of pipes complete
4G DWC HDPE and NON PRESSURE d within
On completion of laying including 70% of the
RCC PIPES FOR GRAVITY 640 days
all necessary earth work, quoted value from
SEWER, DI K-7/ DI K-9 FOR supporting structures, anchor of pipe laying effective
PUMPING MAINS restoration of any property amount minus
date. The
damaged during laying of pipe, payment made payments
Dewatering, where required, railway/ road crossing, if any, all against supply indicated
barricading, traffic diversion, complete of pipes plus
are to be
80% of the made on
Excavation, providing, laying and cost of pro rata
supply of DWC HDPE/NP3/DI K9 excava-tion basis.
pipes of renowned make duly tested Back filling, disposal of surplus 10% of the
inclusive of all taxes related to earth and Temporary shifting quoted value
central, state and municipal, and restoration of water mains/ of pipe laying
sewer lines plus 80% of
inclusive of excise dutyall duties, cost of back
inspection charges, transportation filling
charges, transit insurance, loading/ Sectional Testing 10% of the
unloading and stacking at site / store quoted value
etc, Backfilling, Road restoration of pipe laying
plus 10% of
and testing and commissioning the cost of
complete.1 excava-tion
and back
Non pressure RCC pipe (NP3) RCC filling
Socket & spigot pipes with rubber
After finishing, testing and 10% of the 730 days
gasket joint including testing of successful trial run of work quoted value
joints shall be conforming to of pipe laying
IS:458-1988, ISI marked laying as plus 10% of
the cost of
per IS:783:1985 excava-tion
and back
PUMPING MAINS of socket &
filling
spigot centrifugally cast (spun)
Total 100%
Ductile iron pressure pipes with
inside cement mortar lining (class
K-9) shall be conforming to IS:
8329/2000 with suitable rubber


period
No.
from
effective
date
gasket (push on)joints as per

IS:5382/85 including testing of joint
(laying conforming to IS
12288:1987)
(The payments shall be treated on
pro rata basis)
4B Construction of man hole with Completion of Construction 85%
chamber cover as per of Manholes
Same as
specification (shall be treated on
Sectional Testing 5% above
pro rata basis)
Final Testing & 10% 730 days
Commissioning sewer
Total 100%
4C House Connection Providing and making 100% Based on
house connection running
(shall be treated on pro rata basis)
bills
4D Road Restoration (shall be treated Restoration of road as required 100% Based on
at pro rata basis) after laying of pipes running
bills
5 Flushing System and Providing, Supplying 70% of the 650 days
Arrangements: Sewer Cleaning Invoice Value
Equipment
Testing and acceptance by 100%of the 730 days
the owner total price
minus
payment
already made
Total 100%
6a 1 No Sewage Treatment Plants of After excavation of foundation 5% 200
total cumulative capacity of 9 and casting of bed concrete of days
MLD complete (civil works) all components of STP and
ancillary structures
After completing foundation and 20% 300
up to ground level of all days
components of STP including
inlet chamber distribution
chamber screen channel valve
chambers etc.
After completing all 20% 450
components of STP including
pump house up to roof slab with
footthe
All bridge etc works of all the
finishing 20% 590
components of STP including days
fixing of manifold, valves,
specials, gantry girder etc.
After completion of all 25% 650
development works related to days


period
No.
from
effective
date
STP including roads, plantation,
boundary wall etc
After testing and successful trial 10% 730
run of work days
Total 100%
6b Sewage Treatment Plant complete 60% of 300
electro-mechanical works, On Supply of E & M items invoice value days
including providing,
90% of the 600
installation, testing and
commissioning quoted value days
On Installation of E & M Items minus
payment
already made
On final testing, 10% 730
commissioning and trial run days
Total 100%
7 Sewage Pumping Station After excavation of foundation 10% 350 days
and and casting of bed concrete
Construction of Wet Well
8 After completing foundation and 30% 400 days
cum Pump House
up to ground level including inlet
(The given payment terms shall chamber distribution chamber
apply to each pumping station screen channel valve chambers etc.
and each pumping station shall be After completing pump house up 30% 450 days
treated separately) to roof slab with foot bridge
After fixing of many fold,, 20% 550 days
valves, specials, gantry girder
After finishing, testing and 10% 730 days
successful trial run of work
Total 100%
9 Electro-mechanical works 60% of 600 days
for SPS On Supply of E & M items invoice value
Supply. Providing and installation 90% of the 680 days
of Electro-mechanical works at quoted value
SPS On Installation of E & M Items minus
payment
already made
On final testing, commissioning 10% 730 days
and trial run
Total 100%
10 Environmental and Social After submission of Air/Noise 100% With the
Safeguards Implementation Quality Monitoring report as per interim
Implementation of EMP bills and
excluding the above items. final bill
as per
actuals

The time period is indicative. The final milesyones will be as per the schedule provided
by the contractor and approved by the owner.
1 The contractor is required to prepare estimates for the restoration of structures such as
ramps built over the drains/utilities, if any needed, and get the same approved by the
Project Manager. The Project Manager shall ensure that the demolition of the referred
structure/ shifting of the referred utility is unavaodable for the completion of works.
However, the ESMP applies to all such cases. The Project Manager shall require the
PMC to verify and evaluate the proposal of the contractor. For this purpose, the PMC
shall submit to the Project Manager its finding and recommendation within fifteen days
of submission of proposal by the Contractor. Any damage due to negligence of
contractor shall not be covered under this provision and the contractor has to borne
repairs of such damages.
2 Payment for house connections during O&M period shall be done on pro-rata basis.
The Price Adjustment to the cost of house connection will be applicable during
Operation and Maintenance period.
The following payment conditions apply to the O&M period:
1. The contractor shall be paid during O&M period in accordance to the OMSA;
2. The Variable cost for energy shall be arrived on the basis of actual consumption
of energy and the actual bill raised by the Electric Supply company. The contractor shall
be paying the bill in total and shall be reimbursed by the owner. The rate of Rs 5 per
KwH is for calculation purpose for this bid. This is further clarified that the consumption
of energy shall be within the guaranteed consumption per cum as quoted by the bidder.
In case, the consumption increases, the owner shall pay within the limits of guaranteed
consumption per cum and the rest shall have to be borne by the contractor.
3. The Variable cost for chemicals shall be worked out as per the actual waste water
treated.
4. The cost of sludge disposal shall be based on the actual quantity of dry sludge
disposed (in cum) at landfill after processing as described in Appendix 3A(3). The
quantity of sludge being disposed shall be measured at STP only.
(b) The Project Manager shall check the details given in the Contractor’s invoice by
following MPUDC’s procedures such as measurements, check measurements, approving
deviations etc. and certify such invoices for payment within 15 days of their receipt. The
Project Manager will certify the amounts to be paid to the Contractor after making
deductions on account of advance payments, recoveries, Hold back, liquidated damages-
delay, and other adjustments in terms of the contract and deduction of taxes at source, as
applicable under the law. However, the Project Manager of PIU shall take the opinion of
the PMC before certifying the amounts to be paid to contractor.
Payment against the certified invoice shall be made by the owner no later than 45 days
after receipt of such certified invoice from the Contractor. In the event that the owner
fails to make any payment by its respective due date the owner shall pay to the


Contractor interest on the account of such delayed payment at the rate shown in the SCC
for the period of delay until payment has been made in full.
NOTE: In case, the contractor does not comply with the requirements of EMP, he shall
be issued a written warning by the Project Manager, and he shall be under obligation to
comply the required EMP safeguards within 7 days of the issuance of such warning.
However, if the contractor fails to comply, a penalty of an amount equal to the cost of
EMP safeguards, which have not been complied with, shall be levied on the contractor.
Payment against delivery of non-perishable materials (pipes, pumps, motors, starters,
cables, electric panels etc.) brought to site will be limited, in accordance with the
payment schedule provided above and will be subject to following conditions:
1. The quantities of materials are not excessive and shall be certified by the
Contractor to be utilized within a reasonable time (not exceeding 3 months).
2. The materials are in accordance with the requirement and technical specifications.
3. The materials have been delivered to site and are properly stored and protected
against damage or deterioration to the satisfaction of the owner.
4. The Contractor’s records of the requirement, orders, receipt and use of materials
are kept in a form approved by the owner and such records shall be available for
inspection by the owner.
5. Ownership of such materials shall be deemed to vest in the owner for which the
Contractor shall submit an indemnity bond in a format provided by the owner.
6. The payments for Pipe work shall be made on pro-rata basis.
Any such material that is unlikely to be utilized for the design build services will be
taken back by the Contractor after the owner has adjusted the payment already made for
such materials from the invoice(s) submitted by the Contractor. The amounts to be paid
to the Contractor during the Design-Build Period in accordance with Section I(C) of this
Terms and Procedures of Payment Appendix shall include all costs and expenses of the
Contractor in building the New Facility and providing the Design-Build Services,
including all costs and expenses relating to the Plant and Equipment.
(D) Retention Money
The Owner shall deduct from each payment to the Contractor a Retention Money in the
amount of 5 (five) percent of each payment to the Contractor. The Retention Money
amount may be released to the Contractor, subject to the Contractor furnishing an
irrevocable Bank Guarantee from the nationalized or scheduled commercial Bank
equivalent to the Retention Money amount to be released for the specific period. The
Owner shall pay the amounts held back no later than 90 days after the expiry of the first
year of O&M period.
(E) Payment during the Operation and Maintenance Period
In respect of the Fee for Operations and Maintenance Services listed on the Price
Schedule, after the Operations Starting Date, the Owner shall pay the Contractor as per


the provisions set out in Volume 4 of Appendix 4 (Operation and Maintenance Services
Agreement.
(F) Currencies: Payments will be made by the Owner as per the provisions of the
Letter/Notice of Acceptance.


SECTION 2 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES
The procedures to be followed in applying for certification and making payments shall
be as follows:
A) During the Design-Build Period, payment shall be dealt with in accordance with
Section I (C)
B) During Operation and Maintenance Period
During the total Operations and maintenance Period, the Contractor shall deliver an
invoice quarterly and no later than 15 days after the end of the quarter to which the
invoice applies, along with supporting documents to the MPUDC as specified below:
(a) a statement of performance for every month of the quarter for which the payment is
sought, in duplicate addressed to the MPUDC, (with an additional copy to the
Hoshangabad NP), along-with supporting evidence of achievement of Performance
Standards, for the period for which Contractor Fee is sought;
(b) any other documents that may be required by the MPUDC
C) The MPUDC shall require the PMC to validate the achievement of Performance
Standards submitted by the Contractor. For this purpose, the PMC shall submit to the
MPUDC, a certification validating the achievement of the Performance Standards within
fifteen days of submission of invoices by the Contractor. Only upon receiving such
certification from the PMC, the MPUDC will determine and intimate the Contractor of
the amount to be paid to the Contractor.
D) The MPUDC agrees to make the payments within 45 (forty five) days of
submission of the invoice along with all requisite documents, by the Contractor. In case
of delays in payment beyond such 45 (forty five) days, the Contractor will be entitled to
charge interest at the rate of 4 % per annum (max) on the outstanding amount for the
period exceeding 45 days (net of disputed claims, if any).


APPENDIX 3 TO THE GENERAL CONDITIONS
FOR A CONTRACT
TO



APPENDIX 3: CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT
SECTION 1- CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT
1.1 Contract Price Adjustment Formula

Price Adjustment for payment for Design-Build works: All Contractor payments for
Design-Build works under this Contract shall be governed in accordance to the
adjustments for change in costs as provided in GCC. No Contract price adjustment shall
be applicable for Design Build Price (Part A). However, the contract price adjustment
shall be applicable for O&M period and also in case of delay in works due to owner’s
fault during Design Built period. The following is the methodology to be adopted for
price adjustment:
The adjustment to be applied to the amount otherwise payable to the Contractor, as valued
in accordance with the appropriate Schedule and certified in Payment Certificates, shall
be determined from following formula:
Pn= A + B (Ln/Lo) + C (Cn/Co) + D (Fn/Fo) + E(Pn/Po)
Where-
“Pn” is the adjustment multiplier to be applied to the assessed contract value of the work
carried out in period “n”, this period shall be in month;
“A” is a fixed coefficient stated in the table of adjustment data, representing a non-
adjustable contractual payment;
“B”, “C”, “D”, and “E’ are the fixed coefficients, stated in the table of adjustment data,
representing the estimated proportion of various components;
“Ln”, “Cn”, “Fn”, and “Pn” are the current cost indices or reference price for period “n”
expressed in the currency of payment, each of which is applicable to the tabulated cost
element on 49 days prior to the last day of the period (to which the particular Payment
Certificate relates); and
“Lo”, “Co”, “Fo”, and “Po” are the base cost indices or reference price, expressed in the
currency of payment, each of which is applicable to the tabulated cost element on the
Base Date.
a. The cost indices or reference prices stated in Table A.1, table of adjustment data,
provided in Section 4, shall be used. If their source is in doubt, it shall be
determined by the Owner’s Representative. For this purpose, reference shall be
made to the values of the indices at stated dates for the purposes of clarification of
the source; although these dates (and thus these values) may not correspond to the
base cost indices.
b. Until such time as each current cost index is available, the Owner’s Representative
shall determine a provisional index for the issue of Interim Payment Certificates.
When a current cost index is available, the adjustment shall be recalculated
accordingly.


c. If the Contractor fails to complete the Design-Build works within the Time for
Completion, adjustment of prices thereafter shall be made using either (i) each
index or price applicable on the date 49 days prior to the expiry of the Time for
Completion of the Design-Build works, or (ii) the current index or price, whichever
is more favorable to the Owner.
d. The weightings (coefficients) for each of the factors of cost stated in the table(s) of
adjustment data shall only be adjusted if they have been rendered unreasonable,
unbalanced or inapplicable, as a result of Variations
e. The weightings (coefficients) for each of the factors of cost stated in the table(s) of
adjustment data shall only be adjusted if they have been rendered unreasonable,
unbalanced or inapplicable, as a result of Variations
Table A.1 – Payment for Design-Build Works

Index Source of Base Value Bidder’s Local
Index Description
Code Index and Date Currency Amount
A. Nonadjustable — — —
B. Labor Component (L): Reserve Indices applicable As per cost of Works

Bank of on 28 days prior to done
Consumer Price Index for
India deadline for bid
Industrial Workers for Bhopal,
submission
Madhya Pradesh
C. Cement (C): Reserve Indices applicable As per cost of Works

Bank of on 28 days prior to
Wholesale price index for
Cement and Lime submission
D. Ferrous Metals (F): Reserve Indices applicable As per cost of Works

Wholesale price index for Iron &
Steel (Sub-Group Basic Metals
submission
Alloys & Metals Products)
E. Plastic Products (P): Reserve Indices applicable As per cost of Works

Wholesale Price Index for Plastic
Products
submission
Total


The contract price adjustment for operation and maintenance Period shall be
applicable in the manner specified below:
Fixed O&M Fee
Price adjustment of Fixed O&M Fee payable to the Contractor during O&M would be
determined by the application of the following formula:
Pa = Pb * (a + b La + c Ma )
----- ----
Lb Mb
in which:
Pa = Adjusted price payable to the Contractor for Operations and Maintenance
Period;
Price as per bid (for the period of payment)
Pb=
a= Price component not adjusted for inflation (a = 0.15)
b= estimated percent of labour component in Fixed O&M component (b = 0.30)
c= estimated percent of material and consumables component in Fixed O&M
component (c = 0.30);
L 0, L1 =
labour indexes, CPI IW (Industrial Workers) for the BHOPAL; on the Base Date
and the date for adjustment, respectively
M0 , M1 = material indexes, WPI (published by RBI) on the Base Date and the date for
adjustment, respectively.
The Base Date for price adjustment shall be 20 days prior to the deadline for Bid
submission. Adjustment of the O&M price shall be done on the first day of each year of
the O&M period based on the indices prevailing on the last date of the previous calendar
month. The O&M price thus adjusted shall be applicable for the entire year.
Variable O & M Fee - Energy
Price adjustment of Variable O & M Fee - Energy payable to the Contractor during O&M
would be determined by the application of the following formula:
Pa = Pb* Ea
-----
Eb
in which:
Pa = adjustment of price payable to the Contractor for Operations and
Maintenance Period;
Price per Cu.m (or KL) for Variable O&M Fee-Energy (base price, as per
Pb = price bid);
energy cost as fixed by State Regulatory Authority on the Base Date and
Eb , Ea = the date for adjustment, respectively


Variable O & M Fee - Consumables

Price adjustment of Variable O & M Fee - Consumables payable to the Contractor during
O&M would be determined by the application of the following formula:
P a = P b* M a )
-----
Mb
in which:
Pa = adjustment of price payable to the Contractor for Operations and
Maintenance Period;
Pb = Price per Cu.mfor Variable O&M Fee (base price, as per price bid);
Mb , Ma = material indexes, WPI on the Base Date and the date for adjustment,
respectively.

Volume 3 – Technical
Specifications
AND DISPOSAL SYSTEM OF BARWANI AND OPERATE AND MAINTAIN THE
BUILT SYSTEM FOR 10 YEARS
VOLUME 3 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. Introduction 11

1.1 General 11
1.2 Project Objective 11
1.3 Stakeholders 12
1.4 Implementation Arrangements 12
1.5 Project Area 13
1.6 Climatic Conditions 15
1.7 Precipitation (Rainfalls) 16
1.8 General Topographical and Drainage Conditions 16
1.9 Hydro-geological and Geological Condition 17
1.10 Cultural Heritage 18
1.11 Existing Water Supply System 19
1.12 Existing Wastewater System 19
1.13 Proposed Wastewater Treatment Plant 20
2. Scope of Works 21

2.1 Design and Build (Part A) 21
2.2 Operation and Maintenance (Part B) 21
2.3 Technical Documentation 21
3. Particular Technical Specifications 23

3.1 Contractor’s Design and Engineering Scope of Work 23
3.2 Design Standards 25
3.2.1 Relevant Norms and Standards 26
3.2.2 Relevant Indian Laws 30
3.3 General Information 31
3.4 Design Services 32
3.4.1 General 32
3.4.2 Preparatory Work and Establishment of Design Data 36
3.4.3 Design of Works 38
3.5 Building and Construction Services 40
3.5.1 General 40
3.5.2 Establishment of Contractor's Camp and Working Sites 40
3.5.3 Site Work 41
3.5.4 Procurement and Transportation 43
3.6 Building Responsibilities 44
3.6.1 Temporary Supports, Structures and Utility Services 44
3.6.2 Document Review 44
3.6.3 Plant and Equipment 44
3.6.4 Documents at the Site 45
3.6.5 Use of the Sites and Sewage Collection and Treatment system 45
3.6.6 Setting Out 46
3.6.7 Quality Assurance 46
3.6.8 Contractor's Access Routes and Rights of Way during the Design-Build Period 47
3.6.9 Site Regulations and Safety 47
3.6.10 Contractor’s Equipment (Design-Build) and Site Clearance 48
3.6.11 Protection of the Environment 49
3.6.12 Security of the Site, Existing Facility and Sewage Collection and Treatment
System 50
3.6.13 Co-operation with other Authorities and Utilities 50
3.6.14 Physical Cultural Property 51


3.6.15 Emergency Work 51

3.6.16 Work at Night and on Holidays 52
3.6.17 Existing Facility Operation 52
3.7 Test and Inspection 52
3.7.1 General 52
3.7.2 Pre-Commissioning Tests 54
3.7.3 Guarantee Tests 54
3.7.4 Completion of the Sewage Collection and Treatment System 55
3.8 Commissioning 56
3.8.1 Tests on Commissioning 56
3.8.2 Operational Acceptance 57
3.9 Reporting during the Design Build Period 57
3.9.1 First Report (Inception Report) 57
3.9.2 Preliminary Design Report 58
3.9.3 Final Design Reports 58
3.9.4 Design-Build Progress Reports (Monthly Progress Report) 58
3.9.5 Quarterly Reports 59
3.9.6 Final Report 60
3.10 Replacement of Key Staff to be Deployed by the Contractor During the Design
Build Period 60
4. Sewerage Treatment Plant 61

4.1 General 61
4.1.1 City of Barwani 62
4.1.2 Scope of Work 63
4.1.3 Design Criteria 63
4.1.4 Design Sewage Flow 64
4.1.5 General Arrangement Rules at STP 65
4.1.6 Modular Construction 65
4.2 Process Description 66
4.2.1 Inlet Pump Station (Terminal Pumping Station) 66
4.2.2 Screen Building 69
4.2.3 Aerated Grit and Grease Trap 74
4.2.4 Sequencing Batch Reactor (SBR) Unit 77
4.2.5 Blower Building 85
4.2.6 Chlorination Equipment 90
4.2.7 Supernatant Pump Station 93
4.2.8 Sludge Thickener 95
4.2.9 Thickened Sludge Pump Station and Belt Filter 96
4.2.10 Office and Laboratory Building 100
4.2.11 Electrical, Instrumentation and Control 106
5. Mechanical Specifications 115

5.1 Machinery Guards, Labelling and Emergency Stop Devices 115
5.2 Suppression of noise 116
5.3 Lubrication 117
5.4 Metals 118
5.5 Glasfibre Reinforced Plastic (GRP) 118
5.6 Steel Constructions 118
5.7 Stainless Steel 119
5.8 Aluminium and Aluminium Alloys 120
5.9 Welding 120
5.9.1 Welding in General 120
5.9.2 Welding of Carbon Steel 121


5.9.3 Welding of Stainless Steel 121

5.10 Bolts 122
5.11 Pipe Work 122
5.11.1 PVC Pipes and Fittings 123
5.11.2 Sealing of Ducts 123
5.11.3 Pressure Pipes 123
5.11.4 Flanges and Gaskets 124
5.11.5 Pipe Work Supports 124
5.12 Lifting Equipment 125
5.13 Penstocks 125
5.14 Valves 127
5.14.1 Gate Valves/Sluice Valves 127
5.14.2 Non-return Valves 128
5.14.3 Butterfly Valves 129
5.15 Electric Actuators 130
5.15.1 General 130
5.15.2 Electric Motors 130
5.15.3 Sizing131
5.15.4 Limit and Torque Monitoring 131
5.15.5 Diagnosis 131
5.15.6 Motor and Local Controls 132
5.15.7 Anti-condensation heater 133
5.15.8 Hazardous Area Certifications and Enclosures 133
5.15.9 Hand Wheel 133
5.15.10 Bearings and Gears 134
5.15.11 Noise Level 134
5.15.12 Name Plates 134
5.15.13 Painting and Corrosion Protection 134
5.15.14 Inspection and Testing Manufacturer´s Work 135
5.15.15 Documentation 135
5.16 Pressure Vessels 135
5.17 Compressors 135
5.18 Machinery 136
5.19 Pumps 136
5.19.1 Centrifugal Pumps 136
5.19.2 Submersible Pumps 137
5.19.3 Progressive Cavity Pumps 139
5.19.4 Rotary Lobe Pumps 140
5.20 Climb and Safety Devices 140
6. Electrical Specifications 142

6.1 General 142
6.2 Standard Specifications 143
6.3 Documentation 143
6.4 Equipment and Installation 145
6.4.1 Distribution Units and Electrical Cabinets 145
6.4.2 Wiring System 146
6.4.3 Indoor Installation and Cabling 147
6.4.4 Outdoor Installation and Cabling 147
6.4.5 Environmental Conditions Equipment 148
6.4.6 Lightning Protection and Equipotential Bonding 148
6.4.7 Lighting 149
6.4.8 Spare Parts 149
6.5 Instrumentation, Measurement and Control 149


6.5.1 Operating Levels 149

6.5.2 Local Controlling Systems 150
6.5.3 Visualization 150
6.5.4 Data Storage 151
6.6 Test and Start-up 151
6.6.1 Factory Tests 151
6.6.2 Operating Tests 152
6.6.3 Start-up 152
7. Specifications Civil Works 153

7.1 Introduction 153
7.2 Setting out of the Works and Benchmarks 153
7.2.1 Record and Record Drawings 154
7.3 Control of the Works 155
7.3.1 Protection of Existing Structures and Utilities 155
7.3.2 Safety and Security on Site 155
7.3.3 Clean-up Work 155
7.3.4 Handling and Storage of Materials 156
7.3.5 Progress Photographs 156
7.3.6 Method Statements 156
7.4 Temporary Facilities 156
7.4.1 General 156
7.4.2 Sanitary Arrangements 157
7.4.3 Removal of Temporary Facilities 157
7.5 General Arrangements 157
7.5.1 Methods of Construction 157
7.5.2 Architectural Requirements 157
7.5.3 Thermal Performance 158
7.5.4 Access and Working Space 158
7.6 Structural Works 158
7.6.1 Structural Design and Analysis 158
7.6.2 Checking of Dimensions 159
7.6.3 Loading Conditions 159
7.6.4 Seismic Loading 159
7.6.5 Live Load 159
7.6.6 Water Pressure 160
7.6.7 Wind Load 160
7.6.8 Stresses Due to Temperature 160
7.6.9 Stability of Structure 161
7.7 Concrete Structures 161
7.7.1 General Standards 161
7.7.2 Member Thickness 161
7.7.3 Classification of Concrete Structure 161
7.7.4 Concrete Cover to Reinforcement 162
7.7.5 Intervals of Reinforcing Bars 162
7.7.6 Overlapping and Anchorage of Reinforcement 163
7.7.7 Waterstops and Sealants 163
7.7.8 Joints in Concrete Structures 163
7.7.9 Corrosion Protection of Concrete 164
7.7.10 Equipment Foundations and Vibration due to Machinery 165
7.7.11 Surface Finishes 165
7.7.12 Non-water retaining elements - 0.2mm Drawings 165
7.7.13 Channels and Pipelines 168
7.8 Materials 170


7.8.1 General 170

7.8.2 Concrete 170
7.8.3 Steelwork 175
7.8.4 Excavation 177
7.8.5 Filling 178
7.9 Concrete 180
7.9.1 Concrete Work – General 180
7.9.2 Control of Concrete Quality 182
7.9.3 Transport and Placing of Concrete 184
7.9.4 Surface Finish 187
7.9.5 Testing 188
7.10 Manhole and Ancillary Structures 189
7.10.1 Manholes 189
7.10.2 Ancillary Structures 190
7.10.3 Testing and Inspection 191
7.11 Building Works 194
7.11.1 Brick and Concrete Block Works 194
7.11.2 Indoor Plumbing Installation 195
7.11.3 Painting 196
7.12 Landscaping 199
7.12.1 General 199
7.12.2 Material 199
7.12.3 Existing trees 200
7.12.4 Implementation of landscaping 201
7.12.5 Plan requirements 203
8. Sewerage System 204

8.1 Pipe Specifications 204
8.1.1 RCC Pipe 204
8.1.2 Double Wall Corrugated Pipes 204
8.2 House Connections 211
8.2.1 House Connections Inside the Property 212
8.2.2 Process of Providing House Service Connections in Sewerage Projects 213
8.3 Ground Water Table 213
8.4 Manholes 213
8.5 Setting out of Works 214
8.6 Selection of Diversion Work 214
8.7 Blasting Operations 215
8.8 Disposal of Excavated Material 216
8.9 Investigations 217
8.10 Pumping Stations Specifications 217
8.10.1 General Requirements 218
8.10.2 Pipes and Fittings 218
8.10.3 Appurtenaces 219
8.10.4 Finishing and Painting 219
8.10.5 Testing of Sumpwell 220
8.10.6 Reinforces Concrete Works 220
8.10.7 Minimum Dimension and Shapes 221
8.10.8 Minimum Steel 222
8.10.9 Minimum Spacing of Reinforcement 222
8.10.10 Type of Reinforcing Steel 223
8.10.11 Exposed Surface 223
8.10.12 Curing of Concrete 223
8.10.13 Floor Finish 223


8.10.14 Removal of Form 223

8.10.15 Approval of Material 224
8.10.16 Proposed Pumping Stations 224
8.10.17 Sump and Pumps 225
8.10.18 Testing of Pumps at Manufacturers Premises 227
8.10.19 Electrical, Instrumentation and Control 227
9. Road Construction Specifications 228

9.1 Reinstatement of roads 228
9.2 Water Bound Macadam Sub-Base/Base 228
9.2.1 Materials 229
9.2.2 Construction Operations 232
9.2.3 Reconstruction of Macadam 235
9.2.4 Arrangement for Traffic 235
9.3 Priming of Base Course with Bituminous Primers 235
9.3.1 Materials 236
9.3.2 Viscosity 236
9.3.3 Quantity of Primer 236
9.3.4 Construction 236
9.3.5 Tack Coat 237
9.4 Single Coat Bituminous Surface Dressing 238
9.4.1 Materials 238
9.4.2 Construction Methods 239
9.4.3 Seal Coat 241
9.5 Construction of Concrete Roads 241
9.5.1 Materials 241
9.5.2 Water Content and Workability 242
9.6 Tools, Equipment and Appliances 243
9.6.1 Tools 243
9.6.2 Sub –base 244
9.6.3 Steel Forms 244
9.6.4 Joints 245
9.6.5 Transverse Joints 246
9.6.6 Longitudinal Joints 247
9.6.7 Construction 248
9.6.8 Control of Workability and Strength 250
9.6.9 Transporting and Placing of Concrete 251
9.6.10 Placement of Steel 251
9.6.11 Compaction and Finishing 252


TABLE OF ANNEXES
Annex 2 Layout House Connections
Annex 3 Layout STP 1 + 2
Annex 4 P&ID STP 1 + 2
Annex 6 Draft EMP
Annex 8 Detailed Project Report


PREAMBLE
The Technical Specifications described herein shall be read in conjunction with the other
sections of Bidding Documents.
a) General: The Technical Specifications covering the materials and the

workmanship aspects as well as method of measurements and payments are included in
this section. These specifications cover the items of civil and non-civil works coming
under scope of this document. All works shall be carried out in conformity with the same.
These specifications are not intended to cover the minute details. The works shall be
executed in accordance with good engineering practices followed for achieving high
standards of workmanship, thus ensuring safety and durability of the construction.
b) Inclusive Documents: The provisions of General Conditions of Contract and
Particular Conditions of Contract, those specified elsewhere in the bidding document, as
well as execution drawings and notes, or other specifications issued in writing by the
Project Manager shall also form part of the technical specifications of this contract.
c) Measurement and Payment: The methods of measurement and payment shall be as
described in the GCC, SCC and Appendix 2. Where specific definitions are not given, the
methods described in Bureau of Indian Standards (BIS) Code will be followed. Should
there be any detail of construction or materials which has not been referred to in the
Specifications or in the Bill of Quantities and Drawings but the necessity for which may
be implied or inferred there from, or which is usual or essential to the completion of the
work, the same shall be paid within the clauses of GCC and SCC.
d) The information given hereunder and provided elsewhere in these documents is
given in good faith by the Owner but the Contractor shall satisfy himself regarding all
aspects of site conditions and no claim whatsoever will be entertained on the plea that the
information supplied by the Owner is erroneous or insufficient.


1. Introduction
1.1 General
The Government of Madhya Pradesh (GoMP) through the Government of India

(“Borrower”) has received a loan from the Federal Republic of Germany through
KfW Development Bank (KfW) towards the cost of the project
“Madhya Pradesh Urban Sanitation and Environment Programme (MPUSEP)”
- SURVEY, REVIEW THE DESIGNS, REDESIGN WHERE NECESSARY
AND BUILD SEWAGE COLLECTION AND CONVEYANCE SYSTEM,
SEWAGE TREATMENT AND DISPOSAL SYSTEM OF BARWANI AND
OPERATE AND MAINTAIN THE BUILT SYSTEM FOR 10 YEARS-
and it intends to apply a portion of the loan to eligible payments under the
contract(s) resulting from the bidding for which this tender is conducted.
The M.P. Urban Development Company Limited MPUDC (“Employer”) issues
this Bidding Document to prospective bidders interested in submitting sealed
technical and financial bids for the Works described in this bidding documents.
Tendering is conducted through the international competitive Tendering
procedures and in accordance with KfW Guidelines for Procurement of Goods,
Works and associated Services in Financial Cooperation with Partner
Countries.
1.2 Project Objective
In order to sustainably improve the conditions of the Madhya Pradesh (MP)

water supply and sanitation sector, and to improve health status of population
and protection of environment, the Chief Minister of MP launched an ambitious
initiative called “Chief Minister’s Sanitation Mission 2025 which was merged
with the National programme “Clean India Mission”. Funds from the German
bilateral co-operation shall be allocated primarily to sanitation sector
infrastructure in Urban Local Bodies (ULBs). The GoMP will top up this
amount.
The overall objective of the project is to improve water supply and sanitation
services (WSS) for the population in selected urban areas in MP at affordable
cost. The project also contributes to environmental protection, and will have
positive effects on the socio-economic and health situation of the population,
planned urban development, investments for making the state slum-free, and
strengthen existing policies to achieve these goals. Aim of this project is to
improve water and sanitation systems in Barwani.


1.3 Stakeholders
The programme shall be implemented in cooperation with the Urban

Development and Housing Department (UDHD) which is the Executing Agency
(PEA) through its nascent MPUDC as the Project Implementation Agency (PIA).
The Programme cities (ULBs) are the final beneficiaries. MPUDC will manage
preparation and implementation of all urban infrastructure programmes,
including those co-financed by international financing institutions (IFI).
Other main project stakeholders comprise, inter alia:
 The District administrations,
 The Ministry of Agriculture,
 The State Pollution Control Board,
 The Public Works Department,
 The Public Health and Welfare Departments (at District levels),
 The Water Resources Department.
1.4 Implementation Arrangements
An integrated project cycle approach will be adopted for planning, implementing

and managing the Sewage Collection and Treatment scheme. On behalf of the
NAGAR PALIKA BARWANI (NPB), the MPUDC will be the implementing
agency and the owner during the project period. MPUDC will be playing the
pivotal role by exercising signing-off on critical milestones during construction
and the achievement of performance indicators. MPUDC will be exercising its
powers through the Project Monitoring Unit (PMU) and will be executing the
sub project through regional Project Implementation Unit (PIU). The PMU will
also appoint Project Management Consultant to help and assist the PIU in its day
to day activity. PIU shall also be taking up IEC activities so as to create demand
from end user for taking Sewage Collection and Treatment connections. NPB+S
will also appoint its engineer to help and co-ordinate with the PIU. The Engineer
from NPB+S shall be in the role of coordinator during design build phase, but
will attend to the daily activities during O&M period.
The project is to be implemented under a Design Review, Design if required,
Build and Operate arrangement in which the Contractor will be responsible for -
 Review of designs provided by the owner
 Detailed design (wherever required) of all Sewage Collection and
Treatment facilities
 Construction of the above designed facilities
 Operation and Maintenance of the facilities for a period of 10 years


The contract will be signed by MPUDC on behalf of Government of Madhya

Pradesh and NAGAR PALIKA BARWANI on one side and by the Contractor
on the other side. There will be two Agreements as follows:
1. Design Review, Design if required, Build the Sewage collection and
treatment system; and
2. Operate and maintain the whole system for 10 years
The PIU will be assisted by the Project Management Consultant appointed by the
owner, in its daily functioning with respect to this contract.
3. Financial Arrangements:
The Capital Cost of the works shall be met out through the KfW funding
whereas the Operation and Maintenance cost shall be borne by the owner/ NPN.
1.5 Project Area
The area of the programme MPUSEP comprises the towns of Barwani,

Hoshangabad, Mandla, Narsinghpur and Sendhwa (in alphabetic order). Within
this tender the project area is the town of Barwani.
Figure 1: The following figure depicts the location of the project area.


Barwani is a city and a municipality in Barwani District in the state of Madhya

Pradesh, India. The city is situated near the left bank of the Narmada River, and
is the administrative headquarters of Barwani District. It has served as the capital
of the former princely state of Barwani. Bawangaja, a Jain pilgrimage place, is 8
km from Barwani.
The city of Barwani is geographically located at 22°02°N longitude and 74°54°E
latitude at a mean sea level of 178m (584 ft.)
The district is located in the south-western corner of Madhya Pradesh; the
Narmada River forms its northern boundary and Satpura Range lies to its south.
The city is not connected to rail network and it can be reached by road only.
Nearest airport and railway station are located at Indore some 140 km away. The
city is 50 km away from National Highway NH 3 (Agra - Bombay).
Barwani is a Class-II town of Madhya Pradesh. Barwani Municipality spreads
over an extent of about 28 km² and is divided into 24 wards. The population of
the town was 55,504 as per census 2011. The existing land use pattern of
Barwani shows a major portion of the total area of the municipality still coming
under agricultural use. Agriculture constitutes about 51.4% of the total extent of
the town.
Residential land use in the town is 86 ha, which is about 37.7% of the total
developed area. Among the various land use categories constituting the
developed portion of the town, residential use is the predominant one. It
contributes to more than 69.87% of the developed area of the town while other
categories cumulatively contributing to the rest.
The following table gives the existing land use pattern of Barwani Municipal
Council.
Table 1 Existing land use pattern Barwani Municipality


Figure 1 Land Use Barwani
There are several slum areas in town.

The total road length in Barwani is approximately 148 kms comprising of
cement concrete / WBM/ Bituminous road surface.
1.6 Climatic Conditions
Barwani has a tropical climate. May is the hottest month in the year and
December is the coldest. The peak temperature of the city during day time is
42°C to 45°C in May and low temperature during night is 10°C in December.
Humidity during rainy season is about 70%. The climate can be distinguished
into three distinct seasons, viz.
 Monsoon lasting from mid-June to September.
 Winter from November to February; and
 Summer from March to mid-June.
The month of October witnesses the transition from monsoon to winter.
Winds are controlled by the shifting of pressure belts. They are predominantly
from southwest to North West during monsoon months. In the post-monsoon and
winter, winds blow from north-east to south-west and during summers, winds
blow from west to east. Average wind velocity is 9 km/h.


1.7 Precipitation (Rainfalls)
The Figure below provides the details of monthly rainfall received by Barwani,
Hoshangabad, Mandla, Narsinghpur and Sendhwa for last 5 years:
Figure 2 Monthly rainfall for last five years
1.8 General Topographical and Drainage Conditions
Barwani is situated abutting Narmada River and the general slope of the city is
towards the river in South-North direction. Northern boundary of the city is river
Narmada. Barwani is very rich in fertile alluvial soil.
The topography of Barwani city and its surroundings is such that the natural
drainage system generally slopes towards South-North. There are three major
natural drains that carry the wastewater and storm water. Of these three Nallahs,
two major Nallah flow through the city and meet each other beyond the
municipal boundary and ultimately discharges itself into Narmada river. Third
Nallah captures a very small catchment area of the city which drains itself to the
agricultural fields.
There are no areas as such within the municipal limit which are under the threat
of submergence but during rainy season rain water does not drain immediately
which results into water logging in some of the slum areas.


Figure 3 Present Conditions of Natural Drains in Barwani
1.9 Hydro-geological and Geological Condition
The occurrence and movement of ground water is governed and conditioned by

geomorphic configuration of the place and water bearing properties of the litho
units like porosity, permeability etc.
The alluvial deposits are confined mainly to Narmada & Goi rivers and are not
very extensive in thickness. The ground water in alluvium occurs under pheratic
conditions. The specific capacity of the wells located in pheratic zone is about
490 lpm/meter of drawdown.
Below the geological and mineral map of Narmada river basin is presented
Figure 4 Geology and mineral map of Narmada Basin
As per the 2014 Bureau of Indian Standards (BIS) map, Barwani falls in Zones
III i.e. Moderate Active Zone. Seismic factor proposed by India Meteorological
Department (IMD) for the purpose of design of Civil Engineering structures shall


be incorporated suitably while designing the structures. The Seismic Zone Map
of India showing all the project sites is presented in the following figure.
Figure 5 Seismic Hazard Map of India
1.10 Cultural Heritage
Before Independence Barwani was known as 'The Paris of Nimar'. Bavangaja

Choolgiri is important Jain pilgrimage centre. It is 6 km from the city. There are
11 temples on the hill and they belong to 15th century. It has the world’s tallest
statue of Jain God Lord Adinathji. The land of Bavangaja had been the land of
penance for several great religious dignities. In the middle of the Satpura, at the
height of 4,000.6 ft. is the idol of the founder of Jainism the first Tirthankar
Rishabh Dev, carved on single stone, with height of 25.6 meters (84 ft.). This
place is known as Bavangaja.


1.11 Existing Water Supply System
The existing infrastructure for water supply is presented in the table hereunder.
The next table provides an overview on connections as of August 2016.
Table 2 Existing Water Supply Infrastructure
Table 3 Status of Water Supply Connections
Huge efforts have been undertaken by the GoMP to improve the sector
substantially. Aiming at 100% connection rate and 24/7 water supply, works an
ongoing in all 5 project towns. This covers rehabilitation and extension projects
as well. It is worth mentioning that all designs were carried out for a specific per
capita consumption of 135 lpcd. This value was applied uniformly without
taking into account additional consumption by industry, commerce or
institutions. Estimated NRW was set at optimistic 15%. Minimum pressure is 0.7
bar (7 m). As soon as all ongoing rehabilitation and extension projects are to be
finalised, the water supply systems for all towns will be able to aim for 24/7. It
can thus be stated than in the frame of this project no measures in water supply
infrastructure are required.
1.12 Existing Wastewater System
There is currently no integrated sewerage system Barwani.

In Barwani 80% of Sewage generated is been collected in the Individual Septic
Tanks while rest all sewage is discharged in Natural Streams and Open Storm
Water Drains in the Town. Further the effluent from Septic Tanks is also


discharged in Natural Streams and can be considered a threat to health and

hygiene of the citizens. The flow is following natural ground topography.
Presently, there are several drainage channels flowing through the city which
discharge finally into Narmada River .
Finally the entire sewage and most part of the sewage collected in septic tanks
will be discharged into the various Nallah sections in town.
The waste water coming from schools, colleges, hospitals and hotels are also
draining into natural Nallahs.
The following table presents the existing facilities.
Table 4 Existing Sewerage Facilities
Most of the existing houses are RCC / Brick masonry structures. The people are
having modern amenities and facilities in houses. Accordingly the people are
willing to have an integrated sewerage system so that the sewage collection and
treatment can be done in systematic manner and the town may have the clean
and hygienic environment.
1.13 Proposed Wastewater Treatment Plant
STP based on extended aeration Process (SBR Technology) shall be provided for
treatment of sewage. The STP technology is being selected primarily taking into
consideration less land requirement and effluent characteristics as per CPCB, so
that treated water can be discharged into inland water ways which are being
potential drinking water sources.
The STPs shall be constructed for a 1st stage based on the requirements for the
year 2033, the design shall be done for the year 2048.
Land for the sewage treatment plants were identified with the ULB officials.


2. Scope of Works
The Contractor is to undertake the design, build, operate and maintain a

complete and fully functioning Sewage Collection and Treatment system in the
Sewage Collection and Treatment Area in accordance with the Bid Document.
The obligations of the Contractor shall be regulated by the Design Build
Agreement and Operation and Maintenance Agreement for the Sewage
Collection and Treatment Area, of which the present Technical Specifications
form an integral part.
2.1 Design and Build (Part A)
The Contractor shall be responsible (MPUDC shall facilitate) for the provision of
all relevant permits necessary for construction, the preparation of detailed design
and the construction of the components as defined in the technical
Specifications.
The design and construction of the Sewerage Collection, Sewage Treatment and
Disposal System shall facilitate future expansion of the system as the population
of the Sewage Collection and Treatment Area grows.
The works objective is to provide a complete and fully functioning Sewage
Collection and Treatment system including but not necessarily limited to the
items described in the Scope of Works and the technical Specifications.
The provisions contained in this technical Specification are intended to
supplement the General Conditions of the design Build Contract for the purpose
of providing greater specificity of the Design-Build Services that the Contractor
shall perform.
2.2 Operation and Maintenance (Part B)
The Contractor shall be responsible for the operation and maintenance of the
Sewage Collection and Treatment system as described in the Operations and
Maintenance Agreement.
2.3 Technical Documentation
The following documents shall form an integral part of the contract:

 The Operation and Maintenance Services Agreement for the Contractor in
the Sewage Collection and Treatment Area with Annexes (Volume 4);
 The Contractor’s Technical Proposal.
The Contractor shall have familiarized himself with:


 The project area and present Sewage Collection and Treatment (as briefly
described in the Tender Documentation and supplemented by the
Contractors own investigations);
 The present design documents for Sewerage Collection and Treatment;
 The Institutional and Financial Arrangements for the Project;
 The indicative BoQ (Annex 5);
 The draft Environmental Management Plan (Annex 6);
 The Project Implementation Plan (Annex 7).


3. Particular Technical Specifications
The Contractor is responsible for provision of all relevant permits necessary for
detailed design and construction of the works as defined in Activity Schedule.
The works objective is to provide a complete and fully functioning Sewage
Collection and Treatment system including but not necessarily limited to the
items described in the Scope of Works.
The provisions contained in this Design-Build Specification are intended to
supplement the General Conditions of the design Build Contract for the purpose
of providing greater specificity of the Design-Build Services that the Contractor
shall perform.
3.1 Contractor’s Design and Engineering Scope of Work
Contractor's Design and Engineering Scope of Work will include but not be
limited to:
 Undertake a door-to-door household survey, covering all households in the
Sewage Collection and Treatment Area to assess the potential customers
and customer connections within the Sewage Collection and Treatment
Area, including their existing method of Sewage Collection and Disposal
actions, to serve as a base for further updation. The survey shall include the
following points:
o Status of water supply
o Current toilet arrangements and method of disposal of ‘black’ water;
o Method of disposal of ‘grey’ water (sinks, showers, floor drains, etc)
o If septic tank exists where is it located and does it have soak pit;
o Sketch showing method proposed for sewerage connection with
approximate lengths of pipe and type of floor coverings to be reinstated
(Note: for houses with septic tank / twin pit latrines the new sewerage
connection must be made at the inlet side such that raw sewage is
transferred to the sewerage network)
Within a fortnight of commencement the contractor shall present a
methodology for undertaking the door-to-door household survey, with
standard proforma to be used by the door to door surveyors.
 Study the existing Customer Grievance Redressal system and propose

process improvements required (including appropriate software) to
(a): enable redressal of complaints within the time period specified in
OMSA
(b): enable on-line and integrated monitoring of all complaints registered
through Customer Service Centers, call center and web-based system. The
system should be operationalized at start of the Operations and
Maintenance Period. Where required, the Contractor will also have to


integrate into any existing web based customer service system of the
Authority or of other Governments. The Contractor will allow MPUDC
real time access to the system to monitor and track the status of complaints
and their redressal.
 Undertake a field survey of the entire Sewage Collection and Treatment
Area, with total station survey; Prepare GIS based maps and all required
drawings on AutoCAD.
 Carry out Geo technical survey at the locations of Pumping Stations, STP,
all Sump wells and along the alignment of sewer line wherever required.
 Establish and confirm Physical, Chemical and biological parameters of the
raw sewage;
 Review the designs given by the owner and redesign where necessary;
 Undertake detailed engineering and prepare detailed designs of works and
processes required to fulfil the output requirements for the defined sewage
treatment plant, pumping stations, sewer pipelines, flushing points and
connections;
 Prepare detailed design for the SCADA system to monitor and control
relevant parameters in the system;
 Get the drawing and design of all components vetted and approved by a
Government engineering college/ NIT/IIT;
 Supply all materials for the construction of pumping stations and
installation of the sewage treatment plant and supply and install all storage
facilities, pumping requirements, collection piping, manholes, and house
connections required for the Sewage Collection and Treatment facilities;
 Provide and install required mechanical, instrumentation and electrical
equipment for full operation of the specified SCADA system;
 Supply and install all cabling and control panels as required for safe and
effective operation of all plant and equipment;
 Prepare operations and maintenance manuals for the regular and preventive
maintenance of all components of the Sewage Collection and Treatment
system and submit for approval by MPUDC;
 To prepare, submit for approval and execute an effluent (including solid
and liquid) disposal and reuse plan;
 Flushing arrangements including procurement of equipment;
 House connection inside property: Providing infrastructure inside the
property for collecting the waste water (grey and black water) of the
property and connecting the same to the sewer network;
 Carry out Tests on Completion and Tests after Completion and
commission the works;
 Provide spare parts for all components of the Sewage Collection and
Treatment system as required and all items of equipment;
 Ensure and implement the Environmental and Social Management Plan
provided in Annex 6, Environmental and Social Management Framework
of MPUSEP, relevant safeguard policies, environment, health and safety
guide lines of The KfW, Indian and State Government Laws, Rules,
Regulations and Guidelines


 Exact siting of the structures and laying of pipes shall be finalized by the
contractor and execution plans shall be revised accordingly. Due to
excavation works for laying of pipes, minor damage to road side properties
and loss of income for certain days and locations are likely during
construction phase. During the review and finalization of execution plan,
impacts on roadside properties and loss of income would be assessed and
the respective ESMP will be updated by D(R)BO contractor based on joint
verification with the affected party and PIU representative. Contractor shall
seek approval of updated ESIS from MPUDC along with the final
execution plan. Excavation works for the specific section shall be initiated
only after disbursement of entitlements as per Resettlement Policy
Framework in the ESMF.
 Providing and constructing the arrangements for reuse of treated effluent
including construction of sump, installing of pumps, providing and laying
the pipe etc.
 Plant at least 500 plants of Mango (Magnifera Indica), Peepal (Ficus
Religiousa), Neem (Azadirachta Indica), Bel (Aegle Marmelos), Bar (Ficus
bengalensis), Aonla (Phyllanthus emblica), Jamun (Eugenia jambolana) or
other such plant family during the design-build period within 3 km radius
of the sub project area and upkeep the same upto the completion period.
 The Contractor shall train the Owner’s selected staff for on job training
during the last 6 months of O & M period. A Maximum of Fifteen (15)
staff of Owner will be trained.
3.2 Design Standards
The design shall be undertaken following best international and national

standards.
If not otherwise specified below, the design shall be carried out with regard to
the following standards and guidelines with the indicated ranking and priority:
 Manual on Sewerage and Sewage Treatment (third edition - revised and
updated) by Government of India Ministry of Urban development, New
Delhi, 2013.
 Indian standards, codes and guidelines published by Bureau of Indian
standards and other regulatory bodies whenever existing.
 If no Indian standards exist ISO standards shall be used.
 Finally, if neither of the above standard systems exist, international
standards can be used after approval of the Project Manager, as e.g.:
B.S. - British Standard
EN Euro codes - European Union Standards
D.I.N. - Deutsche Industry Norm
AWWA - American Water Works Association


Materials and construction methods to be used shall be so as to ensure that the

residual life of the Sewage Collection and Treatment system shall be of at least
30 year.
3.2.1 Relevant Norms and Standards
The General Specification shall be as described for all materials and works are to
be in conformity with the specification of the Madhya Pradesh P.W.D and the
specifications prescribed in the Indian Standard Codes (I.S. Code) published by
the BIS (Bureau of Indian Standard). While Executing the works all the relevant
IS code in general, and the following I.S. Codes in particular, all with latest
amendments, current at the time of execution are to be referred.
I.S. Code No. Title of the I.S. Code
SP 7 National building Code of India, 2005
Hand book on Sewerage system and drainage with special
SP 35
emphasis on plumbing
Specifications for fine & coarse aggregate from natural sources
383
for concrete
455 Specifications for PSC (Portland slag cement)
456 Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete
516 Methods of test for strength of concrete
1077 Specifications for bricks for masonry work
1199 Methods of sampling and analysis of concrete
1489 Specifications for PPC (Portland pozzolana cement)
1538 (All Parts) Cast iron fittings for pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage
Specifications for plain hard drawn steel wire fabric for
1785
prestressed concrete
1786 Cold-worked HYSD steel rebars (grade Fe415 & Fe500)
2062 Specifications for steel for general purposes
Code for selections, installation and maintenance of sanitary

2064
appliances
2074 Specifications for prime coat for structural steel
Specifications for high tensile strength steel bar for prestressed

2090
concrete
2116 Permissible clay, silt & fine dust contents in sand



2250 Compressive strength test for cement mortar cubes
2386 Methods of tests for aggregate for concrete
2430 Methods of sampling
2932 Specifications for synthetic enamel paint for structural steel
3025 Tests on water samples
3370: All parts Code of practice for concrete structures for storage of liquids
3466 Specifications for masonry cement
3495 Methods of testing of bricks
3764 Safety code for excavation works
4031 Chemical analysis and tests on cement
4082 Specifications for storage of materials
4885 Specifications for sewer bricks
4925 Specifications for concrete batching plant
4990 Specifications for plywood formwork for concrete
5454 Methods of sampling of bricks for tests
7784: All parts Code of practice for design of cross drainage works
9103 Specifications for concrete admixtures
12118 Specifications for Polysulphide sealants
12592 Prestressed concrete manhole cover and frames
Pipes and Fittings
458 Prestress concrete pipes
780 Sluice valves for water works purpose ( 50 to 300 mm size)
783 Laying of concrete pipes
784 Prestressed Concrete pipes with fittings
Code of practice for selection, installation and Maintenance of
2685
sluice valves.
4711 Method of sampling of steel pipes, tubes and fittings.
HDP Pipes for potable water supplies, sewage and industrial
4984
effluents
Specifications for rubber sealing rings for gas mains, water mains
5382
and sewers
8329 Centrifugally cast (spun) ductile iron pressure pipes for water, gas



and sewage.
9271 UPVC Single wall corrugated pipes for Drainage
9523 Ductile iron fittings for pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage.
11625:1986 Criteria for hydraulic design of penstocks
11639 (Part Criteria for structural design of penstocks : Part 1 Surface
1):1986 penstocks
12288 Code of practice for lying of ductile iron pipes.
12709:1989 GRP pipes for water supply and sewerage
PVC –U pipes for use in Underground drainage and sewerage
15382
system
16098(part 2) Structured-Wall Plastics Piping Systems For Non-Pressure
2103 Drainage And Sewerage — Specification
Waste water handling equipment’s
5600 Pumps- Sewage and Drainage
6279 Grit Removal devices
6280 Sewage Screens
8413 Biological Treatment Equipment
9213 BOD bottle
10037 (All parts) Requirements for Sludge Dewatering Equipments
10261 Requirements for Settling Tank
10553 (All parts) Requirement for chlorination equipment
11117 Requirements for power driven rodding machine for sewers
Requirements for high pressure jetting machine for sewer
11387
cleaning
Specifications for attachment tools for power driven rodding
11397
machine for sewers
Code of Practice
Code of practice for design loads other than earthquake for
875
buildings and structures (part 1 to 5)
1172 Basic requirements for water supply, drainage and sanitation
1893 (Part 1) Criteria for earthquake resistant design of structures
4111: (All Parts) Ancillary structures in sewerage system
5455 Cast iron steps for manholes



Ductile detailing of reinforced concrete structures subjected to
13920
seismic forces
IS Codes for Sewage Treatment
Indian Standard Code: Code of practice for installation of septic
2470 (PT 1 ) & tanks: Design criteria and construction (second revision)
(PT 2): 1985 Secondary treatment and disposal of septic tank effluent (second
revision)
Indian Standard Code: Methods of Sampling Test Sewage
4733-1972
Effluent
6908-1975 Indian Standard Code: Sewage and Drainage
7022 (PT 11)-i Indian Standard Code: Glossary of Terms Relating to Water
979 Sewage and Industrial Effluents PT II
1538-(PT-XXIV)-
Indian Standard Code: Press Pipes for Water. Gas and Sewage
1 982
5600: 2002 Indian Standard Code: Pumps-sewage and Drainage-Specification
Indian Standard Code: Code of practice for waste stabilization
5611 :1987
ponds (facultative type) (first revision)
Indian Standard Code: Specification for Sewage and Drainage
5600-1970
Building Elements
Indian Standard Code: Tolerance Limits for Sewage Effluents
4764-1973
Discharged In to In land Surface Water
6279 :1971 Indian Standard Code: Equipment for gnt removal devices
6280:1971 Sewage screens
7232:1974 Indian Standard Code: Method for lmhoff cone test
7784: Part 1 & 2: Indian Standard Code: Code of practice for design of cross
Sec 1 to 5 drainage work Part 1 General features
Indian Standard Code: Requirements for biological treatment
8413 (PT 1): 1977
equipment Part 1 Trickling filters
Indian Standard Code: Requirements for biological treatment
8413 (PT 2):1982
equipment Part 2 Activated Sludge process
Indian Standard Code: Hand operated augers for cleaning water
9110:1979
closet. pJe and sewer
I9213:1979 Indian Standard Code: BOD Bottle
Indian Standard Code: Requirements for sludge dewatering
10037 : PT1 to 3 :
equipment. Part 1 sludge drying beds-sand, gravel and under
1981
drains



Indian Standard Code: Requirement for sewing tank (clarifier
10261 :1982
equipment) for waste water
Indian Standard Code: Buckets to be used in power driven
10552:1983
buckets type sewer cleaning machine
For interpretation of the IS codes decision of the Engineer -in -Chief MPUDC,
Madhya Pradesh shall be final and binding. If for any item of works that may
require to be executed the IS code does not exist, the particular item will have to
be executed as per the available standard engineering practices and as directed
by the Project Manager.
In case the specification of a particular item of work is not available in the above
mentioned schedule of specifications, the work shall be executed as per sound
engineering practice and/ or as directed by the Engineer–in-Chief, MPUDC, First
Floor, MP Rajva Krishi and Gramin Sahkari Bank, 8 Jail Road, Arera Hills,
BHOPAL-2, Madhya Pradesh.
3.2.2 Relevant Indian Laws
 The Environment (Protection) Act, 1986

 EIA Notification 2006 and amendments thereafter
 Forest (Conservation) Act, 1980 - as amended in 1988
 Wildlife Protection Act, 1972
 Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1974 - as amended in
1978 and 1988
 Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1981
 The Noise Pollution (Regulation and Control) Rules, 2000
 The Ancient Monuments and Archaeological Sites and Remains Act, 1958
 Fly Ash Notification, 1999
 The Right to Fair Compensation and Transparency in Land Acquisition
and Rehabilitation and Resettlement
 Act (RTFCTLARR Act), 2013
 E-Waste (Management) Rule, 2016
 Construction & Demolition Rule, 2016
 Hazardous and Other Wastes (Management and Trans-boundary
Movement) Rules, 2016
 Solid Waste Management Rules, 2016
 Plastic Waste Management Rules, 2016.


3.3 General Information
• Project target year: design horizon for STPs is 2033 (stage 1) and 2048
(stage 2), the sewerage network shall be designed for
2048.
• Mapping: Indicative topography of the sites was surveyed by
the Employer in the Feasibility stage. Detailed
topography as required for detailed design shall be
prepared by the Contractor.
• Soil parameters: General Geotechnical Investigation Report for the
plant site has not been prepared by the Employer to
indicate subsoil condition. Detailed geotechnical
investigations as required for detailed design shall be
prepared by the Contractor.
• Type of design: Final design shall be detailed so that the construction
in compliance to the requirements set in design codes
and regulations is possible.
• Velocity: The minimum and maximum flow velocities
according to international standards are not fallen
short off respectively exceeded in channels and
pipes.
• Manholes: Changes in direction of gravity pipe bends have to be
executed with manholes. Then the minimum radius
to the centre line of the chute shall be 2.0 x pipe
diameter. Benches shall be built up to the top of the
pipe.
• Sludge pipes: Sludge pipes subject to clogging shall be provided
with flush valves in sufficient number and diameter;
the water/sludge velocity shall be vmin = 0.6 m/s and
vmax = 1.4 m/s
• By-passes and gates: Provision of by-passes and necessary gates for all
principal process units so that each process unit can
be taken out of operation without stopping the whole
treatment process.
• Effluent standard: For the STP the quality of the effluent shall be
according to the treated effluent quality limits as
prescribed by CPCB of India or even better.
• Hydraulic: All hydraulic structures, interconnections,
distribution shafts, etc., and treatment units shall be
designed and constructed for the peak hydraulic
load; adequate hydraulic head shall be available for
future configurations and design flows.


• Materials to be used: All steel pipes or steel structure surfaces in contact

with waste water or sludge (internal or external) shall
be manufactured out of stainless steel grade at least
AISI 304 – except where otherwise required and
specified in the Employers Requirements.
3.4 Design Services
3.4.1 General
3.4.1.1 Design and Engineering
The Contractor shall execute the basic and detailed design of the Project and the
engineering work in respect of that design in compliance with the provisions of
the Contract, or where not so specified, in accordance with good engineering
practice.
The Contractor shall be responsible for any discrepancies, errors or omissions in
the specifications, drawings and other technical documents that it has prepared
and/or accepted from owner’s DPR for integration with his design, whether such
specifications, drawings and other documents have been approved by the Project
Manager or not.
The Contractor shall make their own investigations as deemed necessary to
ensure that the design is adequate for meeting the specifications and shall have
full responsibility for any design, data, drawing, specification or other document,
developed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be entitled to disclaim any
modification thereof provided or designated by or on behalf of the Owner, by
giving a written notice of such disclaimer to the Project Manager.
3.4.1.2 Key Staff
The Contractor shall provide all expertise needed to carry out the Design Build
services including the key staff as specified in the BDS.
The Contractor shall provide qualified personnel to assist the Employer and
Engineer in performing all field works. For such the Contractor shall provide
labor as it is reasonably and necessary, to attend to the office requirements, clean
the instruments and assist the Employer and Engineer's Representative in
measuring, supervising, checking, testing, examining or setting out the
Contractor's Work in any way, whatsoever at any time during construction site
opening hours.
In case the Contractor intends to change any key staff, such change will be
subject to approval from the owner on justification provided by the Contractor.
The proposed replacement shall have to be of equivalent or higher qualification
and experience specified above for the respective key staff.


3.4.1.3 Design Responsibilities
The Contractor’s design and design-related services shall include:

1. The preparation of a design that meets the criteria set forth in the Design-
Build Documents and that provides for a Sewage Collection and Treatment
system that meets or exceeds the Technical Standards;
2. The acquisition of all data and information necessary to prepare the design
and that are required to demonstrate that the Sewage Collection and Treatment
system meets or exceeds the Technical Standards;
3. The preparation of schematic design documents to illustrate the scale and
character of the Design-Build Services and how the parts of the Design-Build
Services functionally relate to each other.
4. Estimate of sewage generation based on existing population and level of
water supply in the sewerage system area and population projection rate for the
service area.
5. The preparation of a design report, based on the schematic design
documents submitted in the Contractor's tender and accepted by the Owner,
consisting of drawings and other documents appropriate to the Project to
describe the size and character of the entire utility and the Sewage Collection and
Treatment system including architectural, mechanical, civil works, and electrical
systems, materials, operational processes, landscaping, and such other elements
as may be appropriate;
6. The preparation of Design-Build Documents setting forth in detail the
requirements for construction based on the design development documents
accepted by the Owner;
7. Obtaining all approvals, permits, including building permits, and licenses
for the Design-Build Services, except for those approvals, permits or licenses
that the Owner is explicitly required to obtain itself under the Applicable Law in
which case the Contractor shall prepare all documentation and provide assistance
to the Owner in obtaining such approval, permits or licenses;
8. The preparation of assurances required to regulatory authorities respecting
conformance of the design with the applicable building regulations,
environmental standards and occupational health and safety requirements,
including construction safety issues;
9. The coordination required to integrate all parts of the Design-Build
Services;
10. Such other Design-Build Services that may be required from time to time
that are agreed to by the Contractor and the Owner in writing; and
11. The conducting of general reviews of the progress of the design process, to
the extent necessary, in order to determine to the Contractor’s satisfaction that
the design services are performed in compliance with the requirements of the
Contract and Applicable Laws.


3.4.1.4 Design Build Documents
The Contractor shall prepare all of the Design-Build Documents. The Design-
Build Documents shall include the survey sheets, plans, designs, drawings,
detailed list of requirements, as-built documents, operations manuals,
specifications, schematic design documents, design development documents, and
all modifications thereto required in order to properly and fully test for, analyze
for, plan, design and build the Project as contemplated in the Technical
Standards and the remaining provisions of the Contract.
The Design-Build documents to be prepared by the Contractor shall adhere to the
recommendations of EMP given at Annex 6 (available on www.mpudc.co.in and
mpurban.gov.in). However, the contractor shall also review the environmental
and social management plans and suggest improvements, as required according
to the Environmental and Social Framework of MPUSEP, Indian legislation and
KfW’s guidelines.
The Design Build Documents specially the pipe line laying, to be prepared by
the contractor shall clearly identify and mention the structures, their nature and
ownership, that may be affected, if any, during the construction period. The
contractor is also required to assess the type of damage, if any, to the structure
and prepare Resettlement Action Plan for the same, in consultation with the
Project Manager. The Project Manager shall appoint the Community
Development Officer of the PIU for this purpose.
The Contractor shall prepare any other document, as may be requested by the
Project Manager, that the Project Manager considers necessary to monitor the
progress of the Design-Build Services and assess the Contractor’s compliance
with the Contract.
The Contractor shall also prepare any other documents necessary to instruct the
Contractor’s Personnel.
The Contractor shall provide each of the Project Manager and the Owner with
two sets of all of the Design-Build Documents in reproducible form and shall
modify them to keep them up-to-date as requested by the Project Manager acting
in a professionally reasonable manner. The Design-Build Documents, with the
exception of the as-built documents, shall be subject to the review and approval
of the Project Manager prior to performing any of the services.
When the Contractor notifies the Owner of completion of the Sewage Collection
and Treatment system, the Contractor shall provide to the Project Manager one
copy of the ‘as-built’ Design-Build Documents in reproducible form showing the
exact ‘as built’ locations, sizes and details of the project and Sewage Collection
and Treatment system and the Design-Build Services as executed. The Project
and the Sewage Collection and Treatment system shall not be considered to have
reached Completion until such Design-Build Documents have been provided.
The Contractor shall update the ‘as-built’ Design-Build Documents as necessary
for the correction of defects or deficiencies.


3.4.1.5 Design Considerations
In preparing the design for the Project and the Design-Build Documents, the
Contractor shall:
1. Protect public health and safety in relation to impact from the works;
2. Maximize the protection of the environment and minimize any adverse
environmental impacts caused by the works;
3. Ensure the works have the capacity to fulfil the anticipated services within
the time horizon as stipulated in the following design criteria;
4. Ensure that the works are designed in order to maximize its duration as a
fully functional Sewage Collection and Treatment system that meets or
exceeds the Technical Standards; and
5. Ensure that the works are designed to meet the requirements of the
Technical Standards and the Design Criteria.
3.4.1.6 Design Criteria
The Contractor shall design the project according to the following design criteria
and those detailed in Annex 8. The list of criteria shall not be considered a
complete list of design criteria for the Sewage Collection and Treatment project.
Any required criteria not mentioned here shall be according to current Indian or
International Standards, common international practices or as agreed with the
Owner or his representative, the Project Manager:
1. The design horizon of the project shall be 30 years after commissioning.
2. Pumps will be designed for intermediate horizon of 15 years from the year
of commissioning (tentative year 2034).
3. All pipe works will be designed on the basis of a Long Term Horizon of 30
years, i.e. 2049 (tentatively).
4. Mechanical and electrical works for pumping facilities will be designed for
the intermediate Term Horizon; associated civil works for the pumping
facilities will be generally designed for the Long Term Horizon.
5. Treatment facilities will be designed for the intermediate Term Horizon.
An outline design for the Long Term Horizon will be undertaken to
demonstrate that the future works can be accommodated in the available
land for the project.
6. Process design of Sewage Treatment Plant shall be done as per the design
criteria contained in the Manual on Sewerage and Sewage Disposal (2013
version), published by Ministry of Urban Development, Government of
India. The quality of the treated sewage shall fulfill latest requirements of
Central Pollution Control Board of India.


7. Collection systems shall be designed using peak factor as applicable to the

Long Term Horizon to cover peak demand.
8. The average daily water availability is: 135 litres/person
9. The Contractor shall design the entire Sewerage Systems as per applicable
standards including CPHEEO Manual on Sewerage and Sewage Treatment
(2013 version).
3.4.2 Preparatory Work and Establishment of Design Data
The Contractor shall for his own account carry out field investigations and
surveys as deemed necessary to obtain sufficient physical conditions as required
for the design. Normally, the following field investigations and surveys may be
required and shall therefore be considered by the Contractor:
1. Through detailed topographic/cadastral surveys for project sites, as
required for detailed design, ensure that the water production and
distribution facilities can be designed to operate properly, and so that
quantities of work and materials required can be accurately determined.
2. Field Survey shall be done with Total Station Survey and co-relate the
same with GPS data know the drainage pattern of the city sewer route
along/ across different road network, Raw sewage pumping station and raw
sewage Pumping Main, etc. The details are as under:
i. Net levels at 5.0 meter grid for sites of, STP location, sites for Pump
houses which are to be identified in consultation with the owner.
ii. Generation of contour overlay at 1 meter interval for the STP site.
iii. Longitudinal survey along proposed pipeline routes with spot levels taken
at maximum 30 m intervals and at every changes of road alignment, road
junction etc.
iv. Cross sections along the pipeline routes at every 90 meters intervals and
to include road, rail, canal, river crossings and other cross drainage
structures
v. Node to node length of the proposed sewer route.
vi. RL of the each node (pipe junction; road junction; peak/ valley crest
along the pipe route etc.) above MSL.
vii. Road width (hard crust / side berm); any culvert / bridge; stream / Nallah
crossing; trees/ poles etc. that may obstruct the pipe alignment.
viii. Prominent structures along the proposed route viz. Educational Institute,
Govt / Semi Govt. Offices, Hospitals, Religious Institute, ASI
monuments etc. with their respective GPS data.
ix. Individual dwelling houses, available water body etc. with their
respective GPS data.


x. Establishing temporary bench marks (TBM) at different locations of the

project area on permanent structures viz., parapet of culvert / bridge; at
plinth of old monument / Govt. offices / structures of existing Sewerage
system scheme (if any), with respect to Geodetic Triangulation Station
bench mark (GTS BM, including co relating the TBM with GPS data.
3. Preparation of Maps and drawings - Total station survey drawings shall
be prepared on AutoCAD and converted to GIS base map. The Data
Acquisition and processing for GIS base maps includes the following:
i. Collection of all data linked to GPS ground control survey for providing
sufficient control points evenly distributed over the area.
ii. Post processing of ground control data.
iii. Digitization for plan metric data captures.
iv. Field verification, digitization and compilation of final maps
v. Generation of maps for ground validation surveys. The report / survey
drawings shall have to be prepared in AutoCAD form. The Key map
/Index Map for the complete project shall be made to a scale matching to
A0 size paper. The detailed drawings shall be in 1: 200 scale plotted to
A3 size papers.
vi. Data entry of the ground validation surveys for updating maps for any
correction/mistakes
vii. Updating of the field verified data onto the digital data.
All maps shall be on GIS base.
The contractor is required to get the drawings and design, vetted by a
Government Engineering College/NIT/IIT and submit the same to the Project
Manager in four copies for the approval of the Engineer-in-Chief. The details of
designs and drawings required for each component is given in respective
sections.
4. Geotechnical soil investigations
At all structural locations and if necessary for the excavation and support of
pipelines at suitable intervals along the pipeline alignment. Various parameters
of the foundation soil and safe bearing capacity of soil have to be determined by
conducting subsoil investigation work at pin point location only.
Sub soil investigation work is to be done for determining various parameters of
foundation soil viz. particle size; Atterberg's Limit; Plasticity Index; Density; Sp.
Gravity; Voids Ratio; C-Ø value; consolidation; sub surface water level etc.
making standard penetration test at every 1.5 m. interval or wherever there is
change of strata, and calculating the Safe Bearing Capacity of Soil for
determining type and size of the various structures.


(a) Sub Soil Investigation in minimum 4 nos. (at each of the 4) of exploratory
bore holes up to 8.0 m depth from the G.L. and 6 nos. up to 10.0m depth in case
of each STP.
(b) For Sewerage Network except SPS and STP, sub Soil Investigation in
minimum 3 nos. of exploratory bore holes (in each stretch of 5 km) up to 5.0 m.
depth from the G.L.
The subsoil investigation report shall include all the field investigation; Bore
Hole Log showing soil profile, ‘N’ values at different depth (Observed, corrected
and average); determined soil parameters in tabular form as listed in the scope of
work; graphical representation of the soil parameters; and calculation of safe
bearing capacity including recommendation for type of foundation etc. From the
above sub soil investigation work various soil parameters at the location of
various structures shall be determined and ultimate as well as safe bearing
capacity of the foundation soil shall be calculated. Based on these data the type
and size of foundation for various system components shall be designed.
The Contractor shall propose applicable methods for reducing the size of
settlement and take into account in his calculations the short-term and long-term
effects of differential settlement for each structure or part of a structure, in order
to avoid the risk of cracking of concrete and loosing of water tightness of the
water-retaining structures.
3.4.3 Design of Works
1. The Contractor shall, as the first task, prepare a time schedule for the entire
Design-Build period clearly showing submission of Construction Documents to
the Project Manager for review to conform to the Schedule of Works and
submission dates of the various stages.
2. The Contractor shall submit his Works preliminary design as a complete
package for the review, comment, amendment of the Project Manager. The
Project Manager shall agree to the design and drawings after such review. Any
changes shall be discussed and agreed between the Contractor and the Project
Manager before the Contractor proceeds with the works. As a minimum, the
preliminary design documents and drawings shall cover the topics and items that
follow.
a) The system installed during the design build period shall provide
connections to serve the population of the NPN area in accordance with the
requirements of the Operations and Maintenance Contract.
b) The design of the system shall clearly show the number of connections
served and its relation to current and projected population.
c) The Contractor shall calculate the physical sizes of the components to suit
the design demand.


d) The Contractor shall design a new sewage treatment plant to secure treated
sewage fulfilling the requirements of Central Pollution Control Board of India
The design shall include a clear description of all proposed treatment units and
include a process flow diagrams for the whole Plant showing capacities flow
rates, Layout of component structures, details of treatment process adopted by
confirming raw sewage quality parameters, analysis of hydraulic analysis of the
sewer network as well as Plant under dry, average, and at peak flow flows.
e) The Contractor shall investigate the location and assure capacity of
intermediate pump house and suitable capacity of pump (s).
f) Hydraulic design shall be carried out to ensure that the most cost effective
balance is reached between initial cost and operational and energy costs and
include as a minimum:
i) Hydraulic design calculations for the whole of the Plant from Pump
house to the sewer network and to the customers, including minimum
and maximum velocity for all sewers, fittings, pumping facilities etc.
ii) Process design of Sewage treatment plant shall be done as per the
design criteria laid down in the Manual on Sewerage and sewage
Treatment, published by Ministry of Urban development, Government
of India.
iii) NPSH calculations for pumps, and maximum and minimum system
curves referred to pump characteristic curves. The system curve
envelopes shall be used to determine pump duty requirements for the
design flow ranges.
iv) Surge Analysis designs and reports on proposed piping layouts and
surge suppression installations where required.
v) The overall operation of the designed network will be checked using a
numerical modelling tool for 2019, 2034 and 2049 horizons. The tool
should be acceptable to the Project Manager.
g) Mechanical and electrical drawings, schedules and calculations as follows:
i) General arrangement drawings and sectional views, fully dimensioned
and showing all mechanical, electrical equipment together with
relevant Schedules.
ii) Electrical single line diagrams and general arrangement drawings for
all switchboards, motor control centers and control panels.
iii) Process and instrumentation diagrams for each section of the Plant
together with full supporting Schedules.
h) Civil and Building Works drawings, schedules and calculations as follows:
i) Raw Sewage pump house;
ii) Treatment Plant Transmission pumping facilities;
iii) Sewer network System and ancillaries structure;


iv) Pumping stations;

v) House connections up to the boundary line;
vi) House connection inside the property;
vii) General arrangement drawings and sectional views fully annotated and
dimensioned, for all structures and buildings.
i) SCADA drawings and diagrams:
i) The Contractor shall as a minimum design and implement SCADA for
monitoring of STP and its operation with actuators for automatic
operation.
3.5 Building and Construction Services
3.5.1 General
The Contractor shall carry out all building and construction of all items required
to meet the output requirements.
The Contractor shall provide all of the demolition, excavation, building, co-
ordination, repair, warranty, review, inspection, testing, quality assurance and
control, monitoring, scheduling, clean-up and other construction work and
services required for the modification of the Sites and the building of the Sewage
Collection and Treatment system as contemplated by Design-Build Documents.
The Contractor shall have total control of the building and construction services
and shall effectively direct and supervise the building and construction services
so as to ensure conformity with the Design-Build Documents.
The Contractor shall be solely responsible for construction means, methods,
techniques, sequences, and procedures and for coordinating the various parts of
the Design-Build Services under the Contract.
3.5.2 Establishment of Contractor's Camp and Working Sites
The Contractor shall in connection with the mobilization of the works and sites
assure the following facilities and conditions:
1. Establish design office with all required design facilities for the design
staff.
2. The Contractor shall provide, equip, and maintain an office for the sole use
of the Engineer, his staff and other persons authorized by the Employer.
All rooms shall be provided with AC.
The office shall be located near the Contractor's office and complete with
services, furniture and equipment. The Contractor shall also provide all
necessary attendance and office consumable items. The exact location and details
of buildings shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.


The offices with the furniture and equipment shall be complete and ready for
occupation within 21 days of Commencement Date. The Contractor shall
maintain the offices until the Taking Over Certificate. At that date the Contractor
shall remove the office, seal off services and restore the ground. All furniture and
equipment shall revert to the Contractor. The offices shall be cleaned and
maintained by the Contractor. The Contractor shall repair or replace damaged or
unusable services, furniture and equipment without delay when instructed by the
Engineer.
Provide potable water for construction site personnel and general cleaning in
addition to any required for the construction, testing and commissioning of the
Works.
Install, operate, maintain and subsequently remove temporary electricity supplies
in addition to supplies required for testing and commissioning the Works.
Erect, construct, maintain and subsequently remove all temporary
accommodation necessary to for the efficient conduct and self-supervision of the
Contract.
Before starting work, instruct all employees in the necessity for pollution
prevention. Any employee or Contractor’s representative polluting or fouling the
Sites shall be immediately dismissed and removed from the Site. No medically
unsuitable persons may be employed in or around Sewage Collection and
Treatment installations. Arrange for employees to be examined and tested in the
manner approved by the Owner’s Medical Officer and the Project Manager.
The cost of constructing labor camps at site is the responsibility of the contractor
and no extra cost shall be part of the bid.
3.5.3 Site Work
During work on the sites the Contractor shall:

1. Ensure that methods of working cause minimum disturbance to land,
owners and occupiers where Works are constructed on over under in or through
privately owned land.
2. Construct temporary site office and living facilities for the labor on or near
the site of work at the cost of the contractor.
3. Check and confirm survey data and benchmarks and their precise
relationship to the National Datum before using the data to establish any further
benchmarks. The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for all levels and
setting out undertaken by him in the Works.
4. Establish working and construction lines and grades according to approved
detailed design drawings and supply all the materials needed to establish and
preserve survey points and bench marks.


5. Set out the works precisely in vertical and horizontal planes and angles.
Mark the location of corners with timber pegs. Locate offset pegs at one meter
offsets so that all corner points can be relocated after excavation. Setting out
shall be verified by the Project Manager before excavation.
6. On completion of the works remove any temporary access required for the
execution of the Works and reinstate the access route as a minimum to the same
condition it was in before entry to the Site.
7. Keep the works well drained and ensure that as far as is practicable all
work is carried out in the dry. Excavated areas shall be kept well drained and
free from standing water.
8. On completion of the Works, leave all areas that have been occupied for
whatever reason in a condition equal or better than at the time of entry. Remove
and dispose of all surplus plant and materials.
9. Testing Laboratory Services, whenever the services of a testing laboratory
are required by these Specifications, the Contractor shall employ, at his own
expense, the services of an independent laboratory acceptable to the Engineer
and the Employer. All tests required to be performed by such a testing laboratory
will be conducted to determine compliance with the Specifications.
i) Qualification of Laboratory
 The testing laboratory has to be independent and certified according
to the respective Indian regulations.
 Routine tests at the Site such as concrete slump, air, compressive
strength, aggregate gradation, aggregate quality and proctor density
tests may be performed in the laboratory established by the
Contractor. The Contractor shall employ the qualified personnel to
carry out the required tests.
ii) Laboratory Duties
The Contractor shall at his own expense provide the necessary
laboratory facilities in order to perform the testing required in
Contract specifications or the Contractor shall assure the prompt
services of the testing laboratory to perform the specified
inspections, sampling and testing of materials. The Engineer shall
be promptly notified of all irregularities or deficiencies in the Work
which are observed during the performance of the specified testing.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer two copies of all
certified test reports prepared by the independent testing laboratory.
Each report shall include:
 Date issued.
 Project title and number.
 Testing laboratory name and address.
 Name and signature of Inspector.
 Date of inspection or sampling.


 Record of temperature and weather.

 Date of test.
 Identification of product and specification section.
 Location in project.
 Type of inspection or test.
 Observations regarding compliance with Contract.
Further the Contractor shall at his own expense provide testing equipment for the
tests mentioned in the specifications.
The Contractor’s laboratory facilities (independent laboratory or his own
established laboratory) shall be complete with all equipment, installations and
facilities to carry out the tests related to soil, concrete as well as asphalt.
Other tests required by the Contract to be carried out by the Contractor have to
be carried out in an independent laboratory approved by the Engineer and paid
by the Contractor.
3.5.4 Procurement and Transportation
1. The Contractor shall manufacture or procure and transport all the Plant and
Equipment in an expeditious and orderly manner to the Site.
2. The Contractor shall at its own risk and expense transport all the Plant and
Equipment, the Contractor’s Equipment (Design-Build) and the Contractor’s
Equipment (Operations) to the Site by the mode of transport that the Contractor
judges most suitable under all the circumstances.
3. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract, the Contractor may select any
safe mode of transport operated by any person to carry the Plant and Equipment,
the Contractor’s Equipment (Design-Build) and the Contractor’s Equipment
(Operations).
4. Upon dispatch of each shipment of the Plant and Equipment, the
Contractor’s Equipment (Design-Build) and the Contractor’s Equipment
(Operations), the Contractor shall notify the Owner by facsimile or e-mail of the
description of the Plant and Equipment and of the Contractor’s Equipment
(Design-Build), the point and means of dispatch, and the estimated time and
point of arrival in the country where the Site is located, if applicable, and at the
Site. The Contractor shall furnish the Owner with relevant shipping documents
to be agreed upon between the parties.
5. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining, if necessary, approvals
from the authorities for transportation of the Plant and Equipment, the
Contractor’s Equipment (Design-Build) and the Contractor’s Equipment
(Operations) to the Site. The Owner shall use its reasonable endeavors in a
timely and expeditious manner to assist the Contractor in obtaining such
approvals, if requested by the Contractor. The Contractor shall indemnify and
hold harmless the Owner from and against any claim for damage to roads,


bridges or any other traffic facilities that may be caused by the transport of the
Plant and Equipment, the Contractor’s Equipment (Design-Build) and the
Contractor’s Equipment (Operations) to the Site.
6. The Contractor shall, at its own expense, handle all imported Plant and
Equipment, Contractor’s Equipment (Design-Build) and Contractor’s Equipment
(Operations) at the point(s) of import and shall handle any formalities for
customs clearance. If the Applicable Law requires any application or act to be
made by or in the name of the Owner, the Owner shall take all necessary steps to
comply with such Applicable Law. In the event of delays in customs clearance
that are not the fault of the Contractor, the Contractor shall be entitled to an
extension in the Time for Completion.
3.6 Building Responsibilities
3.6.1 Temporary Supports, Structures and Utility Services
The Contractor shall have the sole responsibility for the design, erection,
operation, maintenance, and removal of temporary supports, structures and
utility services and the design and execution of construction methods required in
their use.
The Contractor shall engage and pay for registered professional engineering
personnel skilled in the appropriate disciplines to perform those functions
referred to in Point 1 where required by law or by the Design-Build Documents
and in all cases where such temporary supports, structures and utility services
and their designs and method of construction are of such a nature that
professional engineering skill is required to produce safe and satisfactory results.
3.6.2 Document Review
The Contractor shall be responsible for all approvals and permits of the Design-
Build Documents of the present specification. If the Contractor during the course
of the construction does discover any error, inconsistency or omission in the
Design-Build Documents, the Contractor shall not proceed with the work
affected until the Contractor has corrected any such errors or inconsistency or
supplied any missing information and these corrections have been approved in
writing by the Project Manager or the Owner.
3.6.3 Plant and Equipment
The Contractor shall provide and pay for labor, Plant and Equipment, tools,
construction machinery and equipment, materials and supplies, water, heat, light,
power, compressed air, communication systems, transportation, and all other
facilities and services necessary for the performance of the Design-Build
Services in accordance with the Design-Build Documents.


The Contractor shall provide, furnish and maintain temporary sanitary facilities
at the site, as provided herein, for the needs of all construction workers and
others performing work or furnishing services on the Contract. Sanitary
facilities shall be of reasonable capacity, properly maintained throughout the
construction period, and obscured from public view to the greatest practical
extent. If toilets of the chemically treated type are used, at least one toilet will be
furnished for each 20 men. The Contractor shall enforce the use of such sanitary
facilities by all personnel at the site.
Wall mounted hand fire extinguishers shall be of the all-purpose, nitrogen
pressured, dry chemical type. Fire extinguishers shall be provided at each site
during construction. The fire extinguishers shall meet international industrial
standards and shall be 10 kg and the color of the shell shall be red. One fire
extinguisher each shall be installed in the Contractor's and the Employer and
Engineer's field offices to be used for this Contract.
The Contractor shall provide first-aid facilities for his and Sub-contractors'
employees and shall ensure that a person under his employment is trained in
first-aid and is present at all times when work is in progress. The Contractor shall
extend his site first aid facilities to provide adequate cover for the Employer and
Engineer's staff.
The Contractor shall ensure that all Plant and Equipment provided are new. Plant
and Equipment which are not specified shall be of a quality consistent with those
specified and their use shall be acceptable to the Project Manager.
3.6.4 Documents at the Site
The Contractor shall keep site order book, one copy of the Design-Build
Documents as up-dated, submittals, reports and records of meetings at the Site,
in good order and shall make them available to the Owner and the Project
Manager or any person authorized by the owner, upon request and at any
reasonable time.
3.6.5 Use of the Sites and Sewage Collection and Treatment system
The Contractor shall confine construction machinery and equipment, storage of

Plant and Equipment, Contractor’s Equipment (Design-Build) and Contractor’s
Equipment (Operations), and operations of Contractor’s Personnel to limits
indicated by laws, ordinances, permits or the Design-Build Documents and shall
not unreasonably encumber the Site with Plant and Equipment, Contractor’s
Equipment (Design-Build) or Contractor’s Equipment (Operations). The
Contractor shall not load or permit to be loaded any of the working areas or the
Sewage Collection and Treatment system with a weight or force that will
endanger the safety of the areas or the Sewage Collection and Treatment system.


The Contractor shall not store Plant and Equipment, Contractor’s Equipment
(Design-Build) or Contractor’s Equipment (Operations) at the working areas
which are not necessary for the construction of the Project.
3.6.6 Setting Out
The Contractor shall be responsible for the true and proper setting-out of the
Sites and the Project in relation to benchmarks, reference marks and lines
specified in the Design-Build Documents.
If, at any time during the construction of the Project, any error shall appear in the
position, level or alignment of the Sites and the Sewage Collection and
Treatment system, the Contractor shall forthwith notify the Project Manager of
such error and, at its own expense, immediately rectify such error to the
reasonable satisfaction of the Project Manager.
3.6.7 Quality Assurance
The Contractor shall institute a quality assurance system to ensure compliance

with the requirements of the Design-Build Documents. Compliance with the
quality assurance system shall not relieve the Contractor of its duties, obligations
or responsibilities.
The Contractor shall submit for approval details of all quality assurance
procedures and documents relating to Contractor’s compliance with the quality
assurance system to the Project Manager before each stage of the Design-Build
Services are commenced as set out in the Time Schedule. When any document is
issued to the Project Manager, it shall be accompanied by the signed quality
statements for such document, if any. The Project Manager may audit any aspect
of the quality assurance system and the Contractor shall take any corrective
action as the Project Manager may deem appropriate.
The Engineer can at all times audit the quality assurance procedure of the
Contractor in the design or construction phase.
The audit is performed with reference to the quality assurance plan of the
Contractor and on the basis of the quality assurance procedure.
The auditor establishes an audit report revealing the found gaps or non-
compliance not later than three weeks after the performance of the audit.
Within a period of 10 working days counted from the date of the reception of the
report, the Contractor indicates in writing the corrective actions he wishes to
implement, their planning, and the name of the responsible of the control over
these corrective actions.


3.6.8 Contractor's Access Routes and Rights of Way during the Design-Build Period
The Contractor shall satisfy itself as to the suitability and availability of the
access routes it chooses to use during the Design-Build Period for access to and
from the project areas. The Contractor shall, as between the Parties, be
responsible for the maintenance of access routes during the Design-Build Period.
The Owner will not be responsible for any claims which may arise from the use
or otherwise of any access route. The Owner does not guarantee the suitability or
availability of any particular access route, and will not entertain any claim for
any non-suitability or non-availability for continuous use, during the Design-
Build Period, of any such route.
The Contractor shall design Site Roads to provide access for proper operation
and maintenance of the works and to support the heaviest wheel load expected
on the site under all weather conditions. Arrange road surfaces so that where
operating vehicles enter buildings there is a short ramp and road drainage leads
away from buildings. Ensure road profiles cause no surface ponding and surface
water is drained away in drains to avoid damage to the roads or to the site.
The Contractor shall bear all costs and charges for special or temporary rights-
of-way required by it for access to working areas and the Contractor's camp. The
Contractor shall also provide, at its own cost, any additional facilities outside the
project areas required by it for the purposes of the Design-Build Services.
3.6.9 Site Regulations and Safety
The Contractor shall establish Site regulations setting out the rules to be
observed in the execution of the Contract at the Sites and shall comply therewith.
The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Owner, with a copy to the Project
Manager, proposed Site regulations for the Owner’s approval, which approval
shall not be unreasonably withheld. Such Site regulations shall include rules in
respect of security, safety of the Site, Existing Facility and the Sewage
Collection and Treatment system, gate control, sanitation, medical care,
emergency preparedness, emergency response, on-site safety training of
employees and fire prevention.
The Contractor shall comply with all applicable safety regulations in providing
the Design-Build Services and in occupying any part of the Sites, Existing
Facility or Sewage Collection and Treatment system. Unless otherwise stated in
the Design-Build Documents, the Contractor shall, during the Design-Build
Period,
(I) Provide secure fencing, lighting, guarding and watching of the Design-
Build Services;
(II) Provide temporary roadways, footways, guards and fences which may be
necessary for the accommodation and protection of its employees, Site visitors,
owners and occupiers of adjacent land, the public and others;


(III) Prepare a manual of safety policies and procedures applicable to each stage
of the Design-Build Services and to the Project as a whole and distribute such
manual to all of its Sub-contractors, agents, representatives and employees
working at the Project; and
(IV) Carry out safety briefings of applicable site regulations to all employees,
Sub-contractors, agents, representatives and visitors to the Project, Existing
Facility and the Sewage Collection and Treatment system prior to permitting first
access of the applicable person to the project areas or the Sewage Collection and
Treatment system, and at regular intervals thereafter.
During the Design-Build Period, the Contractor shall develop and implement a
comprehensive occupational health and safety program for the protection of the
Contractor’s Personnel and all other persons who may attend at the project areas
or the Sewage Collection and Treatment system. The program shall include a
description of how the Contractor will,
(I) Carry out all occupational health and safety responsibilities in respect of
the Project as required under the Applicable Law and occupational health and
safety guide lines of KfW;
(II) Develop and manage all required occupational health and safety reporting
procedures; and
(III) Manage all occupational health and safety claims.
3.6.10 Contractor’s Equipment (Design-Build) and Site Clearance
All Contractor’s Equipment (Design-Build) brought by the Contractor onto the

Site shall be deemed to be intended to be used exclusively for the execution of
the Contract. The Contractor shall not remove the same from the Site without the
Project Manager’s consent that such Contractor’s Equipment (Design-Build) is
no longer required for the execution of the Contract.
The Contractor shall maintain the Sites in a tidy condition and free from the
accumulation of waste products and debris. The Contractor shall remove waste
products and debris resulting from the Sites and shall leave the Facility clean and
suitable for occupancy and performance of the Operations Services before
attainment of Substantial Completion. The Contractor shall remove products,
tools, construction machinery, and equipment, including the Contractor’s
Equipment (Design-Build), not required for the performance of the remaining
Design-Build Services.
Prior to notifying the Owner, the Contractor shall remove products, tools,
construction machinery and equipment, and waste products and debris, including
the Contractor’s Equipment (Design-Build).
Upon the issue of any Completion Certificate, the Contractor shall clear away
and remove, from the Site all Contractors’ Equipment (Design-Build), surplus
material, wreckage, rubbish and temporary work or structures. The Contractor


shall ensure that the Sites and the Sewage Collection and Treatment system are
in a clean and safe condition to the satisfaction of the Owner’s Project Manager.
If the Contractor fails to remove, no later than 30 days after the issue of the
Completion Certificate, any remaining Contractor’s Equipment (Design-Build),
surplus material, wreckage, rubbish and temporary work or structures, the Owner
may sell or otherwise dispose of such items. The Owner shall be entitled to
retain, from the proceeds of such sale, a sum sufficient to meet the costs incurred
in connection with the sale or disposal, and in restoring the Sites and Sewage
Collection and Treatment system. Any balance of the proceeds shall be paid to
the Contractor. If the proceeds of the sale are insufficient to meet the Owner’s
costs, the outstanding balance shall be recoverable from the Contractor by the
Owner.
The Owner will, if requested, use reasonable efforts to assist the Contractor in
obtaining any local, state or national government permission required by the
Contractor for the export of the Contractor’s Equipment (Design-Build) imported
by the Contractor solely for use in the execution of the Contract that is no longer
required for the execution of the Contract.
Clearing and grubbing operations on sites shall be the minimum practicably
necessary to construct the Works. The Contractor shall protect trees and other
vegetation designated for preservation.
Re-install any road furniture (e.g. traffic signs) removed to its original location in
at least equal condition immediately after completion of pipe laying at a
particular location.
No blasting shall be carried out unless otherwise permission is taken from the
competent authority.
3.6.11 Protection of the Environment
The Contractor shall take all reasonable steps to protect the environment, both on
and off the sites, and to limit damage and nuisance to people and property
resulting from pollution, noise, dust and other results of its Services, including,
adopting working practices that prevent or minimize the transfer of any pollutant
off-site; maintaining the access roads in good repair; using appropriate dust
suppressant methods; restricting trucking and loud machinery and equipment use
to daylight hours; using mufflers, silencers and other appropriate methods to
minimize the noise of the construction; using “silt fencing”, hay bales, silt traps
or other methods to minimize soil erosion and prevent the contamination of
surface water and the transportation of soil and sediment off-site onto adjacent
properties; and maintaining clean sites and Sewage Collection and Treatment
System that are free of garbage, except the disposal area, and debris. In addition
to the above, the Contractor shall, at all times during building and construction,
ensure that the Environmental Management Plan provided in Annex 6 and the
recommendations of Environmental and Social Assessment prepared for the


project, are implemented. The contractor shall follow all relevant laws, rules,
regulations and guidelines of Government of India, Government of Madhya
Pradesh, Environmental and Social Management Framework for MPUSEP and
Safeguard Policies of KfW.
The contractor is required to plant at least 500 plants as given in Scope of work
and upkeep them till the end of O&M period. Such tress will be counted at the
end of the Contract period and the same will be mentioned in the completion
certificate.
3.6.12 Security of the Site, Existing Facility and Sewage Collection and Treatment System
Unless otherwise stated in the Design-Build Documents, the Contractor shall be

responsible for keeping unauthorized persons off the Sites and Sewage
Collection and Treatment system, the Contractor shall maintain detailed record
of all persons that enter the Sites and the Sewage Collection and Treatment
system; and the Contractor shall ensure that authorized persons shall be limited
to the Contractor’s Personnel, the Project Manager, employees of Sub-
contractors and persons authorized by the Owner or the Project Manager.
3.6.13 Co-operation with other Authorities and Utilities
The Contractor shall consult and get approval from applicable authorities and
utilities in connection with the following work:
1. Before starting any excavations, the Contractor shall satisfy himself and
the Project Manager as to the exact position of existing services by exploratory
excavations and shall make his own arrangements with the service providers for
any diversion or removal of services required.
2. The Contractor shall be responsible for liaison with all relevant authorities
and utilities and arrange his construction schedule to minimize inconvenience to
all other parties and the public.
3. Make least possible interference with existing amenities, whether natural
or man-made. Keep Site clearance to minimum. Divert around the perimeter of
the sites any minor watercourses crossing the sites that are needed for agriculture
outside the site boundaries.
4. Discharge or dispose of all water and waste products from the sites to the
satisfaction of the Project Manager and of any authority or person with an
interest in land into which water and waste products may be discharged, without
limitation to the Contractor’s general obligations.
5. Accept responsibility for safeguarding all pipes, cables and other things
that would otherwise be liable to suffer damage without precautionary measures.
6. Complete permanent fencing or other temporary safeguards around
electrical equipment as far as practicable before connection of electricity supply.


7. Ensure that all assemblies and sub-assemblies delivered to the site are of
suitable size and weight for access to the place of installation and pack all items
of plant and materials for transport to avoid damage from handling or weather. It
is the sole responsibility of the Contractor to maintain protection of the
equipment.
3.6.14 Physical Cultural Property
The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions to prevent its employees,

agents, representatives, Sub-contractors, or other persons from removing or
damaging any fossils, coins, articles of antiquity, and structures and other
remains or things of geological or archaeological interest at the Site. The
Contractor shall, immediately upon discovery of such article or thing, inform the
Project Manager and shall follow the requirements of Archeological Survey of
India / National Monuments Authority, who will issue instructions with regard to
such items. All fossils, coins, articles of value or antiquity, and structures and
other remains or things of geological or archaeological interest discovered on the
Site shall be the property of the Owner and are bound by the regulations of
Government of India.
If the Contractor suffers delay or incurs any damages or costs in following any
instructions of the Project Manager pursuant to this document, and if such delay
or damages or costs were Unforeseeable, the Contractor shall give notice to the
Project Manager, with a copy to the Owner. After receipt of such notice, the
Project Manager shall determine if the Contractor is entitled to any extension of
time or any compensation for such damages or costs and shall notify the
Contractor accordingly.
3.6.15 Emergency Work
If, by reason of an emergency arising in connection with and during the

execution of the Design-Build Services, any protective or remedial work is
necessary as a matter of urgency to prevent damage to the Sites or Sewage
Collection and Treatment system, the Contractor shall immediately carry out
such work.
If the Contractor is unable or unwilling to do such work immediately, the Owner
may do or cause such work to be done as the Owner may determine is necessary
in order to prevent damage to the Sites or the Sewage Collection and Treatment
System. In such event the Owner shall, as soon as practicable after the
occurrence of any such emergency, notify the Contractor in writing of such
emergency, the work done and the reasons therefore. If the work done or caused
to be done by the Owner is work that the Contractor was liable to do at its own
expense under the Contract, the reasonable costs incurred by the Owner in
connection therewith shall be paid by the Contractor to the Owner. Otherwise,
the cost of such remedial work shall be borne by the Owner.


3.6.16 Work at Night and on Holidays
Unless otherwise provided in the Contract, no work shall be carried out at night
and on public holidays of the Country without prior written consent of the
Owner, except where work is necessary or required to ensure safety of the Sites
or the Sewage Collection and Treatment System or for the protection of life, or
to prevent loss or damage to property, when the Contractor shall immediately
advise the Project Manager, provided that provisions of this document shall not
apply to any work which is customarily carried out by rotary or double-shifts.
Notwithstanding this document, if and when the Contractor considers it
necessary to carry out work at night or on public holidays so as to meet the Time
for Completion and requests the Owner’s consent thereto, the Owner shall not
unreasonably withhold such consent.
3.6.17 Existing Facility Operation
No STP facility exists in the town at present. However, in case of any existing
Sewage Collection and/or treatment facility, the Contractor will not be
responsible for the operation and maintenance or repairs and renovation.
3.7 Test and Inspection
3.7.1 General
1. The Contractor shall at its own expense carry out at the place of
manufacture or on the Site all such tests and inspections of the Plant and
Equipment and any part of the Project as are specified. The Contractor shall, in
addition to those tests and inspections set out in the Contract, develop a plan for
all testing and inspection of the Project that is required in order to complete the
Project in accordance with the Contract.
2. The Owner and the Project Manager or their designated representatives
shall be entitled to attend any test or inspection, provided that the Owner shall
bear all costs and expenses incurred in connection with such attendance
including, but not limited to, all travelling and board and lodging expenses.
3. The Contractor shall obtain from any relevant third party or manufacturer
any necessary permission or consent to enable the Owner and the Project
Manager (or their designated representatives) to attend the test or inspection.
4. If the Owner and the Project Manager, or their designated representatives,
fails to attend the test or inspection, or if it is agreed between the Parties that
such persons shall not do so, then the Contractor may proceed with the test or
inspection in the absence of such persons, and shall provide the Project Manager
with a certified report of the results thereof.


5. The Project Manager may require the Contractor to carry out any test or
inspection not required by the Contract, provided that the Contractor’s
reasonable costs and expenses incurred in the carrying out of such test or
inspection shall be added to the Contract Price. Further, if such test or inspection
impedes the progress of work or the Contractor’s performance of its other
obligations under the Contract, due allowance will be made in respect of the
Time for Completion and the other obligations so affected.
6. If any Plant and Equipment or any part of the Project fails to pass any test
or inspection, the Contractor shall either rectify or replace such Plant and
Equipment or part of the Sewage Collection and Treatment system and shall
repeat the test or inspection upon giving a notice under this document.
7. If any dispute or difference of opinion arises between the Parties in
connection with or arising out of the test or inspection of the Plant and
Equipment or part of the Project that cannot be settled between the parties within
a reasonable period of time, it may be referred to an Adjudicator for
determination.
8. The Contractor shall give the Owner and the Project Manager, at the
Owner’s expense, access at any reasonable time to any part of the Project or any
place where the Plant and Equipment are being manufactured or installed in the
Sewage Collection and Treatment system, in order to inspect the progress of the
work and the manner of manufacture or installation, provided that the Project
Manager shall give the Contractor a reasonable prior notice.
9. The Contractor agrees that neither the execution of a test or inspection of
Plant and Equipment or any part of the Site and the Sewage Collection and
Treatment system, nor the attendance by the Owner and the Project Manager, nor
the issue of any test certificate pursuant to this document, shall release the
Contractor from any other responsibilities under the Contract.
10. No part of the Project or foundations shall be covered up on the Site
without the Contractor carrying out any test or inspection required under the
Contract. The Contractor shall give a reasonable notice to the Project Manager
whenever any such parts of the Project or foundations are ready or about to be
ready for test or inspection; such test or inspection and notice thereof shall be
subject to the requirements of the Contract.
11. The Contractor shall uncover any part of the Project or foundations, or
shall make openings in or through the same as the Project Manager may from
time to time require at the Site, and shall reinstate and make good such part or
parts.
12. If any parts of the Project or foundations have been covered up at the Site
after compliance with the requirement of this document and are found to be
executed in accordance with the Contract, the expenses of uncovering, making
openings in or through, reinstating, and making good the same shall be borne by
the Owner, and the Time for Completion shall be reasonably adjusted to the


extent that the Contractor has thereby been delayed or impeded in the
performance of any of its obligations under the Contract.
13. The Contractor shall provide a report for every test carried out to sign and
certify that the test has been carried out and, the result. Tests witnessed by the
Project Manager shall be countersigned. The Contractor shall collect and collate
all data into a bound certified report.
14. The Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, electricity, fuel, stores
and apparatus and instruments necessary to carry out the tests efficiently.
Measuring instruments indicators and other apparatus shall be as approved by the
Project Manager.
15. The type and number of performance and operational tests to demonstrate
compliance of the installations with the output requirements shall be agreed
between the Project Manager and the Contractor. At least 1 week before testing
starts the Contractor shall submit the test schedule, detailed test procedures and
method statements to the Project Manager for approval.
The following tests shall be compulsory but not necessarily sufficient for the
Project and the test plan agreed between the Project Manager and the Contractor.
3.7.2 Pre-Commissioning Tests
The Contractor will demonstrate the proper function and operation of all
mechanical and electrical plant and confirm compliance of all mechanical and
electrical equipment with the design and specifications, both individually and as
part of a system.
Water will be fed through each stream of each process stage in turn and each
item of auxiliary equipment shall be operated in a similar manner. Changeover of
duties of all plant shall be demonstrated. Each item of plant shall take a
proportionate share of the operating duty for a total minimum of 72 hours of
continuous satisfactory operation.
The Contractor will systematically demonstrate completion of the plant and that
it is ready for Commissioning.
This process shall then be extended to the sewerage system, where the specific
procedures for flushing will apply.
3.7.3 Guarantee Tests
The Contractor shall demonstrate the ability of the system to meet Functional
Guarantees for the Sewage Treatment Plant and sewage collection system. The
Guarantee tests shall be conducted over a period of 28-30 days of continuous
operation of the sewerage network, pumping stations and sewage treatment
plant. The guarantee tests shall commence after the house service connections
have been made and completed such that sewage is entering the network. The


tests shall assess performance of the facilities with relation or regard to the
following criteria:
 Raw sewage composition;
 Treated sewage composition;
 Power consumption; and
 Consumption of chemicals.
Operate the plant in accordance with the Operating Manual and vary plant
outputs over the full operating range. Send results and analysis with all other
data collected to the Project Manager each week for review at regular meetings
with the Owner and the Contractor.
Sample sewage quality at the entry of various Intermediate Pumping Stations and
the effluent treated sewage to ensure that all requirements are met. Use these
samples for analysis by an approved laboratory or by approved portable
analyzers.
The effluent sewage quality test results shall fail if any of the following occurs:
 More than one discrete sample exceeds the maximum value in any week;
 More than three discrete samples exceed the maximum value during the 28
day test.
Supply and install measuring unit and data logging equipment to monitor the
plant power consumption (kWh) throughout the Tests.
The test shall fail if the power consumption exceeds the guaranteed value stated
by the Contractor in the Schedules.
If a Performance Test fails, prepare and submit Plant modification proposals to
the Project Manager. When approved, carry out the modification work as quickly
as possible, and as soon as complete, resume normal works operation and repeat
the Guarantee Tests.
The test shall fail if the power consumption exceeds the guaranteed value stated
by the Contractor in the Schedules.
If a Performance Test fails, prepare and submit Plant modification proposals to
the Project Manager. When approved, carry out the modification work as quickly
as possible, and as soon as complete, resume normal works operation and repeat
the Guarantee Tests.
3.7.4 Completion of the Sewage Collection and Treatment System
In compliance to GCC, and as soon as the Design-Build Services have, in the

opinion of the Contractor, been completed, excluding minor items not materially
affecting the operation or safety of the Project, and the Project has satisfactorily
passed all Tests on Completion, the Contractor shall so notify the Project
Manager and the Owner in writing (the “Notice of Completion”) and provide the
‘as-built’ Design-Build Documents.


The Project Manager shall, no later than 30 days after receipt of the Contractor’s
notice under this document, either issue a Completion Certificate stating that the
Project has reached Completion as of the date of the Contractor’s notice under
this document, or notify the Contractor in writing of any defects or deficiencies
or both.
If the Project Manager is not satisfied that the Design-Build Services are
complete, the Project Manager shall notify the Contractor in writing of any
defects or deficiencies no later than 7 days after receipt of the Notice of
Completion.
If the Project Manager notifies the Contractor of any defects or deficiencies or
both, the Contractor shall then correct such defects or deficiencies, and shall
repeat the procedure described in this document.
If the Project Manager is satisfied that the Design-Build Services have reached
Completion, the Owner shall, no later than 7 days after receipt of the
Contractor’s repeated Notice of Completion, issue a Completion Certificate
stating that the Design-Build Services have reached Completion as of the date of
the Contractor’s repeated Notice of Completion.
If the Owner fails to issue the Completion Certificate and fails to inform the
Contractor of any defects or deficiencies 14 days after receipt of the Notice of
Completion or 7 days after receipt of the Contractor’s repeated Notice of
Completion, then the Design-Build Services shall be deemed to have reached
Completion as of the date of the Notice of Completion or repeated Notice of
Completion as the case may be.
As soon as possible after Completion, the Contractor shall complete all
outstanding minor items so that the Project are fully in accordance with the
requirements of the Contract, failing which the Owner will undertake such
completion and deduct the costs thereof from any monies owing to the
Contractor.
3.8 Commissioning
Commissioning of the Sewage Collection and Treatment System shall be

commenced by the Contractor immediately after issue of the Completion
Certificate by the Project Manager, pursuant to this document, or immediately
after issue of the deemed Completion, under this document.
3.8.1 Tests on Commissioning
The Tests on Commissioning, and repeats thereof, shall be conducted by the

Contractor during Commissioning of the Project to ascertain whether the project
or the relevant part can attain the technical standards set out in the Contract. The
Contractor’s and Project Manager’s advisory personnel shall attend the Tests on
Commissioning, and shall advise and assist the Owner. The Owner shall
promptly provide the Contractor with such information as the Contractor may


reasonably require in relation to the conduct and results of the Tests on

Commissioning, and any repeats thereof.
If for reasons not attributable to the Contractor, the Tests on Commissioning of
the Sewage Collection and Treatment System cannot be successfully completed
within 21 days after the period from the date of Completion specified in
Appendix to GC or any other period agreed upon by the Owner and the
Contractor, the Contractor shall be deemed to have fulfilled its obligations with
respect to the Tests on Commissioning.
3.8.2 Operational Acceptance
Operational Acceptance shall occur in respect of the Project when the Tests on
Commissioning have been successfully completed.
At any time after the successful completion of the Tests on Commissioning, the
Contractor may give a notice to the Project Manager requesting the issue of an
Operational Acceptance Certificate in respect of the Project.
The Project Manager shall, after consultation with the Owner, and no later than 7
days after receipt of the Contractor’s notice, issue an Operational Acceptance
Certificate.
If within 7 days after receipt of the Contractor’s notice, the Project Manager fails
to issue the Operational Acceptance Certificate or fails to inform the Contractor
in writing of the justifiable reasons why the Project Manager has not issued the
Operational Acceptance Certificate, the project shall be deemed to have been
accepted as of the date of the Contractor’s said notice.
3.9 Reporting during the Design Build Period
In addition to the reports indicated in the Bill of Quantities, the Contractor shall
prepare First, Quarterly and Final Reports. All reports shall be prepared in the
English language in hard and electronic version for submission to the Owner.
3.9.1 First Report (Inception Report)
Not later than in four weeks upon commencement of the assignment, the
Contractor will prepare and submit to the Owner a first report. This report will
include the information about the status of the Project preparation and
implementation, any problems encountered during the project preparation,
revised overall procurement plan and contracting strategy. The expected Project
implementation schedule corrected in accordance with the realistic status will be
attached to the report, as well as a confirmation on the Contractor’s work
schedule for the next quarter. The report shall also propose content of the
schematic design documents with e.g. projected water demand and water works


inventory, design reports, detailed technical specifications, supervision

procedures and supervision reports.
3.9.2 Preliminary Design Report
Not later than two months upon from effective date.
3.9.3 Final Design Reports
Not later than three months from effective date.
3.9.4 Design-Build Progress Reports (Monthly Progress Report)
a The Contractor shall prepare monthly progress reports of the Design-Build

Services during the Design-Build Period and submit four copies of the reports to
the Project Manager. The first report shall cover the period up to the end of the
calendar month after that in which the Design-Build Starting Date occurred and
reports shall be submitted monthly thereafter, each no later than 14 days after the
last day of the month to which it applies.
b The Design-Build Services monthly reports shall include the following
information:
 photographs and detailed descriptions of progress, including each stage of
design, procurement, manufacture, delivery to the STP and Sewerage
Network site, construction, laying, erection, testing and commissioning;
 charts showing the status of Design-Build Documents, purchase orders,
manufacture and construction;
 for the manufacture of each main item, equipment, machinery, floor or
component of the STP and Sewerage Network, the name of manufacturer,
manufacture location, percentage progress, and the actual or expected dates
of commencement of manufacture, Contractor’s inspections, tests and
delivery relating thereto;
 detailed records of the Contractor’s Personnel and Contractor’s Equipment
(Design- Build) on the STP site, Sewerage Network and the actual usage of
the Contractor’s Equipment (Design- Build) during the reporting period
and the tasks performed by the Contractor’s Personnel;
 copies of quality assurance documents, test results and certificates of the
Plant and Equipment;
 all monitoring results;
 the Environmental, Social, Health and Safety (ESHS) metrics set out in
Annex 6;
 percentage completion achieved compared with the planned percentage
completion for each activity (in write up as well as through Bar charts);
and


 Where any activity is behind in the scheduled completion, comments and

likely consequences and a description of the corrective action being taken.
“The Contractor shall provide immediate notification to the Project Manager of
incidents in the following categories. Full details of such incidents shall be
provided to the Project Manager within the timeframe agreed with the Engineer.
a confirmed or likely violation of any law or international agreement;
b any fatality or serious (lost time) injury;
c significant adverse effects or damage to private property (e.g. vehicle
accident, damage from fly rock, working beyond the boundary)
d major pollution of drinking water aquifer or damage or destruction of rare
or endangered habitat (including protected areas) or species;
e any allegation of sexual harassment or sexual misbehavior, child abuse,
defilement, or other violations involving children.
3.9.5 Quarterly Reports
Throughout the assignment the Contractor shall submit Quarterly Reports to the
Owner by the fifteenth day of the following month. Each report will show events
and progress for the Contractor’s activities of each of the main tasks.
The format of quarterly reports shall be agreed with the Owner and shall include,
but not be limited to, the following:
1. Chart and description of work and goods of each stage: Design, production,
transportation, construction, installation, testing, commissioning, guarantee
test and acceptance;
2. Comparisons of actual and planned progress including percentage
completion achieved for each activity;
3. Details of any aspects which may jeopardize the completion in accordance
with the contracts, and the measures being (or to be) adopted to overcome
such aspects;
4. Copies of the assurance documents, test results and certificates of materials;
5. Safety statistics, including details of any hazardous incidents and activities
relating to environmental aspects and public relations;
6. Projected contractual payments for next four quarters;
7. Other information to be agreed with the Owner.
The quarterly progress reports should be short and whenever possible made in a
table like for easy reference and comparison.


3.9.6 Final Report
The Contractor will prepare a draft of the Final Report one month prior to the
end of the Design Build Contract and hand it over to the Owner. The Final
Report will be in fact a review of the entire Contractor’s tasks fulfilment and
include the necessary conclusions. Upon receipt of the Owner’s comments and
suggestions the Contractor prepares the finalized version of the report.
3.10 Replacement of Key Staff to be Deployed by the Contractor During the Design Build
Period
If replacement of any Key Staff during design & build services period becomes
necessary, the Contractor shall submit a proposal for Owner’s approval, advising
therein the name of the replacement staff of equivalent or higher qualifications
duly supported by his CV.
The overlap period of the new key staff and the staff to be replaced shall be
minimum of one month.


4. Sewerage Treatment Plant
4.1 General
The Government of Madhya Pradesh (GoMP) through Government of India has

applied for a loan from the KfW Development Bank towards the cost of
“MADHYA PRADESH URBAN SANITATION AND ENVIRONMENT
PROGRAMME (MPUSEP) and intends to apply a portion of proceeds of this
loan towards “SURVEY, REVIEW THE DESIGNS, REDESIGN WHERE
SYSTEM, SEWAGE TREATMENT AND DISPOSAL SYSTEM OF
BARWANI NAGAR PALIKA, DISTRICT BARWANI OF MADHYA
PRADESH AND OPERATE AND MAINTAIN THE BUILT SYSTEM FOR 10
YEARS” and cover eligible payments under the contracts for construction of
works as detailed below.
The scope of work to be provided with the contract is design, construction and
commissioning of complete sewage treatment plants (STP) including all
preparatory and belonging works.
In general, the requirements for the design, construction, fabrication, inspection
and testing of the works shall comply with the technical specifications and
requirements contained in the contract, codes of practices as published by the
Bureau of Indian Standard (BIS), international standards and norms or its
equivalent standard as well as the latest version of “Manual on Sewerage and
Sewage Treatment” as published by the Central Public Health Engineering
Organization (CPHEEO) of the Ministry of Urban Development, Government of
India.
The STP designs and operations have to consider and to fulfil the effluent
parameters as listed below:
Table 5 Effluent Parameters

Unit Limit values
BOD5 mg/l 10
COD mg/l 50
TSS mg/l 20
Ntot mg/l 10
NH4-N mg/l 5
Ptot mg/l 10
PO4-P mg/l 2
Fecal Coli form MPN/100ml 230
pH value 5.5 to 9


The planning horizon for the STPs is 2048. An intermediate planning horizon
was chosen as of 2033. The planning horizon has an impact on population
figures, population equivalents, hydraulic and pollution loads and STPs.
Technical requirements are defined functionally as far as these Tender
Documents do not contain detailed regulations and specifications. Within the
given framework the Contractor is free to propose his own solutions to meet the
requirements and fulfil the guarantees. The bidder’s design has to consider a
maximum build up area of 60% of the available plots.
The P&ID drawings as provided in Annex 4 are to be considered in the same
way as the Tender Documents.
4.1.1 City of Barwani
Barwani is situated abutting Narmada River and the general slope of the city is
towards the river in South-North direction. Northern boundary of the city is river
Narmada.
Table 6 STP in Barwani. Note: 1 Acre = 4,046.86 m²; 1 ha = 2.471 acre

Barwani STP
Available land [acres] 2.18
Ownership public
Plot No. (Khasra No.) 137


Figure 6 Location of STP in Barwani
4.1.2 Scope of Work
The main items/treatment stages for both STPs included are as follows:
all necessary preparatory and belonging works as well as civil, mechanical and
electrical/SCADA works for fully functional STP
 inlet pumping station (depending on the height of the incoming sewage)
 coarse and fine screen including building
 grit and grease chamber
 distribution chamber
 sequencing batch reactors (SBR) including blower building
 equalization chamber including pumping station/service water station
 chlorination (disinfection) and contact basin
 excess sludge thickening and belt filter including building
 office, operations and laboratory building (including emergency generator)
 accessibility of every facility/building by paved roads and heavy truck
4.1.3 Design Criteria
Table 7 Design Criteria


Unit 2033/ 2048/

STP
PE 74,199 96,807
total flow m³/d 9,000 11,500
BOD5 kg/d 2,004 2,614
COD kg/d 3,406 4,443
TSS kg/d 3,005 3,921
VSS kg/d 2,107 2,750
Ntot kg/d 401 522
Norg kg/d 104 136
NH4-N kg/d 260 339
NO3-N kg/d 37 49
Ptot kg/d 59 77
PO43- kg/d 37 49
The contractor shall carry out wastewater analyses of raw sewage to

ascertain/verify the raw sewage quality and quantity. MPUDC will not be
responsible for the above and no relaxation will be given to the guarantee
conditions of desired treated effluent quality. For design purposes lower
parameters than the above mentioned parameter will not be allowed.
4.1.4 Design Sewage Flow
Table 8 Design Sewage Flow

Unit 2033/ Barwani STP 2048/ Barwani STP
Daily average flow

m³/d 9,000 11,359.07
Qd,average
Peak flow (Peak factor taken m³/h 750 946.60

2) Qh,max l/s 208.34 262.95
Average flow m³/h 375.00 473.29
Qh,average l/s 108.97 131.47
Minimum flow m³/h 187.5 236.65
Qh,min l/s 52.10 65.74
The design horizon of the present projects is 2033; however, facilities and
equipment shall be prepared to fulfil the design criteria of 2048. Appropriate
preparation measures shall be undertaken.


4.1.5 General Arrangement Rules at STP
The following general rules shall be followed in arranging the Plant:

 Minimum clear distance of 6 m shall be allowed between adjacent units of
treatment or fixed structures to permit safe and convenient access for
operation and maintenance;
 Open area with necessary pavement, adjacent to all mechanical Plant shall
be provided as a maintenance lay down area;
 Fixed runways, lifting eyes or other means shall be provided to permit the
removal of Plant equipment that may logically be required to be removed
during the course of its normal operational life for maintenance or any
other purpose;
 Areas where leakage is likely to occur whether in normal use or during
maintenance, shall be provided with drains and pipework to the
supernatant pump station;
 Provided acoustic coverings where necessary to limit the noise produced
during normal operation to the limits detailed in these documents;
 Plant shall be arranged and the building designed to permit convenient
maintenance and removal of equipment whenever deemed necessary;
 Management of environmental impacts during construction and
installation/erection works and O&M shall be carried out as per the
Environmental Management Plan provided in Annex 6 of this Volume, as
per the recommendation of the Environmental and Social Impact
Assessment carried out by the owner (shared as part of the information to
the bidders), environmental and social management framework of
MPUSEP and the regulations of Government of Madhya Pradesh /
Government of India.
 Provide adequate supports and restraints for process piping, valves and
appurtenances.
 Connect pipework to equipment with flexible connections or make other
provisions to avoid transfer of pipe loads to devices.
 All electro mechanical equipment, electronic instrumentation and air
conditioning facilities shall be designed to withstand the corrosive
environment that will be prevailing in the STP.
 Particular attention shall be paid to the layout of the chemical piping,
which shall be functional and neat in appearance. Generally, where
pipework is installed in ducts, it shall be supported not less than 150 mm
clear of the floor.
 Where materials subject to UV degradation are employed, they shall be
shielded from direct sunlight.
4.1.6 Modular Construction
All the treatment units shall be designed and constructed for their respective
flows/capacities mentioned in these technical specifications and shall be
constructed in suitable modular or treatment train capacities.


4.2 Process Description
4.2.1 Inlet Pump Station (Terminal Pumping Station)
The incoming wastewater flow is to be coarsely screened and lifted at the STP in
order to flow through the different treatment stages by gravity only. The
pumping head has to ensure that there is only one lifting station for the
wastewater at the inlet of the STP.
Suitable measures shall be undertaken to calm the incoming wastewater flow and
protect the inlet pumps from coarse debris. The pumps shall be placed in the wet
well. The size of the pump sump shall be suitable to accommodate the number of
pumps required for operation with easy manoeuvrability.
Apart from the wet well, the Pump Station has a separate room to house the
Electrical and Control Panel, space for spare parts and a maintenance area, etc.
4.2.1.1 Wet Well
The capacity of the wet well should be kept such that the detention time in the
wet well shall be minimum 5 minutes of peak flow and the maximum detention
time shall not exceed 30 minutes at average flow. The sump sizing has to ensure
that in any case the operation cycle for any pump has to be more than 5 minutes.
At the inlet of the wet well a course screen (100 mm) shall be foreseen. Easy
access and suitable raking facilities have to be considered. A crane system is to
be foreseen with sufficient lifting capacity (1.5 ton or 1.5 times the maximum
single unit/weight that may be required to be removed for maintenance) with
horizontal travel on the I-beam. The crane shall be used for removal of debris as
well as for maintenance of the pumps and piping. In addition the crane shall be
able to lift debris and equipment onto a tuck for disposal or maintenance.
Table 9 Design Criteria Inlet Pump Station

Unit 2033/ 2048/
Medium raw wastewater raw wastewater
Minimum water °C 20 20
temperature
Minimum number 2+1 2+1

of pumps
Estimated m As per design As per design

pumping head


4.2.1.3 Inlet Pumps
Pumps for the wastewater inlet pumping station shall be of non-clog wet
installation centrifugal submersible pump. Single-stage close-coupled
submersible centrifugal vertical pump with a semi open multi vane impeller
designed to transport wastewater with fibrous materials and heavy sludge. Solids
of 100 mm size have to pass through the pump. The maximum speed shall be
less than 1500 rpm.
The impeller blades shall be self-cleaning upon each rotation as they pass across
a sharp relief groove in the insert ring and shall keep the impeller blades clear of
debris.
The pump housing shall be equipped with a drainage valve which enables the
operator to empty the volute before service.
The pump motor shall be induction type with a squirrel cage rotor, housed in an
air filled watertight chamber submersible up to 20m according IEC 60034
protection class IP 68. The stator windings and stator leads shall be insulated
with moisture resistant Class H insulation rated for 180 degree C (355 degree F).
The motor shall be sufficiently cooled by the surrounding liquid to run in
continuous duty S1 without limitation.
Motor and pump shall be designed and produced by the same manufacturer.
The cable entry shall consist of dual cylindrical elastomer sleeves, flanked by
washers, all having a close tolerance fit against the cable and the cable entry.
Epoxies, silicones, or other secondary sealing systems shall not be considered
acceptable.
The shaft made of AISI 410 shall be sealed by a tandem mechanical shaft seal
system consisting of two seals, each having an independent spring system. The
seals shall require neither maintenance nor adjustment and shall be capable of
operating in either clockwise or counter clockwise direction of rotation without
damage or loss of seal function.
The pumps Installation shall be vertically wet sump installation and shall not be
allowed under any circumstances to run dry. The pumps will have automatic
coupling arrangement at discharge end for removal. The pumps shall be mounted
to guiding pipes made of AISI 304. Lifting shall be possible by means of lifting
chain made of AISI 304.
Duty points shall be guaranteed either by ISO 9906 grade 1B or Hydraulic
institute 11.6 grade 1B and test reports shall be delivered with the pump. The
efficiency has to be reported as the total (wire-to-water) efficiency including
motor losses. The minimum efficiency shall be 70%.
All inputs and outputs shall be optically isolated.
The pump control shall be depending on level measurement in the wet well.


4.2.1.4 Housing and Installations
The capacity of the wet well should be kept such that adequate detention time is
available during average and peak flow conditions. The effective liquid volume
shall be provided below the invert level of the incoming sewer after leaving
provision for freeboard. The capacity of the sump is to be so kept that with any
combination of inflow and pumping the operating cycle for any pump will not be
less than 5 minutes.
The wet well is to be equipped with stairs that allow safe access and
maintenance. The wet well is to be ventilated in order to achieve safe working
conditions during e.g. maintenance. The minimum air exchange rate is 6 times
per hour the volume of the to-be-aerated room. The ventilation system can be
combined with the ventilation system of the screen building.
The pipe work shall be made of a DI Class K7 pipeline from sumps to Receiving
Chamber of Screen Building. The pumping mains shall be designed for the
ultimate capacity of the respective IPS with a peak factor as per CPHEEO
Manual.
 The pipeline shall be adequately sized to have a minimum velocity of at
least 1.2 m/s at minimum flow conditions and not more than 3 m/sec at
pumped peak flow.
 The pump head shall be adequately sized to give a residual discharge head
as per CPHEEO manual.
Above ground a crane system is to be foreseen with sufficient lifting capacity.
The electrical and control room shall be suitably sized to house the Electrical
cum Control Panel, space for spare parts and a maintenance area, etc. and be
complete with the following accessories:
 The room shall be so covered from sides to protect it from the elements
and be suitable for protection from the natural elements. Ventilation in the
sheds shall be as per NBC norms specified in the Civil Construction
manual.
 Internal Illumination at levels suitable for proper lighting.
4.2.1.5 Control and Management
Based on incoming flow conditions, adequate no. of pumps shall operate

automatically to cater the pumping requirements. The pumps are automatically
activated depending on the water level in the wet well.
In the electrical and control room a flow meter is to be foreseen to measure the
total wastewater flow lifted and discharged into the STP. The pipe installation
has to consider the proper measuring location in order to minimize measuring
inaccuracies. Depending on the pipe installation flushing facilities have to be
considered.


Flow measurement shall be done online using a magnetic flow meter (accuracy ≤
+/-1%). All raw sewage as pump discharge is to be metered. Protection class as
per EN 60529: IP 66/67.
4.2.2 Screen Building
4.2.2.1 General
Raw Sewage will be received by the inlet pumping station, which will discharge
the raw sewage into a Receiving Chamber from where it will be taken into
downstream screens. The screens are to be designed for peak flow. According to
the flow there shall be one or two chains of coarse and fine screens.
The coarse and fine screens and the screen by-pass are to be housed in the Screen
Building. The building has to provide sufficient space and height to house all
necessary equipment and allow manoeuvring, maintenance and operation as well
as replacement. The building is to be sufficiently ventilated.
The Screen Building shall be constructed including all required equipment
(screenings transport conveyor units, screening wash press unit, containers, crane
system, etc.).
4.2.2.2 Receiving Chamber
The Inlet Pumping Station will discharge the raw sewage into a Receiving
Chamber. The function of the Receiving chamber is to distribute the flow for
process units. The Receiving Chamber shall be designed for peak flow.
The Receiving chamber shall contain an appropriate number of sluice gates on
upstream and downstream for flow regulation. In the sidewall of the Receiving
Chamber, sluice gates shall be installed such that it is possible to operate them
manually, inspection as well as operation by standing on a platform constructed
at a suitable elevation adjoining and circumventing the inlet chamber.
The inlet chamber shall be of adequate size to meet the requirements of
workability inside it. The receiving chamber shall be open to sky and shall be
water tight to prevent seepage of the sewage out of the inlet chamber. The entire
construction is in M30 grade concrete and as per IS 3370. RCC access platform
minimum 1000 wide with railing as per specifications shall be provided on one
side of the chamber:
Table 10 Design Criteria Receiving Chamber

Unit
design flow maximum flow
detention period sec 60


minimum freeboard m 0.3
There shall be a provision of one by-pass channel bypassing the mechanical

treatment stage altogether.
4.2.2.3 Analysis at the Receiving Chamber
The quality of the wastewater of the Receiving Chamber is to be analyzed. The

following parameters are to be analyzed on a continuously basis and transferred
to the SCADA system in the control room. Therefore online measuring devices
are to be installed.
Table 11 Analysis at the Receiving Chamber

Parameter Unit
Temperature °C
pH ‐
Conductivity µS/cm
Manual sample taking has to take place out of the Receiving Chamber.
Necessary arrangements have to be considered in the design and implementation
accordingly. There shall be no influence of internal backflow water (drainage,
supernatant, wastewater, etc.) onto the analyzing station/manual sampling
station.
4.2.2.4 Screens Generals
Each line shall be equipped with penstocks at the beginning and the end to allow
complete isolation of each line. The removed screenings shall be discharged on
an automatic conveyor, which shall feed into the wash press. The washed and
dewatered screenings shall be collected in containers, all to be placed in-house.
The screen shall be delivered and installed with all safety equipment, such as
covers, guards, hand railings, emergency stop, etc.
The screening building is to be equipped with a hoist system comprising of I-
girder and a chain pulley. The chain pulley block’s capacity is to be 1.5 times the
maximum single unit/weight that may be required to be removed for
maintenance with horizontal travel on the I-beam. The building’s height is to be
designed and constructed accordingly so that replacement of all equipment can
be easily performed.
The working platform at the top of the screen chamber is to be easily accessed
e.g. by RCC staircase 900mm. The entire structure is to be M30 concrete and as


per IS 3370 including the platform. The entire work platform and stairs have to
be provided with balustrades and handrails for safety reasons. In case balustrades
and handrails are not foreseen channels and openings have to be covered by hot
dip galvanized steel gratings.
The screened material shall be disposed at the landfill as specified by the owner,
following the Solid Waste Management Rules, 2016 of Government of India.
The screen building is to be equipped with two (2) suitable wheeled trolleys for
disposal of screenings. The container shall be equipped with appropriate fitting
for the carting off the screenings by the truck, which is equipped with a heavy-
duty hydraulic hoisting system of two boom arms and containers lifting chains.
The building is to be forced ventilated. The minimum air exchange rate is 6
times per hour the volume of the to-be-aerated room.
All equipment shall be served by service water of appropriate pressure and
quantity. In addition several service water connections shall be provided for
cleaning purposes (hose connections).
4.2.2.5 Design Criteria Coarse Screen
Table 12 Design Criteria Coarse Screen

Unit 2033/ 2048/
Number of screen channels 2 2
Channel width m 0.5 0.5
Bar spacing mm 20 20
Bar width mm 10 10
Maximum flow velocity m/s 1.2 1.2
Minimum flow velocity m/s 0.3 0.3
Minimum freeboard m 0.3 0.3
Rake mechanical mechanical
Activation time or water level time or water level

difference – difference –
automatic/manual automatic/manual
Note: each screen channel shall be designed for 100% of the flow.
The screen cleaning sequences take place automatically when necessary by
differential water levels measurements in the channel upwards and downwards
of screens. The raked screenings are discharged into wash press and screw
conveyor which dumps the cleaned and dewatered screenings in containers. The
containers are taken away for disposal by trucks.


4.2.2.6 Design Criteria Fine Screen
Table 13 Design Criteria Fine Screen

Unit 2033/ 2048/
Barwani STP Barwani STP
Number of screen channels 2 2
Bar spacing mm 6 6
Bar width mm 6 6
Maximum flow velocity m/s 1.2 1.2

between bars
Minimum flow velocity between m/s 0.6 0.6

bars
Type mat mat
Rake mechanical mechanical
Activation time or water level time or water level

difference – difference –
Note: each screen channel shall be designed for 100% of the flow.
The cleaning sequences take place automatically when necessary by differential
water levels measurements in the channel upwards and downwards of screens.
The raked screenings are discharged into a wash press and screw conveyor
which dumps the cleaned and dewatered screenings in containers. The containers
are taken away for disposal by trucks.
4.2.2.7 Design Criteria By-Pass Screen
Table 14 Design Criteria By-Pass Screen

Unit 2033/ 2048/
Number of by‐pass 1 1
Bar spacing mm 50 50


Rake manual manual
The by-pass is considered as emergency channel equipped with hand raked bar
screen. An appropriate workstation is to be provided.
4.2.2.8 Conveyors
Considered is screw conveyor and its length has to cover all screens. No belt
conveyors will be accepted. There will be one hopper and one down pipe
dimensioned for transporting the jointly residues of the screening and
discharging in the compactor/press located on the screen building floor. Leachate
coming during transport towards the press shall be eventually returned to the
receiving chamber in front of the screening building.
All transport conveyors have to be encapsulated, for minimizing odors and
nuisance, with threaded drain connection and designed for continuous and
interrupted operation.
Each feed/discharge point from the equipment to the conveyor or from conveyor
to other installation has to be provided with chutes of baffles adequately adapted.
Conveyor components permanently or occasionally in contact with wastewater
or screening as well supports/stiffening plates and housing or trough shall be
fabricated of stainless steel AISI 304 / 316 Ti or equivalent.
The trough is supported with a support construction made of profile steel,
adapted to the local demands.
4.2.2.9 Screw Wash Presses
The estimated daily production of the removed screenings shall be washed and
dewatered in a wash press to a dry matter content of minimum 20%. Wash-press
unit shall be provided and shall be able to handle the maximum screening
amount. The discharging pipe onto the container has to be provided with a
flexible connection in order to allow the discharge of the residues through the
socket located on the container’s cover.
The washing-press unit and container will be located in the screening building.
The material employed for encapsulating the transport conveyors, hoppers,
connections between conveyors as well as all piping for transporting the residues
have to be from stainless steel.


4.2.2.10 Material Main Components
Screens, conveyors, pipes and accessories for, permanently or occasionally in

contact with wastewater shall to be fabricated of AISI 304 / 316 Ti stainless steel
shapes or equivalent. The manufacturer has to certify that all stainless steel
equipment will be manufactured in a stainless steel only factory unit and that the
entire equipment will be passivated by submersion in an acid bath.
Material outside of water shall be at least of hot dip galvanized steel.
All equipment is to be equipped with suitable lifting points
4.2.3 Aerated Grit and Grease Trap
4.2.3.1 General
The Aerated Grit and Grease Trap shall be installed with all required equipment.
The Works include the main items as outlined in the following. These including
all necessary ancillaries have to be complete and must achieve satisfactory
operation.
The trap itself is in the open air all equipment such as blower and grit classifier
are to be housed in a belonging building. The building has to provide sufficient
space and height to house all necessary equipment and allow maneuvering,
maintenance and operation as well as replacement.
After the grit and grease removal the sewage shall pass an overflow weir. Then
the treated sewage is flowing to the SBR Distribution Chamber in a suitable pipe
diameter.
4.2.3.2 Grit and Grease Collecting Trap
The grit and grease trap shall be equipped with adjustable shut-off devices to
allow isolation of the chamber. The Grit separator tank shall be of RCC
construction complete with mechanical internals and square in size.
The planned longitudinal aerated grit and grease trap shall be designed for
separation performances of solid particles. The water stream is introduced at the
head of the grit chamber. Through the widening of the cross-section area a
reduction of the flow velocity is achieved enabling grit to settle. The grit
chamber is also supplied with a compartment alongside which function as grease
trap. Grease and floating material is transported to the side compartment by a
horizontal flow at the surface of the grit chambers, also induced by aeration.
RCC platforms with GI railing shall be provided at the upper level. Also access
is provided from this level to the mechanism support beam of the grit chamber.
The entire construction shall be M30 grade concrete and as per IS 3370.


Grit settled at the bottom of the grit chamber is collected by a submersible pump
which is mounted on a scraper bridge. The water with the grit is then discharged
into an open channel alongside the grit chamber from where it flows to a grit
collecting chamber at the head of the grit chamber by gravity flow. The grit
collecting chamber is supplied with a submersible pump which pumps the
grit/water to a grit classifier.
The grit chamber shall be equipped with a coarse air bubble system and a
submerged separation wall towards the grease chamber. The grit chamber
aeration system consists of an air distribution pipe installed alongside the grit
chamber and a rotary vane blower.
Grease is withdrawn discontinuously by scum blades mounted on the scraper
bridge to a grease collection chamber.
All equipment and pipes in contact with the medium shall be fabricated of
stainless steel AISI 304/316 Ti or equivalent.
The grit separated shall be properly collected and be transferred for disposal. The
design has to consider maximum flow conditions.
Table 15 Design Criteria Aerated Grit and Grease Trap

Unit 2033/ 2048/
Number of grit chambers 1 1
Maximum flow m³/h 573.93 697.05
Horizontal maximum flow m/s < 0.2 < 0.2

velocity
Cross section area m² 5 ‐ 10 5 ‐ 10
Length of grit trap m > 13 > 13
Freeboard m 0.3 0.3
Detention at Qmax min ≥ 8 ≥ 8
Pumps 1 + 1 1 + 1
Grit classifier 1 + 1 1 + 1
Scraper bridge equipped submersible air lift submersible air lift

with pump for grit, pump for grit,
scraper and scum scraper and scum
blade blade
Automation time – time–


Unit 2033/ 2048/

Grit containers 2 2
4.2.3.4 Aeration System and Blower
The grit chamber is to be aerated. All necessary pipe system is to be provided

and installed. The air distribution pipe system is to be installed alongside the grit
chamber. The system including diffusers shall be made of stainless steel or
approved PEHD pipes. Closing valves for each diffuser branch shall be
considered. The blowers must be housed.
Table 16 Design Criteria Aeration System and Blower

Unit 2033/ 2048/
Blower n + 1 n + 1
Type rotary vane blower rotary vane blower
Pressure head m 2.5 2.5

blowers
Required air flow m³/min 1.9 1.9

rate
Control manual, pole‐ manual, pole‐

changeable changeable
If one of the blowers is disturbed or not ready to operate there shall be an

automatic changeover to the ready-to-operate blower unit.
Blowers shall be complete with motor and accessories like base frame, anti-
vibratory pad, silencer, non-return valve, air filter etc. All necessary precautions
have to be taken in order to fulfill noise emission standards (acoustic covers,
noise insulation, etc.). For maintenance reasons provisions for installation of an
electrical lifting crane has to be foreseen in sufficient height to allow dismantling
of the blowers and other heavy equipment. The capacity must fulfill the higher of
the following values: 2 tons or 1.5 times weight of blower. The access door has
to be of suitable size to allow passage of blowers. In case the blowers are located
in one building with the grit classifier, the blowers need to be arranged in a
separate chamber.


4.2.3.5 Grit Classifier
The grit classifier shall be able to handle and treat the full quantity of sand and
grit originating from the grit chamber without overloading. After treatment the
organic content shall be less than 15% and the moisture content less than 30%.
The grit classifier shall be manufactured from AISI 316 stainless steel. All
mechanical parts shall be designed to handle the forces that may be exerted and
the classifier during fabrication, shipping, erection, and proper operation.
The classifier shall dewater grit and convey the grit to an appropriate discharge
height in order to fill the grit container. The grit container shall be a wheeled
trolley. The grit shall be disposed at the landfill site as specified by the owner,
following the Solid Waste Management Rules, 2016 of Government of India or
reuse in construction according to national standards.
All wastewater is to be collected and piped to the STP inlet (Receiving
Chamber).
The classifier shall be located in-house.
4.2.3.6 Grease Removal
Grease of the grease collection chamber is removed by a submersible pump and

piped into a container. The disposal to landfill is specified by the owner,
following the Solid Waste Management Rules, 2016 of Government of India.
Suitable housing is to be provided in order to protect the container from
precipitation.
4.2.3.7 Maintenance Provisions
Factors which shall be considered for safe inspection and maintenance includes:
 Complexity of maintenance tasks
 Frequency of maintenance
 Suitable lifting points
4.2.4 Sequencing Batch Reactor (SBR) Unit
4.2.4.1 General
The biological wastewater treatment takes place in continuously filled SBR

Units. Before the SBR Units the mechanically treated wastewater is distributed
via the distribution chamber. There shall be no further lifting of sewage
considered.


The SBR Units are aerated by blowers that are housed in a separate blower
building close by. The treatment cycles have to allow for elimination of carbon
compounds, nitrification and denitrification as well as biological phosphorous
removal. Chemical phosphorous precipitation is to be implemented in addition.
The SBR Units have to be equipped with mixers. However, the mixer
requirement is subject to the requirement of the Technology Provider.
Excess sludge is removed by wet located pumps.
The units shall be designed for maximum flow conditions.
4.2.4.2 Distribution Chamber
The Distribution Chamber shall ensure an equalized inflow to each single SBR
unit. If necessary it shall be possible to shut off one unit completely (n-1).
Furthermore it shall be capable of splitting the maximum flow to n-1 SBR tanks
when one (1) SBR tank is out of service for scheduled or unscheduled
maintenance.
The Distribution Chamber is fed from the Grit and Grease Trap.
The Distribution Chamber will be equipped with ‘n’ separate chambers, each
dedicated to one SBR tank. The equalization of the inflow to each SBR tank
shall be realized by automatic actuated overflow sluice gates, controlled by
ultrasonic level measurement units.
4.2.4.3 SBR General
The treatment works shall be based on a continuous inflow sequencing batch

reactor (SBR) process with distinct phases for nitrification (aerating),
denitrification (mixing), settling and decanting, which are controllable to
provide operational flexible. A schematic illustration of the reactor and the
treatment phases is provided in the following figure.
The functions shall all be carried out in a single basin. However, this is
indicative and the bidder may opt for intermittent inflow SBR process also in
compliance to the CPHEEO manual. This is further clarified that systems that
require reactor bypassing during the settle and/or decant phases shall not be
acceptable.
The biological design for the activated sludge system shall be based upon the
kinetic requirements for nitrification and denitrification, to ensure the required
effluent quality is achieved. Furthermore, sludge is to be aerobically stabilized
during treatment. The design is to be verified by international standards; rule of
thumb design will not be accepted.
Influent shall be continuously and simultaneously received by all tanks of the
system at all times, irrespective of the sequence of operation of the treatment
system. The system shall be designed so that the tank configuration prevents
short circuiting of the influent during the decant sequence. A portion of each


reactor shall contain a discrete pre-react zone formed by a non-hydrostatic

baffled wall. This zone shall have an anoxic environment during settle and
decant phases. This pre-reactor fosters the ability of a high-load selector which
promotes the formation of flocks and suppresses the development of filamentous
bacteria
The inflow via pipe to each SBR shall be metered by magnetic inductive
measurement (MID). The pipe installation has to consider the proper measuring
location in order to minimize measuring inaccuracies. Flow measurement shall
be done online (accuracy ≤ +/-1%). Protection class as per EN 60529: IP 66/67.
SBR tanks are to be operated on a time-based intermittent process cycle to
achieve the process conditions necessary for carbonaceous oxidation,
nitrification, de-nitrification and biological phosphorus removal. In addition,
solids-liquid separation, treated effluent removal, and solids wasting are also
incorporated to complete the process cycle. Each basin is equipped for carrying
out each treatment phase independently. It shall be possible to repeat, combine or
even leave out phases within a cycle, in each single SBR tank.
Figure 7 SBR treatment principle


The SBR Units will be equipped with different mechanical and electrical devices
for the single phases of the biological waste water treatment process. The oxygen
for the biological process is supplied by blowers, which will be located in a
separate blower building close to the SBR tanks. The blowers shall be equipped
with Variable Frequency Drive.
The duration of the aeration in each SBR tank will be controlled by the
periodically opening and closing of the correspondent automatic valve in the
aeration pipe. The valve shall be manually controllable which can be used by the
operator if necessary.
The SBR Units shall have mixers installed in the preliminary and main reaction
zone, which will operate during the “air-off” periods of the reacting phase.
Manual operation must be possible.
The SBR Units shall have decanters installed on the wall opposite to the
preliminary reaction zone to remove supernatant. When the decanter is not in
operation, it shall remain in a stationary position above the top water level,
which avoids carrying over solids during other phases of the cycle.
Actuators shall determine the movement of decanters between the top and
bottom limits when the decanter is in operation. The decanter speed is controlled
through the use of a variable frequency drive (VFD). As a result, the water
discharge rate will be relatively constant from the top to the bottom level. The
decanter must be self-supporting when the basin is drained.
At every SBR Unit chemical dosing facilities are to be foreseen to enable
chemical phosphorous removal. The location of such facility shall be suitable to
allow maximum mixture of chemicals into the wastewater and residence time.
The SRT (sludge retention time) and MLSS (mixed liquor suspended solids) in
the SBR Units will be controlled by adjusting the run time of the Surplus
Activated Sludge (SAS) pumps in the tanks. The activation of the SAS pumps
will be done manually.
All SBR Units shall be equipped with online sensors. The data is to be shown in
the Control Room (SCADA System).
Table 17 Design Criteria SBR Units

Unit 2033/ 2048/
Design flow max WWTP inflow max WWTP inflow
Number of SBR 3 4
Type of SBR continuous continuous
Tank material reinforced concrete reinforced concrete


Unit 2033/ 2048/

Tank shape rectangular rectangular
Total cycling time h 4 4
Aeration system fine bubble pressure fine bubble pressure

aeration aeration
Diffusers disc disc
Number of 2 2
mixers/SBR Unit
Number of SAS 1 1
pump/SBR Unit
Back up SAS pump 1 1
(in stock)
Dosing facility for at every SBR Unit at every SBR Unit

P removal
4.2.4.5 Decanter
Preferably, the decanter system is a floating construction, which shall ensure

free flow discharge of clear water between the operating water levels (min/max)
out of the SBR Unit. It has to be installed as an always horizontally floating inlet
structure made of stainless steel (SS AISI 316). However, the decanter system
can also be as per the specifications of the technology selected for SBR.
The decanter shall be self-supporting in all conditions. All parts requiring

maintenance shall be accessible from above the water level. The electro
mechanical actuator shall be equipped with a VFD rated suitable for continuous
duty in an outdoor, moist environment. All electro-mechanical that require
maintenance shall be accessible from the walk ways. The decanters seals and
bearings shall be made of maintenance free synthetic material. All parts in
contact with sewage shall be made of SS.
The clear water discharge has to be done constantly approx. 10-20 cm under the
alternating water level. The adjustment of the submersion depth can be realized
with the height positioning of the decanter floats. Additionally with the height of
the slot the decanting flow rate can be changed.
The system has to ensure, that during the lowering of the system on to the water
level no sedimentation material can be withdrawn. Therefore, it is necessary to
keep a distance from around 80 cm between the intake structure and the top level
of the sludge layer. Furthermore, shall have a scum guard mechanism to prevent
the discharge of scum and floatables during decanter or overflow operation. The
decanter will be in stationary position above the design top water level during


aeration, mixing and settling phases, thereby eliminating any possibility of solids
carryover during these phases. At the top stationary position, the decanter will
provide fail safe overflow protection in the event of a power failure. Settled
supernatant will flow via gravity, under the scum guard, over the weir, and into
the decanters.
The clear water discharge shall take place without any demand of energy. Energy
consumption only may occur for the lowering and lifting of the floating part of
the system.
All maintenance related parts have to be accessible over the water level.
Consequently flexible tubes under the water level are not allowed. The decanter
shall not require spring loaded valves, flexible joints, and/or throttling effluent
valves to control discharge rate.
The electro-mechanical actuator shall be equipped with a VFD rated motor
suitable for continuous duty in an outdoor, moist environment. The actuator shall
consist of an electro-mechanical screw jack with protective boot and end position
limit switches.
All electro-mechanical equipment that requires maintenance should be accessible
from the walkways atop of the SBR walls.
The decanter seals and bearings shall be constructed of maintenance free,
synthetic materials for longest possible service life. All seals and bearings shall
be shipped factory assembled, simplifying installation. All parts in contact with
sewage shall be made of stainless steel. The decanter must be self-supporting
when the basin is drained.
4.2.4.6 Aeration Grit System and Diffusers
A suitable grid of diffusers shall be provided at the bottom of each tank to

provide a uniform distribution of fine bubble air release performance in the
system and efficient mixing. The entry pipes shall be taken from the top of the
tank. The fixing arrangement for diffusers shall retrievable type for easy
maintenance.
From the stainless steel or polypropylene main, the air flows to the header pipes
located at the under-border of the SBR units. The header pipe will distribute the
air to the branch pipes and subsequently to the diffusers.
The fixed grid aeration system shall be designed with following features:
 Stainless steel or polypropylene pipe assembly to extend from air main
connection to the polypropylene header pipes located at the bottom of the
tank close to the tank wall.
 Since the material of pipes (main/header) is different, a suitable connection
between these parts shall be provided. Cooling pipe prior to the connection
to header pipe to ensure polypropylene pipes, headers and diffuser


assemblies are suitable to withstand the blower discharge maximum air

temperatures.
 Polypropylene branch pipes perpendicular to the header pipes for air
distribution. Pipes fabricated of polypropylene with a flanged connection
to the branch pipes (feeders), and with fixed threaded union joint
connections for each air diffuser header.
 Air distributor sections, joined with positive locking fixed threaded union
or flange type joints to prevent blow apart and rotation.
 316Ti stainless steel (SS AISI 316) supports for the air header and branch
pipes, maximum support spacing at a maximum of 2,400 mm.
 Supports, designed to be adjustable without removing the air distributor
from the support.
 A liquid purge system shall be provided to drain the entire submerged
aeration piping system for each aeration grid. The purge system shall
function automatically and continuously.
 Velocities in piping shall not exceed 20 m/s at any time, based on actual
maximum operating temperature and pressure.
 Air distributors with centerline spacing not to exceed 1.2 meters to
maximize oxygen transfer efficiency and mixing efficiency and to
minimize solids deposition between air distributors
The air diffusers shall be porous, either made of elastomeric rubber membranes
(EPDM) or polyurethane or composed of crystalline fused aluminium oxide with
a suitable ceramic bonding material. Thermoplastic material, i.e. plasticized PVC
is not acceptable. Each diffuser shall be fully supported over the length.
Membranes shall provide a water tight seal with the diffusers assembly to stop
water ingress when not aerating. Membrane endurance shall be more than
180,000 expansion/contraction cycles. Diffuser shall be of self-cleaning, non-
clog disc or dome-shaped type. Oxygen transfer efficiency shall not be less than
20% at 3.5 m submergence in clear water. Spacing between the diffusers shall be
set for efficient distribution of the fine air bubbles.
After installation and commissioning, a performance test shall be conducted to
demonstrate capability of the aeration equipment to meet the specified oxygen
transfer requirements.
4.2.4.7 SBR Sludge Submersible Pumps
Sludge shall be withdrawn from SBR Units during the decanting phase and
carried to the sludge thickeners. For this purpose, single-stage close-coupled
submersible centrifugal pumps shall be installed in the SBR Units (solid size
maximum 100mm). They shall be manufactured of semi open multi vane
impeller designed to transport wastewater with fibrous materials and heavy
sludge. The impeller blades shall be self-cleaning upon each rotation as they pass
across a sharp relief groove in the Insert ring and shall keep the impeller blades
clear of debris.


The pump housing shall be prepared for the assembling of a flush valve.
air filled watertight chamber submersible up to 20 m according to IEC 60034
The stator shall be heat-shrink fitted into the stator housing.
The motor shall be sufficiently cooled by the surrounding to run in continuous
duty S1 without limitation.
Protection and monitoring of motor shall be ensured by 3 bi-metal thermal
switches for thermal control of the stator and 1 sensor to monitor leakage in the
stator housing.
Concerning the motor sealing, the cable entry shall consist of dual cylindrical
elastomer sleeves, flanked by washers, all having a close tolerance fit against the
cable and the cable entry. Epoxies, silicones, or other secondary sealing systems
shall not be considered acceptable.
The shaft shall be sealed by a tandem mechanical shaft seal system consisting of
two seals, each having an independent spring system. The seals shall require
neither maintenance nor adjustment and shall be capable of operating in either
clockwise or counter clockwise direction of rotation without damage or loss of
seal function.
All castings must be blasted before coating. All wet surfaces are to be coated
with two-pack oxyrane ester Duasolid 50. The total layer thickness should be at
least 120 microns. Zink dust primer shall not be used.
The pump flange and the discharge connection shall have metal-to-metal contact.
A rubber sealing shall not be allowed.
Motor, pump and drive shall be designed and produced by the same
manufacturer. Following tests shall be done on each pump prior to shipment:
 Minimum 3-point hydraulic performance test
 No-leak seal integrity test
 Electrical integrity test
Each SBR Unit shall be provided with suitable lifting arrangements to facilitate
lifting of pump, if required for maintenance.
The control shall be time based and considering the filling level of the
Thickener.
4.2.4.8 Piping Work for Sludge from to SBR Tanks to Sludge Thickeners
The sludge from SBR tanks will be pumped to collecting pipes using
polyethylene or stainless steel pipes incl. all fittings, valves, non-return valves,
flanges, masonry/structural pipe supports, puddle flanges, concrete bedding, pipe
specials, melting works, etc. Eventually the SAS is discharged into the


Thickener. All sections exposed to sunlight shall be of stainless steel. For these
sections no other material except stainless steel will be accepted.
4.2.4.9 Automation and Control of SBR Units
The SBR shall be controlled by different measurements. Control shall be

possible on site and in the Control Room.
The SACDA System has to allow continuously monitoring of the following
parameters (in each SBR):
 Filling level/volume
 Inflow
 SAS flow
 Temperature
 DO concentration
4.2.5 Blower Building
4.2.5.1 General
The blower station shall have mechanical blowers with horizontal axis complete
with motors and gearboxes. The station shall supply the air to SBR Units. All
blowers shall be installed in a central blower building close by the SBR Units in
order to minimize the required pipe length for the pressurized air. In a separate
room storage and automatic preparation of chemicals for phosphorous removal
shall be placed. Pumps and pipework provide every SBR Unit with those
chemicals.
Pressure pipe has to be equipped with automatic valves to control the air input
into each tank, depending on time. At the same time manual operation of the
vales must be possible, if necessary.
For the protection of the blowers, each air-inlet channel has to be equipped with
an appropriate air filter designed for maximum air flow at absolute minimum
head loss, and connected directly to the inlet of the blower via flexible
connection. Filters shall be removable through easily removal of the filter
element. The filters shall be sized for a maximum face of velocity of 2 m/s at
peak air flow. For the installation in a sandy environment, a sand trap and pre-
filter has to be installed at the air intake.
The blowers shall be provided with acoustic hood, in order to provide significant
reduction of noise. In addition suitable silencer has to be installed in the air inlet
duct to reduce the noise. National noise standards have to be adhered to.
For regular air exchange and heat dissipation, fans shall be installed. The
required air inlet shall be provided via louvres in the walls of the building.


Electrical rooms for the installation of the transformer and the low-voltage
switchgear shall be integrated in the blower building.
Floor drains shall be built in the building and ensure the complete and quick
drainage of the indoor area in case of oil or water leakage.
4.2.5.2 Design Criteria Blower Building
The Blower Building houses the blowers to aerate the SBR Units. Due to the
noise emissions the building’s location shall be preferably on the side opposite of
the office and laboratory building.
The Blower Building shall be designed, constructed and equipped for the design
horizon 2033. However, the design has also to consider the design horizon 2048.
This means extra space is to be considered e.g. for additional blowers.
The Building shall have sufficient ventilation, lighting and working space. The
room shall be equipped with sufficient capacity electric hoist with trolley
(minimum 2 tons or 1.5 times the weight of blower, depending whichever is
more) to facilitate removal of blower/motor etc. for repairs.
The blower room requires a gate of suitable size in order to deliver and remove
blowers by truck.
The Works include the following main items complete and all necessary
ancillaries to achieve satisfactory operation.

Unit 2033/ 2048/
Blowers 4 + 1 5 + 1
Type of blower rotary piston rotary piston
4.2.5.3 Blowers to SBR Units
The blowers shall be of positive displacement type to be supplied as complete

compact packed unit ready for connection with all accessories necessary for safe
operation. Each blower shall supply mainly one SBR tank (through diffusers).
The blowers shall be capable of continuous delivering 100% of the air
requirements to the process in one tank at any time. Nevertheless, a distribution
main shall ensure the flexibility of the system. The flow regulation of each
blower shall be done by VFD controlled through DO online measuring system in
the SBR tank. The hydraulic performance of the blowers in the SBR tanks shall
be such that complete mixing of solids in the sewage entering the aeration tank is
achieved.


The blowers shall be equipped with a VFD rated motor suitable for continuous
duty in an outdoor, moist environment. Electrical connection shall be 400 V
(±10%), 3 Phase and 50 Hz.
The blowers shall be air-cooled and assure oil-free conveying and compression
of air. It is to be supplied as complete compact packed unit ready for connection,
with all accessories necessary for safe operation (e.g. set of pulleys, belt guard,
motor, base frame, vibration isolators, inlet filter, inlet silencer, isolating valve,
non-return valve, foundation bolts, etc.).
Sound minimization measures shall be undertaken in order to fulfil national
standards.
Rotary pistons and shafts in the housing are to be statically and dynamically
balanced.
The size and performance of the air blower shall be so selected that it can
provide a minimum air flow rate and to maintain the minimum of specified
dissolved oxygen in the SBR tanks.
The blowers shall provide:
 maximum reliability and life time ≥ 20 years
 minimum life cycle cost over 20 years
 minimum carbon footprint
4.2.5.4 Ventilation of Building
Fresh air shall be forced into the enclosed blower building. Continuous
ventilation is required for frequent and complete air changes using fans of axial
flow type installed in exhausters. For the air inlet, louvres shall be provided. The
fresh and exhaust air fan as well as louvres shall be wall mounted type. The
maximum allowed temperature increase in the blower building is 10°C.
All necessary precautions have to be taken in order to have minimum noise
generation and its transmission, as well as minimum vibration. The noise level is
specified by the national standard.
The air circulation in the blower building shall be guaranteed through exhauster
components with made of galvanized steel with 1.0 mm thick. The housing shall
incorporate both ventilator and splitter silencer (to protect against abrasion and
noise) according to the chamber resonance principle. Absorber material shall be
mineral wool, biodegradable, not inflammable, hydrophobic, with high-strength
glass fiber surface abrasion protection up to 20 m/s. Air flow shall be guided
using L-shaped plates with protective gratings made of galvanized steel and
installed wire mesh 20x20x1 mm.
The air inlet units (louvres) shall consist of a galvanized housing with frame for
installation in the building wall. Absorber material shall be mineral wool,
biodegradable, not inflammable, hydrophobic, with high-strength glass fiber


surface abrasion protection up to 20 m/s. Air flow shall be guided using L-

shaped plates with protective gratings made of galvanized steel and installed
wire mesh 20x20x1 mm.
All necessary accessories shall be provided for proper operation and shall also
include as part of unit price.
 Vibration isolators
 Double canvas connections at the outlets of each fan
 Nuts, bolts, shims etc. as required for the grouting of the equipment
4.2.5.5 Piping Work from Blowers to SBR Tanks
Stainless steel (SS AISI 316) or polypropylene pipes shall supply the air from
blower building to the polypropylene header pipes in the SBR tanks incl. all
fittings, valves, flanges, masonry / structural pipe supports, puddle flanges,
concrete bedding, pipe specials, melting works, etc.
A purge system shall be provided to drain condensed water from the entire air
main.
For control of air flow, actuator valves shall be installed in the mains (one to
each SBT tank). Actuators shall be designed for valve operation to ensure proper
function.
Actuator shall have a design life of 10.000 OPEN-CLOSE-OPEN cycles, each
consisting of 30 turns per sense of rotation and must be suitable for operating in
any mounting position. Actuator design must provide simple setting, testing,
maintenance and repair.
Actuator settings shall be performed non-intrusive via push-buttons at motor
control without special tools or instruments (e.g. battery backed setting tool).
Electrical connection of actuators to be multi pin plug and socket connector,
allowing quick disconnection in case of maintenance or repair. In order to
prevent loss of screws during commissioning or maintenance, all covers shall be
fixed with captive screws. In order to minimize the amount of spare parts
required, parts such as covers, plug and sockets, parts must be interchangeable
throughout all model sizes.
Torque-transmitting housings must be made of cast iron, except motor housing.
No plastic parts of any type shall be used, except for electric / electronic
components, operating knobs / levers, indicator mechanism and sealing elements
as far as applicable.
Depending on valve application, actuators shall be self-locking. Self-locking
shall remain active if actuator is switched to hand-operation-mode. For non-self-
locking actuators with high output speeds a mechanical anti-back drive device
shall be provided attached to the actuator.


Valve mounting shall be done using of a plug sleeve connection adapting to

valve shaft. For rising stem applications, actuator design must allow actuator
removal from output drive without disturbing the valve function.
Motors must be suitable for operating at 3 phase power supply voltage of 400 V
(± 10 %), 50 Hz and shall be specifically designed for valve-actuator operation,
characterized by high starting torque, low stall torque and low inertia. Motors
shall be totally enclosed non ventilated type (TENV). Motor housings and covers
to be made of sea water resistant aluminum. Motor-insulation must be Class F
(155° C). Motors must be protected by 3 monitoring devices, which are
embedded in motor windings. Motor connections shall be internal by means of
plug and socket.
Actuator shall be capable of opening and closing the valve against full
differential pressure within specified time on valve data sheet.
Torque sensing shall be of mechanical sliding worm principle with torque values
independently settable for 'OPEN' and 'CLOSE' direction. No electronic torque
sensing derived from motor current or piezo-electric torque sensing at worm
shaft. Torque setting shall be possible for 40 % to 100 % of rated torque.
The actuator is to be operated via remote control, via analogue setpoints (e.g. 0 –
20 mA). All relevant signals such as valve position (%), end positions
(OPEN/CLOSE), selector switch position and high torque alarm in
OPEN/CLOSE direction must be available. In addition to this, actuator must
provide a dedicated fault signal if there is a phase failure, motor protection
tripped and/or high torque in OPEN/CLOSE direction or if the hand wheel is
engaged.
Protection class of actuator, including motor, shall be IP 68.
Actuators must be equipped with a hand wheel for manual operation. Self-
locking shall be maintained in hand operation. Motor must be disengaged during
manual operation. Hand wheel shall automatically disengage when the electric
motor is energized.
Hand wheel must be sized allowing easy manual operation of output drive. The
over torque indication shall be active in manual operation as well as motor
operation, thus allowing a signal to be provided when the set-torque has been
reached.
4.2.5.6 Station of Chemicals Preparation
In a separate room of the Blower Building the appropriate storage of chemicals

shall be located. The storage capacity shall be suitable for uninterruptible
operation for two (2) weeks.
The preparation of the precipitation solution shall take place in the Blower
Building (separate room from the blowers). The preparation station shall be
complete including dosing pumps, pipework, measuring equipment, etc.


All pipework shall be made of polypropylene pipes. The pipes shall be supported
by 316Ti stainless steel (SS AISI 316) supports, maximum support spacing at a
maximum of 2,400 mm.
The control and dosing amount shall be manageable on site and in the Control
Room. In any case the dosed amount must be sufficient to permanently ensure
the required effluent values. All measuring data shall be shown on site and in the
Control Room.
4.2.5.7 Automation and Control of Blower Building
The Blowers shall be controlled by different criteria. The control shall be

possible on site and in the Control Room.
4.2.6 Chlorination Equipment
4.2.6.1 General
The treated sewage leaves the SBR tanks via pipes to the final disinfection stage
which consists of chlorine bleach liquor dosing station and a chlorination contact
tank.
The final disinfection by chlorination allows the reuse of the wastewater for
irrigation in agriculture. The disinfection of biologically treated effluent requires
a controlled chlorine addition to ensure a minimized formation of unwanted
compounds of chlorine which is most important in case of reuse for irrigation.
The used chemical aid is chlorine bleach liquor. The required dosing devices
comprise a storage vessel and membrane type injection pump. Chlorine bleach
liquor is then diluted with service water for free chlorine release before being
added to the effluent stream in the last pipe section before entering the contact
basin.
The contact basin consists of an inlet chamber, a loop reactor for the actual
chlorine contacting and an effluent chamber.
Streams for service water feed and irrigation are diverted from the outlet of the
chlorination basin. The effluent flow not used as service water or for irrigation
flows to the receiving water.
The chlorination basin can be bypassed for maintenance works.


4.2.6.2 Design Chlorination Contact Basin
The Chlorination Contact Basin shall have baffle walls to facilitate hydraulic
mixing of treated sewage. Adequate reaction time shall be considered for
selecting the tank’s volume to ensure proper disinfection.
The dosing pump shall pump the chlorine/water-mix in sufficient quantities to
the dosing points at the beginning of the contact zone.
All used parts shall be absolutely corrosion resistant.
Table 19 Design Criteria Chlorination

Unit 2033/ 2048/
Hourly maximum flow during SBR m³/h 573.9 697.0

withdrawal
Required chlorination contact time min 20 20
Volume chlorination basin m³ 240 240
Average required specific chlorine dosage g Cl2/ 10 10

m³
Active chlorine content fresh liquor g Cl2/l 150 150
Active chlorine content average g Cl2/l 100 100
Required hourly maximum liquor dosing l/h 114.8 139.4

rate
Required hourly average liquor dosing rate l/h 39.2 47.3
Type of dosing pump membrane membrane
Number of dosing pumps 1 + 1 1 + 1
Required storage time (vessel) d 14 14
Storage capacity m³ 18 18
Number of vessels 1 1
The chlorine bleach injection rate is automatically controlled by the residual

dissolved chlorine concentration at the outlet of the contact basin.
The treated and disinfected sewage is to be disposed suitably into nearest drain
preferably by gravity.


4.2.6.3 Service Water Station
Service water must be permanently available for automatic screen, press and
maintenance cleaning or other cleaning works. Accordingly service water pipes
and connections must be provided all over the STP. Service water is also
continuously used for chlorine bleach dilution (final disinfection of clarified
effluent).
The service water mains is equipped with a membrane type surge vessel and an
automatically backwashed in-line filter designed to achieve a residual suspended
solids concentration of approx. 5 mg/l.
The service water sump shall be in the end of the Chlorination Contact Basin.
The service water pipes shall be of HDPE pipeline and protected from sunlight.
Table 20 Design Criteria Service Water Station

Unit 2033/ 2048/
Type of booster pump multistage centrifugal multistage centrifugal
Number of booster 1 + 1 1 + 1

pumps
Selected booster pumps m³/h 15 15

capacity
Pressure head m 60 ‐ 80 60 ‐ 80
The service water mains shall be available at every treatment facility with
equipment connection and/or connections for cleaning purposes. At the service
water station, a filling station shall be considered to provide tankers with service
water for irrigation purposes. Size and capacity shall be suitable to allow
operation without interruption or waiting time.
4.2.6.4 Analysis at the Effluent Chamber
The quality of the effluent is to be analyzed. The following parameters are to be

analyzed on a continuously basis and transferred to the SCADA system in the
control room. Therefore an automatic sampler/analyzer is to be installed.

Parameter Unit
Temperature °C
pH ‐
Conductivity µS/cm


Residual chlorine mg/l
Manual sample taking has to take place out of the Effluent Chamber. Necessary
arrangements have to be considered in the design and implemented. There shall
be no negative influence onto the analyzing station/manual sampling station.
4.2.7 Supernatant Pump Station
4.2.7.1 General
The Supernatant Pump Station collects all different wastewater flows of the STP
and lifts such water to the Receiving Chamber of the STP in front of the Screens.
The underground Collection Chamber shall be large enough to avoid frequent
switching cycles.
4.2.7.2 Design Supernatant Pump Station
The pump shall be provided as submersible wastewater pump for stationary

submerged installation in supernatant collection chamber.
The pump shall be single-stage close-coupled submersible centrifugal pump with
semi open multi vane impeller designed to transport wastewater with fibrous
materials.
The impeller blades shall be self-cleaning upon each rotation as they pass across
a sharp relief groove in the insert ring and shall keep the impeller blades clear of
debris.
The pump housing shall be prepared for the assembling of a flush valve.
air filled watertight chamber submersible up to 20m according IEC 60034
The stator shall be heat-shrink fitted into the stator housing.
The motor shall be sufficiently cooled by the surrounding to run in continuous
duty S1 without limitation.


Motor, pump and drive shall be designed and produced by the same
manufacturer.
The cable entry shall consist of dual cylindrical elastomer sleeves, flanked by
washers, all having a close tolerance fit against the cable and the cable entry.
Epoxies, silicones, or other secondary sealing systems shall not be considered
acceptable.
The shaft shall be sealed by a tandem mechanical shaft seal system consisting of
two seals, each having an independent spring system. The seals shall require
neither maintenance nor adjustment and shall be capable of operating in either
clockwise or counter clockwise direction of rotation without damage or loss of
seal function.
All castings must be blasted before coating. All wet surfaces are to be coated
with two-pack oxyrane ester Duasolid 50. The total layer thickness should be at
least 120 microns. Zink dust primer shall not be used.
Protection and monitoring of motor by:
 3 bi-metal thermal switches for thermal control of the stator
 1 sensor to monitor leakage in the stator housing.
The motor shall be equipped with 10m submersible and screened cable including
2 leads for the sensors.
Pumps shall be incl. grip eye for chain sling and lifting chain sling for grip eye in
stainless steel AISI 316 Ti min. load 500 kg. Chain sling must be CE-marked.
For lifting the pump 1 transportable slewing crane adjustable for reach and
height with minimum load: 150 kg or 1.5 times the maximum single unit/weight
that may be required to be removed for maintenance shall be provided. The hoist
must allow the lifting of equipment onto trucks.
Furthermore 2 floor mounted socket for slewing crane in material AISI 304 shall
be installed.
The collection chamber shall be equipped with level meter. The filling level
controls the pump operation.
Table 22 Design Criteria Supernatant Pump Station

Unit 2033/ 2048/
Estimated supernatant flow m³/d 198 239
Maximum hourly supernatant flow m³/h 153 184
Number of pump 1 + 1 1 + 1



4.2.8 Sludge Thickener
4.2.8.1 General
The excess sludge withdrawn from the SBR Units is pumped into the Gravity
Thickener in which the sludge is thickened by gravity. The Thickener at the
same time functions as a buffer. The Thickener is fed depending on the treatment
phases of the SBR Units. E.g. the SAS of one SBR tank is withdrawn and
pumped to the Thickener on one day and the SAS from another SBR tank on the
next day. Such procedure shall ensure sufficiently long thickening times.
Supernatant produced and withdrawn by an overflow weir in the Gravity
Thickener is collected and returned to the STP inlet by a supernatant/filtrate
pump station.
Access stairs to the overhead walkway together with balustrades, walls, and
handrails has to be provided. All facilities shall be reachable from the walkway
in order to perform maintenance works easily. Access shall also be provided into
the Gravity Thickener by means of rungs/ladder.
An emergency overflow shall be foreseen.
4.2.8.2 Design Criteria Thickener
The Gravity Thickener receives the SAS of the SBR Units. The arrangement of
inflow and sludge withdrawal shall be designed so that short circuiting
prevented.
The Thickener has a low sloped sludge hopper for thickened sludge withdrawal
and a floating decanting device for supernatant withdrawal. A mobile crane shall
be foreseen at the top of the thickener in order to remove and maintain the
supernatant withdrawal facility. The minimum load shall be 150 kg or 1.5 times
the maximum single unit/weight that may be required to be lifted.
An emergency overflow is to be foreseen that discharges into the supernatant
pump station and eventually to the inlet of the STP.
All components that are in direct contact with the sludge shall be a minimum of
stainless steel Grade 316 S16 and all fixings throughout shall be stainless steel.
Material outside of water shall be at least of hot dip galvanized steel.
Table 23 Design Criteria Thickener

Unit 2033/ 2048/
Number of tanks 1 1


Type of thickener batch batch
Maximum retention time d 3.5 3.5
Tank shape circular circular
Diameter m 11 11
Depth m 4 4
Tank material reinforced concrete reinforced concrete
Estimated SAS volume m³/d 203 245
Surface loading kg DS/ 20 20

(m²xd)
Dry solids concentration kg DS/m³ 30 30

after thickening
The Thickener is to be equipped with a level meter. The thickened sludge pipe
leaving the Thickener is to be supplied with an inductive flow meter for the
thickened excess sludge flow.
4.2.8.3 Supernatant Withdrawal
This device shall be floating atop of the thickening sludge. All steel components
shall be made of stainless steel Grade 316 S16. Flexible joints and elbows allow
the device to follow the sludge level while staying in proper working position.
Such components must be of highly durable rubber material.
4.2.9 Thickened Sludge Pump Station and Belt Filter
4.2.9.1 General
The thickened sludge is sucked out of the Sludge Thickener by the Thickened
Sludge Pump Station and discharged to the dewatering unit (Belt Filter Press).
The pump station shall be located in the Belt Filter Press Building located
directly aside of the Sludge Thickener. In addition, the Belt Filter Press Building


combines the stages such as polymer storage, solution preparation and dosing
pump as well as feeding of solution and sludge dewatering by filter press. The
sludge is then lifted by conveyor belts and skipped into containers outside of the
house.
All drainage water is to be discharged to the supernatant lifting station.
4.2.9.2 Design Criteria Thickened Sludge Pump Station
The thickened sludge will be pumped out of the thickener by eccentric screw
pumps to the sludge dewatering unit. The pump shall pump the concentrated
sludge with approx. 3 % TS from the thickener to the belt filter press. The dry
placed pump shall be placed in the thickened sludge pump house. The control
shall be time based.
All pipework internal the Pumping Station in at least material AISI 316 Ti
austenitic stainless steel shall be provided incl. all valves, fittings, fixings,
dismantling pieces, etc. All sections in buildings or exposed to sunlight shall be
of stainless steel. For these sections no other material except stainless steel will
be accepted. The piping outside the buildings may be of HDPE material.
For the entire piping system water flush devices shall be installed and air valves
shall be foreseen for long pipe sections to allow escape of air and digesting
gases.
To monitor the pump performance manometers shall be installed at the suction
and the discharge side of each pump.
All components that are in direct contact with the sludge shall be a minimum of
stainless steel Grade AISI 316 S16 and all fixings throughout shall be stainless
steel.
Table 24 Design Criteria Thickened Sludge Pump Station

Unit 2033/ 2048/
Number of pump 1 + 1 1 + 1
Type of pump eccentric screw eccentric screw
Estimated pressure head m 30 30
Pump capacity m³/h 5.54 6.69
Minimum pipe diameter mm 100 100
Minimum flow velocity m/s 0.75 0.75


4.2.9.3 Design Criteria Polymer Station
The polymer preparation station shall be able to process liquid and powdery
polymers. The preparation station consists of the delivery and mixer unit and two
tanks, made of stainless steel. One tank is the preparation/maturing tank, the
other tank is the storage tank for the prepared polymer solution.
The powdery polymer is transported to the powder feeder by a vacuum conveyor
and mixed with water in the bottom mixer unit. The solution is then transferred
to the first tank (preparation/maturing tank) using the water pressure of the
diluent water. The tank is equipped with an agitator for a gentle mixing of the
polymer solution (slow speed mixer). Having matured, the solution can be
transferred to the second tank via the motor valve.
The system shall be automatically controlled.
The polymer will be dosed into the thickened sludge pipe. Providing complete
mixing of polymer and sludge, a static mixer is foreseen. The estimated polymer
dosing is 20g/kg DS at 0.5% polymer solution strength. The unit shall be suitable
for minimum 8 hours continuous and automatic operation.
The pumps shall be interlocked with Belt Filter Press so that they can only be
running in auto when the press is on. Simultaneously, the pump should shut
down when the press stops.
To monitor the pump performance manometers shall be installed at the suction
and the discharge side of each pump.
The dosing system shall be housed right next to the Belt Filter Press.
Table 25 Design Criteria Polymer Station

Unit 2033/ 2048/
Polymer solution quantity l/d 3,991 4,817
Number of pumps 1+1 1+1
Pump capacity l/h 482 482
Volume preparation tank l 1,500 1,500
Volume storage tank l 3,000 3,000
4.2.9.4 Design Criteria Filter Belt Press
The belt filter press comprises two permeable belts which roll over each other
and in between the sludge is squeezed. In a first dewatering zone, the sludge is
dewatered by gravity and moved by reversible plows over the entire bandwidth.
In the press area, the pressure on the sludge is gradually increasing. Under the
influence of the rising pressure and the developed shear forces, the sludge is


dewatered optimally. A scraper on the end of the machine removes the

compressed sludge cake from the belt. The belt is cleaned under water pressure
by self-cleaning spraying nozzles.
After dewatering the sludge cake shall be lifted by screw conveyor and out of the
building. Outside the conveyor throws off the cake into a container. The
container is to be sheltered or covered in order to avoid rewetting.
The dewatered sludge shall be disposed at the landfill site as specified by the
owner, following the Solid Waste Management Rules, 2016 of Government of
India and as per the Environmental Management Plan provided in Annex 6.
The belt filter press shall operate continuously (not as batch process). The
treatment process shall be fully automated, i.e. no manual intervention required
for cleaning the belt. Full control and management must be ensured from the
central control room as well as on site.
The filtrate collecting tanks as well as all other wetted parts are made of stainless
steel or polypropylene. The frame is carbon steel epoxy coated.
The belt filter press shall comprise of one control unit with manual and
automatic control with all necessary switchgears and operation facilities.
The Belt Filter Press shall be operated only during working days while there is
operating staff on site (8 hours).
Table 26 Design Criteria Belt Filter Press

Unit 2033/ 2048/
Sludge quantity m³/d 55 67
Dry solids to be dewatered kg DS/d 998 1,204
Number of belt filter presses 1 1
Resulting sludge cake m³/d 5 6
DS after dewatering kg DS/m³ 200 200
The filtrate as well as the wash water is to be discharged to the supernatant pump
station by gravity.
4.2.9.5 Housing
All previously mentioned facilities (thickened sludge pump, polymer storage,

solution preparation and dosing pump, feeding of solution and belt filter press,
conveyor belt) are located in one concrete and/or brickwork house. The different
treatment stages are arranged within the house.


The house has to have windows, gates and doors to allow natural illumination,
ventilation, access, accessibility by truck and maintenance and repair equipment.
Electric Hoist with Trolley of minimum 1.5 ton or 1.5 times the maximum single
unit/weight that may be required to be removed for maintenance shall be
provided in the pump room and belt filter press room. The hoist must allow the
lifting of equipment onto trucks.
4.2.10 Office and Laboratory Building
4.2.10.1 Design Criteria Office and Laboratory Building
The Office and Laboratory Building including generator room shall be

preferably G+1 structure.
The following table outlines the room concept. The area information shall be
considered as minimum requirements. The internal clear height shall be
minimum 3.00 m and the overall area of the building shall be minimum 22.00 x
11.00 m.
The external walls and internal wall shall be brick masonry, plastered and
painted with oil bound distemper on the inner face and snowcem on the outer
face. The doors shall be of first quality wood and aluminum sliding windows of
approved quality shall be provided. Vertical blinds have to be provided for all
windows.
The building’s design and construction has to be in line with all national
standards.
The Office and Laboratory Building shall be provided with drinking water
(cold/warm), power supply, firefighting and telephone line including wireless
access to router. In case of no available drinking water infrastructure, a fully
functional and equipped local drinking water station shall be put up. The
building shall be provided with adequate forced ventilation and exhaust fans. All
rooms and the laboratory shall be equipped and appropriately furnished.
Flooring for the office and laboratory shall be of vitrified tiles (fire resistant and
highly resistant to acids, alkalies, solvents, and salts). In the laboratory bottom
sinks have to be provided to allow proper cleaning.

The laboratory is divided into 3 parts, the main working lab, preparation area and
storage. Physical-chemical analyses and biological analyses shall be performed
for making the necessary analytical determinations and operating control tests.
The laboratory shall have sufficient size, bench space, equipment, reagent, and
supplies to perform all self-monitoring analytical work required by discharge
permits, and to perform the process control tests necessary for good management
of each treatment process.
Basic requirements for laboratory furniture fittings and equipment are as follows:
 Performing basic operational testing; this typically includes pH,
temperature, and dissolved oxygen;
 Performing more complex operational and permit laboratory tests
including biochemical oxygen demand, suspended solids, bacterial
analysis, and multiple plant laboratory testing. etc.
 Laboratory equipment and glassware shall be of types recommended by
Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater and the
reviewing authority;
 The cabinets and shelves selected may be of wood or other durable
materials;
 Bench tops should be of acid resistant laboratory grade materials for
protection of the underlying cabinets;
 Glass doors on wall-hung cabinets are recommended;
 One or more cupboard style base cabinets should be provided;
 Cabinets with drawers should be provided with rubber bumpers and stops
to prevent accidental removal;
 Comprehensive first aid equipment and facilities.
The laboratory shall be isolated from vibrating, noisy, or high-temperature
machinery or equipment which might have adverse effects on the performance of
laboratory staff or instruments.
The following equipment shall be provided for the laboratory:
Table 27 Requirement of Equipment for Water Testing Laboratory
Name of Equipment's Required quantity
Refrigerator (310 Liters) 1 No.
Incubator 370c and 050c (Bacteriological) 220 Volt A.C. 1 No.
digital pH Meter (0-14 pH range) 1 No.
Nephelometer direct reading (Range 0-1000) 1 No.
Spectrophotometer visible range 220 to 850 mm 1 No.
Jar test apparatus with variable speed control 10 to 1000 RPM 2 No.
Conductivity meter (systronics) 1 No.
Water distillation plant (15L/day) 1 No.

Name of Equipment's Required quantity
Auto calve (Cabinet 15 Atm pressure) 1 No.
Hot Air Oven 30 lit. cap 100º to 180ºC 1 No.
Water bath 6 to 8 concentric 0 to 500c 1 No.
digital Dissolve oxygen Analyser 1 No.
Chlorine comparator 2 No.
Heating metal (Capacity 1 Litre) 1 No.
Magnetic stirrer (1 Liter capacity speed control) 1 No.
Laboratory Balance 0 to 200 gm 1 No.
Table 28 Requirements of Chemicals for Water Testing Laboratory
Name of Chemical Required quantity
Phenolpthaline Indicator 1 Liter
Mehayal orange indicator 1 Liter
Sulphuric acid N/50 2 Liter
Potassium Chromate 5% 1 Liter
Silver nitrate 200 gms
Manganese Soleplate 1 Kg
Sodium thisulphate 1 Kg
1-10 Pheneptitheline 200 gms
Hydroxylamine Hydrochloride 200 gms
Eriochreme black 'T' 100 gms
Murexide 20 gms
E D T A N/50 5 Liter
Table 29 Requirement of Glassware for Water Testing Laboratory
Name of Equipment Required quantity
Graduated pipette of capacity 1 ml 5No.
do - 2 ml 5No.
do - 10ml 5No.
Ordinary pipette of capacity 10 ml 5No.
do - 25 ml 5No.

Graduated Measuring Cylinder Capacity 10 ml 5No.
- do - 50ml 5No.
- do - 250ml 5No.
- do - 1000 ml 5No.
Reagent Bottles of Capacity 250 ml 10 No.
- do - 500ml 10 No.
Nester's tube of capacity 50 ml 5 No.
- do - 100ml 5 No.
Conical flask of capacity 100ml 5 No.
- do - 250ml 5 No.
- do - 500ml 5 No.
- do - 1000ml 5 No.
Beakers of capacity 100ml 5 No.
- do - 250ml 5 No.
- do - 500ml 5 No.
- do - 1000ml 5 No.
Test tube with rim of size 25 x 250 100 No.
- do - 15 x 150 100 No.
B O D Bottle 300 ml 15 No.
Funnel 4 15 No.
Filter paper (Whatman's) No.1 4 Pkt.
do - No. 40 4 Pkt.
do - No. 42 4 Pkt.
Desiccator 1 No.
Table 30 Requirement of Accessories and Material for Laboratory
Water Sampler (Steel) of capacity 2 L & 5 L 2 No. each
Gas Cylinder 2 No.
Burners (Bunsen Marks) ½" Pipe with tuner tone 4 No.
Wire basket 5 x 5 x 5 2 No.

Burette Clamps (Nickle plated) 4 No.
Tongs stainless steel 13" 2 No.
Spatula steel 8" 10 No.
Test tube stand (Iron) 10 No.
Rubber cork various sizes 50 No.
ICE Box (thirmocal) 3 No.
Iron Box with clamp 6 No.
Blotting paper 10 Sheets
Wire gage 6 x 6" 6 No.
Stop Watch 1 No.
Nesseler's tube stand 5 No.
Sample Box 2 No.
Brown Paper 5 Sheets
Pipette Stand 3 No.
Non-absorbent cotton 1 Kg.
Test tube brush (Nylon) 10 No.
Burette brush 10 No.
Table 31 Requirement of Chemicals for Bacteriological Test
Name of Chemical Required quantity
Mac conkey Broth ( D S) 1 Kg
Mac conkey Broth (S S) 1 Kg
Peptone 1 Kg
Lactose 1 Kg
Sod Chloride 1 Kg
Bile Salt 0.5 Kg
Natural Red 100 Gms
Brilliant green bile lactose Broth (BGIB) 4 Kg
Tryptohe broth 4 Kg
Sprit 10 Liter

In the store room a crane system is to be foreseen with sufficient lifting capacity.
The room shall be accessible with small trucks.
All wastewater shall be collected and discharged into the supernatant pump
station. The entire building is to be equipped with all needed fixtures, extraction
and ducting system fittings such as electrical sockets, fan switchers etc.
The Power Transformer will be located outdoor, close to the Generator room
with a fence and gate according to national standards and requirements.
Table 32 Floor Concept of Office and Laboratory Building

Unit Minimum Dimensions
Ground floor
Emergency generator room m 8.00 x 5.00
incl. MCC
Storage m 9.00 x 8.54
Laboratory, control room m 4.31 x 5.00
including washing, toilet
First floor
Outside stairs and balcony minimum width 1.00
Meeting m 9.00 x 5.81
Staff room m 9.00 x 3.50
Dining room including m 4.31 x 9.54
washing, toilets
The design and construction provides also for other facilities as listed below:
 Asphalt works such as yard, roads, turning areas, side walks, parking etc.
 Minimum parking lots for cars: 3
 Landscaping
 Fencing of entire plot including entrance gate
The building shall comprise the following:
Table 33 Equipment of Building of Office and Laboratory Building

Minimum Equipment
Personal 01 No: latest version and configuration with 500 GB HDD (02 Nos.), 4 GB RAM,
computer DVD Writer, 19" LCD Monitor, Multimedia Kit, Modem, UPS etc.
Printer 01 No: laser printer A3 Size, with latest version: configurations with an
approved make i.e. HP/Epson/Samsung etc.
Plant model 01 No: wall mounted process model: Electronic Plant Display model, with flow
diagram and working. (Minimum size 3 m x 1.5 m)

Minimum Equipment
01 No: 3‐dimensional, scaled model with flow direction display with the
lighting.
Air‐ adequate nos. of air conditioners of approved make shall be provided
conditioning
Toilets separate toilet blocks male and female
Office and one wooden conference Table 3 m x 1.5 m with eight executive chairs
meeting room
four tables 1.5 m x 0.9 m with both side drawers
equipment
two tables 1.2 m x 0.75 m with both side drawers
two tables 0.9 m x 0.6 m with single side drawers
ten office chairs
computer table with revolving chair
four steel cupboards (Store Well or any other approved make)
two filing cabinet with 4 drawers
4.2.11 Electrical, Instrumentation and Control
The scope of works and services shall include everything that is required for the
plant ready for automatic operation.
It is not limited to the process of the STP but also includes building services and
everything necessary to ensure proper operation and safe work even if it should
not be listed or specified in here. Qualified, testing, start-up and documentation
is obligatory.
The Electrical work is to be carried out as per applicable rules, regulations, acts
and standards including all applicable safety rules , regulations, acts and
standards. Liaison with concern authorities (e.g. State Electricity Board /
Company etc.) preparation & submission of relevant documents and drawings
required for relevant necessary approvals is the responsibility of the contractor.
4.2.11.1 Power Supply and electrical distribution system
The power supply must be set up completely new by the contractor including all
necessary equipment like cables, transformers and switchboards for high and low
voltage. It is the Contractors responsibility to coordinate technical details of the
power supply connection with authorities in consultation of the project manager.
The new transformers shall be connected to a main distribution board in the
generator room. Measuring of electric values must be installed at relevant points.

Main consumers shall be equipped with separate current measurement.

Integrated measurement functions of frequency converters may be used therefor.
The electric generator for emergency power shall be connected to the main
distribution board. The feeder shall be equipped with a power measuring device.
The control of the generator has to be integrated into the automation/SCADA
system ready for automatic operation.
The control voltage shall be provided by a transformer supplying uninterruptible
power supply (UPS). The UPS shall provide power for at least three hours to
ensure operability of automation and SCADA system.
All power supply equipment must be designed for optimal operating grades to
avoid overload and ensure constant disposability.
4.2.11.2 Design Criteria Emergency Generator
In case of power cuts the STP needs an independent power source. Therefore an
Emergency Generator has been foreseen. The diesel generator (three phases),
ancillary equipment, noise clamping and diesel storage tank shall be located in a
separate building designed for that purpose. The generator shall start
automatically in case of power cut and operate for at least 12 hours.
The foundation for Emergency Generator housing must be able to absorb
vibrations and ensure sufficient ventilation of the aggregate.
The diesel-electric sets shall conform to the following main specifications.
The motor shall be a 4-stroke diesel engine with mechanical injection fuel with
closed circuit of water air cooling through a radiator.
The motor shall be supplied complete with all the accessories necessary for its
proper operation (continuously), and in particular with those listed below:
Flywheel, appropriately sized for the specified operating conditions.
Automatic speed governor, for maintaining a constant speed within a tolerance
of +-1%, for variations in load from 0 to 100%
 Electric starter complete with motor and dynamo
 Dray type air intake filter
 Oil filter
 Diesel filter
 Diesel pump
 Duty cooled radiator
Automatic and manual starting shall be provided via an electric starter,
consisting of a motor, dynamo and (lead) storage battery, having sufficient
capacity for 6 consecutive start-ups without recharging. The supply shall also
include an automatic self-regulating battery charger.

The Contractor shall estimate the power of a diesel generator unit for basic
emergency power supplying of relevant treatment stages. It is the Contractors
responsibility to draft a concept and to coordinate technical details of the basic
emergency power supply in consultation of the project manager.
The Generator facility minimum size is (8.00 x 5.00 m) with a steel louver door
is provided in the vicinity of the Office and Laboratory Building. The building
shall have a main entrance and a wide louver window at the opposite side facing
the entrance to provide good ventilation.
The Generator shall be displayed in the SCADA system. At least the following
parameters shall be displayed:
 Electrical values (power, current, Voltage)
 Battery Charge condition
 Ready / not ready / in operation
 Level of the Diesel Tank
 Errors
4.2.11.3 Electrical Cabinets and Terminal Boxes
Cabinets can be placed in terminal pumping station, screen building, SBR blower
building, belt filter press building.
Cabinets have to be placed on solid ground and must be mounted on sockets.
Generally proper cable entries have to be ensured. The electrical system may be
subdivided by terminal boxes.
A reserve of at least 20% has to be respected for mounting space in the cabinets,
boxes and spare space for further cabinets.
Air conditioning, ventilation or heating for electrical equipment may be
necessary in respect of the environmental conditions.
4.2.11.4 Control
A control system for the STP has to be set up. If it is necessary to use more than
one programmable logic control, they have to be assigned to different functional
groups. That also applies to operator panels. At least one colored operator panel
with a minimum size of 17” shall be placed in the generator room, preferably in
the front door of a cabinet. Further panels may be of smaller size unless this does
not limit operability.
A reserve of at least 20% has to be respected for Input- / output modules, slots
and bus connections (switch).
The control units shall be integrated into the general SCADA - network of the
plant. Remote I/O units (RIO) may be installed at appropriate places to
decentralize the control system and optimize cable installation. Those units must

be installed inside a case or cabinet and shall be connected via bus system to the
corresponding control.
An engineering station with a programming device has to be installed. It must
include all software that is necessary for changes to the control, SCADA and
configurable equipment like measurement and frequency converters.
4.2.11.5 Operating Concept
The mechanical equipment has to be configured with local controls near to the
drives. It must be possible to take the respective drive out of the automatic mode
and to switch it „ON“, “REMOTE” or „OFF“ in manual mode. The prevailing
mode is to be indicated.
All local controls get an emergency stop button which turns off the concerned
actuators.
The system shall cover the following functions and main objectives:
 a high level of automatic control thereby minimising operator manning
levels and incorporating 'one-button' start-up, synchronising and 'one-
button' shut-down
 maximised availability and efficient use of all plant components
 facilities for comprehensive monitoring, storage and presentation of
information concerning plant conditions and performance with dedicated
sequence of events, plant management and historian systems
 It shall be possible to select the operation mode between:
 Local Automatic Mode: The start/stop command shall only be given by the
operator at the panel by actuating the START or STOP push button. The
start/stop - sequence shall start automatically. All steps shall be indicated at
the sequence display. The external operation e.g. from SCADA shall be
blocked in that case.
 Automatic Mode: In this mode, the start/stop commands are not given from
the panel but from a superior system (master controller / operator panel).
The stop command on the panel shall still be active. Local stopping must
always be possible.
 Maintenance Mode / Manual Mode: In this operation mode it shall be
possible to control every auxiliary device (shut down valve, governor
pump, inlet valve etc.) without interlocking and independent of start/stop
conditions. This mode is only for test and maintenance purposes. All
indicators at start/stop sequence show the actual status of signals. The
mechanical protection system can be activated in this mode.
All switch positions have to be registered in the control system.
Operating errors are to be excluded by hardware measures:
 Definition of measures for the protection against maloperation in
dependence of the process engineering.

 Drives which have been turned off when manual operated may never be
switched on by the control system. The disconnection has to occur via
hardware. Only the changeover to „Remote“ enables the automatic restart
of the drive.
 All limits shall be monitored by the programmable control system. Signals
shall be conditioned such that cable break or an abnormal condition is
detected. A failure of the communication interfaces shall have no effect on
the safe operation of the plant. The units shall continue operating at the
latest set point value, or finish start-up or else shut-down operation.
4.2.11.6 SCADA System
The SCADA system (Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition) has to be set up
in respect of all plant components.
Security measures (such as key lock and password) shall be provided by using
different levels of securities and passwords to prevent unauthorised access to
tuning parameters, alarm set-point and controller modes. The password and/or
key lock security shall preclude unauthorised personnel from making changes to
the configuration of the system. It must be possible to export data from the
SCADA system to other computer systems via the Microsoft Excel product.
The SCADA system and local operator panels shall provide:

 A coloured graphical model of the plant including all actors, sensors and
consumers of the technological process
 command input
 display of actual values of the measurement
 display of actual values of power measuring devices
 dynamic flowcharts
 display of plant conditions
 fault indication
 warnings and alarms
 reset functions
 setting of ranges and parameters
 data storage
The plant must be completely controllable by the SCADA system. All online
parameters have to be shown on site and in the SCADA system. Functional text
must be displayed for specific signals to improve operability and diagnosis. The
graphical model has to be engineered with standardized colors, symbols and a
uniform look and feel. Command inputs and setting of ranges and parameters are
permitted according to the actual operating mode.
Alarm processing: Every alarm signal shall be processed, shown and listed at the
panel of the unit with the relevant time information. (Critical) alarms need to be
acknowledged before the plant can start up again. If some faults are likely to be

of temporary nature (e.g. power failure) the plant shall automatically

acknowledge the alarm and perform an automatic restart. The alarm message
shall however still be listed in the alarm display to inform the operator.
The scope of works also includes:
 A fully equipped PC-based work station for the operator with an adequate
number of PCs, Monitors and printers
 Network components and cables
 All necessary Software
4.2.11.7 Measurement
Sensors shall be provided in an adequate number where they are meaningful and
necessary to ensure safe automatic control and permanent information of the
whole process. All relevant process factors, states and alarm messages must be
analyzed, registered and visualized in software, especially if their values cause
warning and alarm limits. The preferred sensor output signal is 4…20mA. Drives
have to be equipped with thermistor for Motor protection.
Where several sensors provide information about the same object, a plausibility
check shall be implemented. It is up to the contractor to define ranges and limits
unless they are precisely specified.
4.2.11.8 Installation
The Contractor is responsible for the dimensioning, supply, proper installation,

labeling, testing and commissioning of all required equipment, cables and
installation materials.
The entire plant has to be set up ready for operation, including all necessary
installation systems and extra work required, even if they are not mentioned. The
installation system includes all necessary work and materials for the connection
of all system parts.
The Contractor shall plan the placement of the necessary cable trenches. Power
cables have to be separated from signal cables. All Cables shall be installed
completely within closed protection pipes, cable ducts or within cable trenches.
Only copper conductor cables shall be used. Analogue and bus signal cables
shall be shielded.
The Contractor shall supply all auxiliary material for a proper installation.
A reserve of at least 20% has to be respected for the installation system of the
electrical equipment, especially for cable routes.
The scope of supply also comprises detailed design, supply, installation, testing
and commissioning of:
 Outdoor lighting
 Indoor lighting

 Emergency lighting
 Switches, Time control
 Single socket outlets
 Multi-outlet distribution boxes for outdoor installation
 solid auxiliary constructions for free-standing arrangements
 Indoor lighting of all interior rooms of extension
 Air conditioning, ventilation and heating of sections if necessary with
thermostat control
 Signal lamps, warning lights, signboards
 Telecommunication
All outdoor luminaries and installations have to be executed in the degree of
protection IP 54. Numbers of the luminaries, mounting heights etc. have to be
designed to the local conditions by the contractor. Safe crossing of the whole
area even in case of a power failure must be guaranteed.
The exterior lighting will be controlled by time and a photo-electric lighting
controller. For defined times, the plant is completely to be illuminated, during
the other hours a minimum illumination will be switched. Lighting and forced
ventilation are to be supplied in case of power failure.
The whole concept has to be coordinated and agreed with the operator and the
project manager.
Air conditioning, ventilation or heating for electrical equipment may be
necessary in respect of the environmental conditions.
4.2.11.9 Telecommunication
The contractor shall supply and install a telecommunication system for phone
and internet access. Every room is to be equipped with a phone and access to a
wireless router.
It is the contractor’s responsibility to coordinate technical details of the
telecommunication system/internet access with authorities in consultation of the
project manager.
4.2.11.10 Lightning Protection and Equipotential Bonding
The contractor shall design, supply and install the complete lightning protection
system and the equipotential bonding for the plant, including air termination
rods, down leads, disconnecting device, foundation earth, ring earth conductors
etc.
The metalwork of all items of electrical equipment provided under the contract,
as well as handrails, ladders, gratings, checker plates etc. shall be designed to be
securely bonded to earthing.

Buildings have to be equipped with a foundation earth if no insulating layer is

placed under the floors. For keeping an earth resistance of < 2 Ohm during the
dry season, additional earth rods and strips have to be provided. The entire
earthing and lightning protection system has to be executed in high-grade
material.
During the earthworks, steel strips are always to be placed in addition to the
foundation earth in order to obtain the pre-mentioned earth contact resistance.
Exposures to buried cables have to be excluded. In this way an earthing system
of low impedance has to be set up with minor expenditure. A respective quantity
of steel strips has to be calculated.
Expansion joints have to be bridged outside the concrete. All buildings including
outhouses have to be equipped with an external lightning protection system.
Down leads have to be vertically installed behind linings, masonry or in
concrete. In the course of each down lead, a concealed casing with inspection
joint has to be installed. A terminal lug for the meshing of the earthing system
has to be brought out on all building edges.
The structures and buildings have to be interconnected. Connecting and outlet
points will be brought out insulated.
The contractor creates a layout plan which includes the meshing and
interconnections of the earthing system. Protective earthing and earth
termination network have to be considered separately.
The verification of the effectiveness and the minimum earthing resistance values
to be adhered have to be performed at defined measuring points via current-
voltage methods of measurement. Respective protocols have to be set up.
For the internal protection, the following measures have to be taken:
 overvoltage protection at the main power feed in the electrical cabinets
 overvoltage protection at the feed in of substations
 overvoltage protection of the supply- and sensor cables of instrumentation
and control devices
4.2.11.11 Documentation
A complete documentation in respect of the scope of delivery has to be

submitted.
Design drawings have to be submitted for check and approval. The final
documentation will also be checked and needs to be approved.
In the course of the detailed planning, the contractor satisfies himself about the
designed process structure and accepts the development of all shop drawings on
his own responsibility.
The contractor has to prepare and submit the documents and data that are listed
in electrical works.

The complete documentation is to be set up in two languages: English and Hindi.

A table of contents with a tabulation of all single drawings, sheet number,
drawing numbers and so forth has to be set up.
Functional and automation descriptions and charts are to be submitted in
duplicate for the start-up. The complete operation under manual and automatic
control, the functional connections and the instructions for fault location have to
be presented in this document.
In case of outside cabling, site drawings of cable lines and the reserve conduit
system are to be set up.

5. Mechanical Specifications
In case of any discrepancy between standard and particular specifications of the

MPUDC, the herein provided particular specifications shall prevail.
Even if it is not separately mentioned in the Specifications all stated regulations
shall be according to the latest version.
5.1 Machinery Guards, Labelling and Emergency Stop Devices
Plant, as designed and installed, shall have no feature that could be a hazard to
operators, maintenance staff, visitors or other persons having access thereto.
Guard electrical safety devices, thermal insulation, noise suppression devices,
written notices, safety covers, lifebelt and the like shall be provided where
needed.
Machinery shall conform to all international and local safety regulations and
shall be guarded to prevent injury to operators.
All rotating and reciprocating parts, drive belts, etc. shall be securely covered to
the satisfaction of the Engineer, to ensure the complete safety for both
maintenance and operating personnel. All such guards shall be of adequate and
substantial construction, they shall also be readily removable for access to the
equipment. Self-tapping screws shall not be used. Adequate guards shall be
supplied and installed throughout the installation to cover all drive mechanism.
The Contractor shall arrange for the supply and fitting of warning labels for all
machinery.
Guards for machinery shall be constructed of corrosion resistant material.
Rubber mats shall be provided by the Operator in front of all motor control
centres, distribution boards, instruments and battery supply power cabinets,
supplied by him.
Emergency stop devices shall be provided and positioned adjacent to all driven
plant which:
 involves a risk of injury to personnel during norm and maintenance
operations;
 handles high pressure fluid or dangerous chemicals;
 is located at a distance of more than five metres from its controller;
 has no direct, unimpeded access between the controller and the item of
controlled plant, irrespective of distance.
The Contractor shall supply and fit engraved labels and each item of Plant
throughout all installations.
The labels shall be permanently attached in a conspicuous position and shall
detail the design performance, function manufacturer's identification and system

identification. In general the function and system identification shall be

separately labelled.
All indicating and operating devices shall have securely attached to them or
marked upon them designations in English as to their function and proper
manner of use.
Items such as valves shall have direction of rotation for closing and opening
indicated.
Only non-flame-propagating materials may be used for place and labels.
Inscriptions shall be permanently engraved and, in general, a dark inscription on
a light back-ground shall be provided.
The proposed style, label material, inscription, location and means of fixing shall
be submitted to the Consultant for approval. Embossed materials and techniques
will not be accepted.
Where withdrawable or detachable equipment is provided, both the fixed and
moving or detachable portions shall be similarly labelled.
Labels shall be provided to warn of dangerous or potentially dangerous
circumstances or sub-stances.
Inscriptions on danger labels shall start with the word "DANGER" and be white
on a red background.
Inscriptions on caution labels shall start with the word "CAUTION".
Instruction labels shall be provided where safety procedures are essential to
protect operating and maintenance personnel from hazardous or potentially
hazardous conditions, e.g. advising the isolation or earthling of electrical circuits
or the wearing of protective clothing.
In addition to the above plant identification labels the Contractor shall ensure
each item of machinery shall have a manufacturer's identification/rating plate
detailing the following:
 manufacturer's name and address
 model/type identification
 serial number
 year of manufacture
 appropriate rating details
 other relevant details, limitations, etc.
5.2 Suppression of noise
All equipment offered shall be quiet in operation unless otherwise specified. The
noise level within any building shall not be more than 70 decibels "A" scale
when measured along a contour 3 m from any single item of equipment during

starting running and stopping, subject to a tolerance of +1-5% on this over the
audible frequency spectrum measured at mid band.
The noise level outside each building shall not be more than 55 db "A" scale
when measured along a contour 3m from the external wall subject to a tolerance
of +/ 5% on this over the audible frequency spectrum measured at mid band.
Noise test measurements shall be made on completion of the installation of the
equipment at Site to verify that it complies with this Specification. Equipment
which fails to comply with the noise level limits when tested will render it liable
for rejection unless it is satisfactorily modified at the Contractor's expense by the
programmed commissioning date.
5.3 Lubrication
The lubrication system shall be sized to provide full protection of the structures
throughout its designed operating life and environmental conditions. Equipment
shall be adequate lubricated by systems which require attention not more
frequently than weekly during continuous operation. Lubrication systems shall
not require attention during start-up or shutdown, and shall not waste lubricants.
Drains shall be located so as to allow for collection of waste oil into containers
without removing the equipment from its normal position. Lubrication facilities
shall be convenient and accessible. Oil drains and fill openings shall be easy
accessible from the normal operating area or platform, and shall be accessible
without requiring the removal of guards, handrails, or other safety devices.
Arrangements shall be made to prevent overfilling with lubricant.
Oil sumps, reservoirs, and tanks shall be fitted with fill plugs, drain plugs, and
sight glass level indicators. Dipsticks shall only be used if the provision of a
sight glass is not possible. Sight glasses shall show normal, maximum and
minimum oil levels, shall be enclosed in a protective metal case, and shall be
readily dismantled for cleaning whilst the infrastructure is in service.
Lubrication systems, reliant upon pumped circulation of the lubricant, and where
failure of the system would result in catastrophic failure of the process system or
equipment, shall incorporate instrumentation to provide an alarm signal in the
event of a blockage, loss of lubricant, or other malfunction.
The lubricants recommended shall be available locally. A list of recommended
lubricants and their equivalents shall be included in the operation and
maintenance instructions.
Lubricants of the type recommended by the equipment manufacturer shall be
provided in sufficient quantities to fill all lubricant reservoirs and to replace all
consumption during testing, start-up, and operation prior to acceptance of the
equipment by the Engineer. Sufficient lubricants shall also be supplied for
operation of the equipment during the entire defects liability period. The
quantities shall be based on operating hours of 24 hours per day.

The equipment shall be lubricated by long life lubricants such that working life is
not less than 3000 operational hours or as recommended by equipment
manufacturer, whichever is higher. A complete schedule of recommended oils
and other lubricants shall be furnished by the Contractor. The number of
different types of lubricants shall be kept to a minimum. The schedule and the
name of the supplier of the lubricants shall be submitted to the Employer’s
representative for approval.
5.4 Metals
Dissimilar metals shall generally be isolated from each other. Where contact is
unavoidable the metals shall be selected such that any galvanic corrosion shall
not compromise the specified Asset Design Life.
All major stress bearing forgings shall be examined, including internally
wherever possible, and be non-destructively tested for the detection of flaws.
They shall be heat treated for the relief of residual stresses.
Castings shall have a homogeneous structure and shall be free from defects, non-
metallic inclusions or blowholes. Minor defects of a depth not exceeding 10% of
the total metal thickness and that will not affect the strength or serviceability of
the casting may be repaired using approved techniques. Barger defects must be
reported to the Engineer and no repair made without approval.
All castings shall be shot blasted before machining.
5.5 Glasfibre Reinforced Plastic (GRP)
Care is required in handling synthetic pipe (GRP), especially in hot and cold
weather. Stack heights shall be restricted to 1.5 metres or six layers, whichever is
less.
In hot weather pipes shall be protected from direct sunlight during storage by
sheeting or in roofed compounds.
For the fabrication of elements, only raw materials resistant against aggressive
liquids, gases and radiation are accepted.
5.6 Steel Constructions
Steel constructions shall be designed to resist all the static and dynamic forces to
which they may be exposed. The Contractor must specify in his offer all
materials to be used.
Product manufacturer, testing and installation shall comply with the following
requirements, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.

 The Contractor shall be responsible for the design, fabrication and

installation of the entire structure equipment supports and other
accessories.
 Erection of structural steel shall be performed only by the steel fabricators
staff, or by an approved specialist Sub-contractor. The Contractors staff is
not allowed to erect structural steel
 All materials shall be new, unused and free from defects.
 The steel fabricator shall be responsible for verifying all imposed loads
from any services or other equipment items to be supported from the steel
framework.
Structural steelwork shall be designed to BS 449: Part 2 or BS 5950 and shall
comply with the relevant provisions of the appropriate British Standard, as set
out below:
Structural steel sections Cold
rolled steel sections Weldable
structural steels Hot-rolled
structural steel angles Hot-rolled
structural hollow sections Steel
tubes for general purposes 4: Part 1
2994
EN 10025
EN 10056-1
EN 10210: Part 2
6323: Parts 2 - 7
5.7 Stainless Steel
All stainless steel material (pipes, flanges etc.), shall be stamped according to
their type, grade, and pressure class.
Stainless steel shall, at a minimum, be provided in accordance with grade
316S13 to BS 970 (equivalent to AISI 316L, W1.4404,-W1.4435) if not
otherwise specified.
Material thickness of stainless steel shall be at least 3 mm when not otherwise
stated. Welded tubes shall have a wall thickness of at least 2 mm.

5.8 Aluminium and Aluminium Alloys
Immersed installations, or installations which are periodically immersed shall not

be constructed from aluminium or aluminium alloys.
Due to the corrosive atmosphere, the use of aluminium or aluminium alloy
requires the approval of the Engineer in all cases.
If-alloys are used, they shall be of a type used for marine applications with
magnesium as the main additive.
Wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys shall comply with the relevant
provisions of the appropriate Indian or British Standard, as set out below.
Maximum deflection of aluminium structural sections shall be span/200.
Type BS
Sections for structural Purpose 1161
Plato, sheet and strip EN 485 and EN 573
Drawn tube EN 515, EN 573-3,4, EN 754-1,2,7&8
Bars, extruded round tubes and sections 1474 or EN 755: Parts 3-6
Ingots and castings EN 1559-1, EN 1559-4, EN 1676 &
EN 1706
Deliver, store and handle aluminium framing work in manner to prevent damage
and deterioration. Provide packaging such as cardboard or other containers,
separators, banding, and wrappings to protect aluminium items. Storage of
aluminium materials in a protected dry interior area, at least 25 mm off the floor
and at least 10 mm between individual pieces. Follow special storage and
handling requirements of manufacturer. Protect exposed finish surfaces.
5.9 Welding
5.9.1 Welding in General
All welding work shall be carried out at the manufactures workshop. Field
welding will be allowed only with the prior approval of the Engineer.
Before welding, all steel surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned, and no welded
joints shall have as strength than the joined parts.
Where required a non-destructive test (NDT) of the welding work shall be
performed in accordance with a recognized and appropriate standard. Ten
percent of the welds shall be tested. The following methods can be applied:
 Radiographic
 Ultrasonic
 Penetration.

Radiographics shall be given first priority when choosing NDT methods. If it is

impossible, the two other methods can be considered.
The test shall be carried out by an accredited independent agency. The
acceptance criterion shall be class C in accordance with ISO 5817:2003. A report
of the tests shall be provided.
Welds to be tested shall mainly be selected from those of which the reverse side
of the weld cannot be visually inspected. Such welds shall be tested by the
radiographic or the ultrasonic method.
If the NDT tests reveal defects, the number of tests shall be increased. The
consequence of one defective weld is that two neighbouring welds of the same
type shall be tested. If one or both of these welds are defective, the testing shall
extend further.
5.9.2 Welding of Carbon Steel
Prefabrication in workshops shall be used to the maximum extent possible.

Manual shielded metal arc, submerged arc, gas metal arc, flux cored arc, gas
tungsten arc, and other applicable welding processes and methods may be used.
For the welding of carbon steel, the appropriate sections of BS EN 499 and EN
1600 respectively recommended shall apply.
5.9.3 Welding of Stainless Steel
For welding of stainless steel the appropriate sections of BS 4677 respectively

shall apply.
The welding method for workshop as well as on-site welding shall be the
tungsten inert gas method (TIG) or the metal inert gas method (MIG). Whatever
method will be finally chosen, the inner surface of the weld shall be protected by
clean inert gas. When welding, the oxygen content of the mixture oxygen/inert
gas must not exceed 20 ppm.
In order to guarantee high quality welded joints, piping and other quality
stainless steel components shall, as far as possible, be prefabricated in the
workshops.
For stainless steel welding the following shall be observed:
 Only butt weld jointing of pipes is allowed during erection work,
 Where butt welds are used, the penetration shall be completed, if
necessary, with root run,
 Backing rings shall not be used,
 No surface defects reducing the corrosion resistance, or discoloration of
the surface will be accepted,

 After welding the weld shall be carefully pickled and passivated, and
 The welds shall be thoroughly washed in clean water after pickling and
passivation.
5.10 Bolts
All bolts, nuts, washers, and anchor plates, except high tensile, for all ferrous
parts shall be steel galvanized to BS 729, and primed and painted after assembly
and tightening in 'accordance with this Specification.
All nuts and bolts shall be threaded in accordance with BS 3643 "isometric series
thread" part 2 "limits and tolerances for coarse pitch threads" and fitted with 3
mm thick washers beneath bolt and nut.
All bolts, nuts, washers, and anchor plates for fastening galvanized components,
stainless steel or aluminium alloy components shall be of stainless steel BS EN
1088, and shall remain unpainted. PTFE washers shall be fitted beneath stainless
steel washers for both bolt head and nut.
All holding down and anchor bolts, nuts, washers, and anchor plates for use
externally, or in internal areas which are subject to contact with sewage or
effluent, or in “wet” areas but above the top water level, shall be stainless steel,
Grade approved by the Engineer.
All holding down and anchor bolts, nuts, washers, and anchor plates for use
internally in areas not subject to contact with sewage or effluent shall be steel
galvanized to BS 729:1971, and all exposed surfaces shall be painted after
assembly and tightening.
All exposed bolt heads and nuts shall be hexagonal. The length of all bolts shall
be such that, when fitted with a nut and tightened down, the threaded portion
shall fit the nut and not protrude from the face by more than a half diameter.
Drilled anchor fixings for use on concrete structures shall be of a type approved
by the Engineer. The positions of all drilled anchors shall be approved by the
Engineer, and any contractor proposing to use such fixings shall be deemed to
have undertaken to supply, mark off, and fit the fixings.
5.11 Pipe Work
The Contractor shall include for all pipework, valves and fittings to complete the
installation in every part and detail.
Pipe work shall be designed with independent supports and restraints to
accommodate loads and thrust so as not to superimpose stresses onto machinery
or plant items. Pumps, valves, meters, strainers, and other such in-line equipment
shall be supported independently of the pipe work.

All pipes and assembly parts under this Contract shall be of best quality, truly
circular, and of uniform thickness, free from scale, lamination, and other defects,
and shall be designed and suitable for their operational pressures and
temperatures.
Flexible pipe couplings, flange adaptors, or flanged fittings shall be incorporated
into the pipe work as appropriate to facilitate removal of plant items for
maintenance, without the need to dismantle or disturb adjacent pipe work /
manifolds, and to allow for final closure of pipe work joints without
superimposing stresses onto plant items.
Where pipe work passes through a wall, flanged joints shall be provided either
side of the wall.
Where flange adaptors are used they shall be tied to the nearest flange,
restraining structure, thrust block or wall. Lang radius bends shall be used on
pipe work where space permits.
The pipe work design shall include compensation for any thermal or other
differential expansion or settlement between structures by the incorporation of
bellows, rocker pipes, or similar approved devices.
5.11.1 PVC Pipes and Fittings
Unplasticized PVC pressure pipes, joints, and fittings shall comply with BS 3505
and relevant sections of BS 4346 Parts 1, 2 and 3, metric pipes and MOPVC to
WIS 4-31-06, 07 and 08.
PVC pipe work shall be supported at least to the minim um requirements
specified by the manufacturer. Solvent cements for jointing uPVC pipes shall
comply with BS 4346:Part 3.
5.11.2 Sealing of Ducts
Ducts for cables and small pipes shall be sealed against the ingress of moisture
and vermin once the cable or pipe installation is complete. Ducts shall be sealed
to prevent the ingress of gas where one side of the duct is located in a zoned
hazardous area, or where a dangerous gas could be present.
Ducts must be sealed in such a way as to make it possible to break out the seal in
the future without damaging the services within.
5.11.3 Pressure Pipes
The Contractor shall advise the Engineer at least five working days prior to the
pressure tests, and shall provide and mount all necessary equipment for the
pressure tests.

Pressure tests made against closed valves shall follow the guidelines from the
valve manufacturer regarding the highest single side pressure allowed.
Hydraulic pressure tests shall be carried out by the use of potable water. During
pressure tests a minimum of 1.5 times maximum allowed operating pressure
shall be maintained for one hour.
Pipe work material shall be appropriate for the media being carried. Pumping
mains and pressure pipes shall be rated for at least PN 16.
After the pressure tests have been finalised the Contractor shall produce a report,
a copy of which shall be submitted to the Engineer. The report shall as a
minimum include:
 Pressure Test Procedure and Standard(s) followed for such tests;
 Unambiguous references to piping or part of piping and shut-off;
 Specification of test pressure;
 The period of the pressure tests;
 Results and signature of acceptance,
 A description of any failures, their causes, and proposed corrective action.
 Any other requirement as per applicable Standard
5.11.4 Flanges and Gaskets
Gaskets for flanged pipe joints shall be of the inside-bolt-circle type. The
dimensions of gaskets shall comply with BS EN 1514-1. Gaskets shall be
manufactured from material complying with the provisions of BS EN 681-1
Type WA rings. All Hanges must be rated for PN 16, and drilled according to BS
4504 (P.N. 16) and BS EN 1092-2.
Flanges for stainless steel pipes shall be of the weld-on type in stainless steel of
similar quality as the piping. Alternative, welding neck rings and loose flanges of
stainless steel may be used.
5.11.5 Pipe Work Supports
Pipe support brackets and clips shall generally be manufactured in mild steel,
galvanised after fabrication. Plastic clips brackets are acceptable for the support
of thermoplastic pipe work. Steel brackets in contact with thermoplastic pipe
work shall be free from sharp edges. Immersed Pipe supports and supports in
contact with waste water respectively shall generally manufactured in stainless
steel.
Pipe work shall be supported in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions,
or in accordance with BS 3974, parts 1, 2 or 3 as appropriate.
Each pipe support shall cradle the pipe over at least 180 degrees.

5.12 Lifting Equipment
The hoist shall be rated for the heaviest single lift under erection or maintenance
operations, including provision for "break out" loads.,
The Contractor shall include for testing and certification of the equipment and
associated equipment unless otherwise-stated.
In case of Electric Overhead Travelling (EOT) Cranes the capacities of various
EOT Cranes shall be decided as per recommendations of IS: 875. The crane and
hoist shall conform to IS: 3177, IS: 3832 and IS: 3938, class 2, medium duty
and meet specified operational requirements. The lifting hooks shall be single
‘C’ type complying with the requirement of IS: 15560 made from grade
C30/C20 carbon steel. The hook shall have a safety latch to prevent rope coming
off the hook
Manual hoists shall be complete with hand-chain, trolley, pulley block, hook,
hand and load chains, brake and other accessories. They shall comply with the
latest applicable standards, regulations and safety codes in the locality where
equipment will be installed.
Each hoist shall be operated on a monorail (I-Beam). The factor of safety shall
not be less than 5. The load chain may be heat-treated to give ductility,
toughness and conforming to I.S. 3109/B.S. 1663/B.S. 3114. The load wheel is
to be made from heavy duty malleable castings. The hand chain is to Conform
with B.S. 6405:1984 and hand chain wheel may be made from pressed sheet
steel with roller type guarding.
5.13 Penstocks
Penstocks shall be of the following types:

 Cast iron with scraped non-ferrous sealing, or
 Cast iron with rubber sealing faces.
 Stainless steel with rubber sealing faces.
The height of the operating hand wheel shall be approximately 1 meter above
operating level, unless otherwise stated. The hand wheels shall have the direction
of closing cast on them, which shall be clockwise.
Each penstock shall be provided with a suitable hand wheel of adequate size for
the duty required. The gearing shall be supplied, where necessary, to ensure that
the required operating force applied by hand to the hand wheel shall not exceed
250 N.
Spindles shall have machine cut, robust trapezoidal, or square form threads.
They shall be of stainless steel, manganese steel, or manganese bronze.
All penstocks shall be of the non-rising or rising spindle type, depending on
location and duty as agreed with the Engineer.

The penstocks shall be designed to ensure tight closure, whilst maintaining

freedom of plate movement during operation and minimizing sliding wear of the
seals.
Penstocks shall be watertight under the conditions of head and flow direction for
which they are designed.
Rubber sealing faces shall be formed from high quality synthetic rubber, suitably
shaped to interlock into grooves in the frame or plate and shall be securely
bonded thereto.
Penstock shall be preferably wall thimble type. However for
controlling/isolation of flow in channels, channel type gates may also be
accepted as per application requirements.
The construction of Penstocks shall be in accordance specification and generally
to IS:13349.
The Penstock shall be designed for Seating & Unseating Head without
sacrificing reasonable degree of leak tightness. The frame of Penstock shall be
flanged back type and shall be machined on the rear face to bolt directly to the
machined face of the wall thimble. The seating faces shall be made of solid
section strip of Stainless steel. They shall be secure firmly by means of counter
sunk fixing in finished grooves in the frame and slide face in such a way as to
ensure that they will remain permanently in place, free from distortion and
loosening during the life of the Penstock.
Penstocks shall be equipped with adjustable Side & Top wedging devices as
required to provide contact between the slide and frame facing when the gate is
in closed position. They shall be operated through a suitable operating
mechanism.
The Lifting mechanism shall incorporate gearing arrangement, if required to
keep the torque requirement within 7 KgM except electrically actuated gate. In
case of gearing, those to be enclosed grease packed Bevel or Worm Gear box
type. Lifting mechanism shall be provided with suitable position indicator to
show the position of the gate from full open to full close. The indicator to be
provided in the head stock only. Stem Cover to be provided on the top of head
stock for the rising spindle. The cross section of the wall thimble shall have the
shape of the English letter ‘F’.
The Penstock shall be provided with Flush bottom seal. This is a solid square
cornered resilient rubber seal provided on the bottom facing of the slide. The
seal may be secured fastened to the bottom of the face of the slide by a retainer
bar and fasteners. The top surface of the bottom facing of frame shall be flush
with invert of the gate opening. Bottom facing of the slide shall be accurately
machined to make contact with the seal when the slid is closed. Gates shall be
fixed for positive seating. Penstocks shall be electrically operated with manual
override facility. The Penstocks shall be of Class – 2 i.e., suitable for maximum
unbalanced head needs as per calculation/design.
Material of Construction
The materials of construction of important components of gates shall be in
accordance with the following, or equivalent standards:

a. Frame & Shutter: Cast Iron IS: 210 Gr. FG 200

b. Wall Thimble: Cast Iron IS: 210 Gr. FG 200
c. Seating Faces & : Stainless Steel ASTM A276 type 316 Counter Sunk
Fixing
d. Wedging Device Cast Iron IS: 210 Gr. FG 200
e. Wedge Linings: Stainless Steel ASTM A276 type 316
f. Stem & Stem Coupling: Stainless Steel ASTM A276 type 316
g. Stem Nut: Stainless Steel ASTM A743 CF8M or SS316
h. Flush Bottom Rubber Seal: EPDM ASTM D200
i. Seal retainer bar: Stainless Steel ASTM A276 type 316
j. Fasteners, Studs Anchor: Stainless Steel ASTM A276 type 316
Bolt & Nuts
k. Lift Nut: Bronze IS: 318 Type LTB-2
l. Headstock, Stem Guide: Cast Iron IS: 210 Gr. FG 200
m. Hand wheel: Mild Steel IS: 2062
n. Painting: Ordinary Black Bituminous Paint
5.14 Valves
5.14.1 Gate Valves/Sluice Valves
All valves for the project shall be from one manufacturer. Valves shall be
Waterworks Standard to BS 5163, BS EN 1171, and other relevant BS
Standards.
Unless otherwise specified, each valve shall be provided with a suitable hand
wheel of adequate diameter for the duty required. Gearing shall be supplied,
where necessary, to ensure that the required operating force applied by hand to
the rim of the wheel does not exceed 250 N.
Hand wheels shall have smooth rims with the direction of closing, which shall be
clockwise, cast on them.
Extension spindles, headstocks and foot brackets shall be provided where
specified. Where possible and provided the valve is not subject to submergence,
the extension spindle shall be of the non-rising type and a cast iron bridle piece
or similar, shall be incorporated an valves of the rising spindle type for this
purpose. Where rising stem valves are subject to submergence the extension
spindle shall also be of the rising type with the threaded portion positioned above
top water level. Extended spindle installations shall include all necessary
brackets and intermediate supports .etc.
Extended spindles for all motorized or actuator operated valves shall be provided
with thrust tubes between valve and headstock in order to absorb the thrust in
both directions of operation.

Remote mounted actuators shall be mounted an a floor pedestal, and shall be

provided with drive shafts between valve and actuator units, complete with all
necessary universal joints and shaft support bearing brackets.
Each valve weighing more than 50 kg shall be provided with 2 Lifting eyes for
handling by crane.
Where sluice valves larger than 350 mm bore are mounted with the spindle in the
horizontal plane the valve bodies shall be fitted with renewable gunmetal
machined gate slides and the gates-with renewable hard bronze shoes accurately
machined to reduce sliding friction.
All sluice valves above 500 mm bare (300 mm if power actuated) shall be
provided with jacking screws and valves above 350 mm bare where mounted in
the vertical plane shall be provided with feet.
Vandal and weatherproof clear polycarbonate tube covers shall be securely fitted
to protect the threads of rising stems and spindles and tubes shall be clearly and
permanently engraved to indicate the position of the valve.
Fixing nuts and bolts supplied by the manufacturer shall be as specified in the
appropriate sections herein and in accordance to BS Standards.
All hand wheels, headstocks, foot brackets, guide brackets and thrust tubes shall
be of ductile iron.
Valves shall carry identification plates or marks in accordance with appropriate
standards.
All materials used in manufacture of the valves shall conform to the following
minimum standards:
 Ductile Iron BS 2789
 Dezincification Resistant Brass BS 2874 Grade CZ132
 Stainless Steel BS 970 Pt. 4 Grade 431 S29
 0-rings NBR Rubber.
The materials of construction of important components shall be in accordance
with the following, or equivalent standards:
1.Body: Cast Iron to IS: 210 Gr. FG200
2.Wedge: Cast Iron to IS: 210 Gr. FG200
3.Spindle: St. Steel to IS: 6603 04Cr18Ni10
4.Seat Rings: SS to CF8
5.Spindle Nut: High Tensile Brass to IS – 320 HT2
6.Back Seat Bush: SS to CF8
7.Shoe & Channel Lining : SS to CF8
5.14.2 Non-return Valves
Non-return valves shall be mounted in the horizontal plane unless otherwise

agreed with the Engineer.

Non-return valves DN 80 and larger shall be cast iron swing check pattern in
accordance with BS 5153, with flanges to BS 4504 Section 3.1. Valve rating
shall be 16 bar minimum. Valve bodies shall be fitted with an inspection cover.
lnspection covers shall have tapped Basses fitted with galvanised plugs.
Non-return valves shall be supplied with a limit switch mounting plate, external
lever and counter-weight, and fully enclosed in a guard compliant with PD 5304,
unless otherwise specified.
All materials used in the manufacture of non-return valves shall conform to the
following minimum standards:
 Cast Iron BS 1452 Grade 220
 Gun metal BS 1400 Grade LG 2
 Stainless Steel BS 970 Grade 431S29
a. Body & Cover: Cast Iron IS: 210 Gr. FG 260
b. Door: Cast Iron IS: 210 Gr. FG 200
c. Hinge Pin: St. Steel to AISI – 316
d. Seat Rings : Gunmetal with 2% Nickel / IS: 318 Gr. LT B2
e. Bearing Bush: Teflon
f. Fastener: carbon steel
5.14.3 Butterfly Valves
Butterfly valves shall comply with BS 5155, and be of the double flanged type
with metal or resilient seating and grey or ductile cast iron body.
Butterfly valves shall only be used at locations where there is no risk of tags,
fibres etc. Use of butterfly valves for wastewater requires prior acceptance by
the Engineer.
Valves shall be drop tight at closure, with a diameter not less than that of the
nominal pipe bore.
Suitable stops shall be incorporated to prevent disc movements beyond the fully
open and fully closed positions.
Percentage Opening - Flow Curve shall be submitted along with data sheet
mentioning area where such valves are subjected for any controlling of the fluid
flow.
A valve position indicator to show the position of the disc shall be provided at
the valve clearly marked with ‘open’ and ‘closed’ positions
 Cast Iron BS 1452 Grade 220
 Gun metal BS 1400 Grade LG 2
 Stainless Steel BS 970 Grade 431S29
 Sph. Graphite Iron BS 2789

 Seals and O-rings Moulded rubber

 Valves shall not contain any brasses containing more than 5% zinc
 Resilient-seated valves shall have nitrile rubber seals
5.15 Electric Actuators
5.15.1 General
Actuators shall be designed for valve operation to ensure proper function.

Depending on application the operating mode must be respected.
Actuator shall have a design life of 10.000 OPEN-CLOSE-OPEN cycles, each
consisting of 30 turns per sense of rotation and must be suitable for operating in
any mounting position. Actuator design must provide simple setting, testing,
maintenance and repair.
Actuator parameters must be settable at motor control without special tools or
instruments (e.g. battery backed setting tool.
Electrical connection of actuators has to be multi pin plug and socket connector,
allowing quick disconnection in case of maintenance or repair. In order to
prevent loss of screws during commissioning or maintenance, all covers shall be
fixed with captive screws. In order to minimize the amount of spare parts
required, parts such as covers, plug and sockets, parts must be interchangeable
throughout all model sizes.
Torque-transmitting housings must be made of cast iron, except motor housing.
No plastic parts of any type shall be used, except for electric / electronic
components, operating knobs / levers, indicator mechanism and sealing elements
as far as applicable.
Depending on valve application, actuators shall be self-locking. Self-locking
shall remain active if actuator is switched to hand-operation-mode. For non-self-
locking actuators with high output speeds a mechanical anti-back drive device
shall be provided attached to the actuator.
Valve mounting dimensions shall be according to ISO 5210 with use of a plug
sleeve connection adapting to valve shaft. For rising stem applications, actuator
design must allow actuator removal from output drive without disturbing the
valve function.
5.15.2 Electric Motors
Motors must be suitable for operating at 3 phase power supply. Tolerances for
voltage (+/- 10 %) and frequency (+/- 3 %) have to be ensured. Motors shall be
specifically designed for valve-actuator operation, characterized by high starting
torque, low stall torque and low inertia. Motors shall be totally enclosed non
ventilated type (TENV). Motor housings and covers to be made of sea water
resistant aluminium. Motor-insulation must be in accordance with IEC 85 Class

F (155° C). Motors must be protected by 3 thermal monitoring devices, which

are embedded in motor windings. Motor connections shall be internal by means
of plug and socket.
Motors must be totally separated from lubricant-filled gearing of actuator,
allowing replacement of motor without loss of lubricant regardless of mounting
position. Motors shall have a dog coupling as mechanical connection to actuators
worm shaft.
Actuator motors must develop full torque when power is turned on. All motors
shall be of high starting torque type to facilitate 'unseating' of the valve. Each
motor shall have a rating plate marked in accordance with IEC 34.1 as far as
applicable.
5.15.3 Sizing
One actuator size (same outside dimensions) shall be available covering output
speeds from 4 to 180 rpm for a given torque range, to avoid over sizing and
unnecessary weight load on valve stem, flange and yoke. An increase of actuator
size caused by higher actuator output speed is not acceptable to avoid weight
over sizing of actuators. Actuators must be selected to provide sufficient torque
required for safe valve operation. Actuator output torque must be available at 90
% of nominal voltage.
In order to enable proper sizing of applicable electric equipment, actuator
supplier has to disclose current value at maximum setting torque. Actuator shall
be capable of opening and closing the valve against full differential pressure
within specified time on valve data sheet.
5.15.4 Limit and Torque Monitoring
No battery backed limit sensing shall be used to avoid actuator malfunction in

case of power failure. Actuators shall have a hall sensor principle based absolute
encoder for limit sensing with a resolution of 3° or better. Actuator shall not be
equipped with a battery.
Torque sensing shall be of mechanical sliding worm principle with torque values
independently settable for 'OPEN' and 'CLOSE' direction. No electronic torque
sensing derived from motor current or piezo-electric torque sensing at worm
shaft. Torque setting shall be possible for 40% to 100% of rated torque.
5.15.5 Diagnosis
Actuators installed in critical applications, shall be optionally equipped with a

sensor package, consisting of torque, temperature and vibration diagnosis. In this

case actuators shall also have a real time clock for event recording to support
asset management functions and life cycle analysis. Display indications shall
follow NAMUR recommendations with simplified status indications, operation
log and torque curves.
5.15.6 Motor and Local Controls
Integral motor controls shall be microprocessor based and include mechanically

and electrically interlocked reversing contactors for ON-OFF duty and solid state
contacts (thyristors) for MODULATING duty actuators.
Local controls shall consist of motor controls, push buttons OPEN-STOP–
CLOSE–RESET, lockable selector switch LOCAL-OFF-REMOTE and a
wireless Bluetooth interface with separate indication showing wireless
connection as active, as well as LCD graphic display clearly visible under all
lighting conditions with plain text and in world languages, diagnosis symbols,
graphs. Five indication lights, available in different colour codes, showing status
information such as end position open/close, torque fault in both directions and
motor protection tripped.
Local controls shall be electrically attached to actuator via plug and socket
connection. It shall be possible to re-position local controls at every 90°, so that
push buttons and indication lights will face the operator.
In case actuators have to be mounted in difficult to access positions, it shall be
possible to separate local controls (including motor controls) from actuator. A
wall bracket shall be available to mount local controls / motor controls near
valve actuator for distances up to 50 m cable length.
If reasonable the following function blocks shall be supported by the FF H1
interface for full flexibility: 4 x Analogue Input (AI), 2 x Analogue Output (AO),
10 x Discrete Input (DI), 8 x Discrete Output (DI), 1 x
Proportional/Integral/Derivative PID, 1 x Input Selector (IS), 1 x Signal
Characteriser (SC). The function blocks shall be supported by a Resource Block
(RB) and dedicated blocks for commissioning and diagnosis. The data signals of
the function blocks shall be fully configurable in order to support an efficient
communication while preserving the utmost flexibility of the data transfer
according to the project requirements. The output transducer blocks shall support
a “Manual” mode in order to support service commands without affecting any
available function block schedule.
All relevant signals such as valve position (%), end positions (OPEN/CLOSE),
selector switch position and high torque alarm in OPEN/CLOSE direction must
be available via fieldbus. In addition to this, actuator must provide a dedicated
fault signal if there is a phase failure, motor protection tripped and/or high torque
in OPEN/CLOSE direction or if the hand wheel is engaged. Irrespective of the
fieldbus interface selected the four major diagnosis signals according to
NAMUR recommendation NE 107 (Failure, Function Check, Out of
Specification and Maintenance Required) are to be provided within the cyclic

feedback data to the DCS in order to fully support field diagnosis and asset
management.
Actuator behaviour in case of bus communication failure must be programmable
(fail as is, fail open, fail close, fail to preset position and also fail to the last
command received).
All control signals, communication signals as well as main power supply must be
wired to a multi pin plug and socket for customer connection. Removal of the
plug shall not require any re-wiring of the fieldbus cable to maintain the
communication to the remaining field devices in order to ensure a quick, simple
and target-oriented serviceability. Terminal compartment shall provide sufficient
space to accommodate the possible maximum number of incoming wires. A
minimum of three cable entries must be provided for motor power cable and
digital/ analogue inputs and outputs. Each cable entry shall be properly sealed by
cable glands during site installation. Cable glands shall be chosen by contractor,
responsible for wiring during commissioning phase.
Each actuator shall provide an adequately sized internal and external connection
for grounding.
5.15.7 Anti-condensation heater
In order to prevent condensation, a heater must be installed inside the actuator,

suitable for continuous operation. Actuator must provide an alarm signal in case
of failure of anti condensation heater.
5.15.8 Hazardous Area Certifications and Enclosures
Electrical actuators and accessories shall be certified II2G Ex d or de for use in

ZONE 1Group IIC and temperature class T3, according to ATEX directive
94/9/EC where required.
Protection class of actuator, including motor, shall be IP 68, according to EN
60529 against submersion up to 8 m head of water for at least 96 hours. During
submersion it must be possible to operate the actuator at least 10 times.
5.15.9 Hand Wheel
Actuators must be equipped with a hand wheel for manual operation. Clockwise
operation of hand wheel shall cause clockwise movement of output drive. Hand
wheel shall be clearly marked with an arrow and the word 'CLOSE'.
Hand wheel engagement shall be of spring loaded push mechanism type and
required manual declutching. Actuator must provide a switch signal when in
manual mode.

Under manual operation, hand wheel shall drive the worm shaft. Self locking
shall be maintained in hand operation. Motor must be disengaged during manual
operation. Hand wheel shall automatically disengage when the electric motor is
energized.
Hand wheel must be sized allowing easy manual operation of output drive. The
over torque indication shall be active in manual operation as well as motor
operation, thus allowing a signal to be provided when the set-torque has been
reached.
5.15.10 Bearings and Gears
Bearings shall be of antifriction or self-lubricating type. Bearings shall not

require any maintenance between general overhauls. Power gears shall be made
from heat treated steel. Worm-wheels shall be made of bronze material. Actuator
gear housing shall be filled with an adequate quantity of lubricant. Re-lubrication
between general overhauls shall not be required.
5.15.11 Noise Level
Under all operating conditions the noise level of actuators shall not exceed 75
dB(A) at 1 m.
5.15.12 Name Plates
Two nameplates, made of aluminium, shall be attached to each actuator; one on

the motor housing, showing all relevant motor data, one on the actuator housing
showing all relevant actuator data. Special information, such as valve tag no.,
shall be shown if required. Nameplates shall be securely fixed to actuator and
motor, so that they cannot be removed or scratched off during shipment,
installation, operation or maintenance.
5.15.13 Painting and Corrosion Protection
Actuator corrosion protection shall fulfil the requirements of EN ISO 12944-2,

classification of environments C4 with a specified salt spray test of 720h.
Actuator painting must be performed in such a way, that no corrosion takes place
under ambient conditions as specified. All outside screws or bolts shall be made
of stainless steel (A2). Actuators shall be corrosion protected with a primer
coating and a two layer powder coating consisting of an epoxy coating and a
polyurethane top coating with a total film thickness of at least 140µm. Final
colour shall be silver grey similar to RAL 7037.

5.15.14 Inspection and Testing Manufacturer´s Work
Each actuator shall be factory tested. Tests shall be performed in accordance

with IEC standards as far as applicable. A final inspection record shall be
supplied with each actuator showing general actuator data, nominal current, no
load current, starting current, power factor at rated torque, output speed, torque
setting, limit setting (turns/stroke), high voltage test, functional test (including all
options) and visual test.
5.15.15 Documentation
Supplier to provide storage- installation- and operation instruction as well as

electric wiring diagram, dimensional drawings and technical data sheet including
motor data as per manufacturer standard.
5.16 Pressure Vessels
The-vessels shall be complete with all necessary fittings for control and safety of
operation including but not limited to water level gauge, manometer, air cock,
safety valve, manway.
Pressure vessels shall be constructed in accordance with the relevant British
standard shall be mounted- vertically or horizontally and supported an concrete
plinths. The vessels shall be manufactured from hot dip galvanised steel and
shall be GRP coated internally an external access ladder shall be provided for
each tank.
5.17 Compressors
The compressor shall be suitably rated for the quantity and pressure of air
required for the Installation and a pressure gauge shall be fitted to each unit to
indicate the operating pressure. The design shall ensure that the air discharged by
the compressors is oil free.
Compressors shall be manufactured to the relevant British standards and shall
have direct coupled motors the compressor and motor shall be mounted an a
robust common baseplate. The units shall be sound insulated and dust proofed.
Pressure relief& valves, non-return valves and air intake filters shall be provided
fitted to each unit.

5.18 Machinery
Unless-stated otherwise, bearings shall be selected and rated with an L10 (h)
operating life not less than 100,000 hours at design duty conditions. Bearing
assemblies shall be sealed-for-life to IP 55 W minimum. Oil-bath lubricated
bearings shall be fitted with a pressure venting device, oil NI and drain tapings,
and an oil-level sight glass.
Where practicable, machine assemblies shall be mounted on a common bedplate
or base frame complete with drive motor, gearbox, etc., and be arranged for
direct drive by use of flexible couplings.
Belt drives shall be designed such that not more than 20% of the speed reduction
is achieved by pulley ratios. All Belt drives shall include a means of adjusting
the tension of the belt(s). All multiple belt drives shall be provided with matched
sets of belts.
5.19 Pumps
Pumps supplied shall be capable of satisfying the performance requirements

specified and shall be limited to the max. starts per hour as given by the
manufacturer.
Pumps shall be quiet in operation and free from vibration. Preference will be
given to pumps with lower speeds in Operation.
5.19.1 Centrifugal Pumps
Pumps shall be suitable for vertical dry chamber installation, and shall be fixed
on stools or plinths above the floor of the pump chamber the drive motors shall
be mounted within the motor room with shaft drives to the pump. Vertical dry
well installation with dose coupled motors shall be subject to the approval of the
Engineer.
The pumps shall be of the non-clogging single vane centrifugal type, and shall
run unattended for long periods. They shall be capable of passing solids at least
up to a sphere size of 100 mm, and they shall pass stringy matter, rags, paper,
and plastics without choking.
Net positive suction head (NPSH) required for the pumps when pumping singly,
or in any combination as specified, shall satisfy the NPSH available. The
calculations are to be submitted with the Quotation. Any deviation in the NPSH
of the pumps shall be corrected at the Contractors expense.
Copies of pump performance curves and anticipated system hydraulics are
included with the quotation drawings it is the responsibility of the contractor to

verify this information and to provide with his quotation the proposed pump
hydraulic performance details.
Unless stated otherwise in the Contract specific specification, centrifugal pumps
shall be tested at fixed speed in accordance with BS 5136 Part 1 and ISO 2548.
The acceptance criteria shall be as follows applied to the guaranteed duty point
value:
Differential head: ±5%
Flowrate at Duty Point ±5%
Power absorbed: ±5%
Efficiency: -5% point
NPSH (R): +0%
a. Casing: CI to IS:210 GR FG 260 with 1.5 to 2% Nickel.
b. Impeller: Stainless steel CF 8M STA STM A35/Gr.CF8M
c. Wearing rings: SS 316 STA STM A35/Gr.CF8M
d. Shaft: SS to AISI 431 STA STM A276 Type 410
e. Shaft sleeves: SS to AISI 410 STA STM A276 Type 410
f. Packing: Asbestos yarn coated with MoS2 (Molybdenum Di-Sulphide)
g. Packing: CI/MS fabricated.CI IS210 Gr F G260
h. Base plate: CI/MS fabricated IS 2062
i. Gland: Cast Iron CI IS 210 Gr F G260
j. Coupling: CI
5.19.2 Submersible Pumps
Pump construction shall be suitable for operation in a dry well or wet well
installation. They shall be designed to give non-overloading characteristics over
the complete operable range of the pump.
The units shall be supplied with an adequate length of suitably sheathed flexible
cable which shall pass through a watertight gland an entry to the motor body.
The motor windings shall incorporate thermal switches as a safeguard against
overheating, these shall be connected into the control circuit for hand reset only.
For Submersible pump Motor Following Parameters should be considered:
squirrel cage induction motor having at least Class IP 68 Protection. Class of
Insulation “F”, Motor Cooling - By liquid Submergence, Voltage 415 V (+/-

10%), 50Hz (+/-3%) , 3 Phase AC, Submersible Cable Type - Dual PVC
sheathed, Round type, Copper Conductor (Std), PSLD (Primary/Lower Seal
Leakage Detector), Bearing Temperature Detector to detect temperature of DE
& NDE Bearing (Bearing Temperature Detector – as per specific requirement &
rating of motor)
Wet well installations shall be provided complete with guide rails, automatic
location pump discharge branch, cable guides and holders and lifting chains to
allow the pump to be raised and lowered without entry to the sump. Lifting
davits and equipment shall be provided for this purpose.
Pumps
Pump casing : CI IS : 210 FG 260
Discharge cover : CI IS : 210 FG 260
Impeller : Stainless steel SS316/Duplex steel
Shaft : Stainless Steel SS316 /Duplex steel
Bearing Bracket : CI IS : 210 FG 260
Motor casing : CI IS : 210 FG 260
Bolts, nuts : Stainless Steel SS316
Casing wear ring : CI IS : 210 FG 260
O-ring : Nitrile rubber (NBR)
Shaft seal
Type of seal : Double mechanical seal
Arrangement : Tandem
Seal on medium side : With elastomer bellows
Mechanical seal, pump side : Silicon carbide/NBR
Mechanical seal, bearing side: Silicon carbide/NBR
Motor
Type : Squirrel cage induction motor
Motor efficiency : Premium efficiency motors according
to IE3 as defined in IEC60034-30
Degree of protection : IP 68
Insulation class : H, Thermal Sensors set for 140 deg C
Coolant temp : </= 40 C
Temp rise limit : NEMA Class A
Motor version : Explosion Proof

Starting mode : Direct

Rated voltage : 3ph, 415 V
Rated frequency : 50 Hz
Nominal speed : Less than 1000- rpm (Synchronised)
Motor casing : CI IS 210 IS FG 260
Main cable : Complete with cable length as per
requirement
5.19.3 Progressive Cavity Pumps
The pumps shall be of the horizontal rotary progressive cavity type having a
helical rotor operating in a resilient synthetic stator suitable for handling the
media to be pumped.
The pump, gearbox and motor shall be mounted on a common rigid baseplate
and the drive shall be transmitted through shaft couplings. The rotor speed shall
be limited to 300 rpm.
Pressure and compound gauges shall be fitted to the delivery and suction
branches of each pump.
The pump set shall be tested at fixed speed in accordance with BS 5316: Part 1
(ISO 9906).
Vibration testing shall be in accordance with BS 7854: Part 1, or European
equivalent standard.
For pumps absorbing less than 50 kW the vibration level shall not exceed 4.5
mm/sec RMS. For pumps absorbing more than 50 kW the vibration level shall
not exceed 7.1 mm/sec RMS. Testing shall be undertaken across the full range of
operating speeds.
As part of the pump set commissioning procedure, vibration levels shall be
measured with the pump set running at the guaranteed duty flow rate ±10%.
Vibration levels shall not exceed the prescribed levels for the pump.
Pumps shall be arranged generally with a single shaft seal at the suction end.
Mechanical seals shall be used. The rotor shall generally be single-stage and
shall incorporate not less than 3600 of twist, but for high-head applications, it
may be necessary to use more than a single-stage. The size and speed range of
the pump shall ensure that the highest expected duty point shall lie within the
available speed range. Motor anti-condensation heaters shall be provided and
shall be suitable for use on a 220V single-phase,50Hz supply. All bearing shall
have a B10 design life of not less than 40,000 running hours and shall be
designed for loading 20% in excess of calculated maximum loading. Pumps
shall be fitted with individual dry-running protection to initiate pump trip. Dry-
running protection by „undercurrent‟ monitoring or „pipeline-intrusive‟ device
shall not be used.
Material of construction


Pump Housing : CI IS 210 GR. FG220 or FG260
Rotor: SS AISI 316(Hard chrome Plated)
Shaft : SS AISI 410(Hard chrome Plated)
Stator : Nitrite black
Type of drive : V belt & Pulleys
Base plate : MS fabricated
Seal type : Gland packing (Asbestos Free)
5.19.4 Rotary Lobe Pumps
Rotary Lobe Pumps as self-priming, valve-less, positive displacement pumps.

The even rotation of the rotor pair creates a vacuum on the priming side of the
pump, which can be defined by the direction of rotation of the drive. This
vacuum draws the liquid into the pump chamber. With further rotation, the
pumped medium is conveyed past the pump wall into the pressure area. Up to six
chamber charges are displaced with each drive rotation– depending on the rotor
type.
The door to the interior of the pump shall ensure a quick access to all wetted
parts.
Coatings for the rotor shall be made of various elastomers, plastics, solid metal
or stainless steel depending on requirements. The rotors are specially selected for
each individual application.
5.20 Climb and Safety Devices
Cat ladder
 safety ladder
 all devices made of stainless steel Nr. 1.4404
 distance beam / beam: ca. 400 mm
 distance stave / stave: ca. 280 mm
 distance wall / step: ca. 15 cm
Beam
 Made of pipe according to DIN EN 10297, dimensions 48,3 x 3,6 mm,
according to the handrail of the continuative railing.
 Free pipe ends watertight welded.
Stave
 breadth minimum 25 mm
 surface with slide protection by perforation and profiling

 anti-slip property R 13
 holder made of stainless steel with mounting plates
 distance of holders: max. 1.0 m
Exit-construction
 At the top of the ladder the distance railing standard is to widen to 600
mm.
 Leading the beams on to the handrail of the railing.

6. Electrical Specifications
6.1 General
The specification of electrical equipment defines supplies and services.

The total electrical engineering is to be based on the relevant data of the offered
mechanical equipment and has to respect temperatures, altitudes and sudden
variations of load and voltage and all environmental conditions that may be
encountered at site. Especially the influence of gaseous concentration on the
electromechanical equipment like corrosion and deterioration has to be
considered. The requirements for continuous operation during prolonged periods
with a minimum of maintenance have to be considered. The design has to
incorporate every reasonable precaution and provision for safe operation and
maintenance of the plant.
Equipment and materials are to be new, of sound condition, robust design, of
good quality and suitable for the climatic conditions at the site.
For the purpose of a simplified stocking of spare parts, uniform devices of one
manufacturer are always to be used for similar tasks. The number of
manufactures coming up for use is to be reduced to a minimum.
The equipment parts have to leave the supplier’s works carefully cleaned up and
preserved especially inside. All openings have to be closed up in such a way that
no contaminations of the inside are possible during transportation and assembly
until the point of connection.
The assembly of the electrical equipment has to depend on the construction
progress. Interruptions during the assembly have to be considered. The structural
measure can be divided into stages which will be realized at different times.
These requirements have to be considered without additional costs.
The contractor calculates the equipment, determines the necessary space required
and coordinates the structural conditions with the other buildings that will be
erected. In view to the local climatic and environmental conditions, appropriate
measures have to be met for cooling and protection against dust and water of the
equipment. Especially outdoor equipment like outdoor local control panels has to
meet the local conditions and international standard norms.
First of all, the contractor will design and calculate the entire supply services
according to the fixed requirements. On the basis of this design, the final
coordination is to be done with the engineer, the principal and the local energy
supplier. Highest priority is to be given to the safe working and supply
conditions when designing and dimensioning the equipment.

6.2 Standard Specifications
If not otherwise specified below, the design shall be carried out with regard to
the following standards and guidelines with the indicated ranking and priority:
 Indian standards, codes and guidelines published by Bureau of Indian
standards and other regulatory bodies whenever existing.
 Manual on Sewerage and Sewage Treatment (third edition - revised and
updated) by Government of India Ministry of Urban development, New
Delhi, 2013.
 IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission)
 ISO (International Organization for Standardization)
 B.S. British Standard
In case, no relevant proposals will be made on behalf of the contractor, the

standards mentioned in the specification are valid. In addition, the following
standards have to be considered especially:
 IEC 60027 Letter symbols to be used in electrical technology
 IEC 60034 Rotating electrical machines
 IEC 60076 Power transformers
 IEC 60079 Explosive atmospheres
 IEC 60204 Safety of machinery - Electrical equipment of machines
 IEC 60287 Electric cables - Calculation of the current rating
 IEC 60364 Low-voltage electrical installations
 IEC 60381 Analogue signals for process control systems
 IEC 60439 Low voltage switchgear and control gear assemblies
 IEC 60730 Automatic electrical controls
The contractor will certify that all electrical equipment, operating materials and
the electrical installation meet the relevant standards and local provisions.
6.3 Documentation
In the course of the detailed planning, the contractor satisfies himself about the
designed process structure and accepts the development of all shop drawings on
his own responsibility.
The contractor has to prepare and submit the following documents for
verification:
a Directory of all drawings and further documents
b Layouts (schematic layout, block diagrams, single-line representations)
c Functional descriptions and specifications of work and services
d List of components

e Mechanical design and projection of components

f Control system function diagram and description
g List of measuring points including
h Schematics and circuit diagrams
i Terminal connection diagram
j External connection diagrams
k Test records
l Installation drawings
m Explications and verifications relative to the professional implementation
of the works
n Setup of all configurable Equipment
o Programs of SCADA, Control e.g.
p Handbooks and data files of installed equipment
q Load List (Connected Load)
The complete documentation is to be set up in two languages: English and Hindi.
A table of contents with a tabulation of all single drawings, sheet number,
drawing numbers and so forth has to be set up. All drawings have to be provided
with a common numbering system, under inclusion of all individual devices,
building parts, etc.
Furthermore, all drawings are to be delivered on data carriers. Here, current
formats have to be used (DXF-format, Excel, Word, etc.).
If necessary, all records are to be folded in DIN-A4 format and handed over in
appropriate files. Depending on their size, the originals have to be made
available in wrappers, drawing rolls and so forth.
The complete list of components, which will be delivered under this contract,
belongs to the documentation. The listing is done on DINA4 lists with item
designation, the electrical drawings, manufacturers, type designation,
manufacturer or product number as well as an indication about wear and
durability. A complete maintenance list is to be set up.
Functional and automation descriptions and charts are to be submitted in
duplicate for the start-up. The complete operation under manual and automatic
control, the functional connections and the instructions for fault location have to
be presented in this document.
In case of outside cabling, site drawings of cable lines and the reserve conduit
system are to be set up.

6.4 Equipment and Installation
All equipment delivered by the contractor or other suppliers has to be connected,

adjusted, calibrated and put into operation.
Every measuring circuit, actuator and control loop is to be checked. The check
list is to be provided with the name and signature of the test engineer as well as
the date.
Deliveries of electro technical configuration as parts of the mechanical
equipment are to be integrated in the overall concept, where appropriate with the
necessary extensions.
Installations must supervised by a qualified technician. Final adjustments and
putting into satisfactory operation have to be made by a specialist delegated by
the factory.
Only tools that are recommended by equipment manufacturers may be used for
installations, particularly in making connections and adjustments.
Upon the end of assembly, all terminals and screwed connections have to be
tightened once again and the corrosion protection and the coating have to be
subsequently improved, if necessary.
6.4.1 Distribution Units and Electrical Cabinets
All switchgears have to be executed by a uniform cubicle system as far as

possible. The environmental conditions as regards temperature, dust
development and if necessary aggressive atmospheres have to be taken into
account.
The power loss of the installed equipment and the inner temperature of the
cabinet must be calculated with operating conditions. A climate control must be
installed if necessary.
Warning and indicating boards have to be attached in all areas. Especially in
switchgear rooms signposting of the escapes are to be effected.
In all switchgears at least 30% spare space has to be provided.
The possibility of proper storage of the respective drawings has to be ensured for
each functional unit in the doors, frames or side walls of the switchgears. The
pockets for the drawings are to be delivered in a form resistant design.
Against accidental arcs the switchgear cubicles have to be partitioned. Only the
concerned section may be affected in case of disturbance.
Each section gets an engraved signboard which clearly displays the functional
group, installation place, circuit diagram, terminal strip, etc. These signboards
are to be mounted durable on the outside.

All electrical equipment, devices and terminals are to be marked durable by

engraved formica labels in accordance with the schematic diagrams. Double
letterings are to be provided, one on the device and equal on the mounting plate.
Fused outgoing circuits are to be marked in plain language as to their function. It
is not allowed to stuck the labels, they are to be attached by screws or rivets.
Measuring circuits are to be installed shielded. The wiring of the control-, signal-
and measuring circuits as well as electronics in-/outputs is done in colour.
All bus bars have to be provided with appropriate markings over the total length
according to their meaning. Normally L1/L2/L3 are mounted in the upper area of
the mounting plate and N/PE in the lower area.
All in- and outgoing cables and lines have to be marked with cable-identification
labels inside the switchgear cubicles, main distribution switchgears, etc. The
respective cable number has to be mounted permanently in a respective
designation carrier. It is not allowed to paste the cable numbers on the cables.
All terminal-, plug-in- and solder tag strips are to be assembled with a 30 %
reserve.
The contractor has to ensure a durable protection against corrosion for the entire
scope of delivery.
The colour has to be agreed upon with the Engineer. Transportation and
assembly damages are to be repaired professionally on the site.
Elapsed time meters and current measuring must be provided for drives.
Design and manufacturing need to be done according to aforementioned
standards. All cabinets must have been checked before being delivered to the
site.
6.4.2 Wiring System
Basically, methods of installation adapted to the local requirements are to be

used (for example conduits, cable ducts, etc.). When installing cables and lines
inside of buildings it is probably necessary to mount auxiliary constructions for
fixing. These are to be considered in the tender.
Cables have to run in one length without splice boxes or muffles. Exceptions
require the approval of the engineer. All cables have to run properly adjusted.
The filling factor of cable racks may not exceed 70 %.
All designation systems for cables and lines have to be executed in English and
Hindi. The marking of the cables with identifying bands are to be effected
durable with a distance of 20 m. All cable selling ends on devices, equipment
and machines are to be marked with respective cable numbers.
The voltage drop between the feed-in and the electrical consumer shall not
exceed 3 % of the nominal values.

N-conductors will be marked blue, PE-conductors green-yellow. This colouring

is exclusively reserved for these potentials. A marking in form of coloured tube
covers is not allowed, with the exception of single-core lines/cables and number
cables.
The proof for the compliance of the release conditions for over-current- and fault
current-protective devices are to be provided in tabular form for each line/cable
and with indication of the line/cable length.
For all connections it has to be obligatory that a perfect strain relief of the cables
is guaranteed.
All reserve strands of cables have to be put on respective terminals and are to be
indicated in the documentation. The terminals for the reserve strands are to be
marked according to the documentation.
Cabling, cable racks, cable ducts, tubes, conduits and all fixing materials belong
to the scope of delivery.
For measuring- and control cabling, shielded cables or lines have to be used. The
shielding has to be put on at least on both ends and grounded at one end.
6.4.3 Indoor Installation and Cabling
The electrical installation inside the buildings shall be carried out surface
mounted.
Cable racks and gutters consisting of metal have to be connected electrically
conductive and included into the equipotential bonding. Edge protection must be
fit on sharp edges. The used materials for the cable routes are to be adapted to
the local demands. If necessary (e.g. for common embedding of energy- and
measuring cables), separation strips are to be used.
Fixings among each other and on brackets, walls, ceilings and so forth have to be
executed with typical accessories. For accident prevention, stirrups are to be
equipped with plastic protection caps on the bottom cutting edge.
In the domain of building installations, all socket-outlets are to be provided with
their fusing number of the corresponding sub-distribution switchgear. The same
signboards as for the cable markings can be used.
6.4.4 Outdoor Installation and Cabling
The underground laying of cables is to be done with conduits.

Cable entries into buildings and sub-structures, e.g. into the raised floor of the
low voltage switchgear room have to be executed with waterproof cable glands.

6.4.5 Environmental Conditions Equipment
All devices, machines and equipment connected by the contractor, have to be

sealed at least in the degree of protection IP 54 against penetration of humidity
and dust. Measures for higher degrees of protection, e.g. IP 67 or explosion proof
type, are taken there where they are necessary, e.g. in flooding and hazardous
areas. The necessary degree of protection has to be considered for all devices.
6.4.6 Lightning Protection and Equipotential Bonding
For personal safety and protection of the equipment an appropriate earthing

system is to be designed and built up by the contractor.
Foundation earths, ground strips and, if necessary, earth rods have to be
provided.
The effectiveness of foundation earth requires a certain degree of humidity in the
ambient. Therefore, it is not allowed to apply humidity insulation under
foundation earth.
Earth termination network and protective earthing have to be considered as
different systems.
Buildings have to be equipped with a lightning protection system. On the roofs
air terminations are to be installed. Down leads are to be drawn up behind
building linings as far as possible.
All metallic structural elements of outdoor buildings are to be included in the
lightning protection. The earthing systems are to be connected to equipotential
bonding strips and marked in correspondence to their application.
In any case, all metallic casings of electrical equipment which can take up
voltages in case of faults are to be connected with the protective conductor.
As secondary protection of the electrical equipment against atmospheric and
switching surges, overvoltage protectors are to be used.
The control and instrumentation systems are to be equipped with overvoltage
protectors in their signal input. These are also to be equipped with quick acting
transient protection devices. It is to be observed that protected and unprotected
lines are not running parallel.
The functionality of these protective devices is depending on the careful
planning and execution of the equipotential bonding. All measures of this
domain are separately to be documented including the necessary measurements
of the earthing system.
As further criterion for trouble free operation of the plant and as protection
against corrosion damages, the earthing system is to be kept at zero current, as
far as possible. No equalizing currents due to unacceptable PEN links may flow
over the earthing system. This is to be proved by measures.

6.4.7 Lighting
The lighting has to be designed in order to guarantee save crossing and

appropriate working conditions whole-time. The visual demands as well as the
psychophysical aspects of view have to be considered.
It´s recommendable to use time limited twilight switches.
Type, number and arrangement of luminaries are to be adapted to the
requirements of the individual rooms and areas.
6.4.8 Spare Parts
For the time of guarantee spare parts have to be delivered by the contractor free
of charge. This also includes the service and works to restore normal operation.
The proposed equipment manufacturers have to be locally established and
authorised organisations which can be called upon for professional advice and
maintenance when necessary. A day to day supply of spare parts and an
emergency maintenance must be guaranteed.
6.5 Instrumentation, Measurement and Control
The instrumentation and control includes all services for an automatic operating
mode. All services for control, measured-data acquisition and observation are to
be included in the contractors scope of supplies. After finishing, all plant has to
run automatically on the PLC.
Fault and alarm indications are to be linked to the main SCADA in the Control
Room. They must be displayed in detailed text to suggest the source and kind of
malfunction. This aspect has to be respected early in the design of hard- and
software. The valence of the indications is to be determined in the customer
requirement specification. These specifications are to be done by the contractor
in agreement with the designer of the plant.
Essential interventions are to be displayed to the staff by HMI. The logs of the
main measured data will be displayed on the SCADA System. After the
appropriate training, the operating staff has to be able to observe and control the
procedures independently.
6.5.1 Operating Levels
The concept for the process engineering provides the automatic operation of the
plant. The requirements on the instrumentation and control engineering have to
be coordinated with this concept. Operational reliability and availability of the
equipment are the principal design criteria. It has to be guaranteed that the

equipment serves its purpose unattended and faultless for longer periods under
the local operational conditions.
The operation and control of the equipment shall be effected by local control
units, manual control elements on the door of the switchgear cabinet or
automatic control. The reporting and archiving must be made by a SCADA
System and additional by printing recorder with a data logger on board. The
following structure has to be set up for each equipment, even if the equipment
will be controlled by a subdistribution switchgear of the manufacturer:
Local manual operating level
The highest priority has to be given to this operating level. When switching over
to the manual operation local, this level is hardware-like directly linked with the
drive so that the control has no longer any influence.
Central manual operating level
The second priority has to be given to this operating level. When switching over
to the manual operation on the switchgear cabinet, this level is also hardware-
like directly linked with the control units in the switchgear cabinet, so that the
automatic operating level has no longer any influence.
Automation operating level
The automatic control of the equipment or aggregates is realized via the
PLC/SPC units in dependence of the measurements and the relevant operation
limits.
6.5.2 Local Controlling Systems
The mechanical equipment has to be configured with local controls near to the
drives. It must be possible to take the respective drive out of the automatic mode
and to switch it „ON“, “REMOTE” or „OFF“ in manual mode. The prevailing
mode is to be indicated.
All local controls get an emergency stop button which turns off the concerned
actuators.
6.5.3 Visualization
The mimics listed below shall be designed, configured and commissioned by the
Contractor under this Contract. All visualization shall be submitted to the
Engineer for approval prior to configuration. All mimics shall be suitable for
display all sizes of monitors supplied within the contract and careful design of
the mimic shall be used to this end. Where mimics replicate those configured for
the local PLC display, the mimics shall be identical to those displayed on the
PLC display. The following requirements are required for all mimics:

1. The background colour for all mimics shall be subject to the approval of
the Engineer.
2. Each mimic shall have navigation 'pushbutton' to the process overview, the
geographical overview and associated process mimics.
3. Standard symbols shall be used to describe the plant items
4. Mimics shall display process lines as colour dynamic with arrow indication
of flow direction.
5. Alarms indication shall be animated within the relevant mimic.
6. Trend pages (including historic and current information) and the alarm
summary page shall be available from every mimic.
7. The Contractor shall configure each on-site workstation thereby a screen
dump can be printed by a single keyboard/on-screen action.
8. Control pages for all plant that can be controlled, overridden or plant data
entered manually shall be available from every mimic.
6.5.4 Data Storage
The SCADA system shall provide on-line historical data for all inputs/outputs on
the system, whether real or derived signals, at:
 Digital signals: On change of state.
 Analogue: Every 15 minutes and significant change.
 Integrated e.g. flow, mean, max/min, 15 minute, daily, weekly, monthly,
yearly.
The Contractor shall provide the ability to export data from the SCADA system
to other computer systems via the Microsoft Excel product.
Backup processor and redundancy for CPU module & communication module
shall be provided. All Software for PLC & SCADA system shall be provided
with valid licence in latest version.
6.6 Test and Start-up
6.6.1 Factory Tests
Factory assembled equipment is to be tested at the factory, before shipping.

Complete performance tests are to be carried out under site simulated conditions,
in accordance with the Standards and as described in the Specification.

6.6.2 Operating Tests
Works tests will be performed in accordance to relevant standards and include all
other tests the Engineer may require for the verification that the works comply
with the specification.
Prior to start-up, the contractor will check the entire equipment in view to its
functionality. Not only an individual device and information verification has to
be performed, but the entire interdependent functionality from the process
control to the respective signalling devices, processing blocks and the automatic
control level has to be proved. As far as process data are not available, they have
to be simulated.
During this phase, all operating conditions have to be performed. The step-by-
step startup can only be carried out upon the successful functional tests.
On request of the Employer, the Contractor is obliged to demonstrate the
functionality of the plant under “dry conditions” as far as possible.
Furthermore, the functional testing of electrical equipment includes the
verification of the correct operation of all switching, measuring, the checks on
keeping the desired temperature of all engines and drives, insulation tests for all
power circuits (voltage tests) etc.
Performing the tests, the Contractor shall use only tested measuring instruments.
A copy of the test certificate for test instruments shall be submitted at request of
the engineer.
6.6.3 Start-up
Prior to start-up, all necessary certificates and test protocols have to be submitted
to the Engineer.
The starting up of the electrical system is effected together with the
commissioning of the mechanical equipment and the process technology. The
Contractor shall carry out the start-up including final functional tests of all
connected components. These will be carried out at the discretion of the
Engineer. Changes and adjustments will be made where necessary for proper
operation of the equipment.
At this time, the Contractor undertakes the entire responsibility for the start-up of
the manual and automatic functions for the electrical engineering.
Functional tests and the start-up are to be performed in the presence of the
Employer and his future operating staff. It is the Contractors obligation to render
a detailed introduction into the operation and maintenance of the electrical plant
to the Employer’s staff.
The coordination of the plant commissioning with regards to the contractual
deadlines is the Contractor responsibility.

7. Specifications Civil Works
7.1 Introduction
This part of the specification sets out the general standards of design and
materials to be supplied and work to be carried out by the Contractor. Mention of
any specific material or plant does not necessarily imply that such is included in
the works.
All civil works shall, unless otherwise specified, comply with the provisions of
this Section. The names of the manufacturers of materials proposed for
incorporation in the works, shall be furnished by the Contractor when so
requested by the Owner who shall have power to reject any parts which in his
opinion are unsatisfactory or not in compliance with the specification.
List of buildings:
 Terminal Pump Station
 Screens Building incl. Blower Room
 Blower Building
 Belt Filter Press Building
 Administration Building incl. Workshop, Laboratory, Staff Facilities,
Emergency Generator
Reference is made for further specifications to Volume 3 Section Process
Specifications.
7.2 Setting out of the Works and Benchmarks
The Contractor shall employ well-qualified and experienced surveyors approved

by the Owner for the execution of the survey work and setting out as described in
the Contract.
The Contractor will be notified of the location and value of the bench mark level,
upon which the works are based and he must use this bench mark level as the
basis of all setting out, where this is applicable, or to any other datum defined by
the Owner and notified to the Contractor.
The Contractor shall establish temporary benchmarks and survey stations at
suitable locations on the Site and during the progress of the works shall
periodically check the levels of the benchmarks and the co-ordinates of the
stations against the original points lines and levels of reference.
The Contractor shall submit to the Owner for approval drawings showing the
locations and levels or co-ordinates as appropriate of each and every temporary
benchmark and survey station used for the setting out of the works.
The Contractor shall before commencing execution of any given section of the
works submit to the Owner complete setting out details with supporting

calculations and drawings (including drawings showing the locations and co-
ordinates of the reference points used) in duplicate for approval.
The Contractor shall identify setting out dimensions for all structures by relating
them to existing facilities and by interpretation of the Documentation. The
gradients of sewers and pipelines and the levels of weirs, inverts of channels and
other hydraulic structures shall be as shown on the drawings unless otherwise
required or approved by the Owner.
The locations of structures to be constructed as part of the works shall be
identified by reference to steel pins set in concrete or other approved markers set
up by the Contractor, who shall also determine the co-ordinates of the markers
and their distances from adjacent existing structures.
The Contractor shall establish reference co-ordinate points at intervals of not
more than 500 m along all sewers and major pipelines and these points shall be
located and clearly marked at approved locations either on existing buildings or
by means of steel pins fixed in concrete.
The survey instruments to be used by the Contractor shall be suitable for the
work to be executed and shall be maintained in a first class condition. The
instruments and/or equipment shall be subject to the approval of the Owner.
For all survey, instruments used in the works the Contractor shall submit recent
calibration certificates issued by competent authorities. Further calibration of the
instruments shall be carried out every six months.
All field-books, calculations, maps etc. of the survey activities mentioned above
shall be available to the Owner immediately after the completion of the survey
work.
The Contractor shall provide the necessary skilled and unskilled labour and
materials to the Owner to enable him to check and approve the levels and setting
out of the alignments and positions of structures.
7.2.1 Record and Record Drawings
The Contractor shall maintain accurate records, plans and charts showing the
dates and progress of all the main operations and the Owner shall have access to
this information at all reasonable times. The Contractor shall mark on a separate
copy of the drawings, the positions, levels and other details of all existing water
mains, sewers, drains, cables and other services which are exposed during
construction of the work. The Contractor shall submit the schedule of civil works
to the Engineer. All civil works shall be done after approving the schedule by the
Engineer.

7.3 Control of the Works
7.3.1 Protection of Existing Structures and Utilities
The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for the protection of all buildings,
structures and utilities, public or private including poles, signs, services to
buildings, utilities in the street, water pipes, hydrants, drains and electric and
telephone ducts and conduits, whether or not they are shown on the drawings.
The Contractor shall carefully support and protect all such structures and utilities
from injury of any kind. Any damage resulting from the Contractor's operations
shall be repaired at his expense.
The Contractor shall bear full responsibility for obtaining all locations of
underground structures and utilities. Services to buildings shall be maintained,
and any costs or charges resulting from damage thereto shall be paid by the
Contractor.
7.3.2 Safety and Security on Site
The Contractor shall be responsible for observing local safety regulations and for
taking all necessary measures to safeguard all personnel working on the site from
any risks which may be attendant on carrying out the works. In particular he
shall ensure that only persons who are properly trained for their duties are
employed and that the correct tools and procedures are used.
The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring the security of the site to protect
his materials and equipment and to prevent unauthorised access to the
construction site with its attendant safety risks.
7.3.3 Clean-up Work
The Contractor shall bear full responsibility for the protection of all finished
exterior and interior surfaces, fixtures and equipment from stains, marks, dirt or
damage of any kind, from the time of their construction, finishing, or installation
until the time of handing over the fully completed project to the Owner.
Before requesting an inspection of the completed works with the intent of final
acceptance, the Contractor shall do all necessary cleaning, making good, and
touching up that may be required to leave all finished surfaces, fixtures and
equipment in acceptable condition.

7.3.4 Handling and Storage of Materials
All materials and equipment to be incorporated in the works shall be handled and
stored by the manufacturer, supplier, fabricator, and the Contractor before,
during, and after shipment in a manner to prevent warping, twisting, bending,
breaking, chipping, rusting, and any injury, theft or damage of any kind
whatsoever to the material or equipment.
Any materials which, in the opinion of the Owner, have become so damaged as
to be unfit for the use intended or specified shall be promptly removed from the
site of the Work, and the Contractor shall receive no compensation for the
damaged material or its removal.
Manufactured materials shall be delivered and stored in their original containers,
plainly marked, with identification of material and manufacturer.
7.3.5 Progress Photographs
Digital Photographs showing the progress of the works shall be taken every
week. Special photographs showing particular features of the plant of interest in
connection with the works shall also be taken when required by the Owner.
All Photographs shall be numbered, filed, and handed over to the Owner
monthly on CD and as a paper book with comments. The copy-right of the
photographs shall remain with the Owner.
7.3.6 Method Statements
The Contractor shall submit, for the Owner’s approval, his proposed method
statement at least 14 days before his intended commencement date for the
activity of work.
7.4 Temporary Facilities
7.4.1 General
The Contractor shall supply a detail design specifying all temporary facilities
that he intends to organize on the site – stores, workshops, temporary and access
roads, water, power and sewerage supply services etc.- to the Owner for
approval.

7.4.2 Sanitary Arrangements
The Contractor shall provide and maintain temporary sanitary facilities on the
site for the use of all persons connected with the works. The Contractor shall
keep the site in a clean and sanitary condition, and shall post notices and take
such precautions as may be necessary to keep the site clean. The Contractor shall
carry out any cleaning whatsoever as may be directed by the Owner to maintain
such sanitary conditions.
7.4.3 Removal of Temporary Facilities
The Contractor shall remove temporary facilities at the end of project.
7.5 General Arrangements
The Contractor shall carry out the Final Design of the works. The Contractor
shall observe the basic design rules specified below in this section.
7.5.1 Methods of Construction
All structural element containing or conveying sewage, sludge, effluent or water

shall be constructed in reinforced or pre-stressed concrete, including tanks,
channels, culverts and chambers. Storage tanks for process chemicals should be
made of concrete, lined with a protective membrane as necessary, or
prefabricated from corrosion-resistant materials (e.g. laminated epoxy resin
coating or glass-reinforced plastic). Buildings intended to house process
machinery as well as those intended for administrative purposes, should be made
of reinforced concrete foundations, framing, floors and roofs, with infield
masonry panels or prefabricated cladding.
7.5.2 Architectural Requirements
The architecture of the various buildings in the project shall present a pleasing
external appearance but still maintain clean and simple lines, combined with
good weathering and low maintenance properties. Materials shall be selected for
long life more than 50 years, taking the exposed nature of the Site into account.
Maximum use shall be made of local materials, preferably of natural stone
facings.
The Contractor shall submit details of any architectural treatment, building

materials, colour schemes and room programmes for the treatment works to the
Owner for approval.

Details of the external appearance of all buildings and structures exposed above
completed ground level shall be submitted to the Owner for approval before
commencing the Final Design.
Effective methods of rainwater disposal shall be provided so that no roof or
overhang water is left to run down the face of the building. Effective drips shall
be incorporated in all overhanging elements. Buildings requiring equipment
removal by mechanical means shall be provided with equipment access doors
sufficient to permit access by truck for equipment removal. In case of truck
access the height of doors shall not be less than 5.0 m and the width of doors
shall not be less than 3.5 m. Separate personnel access doors shall be provided in
addition to the equipment doors. Minimum ceiling height in offices etc. shall be
3 m. Window frames shall be made of anodised aluminium. External doors and
frames shall be made of anodised aluminium, or other material, approved in the
Final Design.
7.5.3 Thermal Performance
Heated and air conditioned buildings shall be designed to utilise minimum

energy consumption. Windows shall be designed in such a way that in the
summer months there will be no or little direct sunlight into the rooms. Wall and
roof construction shall be designed to prevent condensation within the building
elements (interstitial condensation).
7.5.4 Access and Working Space
The design of stairways, ladders, landings, ramps, handrails etc. and the
provision of adequate working space shall be in accordance with the
recommendations of the Indian regulations approved reference. Spiral and
curved stairways will not normally be permitted.
7.6 Structural Works
7.6.1 Structural Design and Analysis
The structures shall be designed to sustain the imposed maximum considered

various loads. These include dead load, live load, earth and water pressures,
seismic impact etc. Moreover, the structural design shall be carried out to ensure
the stability and durability of the structures. The said design shall be based on
international and local standards of engineering practice.
In his Quality Assurance Program, the Contractor shall define the procedures for
preparation and approval of the structural designs. During the Final Design,
detailed design calculation for each individual structure, together with general

arrangement drawings and reinforcement drawings, are subject to the checking

and approval procedures as laid down in the Quality Assurance Program.
A statement explaining the principles of the design shall preface the detailed
calculations and the type of analysis adopted any design references on which the
design is based. The method by which seismic forces have been allowed for in
the design shall be given. For a concrete structure, the class into which the
structure has been placed for design purposes shall be stated.
For a superstructure framework, a separate statement shall be included
explaining how overall stability has been achieved and whether reliance has been
made on infilled walls, whether of brick, concrete or other material to provide
stability. All loads and structural wall sizes, including positions and sizes of any
significant chases and openings shall be clearly indicated in the design
calculations. Dead load on structures should be calculated according to the
applicable standards.
7.6.2 Checking of Dimensions
After receiving execution drawings, the Contractor must check dimensions and
inform the employer about probable disagreements. Any difference and
disagreement in dimensions of drawings is on Contractors' responsibility.
7.6.3 Loading Conditions
All structures and parts thereof shall be designed to sustain the maximum dead
and live loads to which they are subjected including temporary and erection
loads occurring during construction, and all the other loads resulting from
earthquakes, winds, earth, hydrostatic pressures and others.
They also shall be designed to withstand the loads from within the plant and its
components, including dynamic effects where they occur. Such loads shall be
clearly indicated in the design calculations.
7.6.4 Seismic Loading
Seismic loading on structure at this particular location should be calculated

according to the applicable National Standard.
7.6.5 Live Load
Floor slabs in operating areas shall be designed for all permanent plant loads and
other loads which could take place during maintenance or repair work.

Loads to be considered in design shall be as per relevant Indian standard and

local building codes.
7.6.6 Water Pressure
Structures shall be designed with an adequate factor of safety against uplift due
to hydrostatic pressure. The design shall not rely on dewatering or pressure relief
valves to relieve hydrostatic pressure. Forces on pump wells, tanks, channels,
culverts and pipes shall be calculated according to the assumption that they are
empty; the factor of safety against flotation shall not be less than 1.1 for this
condition.
No reliance shall be placed upon side drains or underdrains to lower the natural
level of ground water locally in the vicinity of structures. Where structures are
constructed above the natural ground water level and this is relied upon in the
design, positive means of drainage shall be provided to prevent accidental uplift
arising from leakage of contents or percolation of surface water into the backfill.
In the case of structures, which are partially submerged, drainage shall be
similarly provided above the designed maximum water level.
Where additional amounts of concrete beyond the normal structural design needs
are introduced, for example for the purpose of gaining dead weight to counter the
effects of buoyancy, any such addition to the concrete shall, as far as possible, be
uniformly distributed among the substructure members.
The Contractor shall determine the maximum external water level that has been
considered in the design. Structures that may be water tested before backfilling
shall also be designed for no external pressure from water or backfill together
with maximum internal water pressure.
7.6.7 Wind Load
The Contractor shall design the structural elements for the identified wind load
in the area of Site. Wind pressures shall be calculated in accordance with the
respective Indian Standard.
7.6.8 Stresses Due to Temperature
Stress or strain resulting from temperature variations has to be taken care of by

means of additional reinforcement or joints. The Contractor shall design the
structural elements for the identified range of temperature variations on the
construction in the area of Site. Stresses due to Temperature shall be calculated
in accordance with the respective Indian Standard.

7.6.9 Stability of Structure
Stability of all structures shall be evaluated to resist overturning and sliding. No

risk of cracking in the structural elements shall be allowed too. Size of cracks
shall be calculated and limited by different measures as minimal defined in the
Indian Standards.
7.7 Concrete Structures
7.7.1 General Standards
Structural concrete shall be designed in accordance with the applicable standards

for
Concrete and reinforced concrete
Pre-stressed concrete building components of normal concrete with restricted or
full pre-stressing.
The 28-day compressive and tensile strength specified for different classes of
concrete shall be determined in consideration of the size of the structure, its
durability and water tightness, construction conditions (plant and materials
available), economic advantages, and other factors.
7.7.2 Member Thickness
The minimum thickness of members shall generally be determined in

consideration of the workability and water tightness requirements.
7.7.3 Classification of Concrete Structure
This classification shall apply equally to parts of structures, where more than one
application of classes of concrete exists within a particular structure. Structures
are to be divided into classes with regard to environmental influence.
Civil–works: Concrete - The civil design shall be based on the following:
1. Water retaining structures M30

2. All other structure M25
3. Valve chambers M20

Reinforcement steel to be used will be Fe 415 TMT.
All structural designs shall be based on the B.I.S Standards and Codes (draft
codes / latest revisions), with amendments, if any as on date. Apart from these
codes, specific design guide lines laid in the bid document shall be followed.
Reinforcing bars shall not be welded without prior written approval from the
Owner. Reinforcing steel shall not be bent or straightened in a manner that will
injure the material. Any use of such injured reinforcing steel will not be
permitted.
7.7.4 Concrete Cover to Reinforcement
Concrete cover of outermost reinforcement bars and pre-stressing ducts shall not
be less than the following:
Internal surfaces of slabs and walls in building superstructures where less than
300 mm thick in mild conditions of exposure 40 mm.
All other locations 50 mm bond, lap lengths and minimum radii of bends shall be
in accordance with relevant European standards.
Concrete cover of reinforcement shall ensure the common performance of
concrete and reinforcement during all stages of construction period and in period
of operation as well as the protection of reinforcement against atmospheric
conditions and some other impact.
The depth of the concrete cover of reinforcement shall be determined in
consideration of the importance of the structure, site conditions, and other
factors. It shall comply with the requirements of norms for design of concrete
and reinforced concrete structures, norms for design of concrete and reinforced
concrete structures of hydro-technical facilities, protection of structures against
corrosion.
The bottom mat of reinforcement on all in-situ concrete that is in contact with
the ground shall set out on a base of blinding concrete. The blinding layer shall
be detailed to provide a firm and even foundation for setting out the reinforcing
steel, shuttering and formwork.
7.7.5 Intervals of Reinforcing Bars
Reinforcing bars shall be arranged at intervals varying according to the type and
size of members due to the static calculation, maximum size of aggregate,
dimensions of inserted steelworks, and other factors but not less than 2.5 times
the diameter.

The Contractor have to consider also enough space for the internal spud vibrator
while concreting without touching the reinforcing bars with the vibrator as far as
practically possible.
7.7.6 Overlapping and Anchorage of Reinforcement
Overlapping and anchorages of reinforcement shall comply with European

Standards and the Standards mentioned above.
7.7.7 Waterstops and Sealants
Expansion and contraction joints in water tight structures shall incorporate both
waterstops and surface sealers. A sealer shall always be provided on those faces
in contact with water.
In expansion joints and complete contraction joints internal waterstops shall be
of the hollow centre bulb type. Surface waterstops shall be of the expansion type
and will be permitted only beneath base slabs.
Joints in slabs and walls in contact with soil shall be provided with waterstops,
notwithstanding any protective membrane provided.
7.7.8 Joints in Concrete Structures
The Contractor shall be responsible for the design and location of the joints
which shall be appropriate.
The positions of construction joints shall be shown on the drawings and shall
comply with the specifications. In expansion joints, concrete faces shall be
separated by a gap to accommodate estimated thermal expansion. Reinforcement
shall be discontinuous and dowel bars provided with one half coated with bond
breaking compound and the end provided with a compressible cap.
All joints in water tight structures shall be provided with a waterstop and sealant.
7.7.8.1 Construction Joints
Construction joints will be required where the type of the structure, its size, the
conditions of work or other conditions hinder the continuous casting of concrete.
The locations and type of construction joints shall be shown in the design
drawings. Grooves shall be formed if higher safety against shear forces is
desired.

In all structures subject to internal or external water pressure, waterstops shall be

fitted to the construction joints perpendicular to the direction of water flow.
Reinforcing steel shall be continuous through a construction joint, and bars
projecting through a joint shall be kept clean.
The intervals between construction joints shall be determined according to the
type of structure, foundations, and other working conditions. Construction joints
shall be provided at standard intervals of 3 to 5 m in reinforced concrete
elements.
7.7.8.2 Movement- / Deflection Joints
Deflection joints shall be provided to prevent cracking of the concrete due to

contraction, different settlement of soil layers, steep slopes of the ground base,
different soil layers (it different characteristics), variation in loading of adjacent
blocks of the structure.
Location and type of deflection joints shall be indicated clearly on the design
drawings. Generally, deflection joints are mainly applied to underground
structures - siphons, culverts and buried structures.
7.7.8.3 Movement- /Expansion Joints
Expansion joints shall be provided to prevent cracking of concrete due to

temperature expansion. Expansion joints are usually applied in structures
exposed above the ground.
Location of expansion joints shall be determined according to the type of
structure, foundations, and other working conditions. Expansion joints shall be
provided at points where the structure’s cross section or form changes.
Expansion joints shall be spaced no more than 6 m apart to divide the paved
surface into blocks 6 m square maximum.
For a series of structures exposed above the ground such as flumes, expansion
joints shall be provided at intervals of not more than 24 m.
Expansion sealants (gaskets) shall be inserted into the void of the joints.
Pedestals or dowel bars shall be provided to prevent movement of the structure
due to uneven settlement.
7.7.9 Corrosion Protection of Concrete
Consideration shall be given to the corrosion potential of sewage and sludge and
their products on concrete surfaces both above and below water level. The
Contractor shall take whatever measures are necessary (e.g. surface protection

systems and increased concrete cover) to satisfy the durability requirements of

the design life of the structure.
In case of application surface protection systems the Contractor has to comply
with the minimal adhesive tensile strength of the concrete surface, the levelling
compound if necessary and the coating according to Indian or respective British
Standards.
7.7.10 Equipment Foundations and Vibration due to Machinery
Concrete floor slabs or foundations under pumps or other rotary (equipment)

machines shall be designed in such a way as to minimise vibrations of the
structure itself and thus avoid additional stresses.
Mechanical and electrical items of equipment shall generally be mounted on
concrete foundations constructed above the surrounding structural floor level.
The foundations shall be designed to transmit the static and dynamic loads from
the equipment into the concrete structure isolated from the main structure, but if
necessary they shall be reinforced and tied to the main structural concrete. The
specific dynamic and static loads for the equipment determine if other foundation
solutions are applicable.
7.7.11 Surface Finishes
Finishes shall generally be provided for concrete surfaces to be placed against

other concrete structures and especially for all concrete surfaces prominently
exposed to public view.
7.7.11.1 Requirements for Control of Cracking
The maximum crack width under normal loading conditions shall corresponded
to the following limits:
 Water retaining elements - 0.1mm
 Non-water retaining elements - 0.2mm
7.7.12 Non-water retaining elements - 0.2
All concrete dimensions and any special requirements associated with design
shall be included in the civil general arrangement drawings. No dimensions shall
be given on the steel reinforcement drawings unless they are essential for steel
fixing or the preparation of bar schedules. Information to be shown on the
general arrangement drawings shall include:
 fills below structures and compaction requirements
 blinding concrete (at least 50 mm to be provided under all foundations)

 concrete and surface finish classifications

 position and type of movement joints
 waterstop details
 sequence of construction
 special tolerances e.g. in relation to mechanical or electrical equipment
Concrete Reinforcement Drawings

Special consideration shall be given to the spacing of bars and prestressing steel
to ensure that the concrete can be placed and consolidated without difficulty.
Wherever possible, distribution reinforcement in walls and slabs shall have
staggered laps.
Scale of drawings shall be according to Indian Standard, and if not mentioned
the following scales shall be used.
Item Scale
Walls and slabs 1 to 50 or 1 to 20
Walls and slabs - sections 1 to 20
Beams and columns – elevations 1 to 20
Beams and columns – sections 1 to 20 or 1 to 10
Where reinforcement details are complex and difficult to read, the larger scale
shall be adopted.
Beams
Elevations shall give the full bar notation of main reinforcing bars and link
reinforcement. Cross-sections shall show the individual position of each
reinforcing bar, its bar mark, the concrete cover and shape of the link
reinforcement. Slab reinforcement and reinforcement in adjacent beams shall be
shown only on the beam details for their relationship with the reinforcing bars in
the subject beam, and when shown shall be indicated by broken lines.
Pre-stressed Constructions
Drawings shall describe and show fully the location of all components, including
tendons and tendon forces, stressing sequence, grout specifications, anchorages,
spacers and duct vents. Full details of tendon supports with permissible
tolerances shall be stated.

7.7.12.1 Structural Steelwork
7.7.12.2 Codes and Standards
Structural steelwork shall be designed in accordance with applicable Indian or

BS Standard.
The Contractor shall prepare detail shop and erection drawings and welding
procedure sheets for all structural steelworks and shall submit these to the Owner
for approval before fabrication commenced.
Shop drawings for fabrication shall show full details of the type of steel, member
sizes and dimensions, weld details, welding sequences and any requirements for
weld stress relieving.
Erection drawings shall detail all connections, type and size of bolts and all site-
welding details if applicable.
The steelwork shall be detailed and fabricated so as to minimise the formation of
pockets to hold condensation, water or dirt. Where such pockets are unavoidable,
suitable drainage shall be provided.
7.7.12.3 Crane Beams and Supporting Structures
The design of crane beams shall take into account all factors relevant to the
provision of effective support to the crane under all conditions of loading
including underslung cranes and monorail runway beams:
 combined flange stresses resulting from overall bending and local flange
bending due to wheel loads causing transverse stresses
 lateral instability
 torsional restraint
 deflection limitations
 joints, particularly local force concentrations due to loads passing across
joints
Overhead cranes and gantry girders:
 lateral loading combined with vertical loads related to seismic effects
 as above but related to coincident lifting, slewing, traversing actions of the
crane
All crane supporting structures shall be designed for the support of:
 the design loadings; or
 the provided capacity of the crane

7.7.13 Channels and Pipelines
7.7.13.1 Main flows
Main sewage and effluent flows shall be conveyed by in-situ reinforced concrete
channels and culverts. Inverted siphon sections conveying crude sewage shall be
provided with washout valves at the low points and means of scum removal into
the works liquor drainage system at points of entry into siphons.
7.7.13.2 Sludge and Works Liquor Pipelines
Gravity pipelines shall be constructed of vitrified clayware, UPVC, GRP,

polyethylene or other approved corrosion resistant material. The minimum pipe
diameter shall be 250 mm. Connections into the network for foul drainage from
buildings, and washouts from individual chambers, may be 150 mm diameter.
Manholes shall be constructed at changes of direction and gradient, at junctions,
and at not more than 20 m distance on straight runs of sludge pipelines and 40 m
for works liquor pipelines.
Pressure pipelines (either pumped or under gravity head) in trenches shall be
constructed of ductile iron, UPVC, HDPE, GRP or polyethylene. Where exposed
within buildings or within buildings of HDPE or stainless steel.
The minimum diameter for pumped mains shall be 100 mm, unless maceration is
provided; minimum diameter for pressure lines under gravity head shall be 250
mm. Wherever possible, pressure pipelines shall be designed to avoid high
points and the consequent formation of air or gas pockets. If unavoidable,
provision shall be made for air release at high points either by automatic air
release valves (sewage type), or manual air release cocks, if approved for
locations where infrequent use is anticipated. Washouts shall be provided into
the works liquor drainage system at low points.
Bends in pressure pipelines shall be of the long radius type, T-junctions shall be
of the radial branch type. Crosses will not be permitted. Hatch boxes shall be
provided at intervals on site pipelines, generally at bends or tees. Hatch boxes
shall be located in reinforced concrete chambers with galvanised steel covers.
Where two or more pumping stations discharge to the same point, separate
pumping mains shall be provided even in following a common route.
7.7.13.3 Potable and Wash Water Pipelines
Water pipelines shall be constructed in UPVC, HDPE, polyethylene or

galvanised steel. Galvanized steel used outside building should be protected with
bitumen-coating. Air valves shall be provided at high points in the network and
washouts at low points. Washouts shall be connected to the surface water
drainage network, or to the works liquor drainage network via a break pressure

chamber. Vacuum breakers to prevent back flow shall be installed where

necessary.
7.7.13.4 Surface Water Pipelines
Surface water gravity pipelines shall be constructed of concrete, HDPE, UPVC

or other approved materials. The minimum pipe diameter shall be 150 mm for
connections from individual gullies; 200 mm otherwise. Manholes shall be
constructed at changes of directions and gradients, and at not more than 60 m
distance.
7.7.13.5 Manholes and Chambers
Manhole and chambers shall be adequately sized to permit maintenance of the

pipeline, valve or other plant. Access covers and openings shall not be less than
600 mm square. Shafts on gravity pipeline manholes shall be provided with step
irons and be not less than 900 mm diameter. Shafts on larger chambers shall be
provided with ladders and be not less than 1000 mm square.
Manholes and chambers located under roads shall have heavy duty manhole
covers. Manholes and chambers in unpaved surfaces shall generally be finished
up to 300 mm or more above ground level, the walls of the chamber being
carried up the full height and either handrail or open mesh decking provided.
Floors of "dry" chambers shall be sloped to a drainage outlet and drained to the
works liquor drainage system. Chambers will not normally be required for valves
of less than 300 mm diameter.
7.7.13.6 Loads on Buried Pipelines
Loads on buried pipelines shall be calculated according to backfill and traffic

loads. In addition to backfill and traffic loads, the weight of water in the pipe
shall be allowed.
7.7.13.7 Connections of Pipelines to Structures
Consideration shall be given to the relative vertical movement between pipelines

and structures, due to settlement of the structures themselves and of the backfill
surrounding the structures. Pipes connected at a high level relative to the
structure formation, shall incorporate at least two flexible couplings within the
backfill zone.
The following minimum requirements are given for guidance:

Pipe diameter (mm) L1 (mm) L2 (mm)

300 150 500
600 300 1000
1000 600 1000
1200 1000 1500
L1 – distance from wall of structure to first flexible joint
L2 – distance from first to second flexible joint.
7.7.13.8 Anchorage of Pipelines
Pipelines in trenches shall be provided with concrete thrust blocks cast against
the undisturbed trench face to prevent movement at bends, tees and blank ends.
In areas of disturbed ground where the available passive earth pressure is low,
consideration shall be given to the use of self-anchoring type flexible joints.
Pipework above ground or in ducts shall be adequately supported and anchored
by means of suitable brackets.
All anchorages shall be designed on the basis of the pipeline site test pressure.
7.7.13.9 Channel and Pipelines Routes
Two or more pipelines following approximately the same direction shall be laid
parallel, if appropriate in a common trench. Pipes of similar size in a common
trench shall be provided with means of identification channels.
7.8 Materials
7.8.1 General
All materials, particularly those imported, shall be suitable for use in the climatic
and environmental conditions prevailing on the site.
7.8.2 Concrete
7.8.2.1 Water
Water used in mixing and curing concrete shall be in accordance with the
respective Standards.

7.8.2.2 Cement
Where necessary, cement shall be Sulphate Resisting Portland Cement

complying with relevant Indian Standard. Copies of the manufacturer's test
certificates shall be provided by the Contractor to the Owner without a request.
All bagged cement shall be delivered to the works in sound condition and in the
original unopened branded packages of the manufacturer. If cement from more
than one source is supplied, separate stores shall be provided. Any cement
contaminated by cement from a different source shall be rejected. Immediately
upon delivery, cement shall be stored either in special silos or in dry weather,
tight, properly ventilated structures with floors raised at least 500 mm above
ground level. All storage facilities shall permit easy access for inspection and
identification purposes.
7.8.2.3 Aggregates for Concrete
Aggregates shall comply with the respective Standards. Samples of aggregates

shall be submitted to an approved laboratory for testing not less than 3 weeks
before concreting is due to commence and whenever a change in the source of
aggregate is proposed. Aggregates shall be hard, strong, durable, clean and free
of organic matter and adherent coating.
Unless otherwise approved, the Contractor shall, in accordance with relevant
Standards, determine the shrinkage properties of aggregates from the proposed
source of supply. The use of aggregates for concrete in specific locations shall
not be approved if, in the opinion of the Owner, the shrinkage properties are
excessive. Chloride and sulphate concentrations in aggregates shall be such that
the limitations on the total contents of these substances specified for the concrete
mix are not exceeded.
7.8.2.4 Reinforcement and Pre-stressing Steel
Reinforcing steel shall comply with the Indian Standards for definitions,
properties, identification symbols, reinforcing steel, bar dimensions and
reinforcing steel fabric.
All pre-stressed steel – if applicable - should be accompanied with a respective
Certificate. Pre-stressing anchorages shall be of approved type suitable for the
type of wire & cables. The pre-stressing system shall be subject in the QA/QC
Program. The Contractor shall collect and on request provide the Owner with
certificates from the manufacturers confirming that all steel and other
components supplied are in accordance with the appropriate standard. The steel
shall be free from oil, paint, mill scale, dirt, loose rust, sulphates, chlorides or
any other agent that may impair the bond or initiate corrosion.

7.8.2.5 Reinforcement Bar and Formwork Spacer
Reinforcing bar spacer

On the side of impermeable concrete in contact with water, only reinforcing bar
spacers made of concrete with the minimum strength of the structural concrete,
produced in a quality monitored manufacturer's works shall be used.
Formwork spacer
Formwork spacers made of steel bolts with a thread along the whole length and
middle "water stop", as well as plastic cones, are only allowed for waterproof
concrete.
Formwork spaces with pushed on cones for feeding through the Pre-stressing
wires shall be used for non-waterproof concrete. In special cases, with the
consent of the Owner, the cones can be dispensed with (in these cases the
missing cones shall be closed off with plastic plugs after removing the pre-
stressing wires).
Concrete Admixtures
The Contractor shall collect and on request provide the Owner with the
following details of any proposed admixture:
 Brand name and manufacturer
 Type; i.e. accelerating, water retaining, air entraining, admixture for water
tight concrete such as microsilica etc.
 Full manufacturer's details of the admixture acceptance tests
 Manufacturer's recommended dosage and the effects of under dosage and
over dosage
 Instructions for use and any safety precautions
 Physical state; i.e. liquid or solid and colour
 Composition; i.e. dry material content, ash content and the relative density
of liquid admixtures
 Chloride ion content expressed both by weight of admixture and weight of
cement at the recommended dosage
 Recommended storage conditions, limits on storage life and the effect on
the admixture of extremes of temperature; i.e. above 40 °C
 Any known incompatibility with other admixtures or with certain types of
cement
Before any admixture is used in the works, the Contractor shall submit
certificates confirming that storage recommendations have been complied with.

7.8.2.6 Liquid Curing Membranes
The Contractor shall inform the Owner on request of the type, brand name,
manufacturer, form, active ingredients and rate of application of the proposed
curing compounds.
The approval of any curing compound shall be conditional upon it having
moisture retention capability in summer ambient conditions of at least 75 per
cent. Curing compounds shall not react chemically with the concrete and shall
not crack, peel or disintegrate within three weeks after its application, or cause
any long-term discoloration of the surfaces.
7.8.2.7 Waterstops
Where water stops are built into concrete, they shall be rigidly secured in
position to prevent movement and shall be free from external coatings which
might reduce the bond. The Contractor shall take precautions to prevent the
formation of air pockets, voids or other defects whilst the concrete is being
placed.
Water stops for all joints shall be continuous around all comers and intersections.
Splices shall be made by welding in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations. They shall be so installed as not to conflict with the
reinforcing steel.
Surfaces in contact with sealants shall be clean, dry and firm with all traces of
form oil or other coatings removed. Preparation of surfaces, priming, and the
handling and preparation of materials shall be in complete compliance with the
manufacturer's instructions.
Details of proposed waterstops shall be submitted for approval. Rubber water
stops shall be approved. PVC water stops shall be approved. Rubber or PVC
waterstops shall be resistant to deterioration through ageing, mechanical abrasion
and attack by water, domestic sewage, sea water and natural salts. Surface
waterstops shall incorporate grout checks. The minimum width shall be 200 mm
for concrete thickness of up to 600 mm and 300 mm for concrete thickness
greater than 600 mm. Central placed waterstops for water-retaining structures
shall have a web thickness of at least 10 mm and a minimum width of 200 mm.
Waterstops used in expansion joints shall be of the type recommended by the
manufacturer to accommodate movement between the two concrete sections. All
joints except butt joints between waterstops of the same profile shall be factory-
made. Joints in rubber waterstops shall be made by appropriate vulcanised or
sleeking methods. Joints for PVC waterstops shall be made by an appropriate hot
knife-welding technique.

7.8.2.8 Concrete Coating
Preparation of the concrete surface

The concrete surface has to be prepared in such a way, that there will be a full
and permanent connection between the concrete and the surface protection
system. Therefore the concrete surface has to be uniform strong and free from
dividing materials, sharp formwork edges and flashes.
The preparation of the concrete surface includes at least the following items:
 Removal of coatings, curing materials and dirt
 Removal of cement laitance und unstable parts of the surface
 Removal of damaged concrete and if necessary uncover the reinforcement
If reinforcement is uncovered the Contractor has to consider the static
aspects of the concerned structural part.
 Removal of rust at uncovered reinforcement and other metal parts
 Cleansing the concrete surface of water, dust and loose other parts
The Contractor has to guarantee the properties and abilities of the concrete
structure by using appropriate practise and machines during preparation works.
The surfaces of concrete parts and constructions have to cover with a surface
protection system according to the respective Indian regulations (Epoxy
Coating).
7.8.2.9 Non-Shrinking Grout
Unless otherwise specified, all non-shrinking grouting specified on the drawings

or where designated by the Owner shall have a compressive strength of not less
than 60 N/mm² at 28 days. Mixing proportions and instruction for use shall be
followed in strict compliance with the manufacturer's direction.
Grouting materials that will be in contact with water shall be of non-metallic and
non-toxic type. The Contractor shall submit technical specifications of grouting
materials to the Owner for approval.
7.8.2.10 Formwork
Formwork shall be used for all concrete construction, including footings required
for forming the concrete and shall be carried out in accordance with applicable
provisions of the relevant European standard.
Formwork shall be constructed from good quality timber, free from loose knots,
shakes and warped surfaces. Timber for shuttering shall not be less than 30 mm
in thickness, board edges shall be planed smooth and joins shall be of tongue and
groove construction. Metal or plywood shuttering may be used, subject to the
approval of the Owner.

Shuttering shall be oiled before reinforcement is placed with an approved non-

staining oil or liquid form coating not having a paraffin base.
7.8.3 Steelwork
7.8.3.1 Screws, Bolts, Nuts and Washers
Nuts, bolts and washers shall have a finish equal in corrosion resistance to the
material to be fastened. Where dissimilar metals are likely to be in contact,
suitable insulating washers, and if necessary, sleeves shall be used.
Expanding or resin anchor bolts for fixing to concrete shall have a pull-out
strength not less than the tensile strength of the bolt.
7.8.3.2 Welding
All welding carried out during fabrication in the factory and erection on the site
shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements as shown on the
approved detail drawings by the Contractor. Details of the proposed welding
procedures shall be submitted to the Owner’s Representative for approval at the
same time as the detail drawings. All connections shall be welded in such a
manner as to make the finished connections neat and smooth in appearance, and
suitable for painting. All slag shall be removed, and any sharp projections shall
be ground smooth. Before welding is commenced either in the fabrication shop
or on site, weld procedure tests shall be carried out in accordance with the
European Standards.
All welders employed either in the fabrication shop or on site shall pass
qualification tests relevant to the weld procedures in use in accordance with the
European Standards.
Welders shall have at least 9 months skilled experience in the preceding 12-
month period. If the work of any welders employed on the Contract is
unsatisfactory, the Contractor shall carry out such further welder qualification
tests as are necessary to demonstrate that the welders are proficient.
Where directed and/or specified, welds shall be subject to non-destructive testing
by processes which may include but not necessarily be limited to radiographic,
ultrasonic, magnetic particle, or dye penetrate methods, depending on the type of
weld and its position in the structure.
If any work shows defects or fails to comply with the requirements of the
approved drawings or the specification for any reason, it shall be repaired or
rejected, even though it may have been carried out by qualified welders using
approved procedures.
The welding procedure for cupro-nickel linings shall avoid porosity in the weld
and any uncontrolled dilution of the weld by iron picked up from the steel.

Special precautions shall be taken to avoid lamellar tearing when welding thick
plates and low hydrogen content electrodes shall be used. Class 1 welds shall be
fully radiographed except where otherwise specified.
In bad weather, additional measures are needed in the course of welding
consequently, in case of rainy weather; provision shall be made to keep the
places of welding dry.
Splash, burning-in, uneven arc, oversized root edges at corner joints,
unsatisfactory seam or any crack are impermissible in the course of welding.
Surfaces should be free from any marks of impact, indentation and deformation.
7.8.3.3 Normal Anti-Corrosion Measures
Steelwork shall be blast-cleaned free from all mill scale, rust and other
contamination.
The steelwork shall then be painted with one coat of primer, one coat of
undercoat and at least two finishing coats.
Surfaces required to be hot dip galvanised shall include ladders, cable trays, stair
treads, hand railing, gratings, grilles, bolts, nuts and washers, and other
miscellaneous carbon steel or low alloy steel items. Galvanising shall be carried
out only after completion of all cutting, drilling, welding and other fabrication
activities associated with the items to be treated.
7.8.3.4 Special Anti-Corrosion Measures
All parts, which cannot be protected by painting due to their function (rolling
pieces, spring mechanism, pins etc.) shall be made in stainless steel or bronze
and similarly for those parts not easily accessible for servicing and where
replacement is difficult.
Where dissimilar metals are used in close proximity to structural steel members
or their connections, contact between such metals and the steel shall be avoided
unless the Contractor can demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Owner that
contact between the dissimilar metals will not lead to galvanic corrosion.
Details of precautions to be taken by the Contractor shall be submitted for the
Owner’s approval. Where "stainless steel" is specified it shall have resistance to
atmospheric corrosion not less than that provided by 18 percent Chrome - 8
percent Nickel steel.
7.8.3.5 Protective Coating for Underwater Parts
All metal parts such as screens, penstock, valves, steel frames totally or partially
submitted to immersion, where constructed in mild steel or cast iron shall be

protected by an adequate protective coating. The coating process shall be as

follows:
Before assembly, all steel surfaces shall have all rough welds and edges rounded
and shall then be grit-blasted to grey-white metal equivalent to the European
Standard or equivalent approved by the Owner, under controlled environment,
before any oxidation takes place.
The prepared surface shall be coated, with one coat of two pack polyamide cured
epoxy resin based primer pigmented with barium chromate. Minimum dried film
thickness to be 40 microns.
It shall then receive two coats of two pack coal tar epoxy, minimum dried film
thickness of two coats to be 250 microns.
7.8.3.6 Asphalt
Asphalt Concrete paving shall be in accordance with the respective Indian

Standard.
7.8.4 Excavation
7.8.4.1 General
Excavations shall be executed in the least dimensions required to construct the

various structures, but shall allow for any working space necessary.
7.8.4.2 Support
All excavations shall be adequately supported to ensure the safety of the

operatives working in the trench, and to ensure no subsidence or movement of
the adjacent ground and structures. No timber or other support shall be left in
the excavations without consent of the Owner. The Contractor shall take all the
precautions as required by the respective Indian Standards.
7.8.4.3 Water in Excavation
The excavation shall be kept clear of water at all times. Water in the excavation
shall be dealt with in such a manner as will protect the surfaces. Particular care
shall be taken to maintain the stability of the bottom of the excavations against
water pressure as the overburden is removed. If wellpoint dewatering is to be
used, the Contractor shall furnish details of his proposals.
Such proposals shall ensure that there is no loss of support to adjacent ground
and structures by the removal of fine soil particles with the water.

7.8.4.4 Trench Excavation
No trench excavation for pipe laying of pipes with a diameter more than 300 mm
shall be taken out until the line of the trench has been set out and has been
checked by the Owner's Representative. A guide line shall be laid parallel to the
line of the trench so that the excavation may be executed accurately at a fixed
distance from it. Trenches shall be left open for a length of 100 meters or
between manholes, whichever is less, until they have been inspected and
approval has been given for backfilling.
Trenches for pipes shall be excavated to a sufficient depth to enable the pipe and
the specified joint, bed and surround to be accommodated, and in accordance
with the maximum and/or minimum widths shown on the drawings. Where rocks
or boulders are present in pipe trenches, they shall be removed to a minimum
distance of 200 mm from the outside of the pipe.
7.8.4.5 Unsuitable Material
Unsuitable or unstable material shall be removed from the foundations of the

works and elsewhere from the site as approved.
7.8.4.6 Subsidence
The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all material and labour for
making good any settlement and subsidence damage arising from such
settlement or subsidence.
7.8.5 Filling
7.8.5.1 Backfilling of excavations
Where excavations are to be backfilled after completion of the structure or

pipeline, the Contractor shall refill these excavations with excavated material
that is dry or moist and can be compacted, free from slimy, perishable material
or vegetable matter. Where excavated materials may be unsuitable, other
appropriate materials shall be used as directed. No stone or rock fragment larger
than 150 mm shall be included in the backfill.
The backfill shall be carried out in layers of 30 cm each. Each layer shall be
thoroughly compacted by an approved mechanical compacting device before
each succeeding layer is placed. Design and applications of drains in the backfill
and the outlet of the drains are to be effective and conform to prevailing Indian
practise and calculation principles. Soils containing clays shall be compacted by
impact tampers and granular soils by vibration. Compaction within 500 mm of
the pipeline or structure shall be carried out by hand tamping. Care shall be taken

to avoid dropping large masses of material into the excavation in a manner likely
to damage the pipeline or structure.
Where excavations have been supported, and supports are to be removed, they
shall, where possible, be withdrawn progressively as backfilling proceeds in such
a manner as to minimise the danger of collapse and to ensure complete
backfilling of the excavation. Filling on roofs and tanks and underground
chambers shall be placed by such device as will avoid risk of damage to the
structure through unbalanced or excessive loading. Compaction of such filling
shall be of the highest standards.
Backfilling shall be carried out as soon as practicable after completion of the
permanent work but only after testing as required. Backfilling of partially
completed structures shall only be permitted and to such intermediate levels as
allowed for in the structural designs.
7.8.5.2 Forming of Embankments – Non-structural
Embankments and other areas of fill, which do not support structures, roads or
pipe-lines, shall be formed of approved selected material from the excavations.
All earth-works material placed in or below such embankments shall be
deposited and compacted as soon as practicable after excavation, in layers of
loose fill not exceeding 400 mm but appropriate to the compaction method used.
Embankments shall be built up evenly over the full width and shall be
maintained at all times with a sufficient camber and a surface sufficiently even to
enable surface water to drain readily from them. During the construction of
embankments, the Contractor shall control and direct constructional traffic
uniformly over their width.
7.8.5.3 Placement of Structural Fill
Bulk fill material below roads, structures or pipelines shall be placed as soon as
practicable after excavation and compacted in layers in accordance with the
design. The Contractor shall carry out laboratory and in-place compaction tests
to ensure 95% compaction of the maximum dry density of material as per
relevant Standards and that the required degree of compaction is achieved. The
test results shall be submitted to the Owner on request within 48 hours of the test
being carried out.
7.8.5.4 Drainage Water
The Contractor shall arrange for the rapid disposal of water shed onto
embankments and other areas of fill or completed formation of access roads or of
other areas. When practicable the water shall be discharged into adjacent ditches,
channels or other surface water drainage systems. Adequate means of trapping

silt shall be provided on temporary systems discharging into permanent drainage

systems. Where necessary, temporary watercourses, ditches, drains, pumping or
other means of maintaining the earthworks free of water shall be provided.
7.8.5.5 Finished Surface
When the excavations have been filled in, the Contractor shall prepare the
surface of the backfill to receive the final surface. The backfill surface shall be
left sufficiently high above the design level to allow for consolidation and
settlement of the back-fill.
7.9 Concrete
7.9.1 Concrete Work – General
The Contractor is obligated to consider for his works the temperatures in the
region. No claim of the Contractor because of the temperatures will be accepted.
All concrete work shall be carried out in accordance with the relevant clauses of
European Standard except that in case the European Laws give no regulation or
specification, specifications mentioned in this Chapter shall take precedence and
prevail.
Chloride content
The total chloride content of the concrete mix arising from the aggregate,
together with that from any admixture and any other source, shall not in any
circumstances exceed the following limits expressed as percentage chloride ion
by weight of cement:
Maximum total chloride content expressed as
Type of use of Concrete percentage of chloride iron by weight of

cement
Prestressed concrete
steam-cured structural concrete 0.1
Reinforced on plain concrete made
with sulphate-resisting cement 0.2
Sulphate content
The total sulphate content of the concrete mix arising from the aggregate,
together with that from the cement, any admixture and any other source, shall not
exceed 4 per cent expressed as SO3 by weight of cement.
Alkali-aggregate reaction

The Contractor shall secure that alkali-aggregate reaction will not occur in the
concrete. Generally the use of cement with less than 0.6 per cent alkali
concentration expressed as a soda (Na2O) equivalent will be deemed to satisfy
this requirement.
7.9.1.1 Mix Content Design
General
The concrete shall be designed and prepared so that:
 it shall be homogeneous
 it shall have workability such that it shall be enabled to be placed and be
satisfactorily compacted
 it shall have strength and endurance specified for the works.
Obligations
The proportions of the constituent materials for the preparation of the concrete
shall be the results of laboratory mix design, carried out by certified laboratories.
The mix design for every class of concrete shall be done at the beginning of the
contract and must be repeated:
 when there is a change of source of aggregates
 when the aggregates show different properties
 when there is a change of the admixtures or the type of cement
Required strength
The required strength shall be determined according to applicable Indian
Standard. Compression strength of the concrete should be checked according to
this standard.
Elements of mix design
The concrete mix design shall be done with the actual aggregates, the cement,
the admixtures and the water which are going to be used in the works. These
materials shall be brought to the laboratory by the Contractor for testing before
use. The proportions of the materials that result from the mix design shall ensure
the following for the mix; optimal workability, strength, tightness, endurance and
compaction. The workability specified by the designer of the plant shall be
expressed in centimetres of slumping.
7.9.1.2 Production of Concrete
Access to production areas

The Owner shall at all times have access to all the constituent materials and to
the manufacture of concrete for the purpose of inspection and sampling or
testing.
Batching and mixing
The solid constituents of the concrete mix shall be measured by weight. A
separate weighing devise shall be provided for the cement. Alternatively, the
cement may be measured by using the number of whole bags in each batch. The
added water may be measured by either volume or weight. Water shall not be
added after concrete has left the mixer.
During production of concrete, solid admixture shall be measured by either
weight or volume.
When weighing aggregates, due allowance shall be made for the weight of water
that would normally be found in the aggregates under prevailing conditions. All
measuring equipment shall be maintained in a clean and serviceable condition.
Concrete mixers shall comply with the relevant European standard. The mixing
time shall not be less than that used by the mixer manufacturer in assessing its
performance.
Mixers shall be thoroughly cleaned before any fresh concrete is mixed and all
mixing plant shall be thoroughly cleaned before changing from one type of
cement to another. The first batch of concrete through the mixer shall contain
only two-thirds of the normal quantity of coarse aggregate.
Workability
The workability of fresh concrete shall be such that the concrete can be handled
and placed without segregation and, after compaction, shall completely fill the
formwork and surround all reinforcement and ducts. The quantity of water used
shall not exceed that required to produce concrete with the appropriate
workability to be placed and compacted in the required location.
7.9.2 Control of Concrete Quality
When concreting is in progress the Contractor shall carry out the following tests
at regular intervals for which he shall maintain all necessary equipment and
instruments. The Contractor shall keep records of the tests as described and shall
submit copies of all test results to the Owner.
Tests on materials
Materials represented by samples producing unsatisfactory test results shall not
be used in the works.
Aggregate grading tests
The rate of testing during concreting shall be in accordance with the following
table but not less than two tests per week for each grade of aggregate. Tests shall
be in accordance with relevant Indian Standards. A copy of the test result shall

be submitted to the Owner immediately after completion of the test and a further
copy retained on Site.
Tests for natural moisture content of fine aggregate

The moisture content of aggregate particle size fractions of 4 mm and less shall
be determined before the commencement of any concreting operations and when
any change in moisture content is apparent.
Tests on concrete
All sampling, curing and testing shall be carried out in accordance with relevant
European Standards unless specified otherwise.
Workability - slump
Prior to pouring the workability of all concrete shall be tested. The slump shall
not vary from that of the corresponding approved trial mix described in the
relevant European standard.
Strength
The concrete shall be tested by taking cubes directly from the mixers.
Compression strength of these test cubes shall be according to the compliance
criteria. The test cubes taken for compliance control shall be 10 or 12 cm edged
cubes. The test cube that will be used in compliance control will have the same
shape and dimensions as those used for mix design.
Except for the test cubes necessary for compliance control, the Owner may
request the Contractor to take more test cubes to control the strength at an earlier
age, control the concrete hardening progress or make other special tests.
Test cubes with defects from bad compaction or injury will not be included in
the compliance control. For this reason, one more cube shall be taken in each
sample. If after the removal of forms no cube is found to be defective, the
additional cube will not be included in the compliance control but can be used to
control strength at an earlier age. The concrete placed each day in each separate
concrete class, shall be one batch represented by one sample. If the work requires
continuous placing for more than one day (sliding formwork), the concrete shall
be divided into theoretical batches, according to the construction stage (e.g. day
placing, night placing). All cubes shall be marked with an identification number
or letter. The Contractor shall record the following information immediately after
each cube is made and shall forward copies to the Owner and the testing
laboratory:
 Identification number or letter of cube
 Date of casting

 Location of batch of concrete in works from which cube was taken

 Mix proportions
 Cement content
 Water/cement ratio
 Maximum size of aggregate
 Category of cement used
 Workability
 Temperature when cubes were cast
 Temperature when workability test was carried out
Curing of the cubes shall continue until they are tested.
7.9.3 Transport and Placing of Concrete
7.9.3.1 Placing Concrete – General
Place concrete in accordance with the relevant European standard. Concrete shall
be transported from the mixer and placed in the works as rapidly as practicable
by methods which will prevent segregation or loss of any of the ingredients and
which will maintain the required workability. It shall be deposited as near as
practicable to its final position to avoid re-handling. Concrete, which has been
partially set during transportation, shall not be used. All plant and equipment
used for the transportation of concrete shall be kept clean. The operation shall be
organised to provide a continuous supply of concrete in order to avoid
unnecessary joints.
No concrete shall be placed until the formwork and reinforcement sections are
complying with the Final Design. The Owner has to be notified not less than 24
hours in advance of each placing of concrete.
Concreting shall then proceed continuously over the area between construction
joints. Fresh concrete shall not be placed against in-situ concrete that has been in
position for more than 60 minutes, unless a construction joint is formed in
accordance with this Specification. When in-situ concrete has been in place for 4
hours, no further concrete shall be placed against it for a further 20 hours.
Concrete shall be deposited in horizontal layers to a compacted depth not
exceeding 450 mm where internal vibrators are used, or 300 mm in all other
cases. Unless otherwise approved, concrete shall not be dropped into place from
a height exceeding 2.5 meters. Where trunking is used, this height including any
vertical end section of trunking shall not exceed four meters. During placement
of concrete a competent steel reinforcement fixer shall be in attendance on the
site to adjust and correct the position on any reinforcement which may be
displaced.
The Contractor shall keep a complete record of work showing the time and date
of placing of the concrete in each part of the works. A copy of this record shall
be made available when required by the Owner.

7.9.3.2 Pumping Concrete
Concrete shall be placed by pumping only when approved. Concrete mixes to be

placed in this manner shall be designed to meet the requirements of the specified
grade of concrete and shall also be such as to ensure that there will be no
bleeding or segregation of the constituents during pumping.
Concrete mixes not designed for pumping in the first instance shall be checked
as to their suitability for pumping well in advance of pumping operations so that
any necessary adjustments to the mix can be made.
7.9.3.3 Compaction of Concrete
During placing, concrete shall be carefully worked around the reinforcement,

pre-stressing tendons, and cast-in members and spread into all parts of the
formwork and shall be thoroughly compacted to ensure that a dense
homogeneous mass, free of voids, is attained. Compaction of concrete in its final
position shall be completed within 30 minutes of discharge from the mixer. If the
concrete is carried in purpose-made agitators operating continuously, the time
shall be within two hours of the introduction of the cement to the mix or such
lesser time in high ambient temperatures that the Owner deems appropriate, and
within 30 minutes of discharge from the agitator. All concrete shall be
compacted by the use of mechanical vibrators. Sufficient vibrators in a
serviceable condition shall be on site so that spare equipment (minimum 2) is
always available in the event of breakdown.
Mechanical vibrators shall be of an approved pattern and of a frequency not less
than 80 Hz. The size of the head of immersion-type vibrators shall be appropriate
to the section of the member of the compacted and to the spacing of
reinforcement. Unless otherwise approved, external vibrators may be used only
in precast concrete. Where vibration is applied externally, the design of
formwork and the disposition of vibrators shall be such as to ensure efficient
compaction and to avoid surface blemishes.
Vibrators shall be used by skilled operators only. Immersion vibrators shall
penetrate the full depth of the layers and, where the underlying layer is of fresh
concrete, shall enter and revibrate that layer to ensure that successive layers are
well bonded together. Overvibration causing segregation, surface sweating or
leakage through formwork shall be avoided. Immersion vibrators shall be
withdrawn slowly to prevent the formation of voids. Vibrators shall not be used
to work the concrete along the forms, or in such a way as to damage formwork,
or other parts of the structure, or displace the reinforcement or other embedded
items. Care shall be taken to avoid disturbing freshly compacted concrete and
reinforcement.

7.9.3.4 Protection from Extremes of Weather
Rainfall
Concrete shall not be placed during heavy rainfall. Freshly laid concrete shall be
suitably protected by tarpaulin or other means, so that if heavy rain falls before
the concrete has sufficiently hardened, there will be no chance of the rain
washing away the cement and fine aggregate or of marking the finished surfaces.
Hot weather
The Contractor takes into account and neutralises the effects of high
temperatures on the storage and use of any admixture proposed. Water-storage
tanks and cement silos shall be shaded from prolonged strong sunlight. Where
shading is not possible, all external surfaces shall be covered and painted with a
reflective coating. Water supply pipes shall be buried underground. Aggregates
shall be stored in the shade but should be exposed to the wind as much as
possible e.g. in an open-sided shed. Fog nozzle spraying shall be used on the
coarse aggregate during extreme heat conditions.
Wherever practicable, concreting shall be carried out during the early morning or
late evening. Formwork shall be shaded from direct sunlight prior to during the
placing of concrete and until removed. The temperature of concrete when
deposited shall not exceed 32°C conform to relevant European standards when
concreting during hot weather.
7.9.3.5 Built-in Parts (sleeves, pipes, and other items)
Where sleeves, pipes and other items are built into concrete they shall be rigidly
secured in position to prevent movement and shall be free from external coatings
which might reduce the bond.
The Contractor shall place no concrete until reinforcing steel, pipes, conduits,
sleeves, hangers, anchors, and other items required to be built into the concrete
have been inspected by and approved by the Owners Owner. All water and
foreign matter shall be removed from the shuttering and excavation. All soil
bottoms for slabs and footings shall be approved by the Owner before placing
concrete.
7.9.3.6 Cleaning and Treatment of Forms
The inside faces of all temporary forms shall be coated evenly with a suitable
release agent. The form release agent shall have a maximum 350 g/l volatile
organic compound (VOC’s) that will not bond with stain or adversely affect
concrete surfaces. Contact with reinforcement and other embedded items shall be
avoided. Where the concrete surface is to receive an applied finish, care shall be

taken to ensure the compatibility of the release agent with the finish.
Immediately before concreting, all forms shall be thoroughly cleaned out.
7.9.3.7 Removal of Formwork
Falsework, shuttering and formwork shall be removed without shock to the

concrete or disturbance of the concrete.
The Owner shall be informed in advance when the Contractor intends striking
any formwork.
The formwork striking times shall be determined by the Contractor but shall in
no case be less than the period required by cubes, stored as far as possible under
the same conditions as the work they represent, to develop a strength of twice the
stress to which the section of work will be subjected, but not less than 10 N/mm².
Any damage caused by premature striking including unacceptable deflection due
to shrinkage and creep shall be made good at the Contractor's expense.
Before formwork material is reused, all surfaces that have been in contact with
concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned, all damaged places repaired, all projecting
nails withdrawn, and all intrusions or protrusions smoothed.
7.9.3.8 Pockets and Openings for Mechanical and Electrical Installations
For holes smaller than 150 mm x 150 mm in slabs or walls reinforcement may be
displaced locally around the opening. For holes larger than 150 mm x 150 mm
additional reinforcement bars shall be placed, equal to the bars cut, plus diagonal
bars of the same diameter enclosing the opening.
Machinery bases and bolts shall be grouted using cement grout with an
appropriate expanding agent. Where dissimilar metals are embedded in the
concrete in close proximity, measures shall be taken to ensure that electrolytic
corrosion does not occur.
7.9.4 Surface Finish
Edges of concrete components shall be broken using triangular fillet strips with
1.5 cm edge length. These triangular fillet strips shall be made of plastic for fair-
faced concrete surfaces.
7.9.4.1 Pump Rooms and Pump Sumps
The profile of pump rooms and pump sumps shall be carried out in conjunction
with the pump manufacturer, to ensure that the finished shape is in accordance
with his requirements.

The final coating or screeding of pump rooms and pump sumps shall ensure the
requirements of concrete protection.
7.9.4.2 Measurement Flumes
Measurement flumes shall be constructed according to the tolerances specified

by the supplier of the flow measurement equipment. The flume may be formed
by one of the following methods:
 using formwork and cast in-situ with the channel walls
 using formwork but casting flume blocks after channel walls have been
cast
 using pre-formed GRP flume liners with concrete backing
Ties or other fixings shall be provided at each interface to ensure adequate
anchorage of the separate components.
7.9.5 Testing
7.9.5.1 Water Testing of Structures
All structures whose inside surfaces may be in contact with liquid shall be tested
for water tightness.
Water testing shall be carried out before backfilling is placed against outside
walls and before the application of any waterproofing membrane to external
surfaces. All connecting pipework and any other components which pass through
the structural members under test shall be installed prior to the test being carried
out. Any additional test required by the Contractor at an earlier stage of
construction shall be carried out at his expense.
Water from the mains shall be used for water testing. The structures shall be
filled with water at a rate approved by the Owner. After allowing a period of
seven days for absorption, the water level shall be recorded by a hook gauge with
a vernier attachment or by other approved means, and the water shall be allowed
to stand for a period of seven days, during which the total permissible drop, after
allowing for evaporation and rainfall, shall not exceed 0.001 times the average
water depth of the full tank or 10 mm whichever is the lesser amount.
If the structure does not satisfy the conditions of the test and the daily drop in
water level decreases, the period of the test may be extended for a further seven
days and, if the specified limit is then not exceeded, the structure may be
considered satisfactory.

7.9.5.2 Testing of Roofs
Roofs shall be tested on completion. Where it is not practicable to contain a 25

mm depth of water because of roof falls or otherwise, the roof shall be
thoroughly wetted by continuous hosing for a period of not less than six hours.
In either case the roof shall be regarded as satisfactory if no leaks or damp
patches show on the soffit.
7.9.5.3 Elevated-Temperature Curing
When elevated-temperature curing is used the temperature of the concrete shall

not exceed 50 °C within 2 hours, or 100 °C within 6 hours of the concrete being
placed. The rise in temperature within any period of 30 minutes shall not exceed
10 °C. The rate of subsequent cooling shall not exceed the rate of heating. The
method of curing employed shall prevent loss of moisture from the concrete.
7.10 Manhole and Ancillary Structures
7.10.1 Manholes
7.10.1.1 Concrete Manholes
Bases, benching and walls to above soffit level of the highest pipe shall be
constructed in-situ with Class II concrete. The concrete shall be cast immediately
against the newly-trimmed excavation or against permanent or temporary
shutters externally and against shuttering internally. No manhole rings shall be
placed until the bases are completed. Precast manhole rings and cover slabs shall
be jointed in 2:1 sand/cement mortar and, when completed, the inner face shall
be smooth and true. The precast concrete ring shall be surrounded by not less
than 150 mm of Class II concrete formed externally with approved circular
mould. The termination of each pour shall occur mid-way between the precast
ring joints, where required shall be cast into the precast concrete rings during
manufacture.
7.10.1.2 Manhole Inverts and Benching
Inverts and junctions for pipes up to and including 400 mm diameter shall be
formed of half-round, pre-formed channels, bends, tapers and specials. Inverts
and junctions for pipes over 400 mm diameter shall be carefully formed in-situ
with 25 mm mortar screeding floated to the required shape.
Where manhole inverts are indicated on the drawings as being cast in-situ with
no mortar facing then Class II concrete shall be used. The exact contours of the

finished invert shall be obtained by means of purpose made smooth formwork.

Unless otherwise indicated the invert shall have vertical sides up to soffit level of
the pipes and shall then be turned over to the benching which shall be sloped at
12 to 1. Cement rendering of 12 mm thick shall be applied to the benching and
finished with a slip resistant surface.
7.10.1.3 Manhole Covers
Manhole frames shall be set and positioned squarely on level. The frames shall
be concreted in position and the case of recessed-type covers shall be inserted
and any adjustments made prior to concreting being carried out. The tops of the
covers shall in roads conform to the existing surface and in fields to such a level
as may be directed. The surface of the concrete filling to recessed type manhole
covers shall be smooth steel trowelled under firm pressure and left free of trowel
marks except inside buildings where the finish shall be to match the surrounding
floor.
7.10.2 Ancillary Structures
7.10.2.1 Concrete Anchorages
Unless self-anchoring joints are provided concrete anchorages shall be provided

at all changes in direction, tees, blank ends etc., sufficient to withstand the site
test pressures adopted. The dimensions of the anchor blocks are to be strictly in
accordance with the drawings and must be placed against freshly trimmed
excavation. Any loose or disturbed material shall be removed immediately
before the concrete is placed.
Concreting shall be undertaken as early as practicable after the fitting has been
laid, leaving sufficient clearance around the joint for testing purposes. Synthetic
material pipes shall be wrapped with 2 mm thickness of roofing felt before
concreting.
7.10.2.2 Pipes Built into Structures
The outside surface of all pipes and special castings to be built into structures
shall be thoroughly cleaned immediately before installation. Where ordered
protective coatings to metal pipes shall be removed from the sections to be built
in. The external surfaces of concrete pipes shall be roughened to form a key for
concrete or mortar.
Sheathing to steel pipes shall be cut away from the sections to be built in, and
after erection the protection shall be completed by applying approved bituminous
material around the barrels of the pipes at the junctions with structures. Synthetic
material pipes shall be wrapped with compressible neoprene rubber or similar

before building, in and later sealed around the pipe circumference on both faces
of the structure.
Pipes passing through water retaining structures shall, where possible, be built
into the structure in-situ. Formwork shall be formed closely to the outside of the
pipe, and concrete shall be placed and compacted thoroughly round the pipe and
puddle flange if any.
7.10.3 Testing and Inspection
Before any testing and inspection of a pipeline, the Contractor shall submit to the
Owner his proposed programme of testing and inspection and, where required,
swabbing.
7.10.3.1 Testing of Sewers and Manholes – General
Testing shall be carried out from manhole to manhole. Short branch drains
connected to a main between manholes shall be tested as one system with the
main sewer. Long branches shall be tested separately. All sewer pipes shall be
thoroughly cleaned out and tested. The Contractor shall give due notice of his
intention to test any pipes.
Notwithstanding the satisfactory completion of any test, if there is any visible
leakage of water from any pipe or joint, the pipe shall be replaced and/or the
joint re-made as appropriate, and the test repeated until the leakage has stopped.
7.10.3.2 Water Testing of Sewers
Sewers up to and including 750 mm diameter shall be tested after laying, but
before placing concrete and backfilling, and again after backfilling has been
completed. Suitable watertight plugs or stoppers adequately strutted shall be
inserted in the low end of the sewer and in connections if necessary, followed by
filling the pipe system with water. For small pipes a knuckle bend may be
temporarily jointed in at the top end and a sufficient length of vertical pipe
jointed to it so as to provide the required test head.
A test pressure of 1.2 meters head of water above the soffit of the sewer shall be
applied at the high end but not more than 6 meters at the low end, by means of a
stand-pipe. Steeply graded sewers shall be tested in stages where the above
maximum head would be exceeded if the whole section where tested at once. A
period of one hour shall be allowed for absorption. The loss of water over a
period of 30 minutes shall be measured by adding water from a measuring vessel
at regular intervals of 10 minutes and noting the quantity required to maintain the
original level in the standpipe. The average quantity of water added shall not
exceed 0.5 litres per hour per linear meter per meter of nominal bore of the

sewer. Interim air testing of sewers up to 450 mm diameter may be permitted but
the completed pipeline shall be subject to a water test prior to acceptance.
7.10.3.3 Air Testing of Sewers
Sewers exceeding 450 mm diameter up to and including 750 mm diameter may

be tested by means of compressed air, instead of the water test. The Contractor
shall satisfy himself that the type of pipe is suitable for air testing. The length of
sewer under test shall be effectively plugged and air shall be pumped in by
suitable means until a pressure of 100 mm head of water is indicated in a U-tube
connected to the system. The air pressure shall not fall to less than 75 mm head
of water during a period of 5 minutes, without further pumping, after a requisite
period of stabilisation.
7.10.3.4 Visual Testing of Sewers
Sewer pipelines shall for test purposes visually inspected internally, before and
after backfilling, and defects shall be remedied.
7.10.3.5 Testing of Manholes and Chambers
Manholes and chambers shall be water-tested on completion by inserting

stoppers in each pipeline and filling the manhole or chamber to 0.5 meter below
cover level. They will be deemed watertight if, after making due allowance for
evaporation and absorption, the total drop in surface level does not exceed 15
mm in 24 hours. Visible leaks and workmanship which is defective shall be
rectified notwithstanding the passing of the test for water tightness.
7.10.3.6 Infiltration Testing of Sewers
All new sewers, manholes and inspection chambers shall be tested for
infiltration on completion of the backfilling and construction of complete
lengths of sewer. All inlets to the system shall be effectively closed. There shall
be no infiltration during testing.
7.10.3.7 Testing of Pressure Mains
Before filling in any length of pressure main trench the pressure main shall be
tested. Prior to testing the trench shall be filled in around the body of each pipe
for at least half its length excluding the joint with a minimum thickness of 300
mm of well-rammed selected fill or granular surround above the top of the pipe.

In general, tests shall not be carried out on lengths of pipeline exceeding 1000
meters and shall be applied to prove the structural soundness of the various units
in the line, including pipes, valves and anchorages as well as the water-tightness
of the line. Air-testing of pressure mains is prohibited.
The Contractor shall provide adequate pumps, gauges, jacks, struts and all
apparatus necessary for carrying out the tests and shall keep them in good order.
The test section shall be capped or blank-flanged off at each end as well as at any
branches. The Contractor shall provide for transmitting the unsupported end
thrust to solid ground at the ends or into the sides of the trenches. Testing shall
not be permitted against a closed valve.
The test pressure shall be such that the entire pipeline or section being tested is
subjected to 1.5 times the working pressure, or 1.25 times the maximum surge
pressure or 800 kPa, whichever is the greatest.
7.10.3.8 Flexible Pipe Deflections
On completion of trench backfilling the vertical deflection of the pipes shall be

checked for compliance with the design limits taking into account the increase in
deflection with time.
7.10.3.9 Swabbing of Water Mains
On completion of the hydraulic tests all water mains shall be cleaned by passing
through a foam swab. When main pipe laying commences a swab shall be
inserted immediately downstream of the first valve. Swabs shall also be inserted
on the downstream side of the valves controlling all branch mains. A terminal
hydrant shall be placed by the Contractor at the end of every main. If this is not
shown as a permanent installation on the drawings a temporary hydrant shall be
installed.
Following the completion of main pipe laying the Contractor shall flush the swab
through the main until it reaches the terminal hydrant. The Contractor shall then
shut down the main and recover the swab by removing the hydrant. Each branch
of a mains system shall be flushed separately. The process shall be repeated until
the wash water runs clear.
7.10.3.10 Disinfection of Water Mains
The Contractor shall disinfect all water mains in accordance with the supply
authority’s requirements. The Contractor shall take measures to minimise the
risk of contamination of the new pipeline and the existing main to which it will
be connected.

Mains shall be disinfected after testing, swabbing and scouring, using potable
water.
After completion of the disinfection process as described above and before
putting into service the main shall be filled with fresh potable water with a
chlorine residual not exceeding 1.0 mg/litre. Microbiological tests shall be
undertaken to ensure that the main is free from contamination.
7.10.3.11 Gas Lines Testing
Roofs of sludge digestion tanks shall be tested for gas tightness by visual
inspection using a soap solution. The test pressure shall be 1.5 the working
pressure. The test shall be considered successful if no bubble appears on the soap
solution applied. In the same way the metal domes of the gas holders shall be
tested.
7.11 Building Works
7.11.1 Brick and Concrete Block Works
Both perimeter and partition walls should be constructed with bricks/blocks.

Walls should fulfil the Indian Standards.
7.11.1.1 Materials
Before starting the work, the Contractor shall obtain the following documents
and samples:
 Specifications of the brick and/or concrete block manufacturers and
leaflets with data about the materials and products. Three samples should
be submitted from each type of brick or block.
 Samples will be taken from the first load of each type of brick or block
delivered on Site and submitted for approval before work is started. The
bricks or blocks of all other deliveries must be the same and according to
the approved samples
Bricks shall be of good quality, sound, hard, well-baked, with uniform
dimensions and shapes and of an approved type and colour. The Contractor shall
prepare samples of brick and block work which will show the colour of the
mortar, the arrangement of the bricks and blocks and in general the quality of
work. The samples shall be used as a standard for purposes of comparison with
the brick and block work to be constructed in the works. Concrete blocks should
be supplied by an approved European manufacturer and of approved quality and
design.

The cement shall be Portland-type and, as well as the water, it shall comply with
the European Standards. The lime shall be of good quality either slaked in putty
form or hydrated. The sand to be used in the mortar shall be clean, hard and
without clay, organic or other admixtures, and shall comply with the
requirements.
7.11.1.2 Construction
Mortars to be used for the construction of brick and block work shall be in
accordance with the following table:
Table 34 Proportions of materials in mortars (by volume)

Type of masonry Cement Lime Sand
External walls 1 1 6
Internal partition 1 2 9
Mortars shall be mixed in a mechanical batch mixer in which the quantity of

water can be accurately controlled. For work requiring only small batches of
mortar, mortar may be mixed by hand. The mixing time shall not be less than 5
minutes. The quantity of added water shall be minimum, consistent with
practical work and shall be varied to suit the moisture content of the sand.
Bricks and concrete blocks should completely be soaked before masonry works.
Brick walls and concrete block walls should be kept humid for minimum 3 days
after construction.
7.11.2 Indoor Plumbing Installation
7.11.2.1 General
The water supply and drainage installation at the administration, control and
other buildings shall be constructed according to the Indian regulations & codes
of Indoor Installations.
7.11.2.2 Materials and Methods of Performance of the Work
The water supply network shall be constructed of galvanised steel pipes, PVC
pipes, having pressure strength of PN 10. A bronze chrome-plated bell-type shut-
off valve shall be placed ahead of each bath-room fixture.
The horizontal and vertical drainage network shall be constructed of PVC or tar-
coated cast iron drainage pipes. The drainage of plumbing fixtures up to the floor
siphons shall be accomplished with HDPE or plastic pipes, and sections within

walls shall be constructed from the same material. Branching shall be done
through suitable special pieces. Wash basin siphons shall be made of plastic,
while floor siphons shall be constructed from suitable plastic parts. Horizontal
drainage pipes must have a longitudinal slope of not less than 1.5-2 % according
to size of pipes, and shall rest on grout concrete. Access wells shall be
constructed with concrete and be lined with cement mortar. They shall be
provided with a double cast iron cover.
Rainspouts shall be constructed from galvanised sheet metal and the rain water
collection boxes shall be constructed from suitable HDPE material.
7.11.2.3 Testing
The water supply and drainage system shall be tested with an inside hydraulic
pressure. The Contractor will provide all materials and equipment necessary for
testing. All underground or covered sections of the pipework shall be tested
before being covered up. The drainage system shall be tested by plugging all
necessary openings to permit the system to be filled with water to the level of the
highest vent stack above the roof. The system shall be left full of water for 30
minutes without showing a drop in the water level of the vent pipe. Where only a
portion of the system is to be tested, the test shall be conducted in the same
manner as described for the entire system. The test should be done by installing a
vertical stack up to 3 meters above the highest horizontal line of the portion to be
tested, and filled with water up to that level. The same test pressure may be
created through a pump and be kept stable for at least 30 minutes. The water
supply system shall be tested, before the installation of the fixtures, to a
hydrostatic pressure of at least 50 meters head. The pressure must be maintained
for at least 30 minutes without showing any leakage at the connections.
7.11.3 Painting
7.11.3.1 General
The following surfaces shall not be painted: stainless steel, aluminium, copper,
bronze, surfaces already prepared at the factory, insulated, and surfaces of steel
members to be embedded in concrete.
7.11.3.2 Materials
In the Final Design the following shall be included:

 A list of all surfaces to be painted, the type of the proposed painting, and
manufacturer's leaflets including directions for the preparation of surfaces,
usage of products and recommended thickness of dry coats.

 Three sets of colour scales with all types of colours. After approval of the
colours selected, the Contractor shall submit three samples of each colour
with dimensions 300 x 300 mm. Each sample shall be designated with the
type of finish, number and name of the colour, type of lustre, units of lustre
and batch number.
 Three copies of the quality control program recommended by the supplier's
factory for test and controls of materials brought in for usage at the Site.
In addition to the requirements for the submission of samples of colour paints,
the Contractor, before starting painting, shall prepare on site painting samples on
all types of surfaces to be painted. The purpose of this is to demonstrate the
method of work, the texture of the finish, the colour and the quality of work.
Paints shall be delivered in factory sealed cans with a label indicating the name
of the manufacturer, the type of paint, production date and instructions for
mixing and thinning. Adequate enclosed and well-ventilated storage areas shall
be provided apart from storage for other building materials. The ambient
temperature of these areas shall not be below 4 °C and above 30 °C. Paint
containers shall be opened only before immediate usage. Materials with expired
dates of usage shall not be used.
7.11.3.3 Preparation of Surface
Before the painting gets started, the surfaces shall be filled with filler and after
drying be smoothed with sandpaper. The surfaces shall be treated with a priming
coat at the latest eight hours after cleaning.
More specifically, the preparation of the surfaces shall be done as follows:
Metal surfaces
The metal surface shall be completely cleaned from oils, grease, paints, salts and
pollutants in general, using a cleaning solvent. Loose rust shall be removed. The
surfaces shall be primed with an organic zinc primer. Galvanised surfaces shall
be cleaned from solvents by using water. Water and detergents shall be used for
dirt and chemicals, and a solvent for other dirt’s in general.
Concrete and masonry
Concrete surfaces shall be cleaned from dirty materials, lose or superfluous
mortar, as well as from residues of unsuitable oils used to remove the forms and
from materials used for the preservation of concrete. If necessary the surface will
have to be cleaned by sandblasting. Cracks and other types of defects, too big to
be covered with paint must first be properly filled.
Masonry shall be cleaned from dirty materials, loose and superfluous mortar, and
be perfectly dry. Cracks and any defects too large to be remedied with putty shall
first be made good.
Plastering

Plastering has to be hard and dry. Plastered surfaces must be tested as to

humidity with a hydrometer and no painting should take place if the humidity
content does not agree with the recommendations of the relevant factory of
manufacture. Sand, mould and loose particles shall be removed and surface
defects shall be repaired before proceeding with the painting.
Cracks and holes shall be repaired with putty which provides a good bond with
the existing plaster, and then be smoothed with sandpaper. Plaster surfaces shall
first be covered with a priming coat. If the primer does not dry in a manner to
give a uniform lustre to the entire surface, the areas showing an increased
absorbability shall be primed locally anew before proceeding with the
application of other coats.
Wooden surfaces
Wooden surfaces shall be polished with sandpaper; any loose edges shall be
removed, and be finally brushed to remove the dust. Knots, circular cracks and
visible resinous stains shall be cleaned and filled with putty. The surfaces shall
receive a priming coat and subsequently, any nail holes, seams and joints shall be
filled with putty matching the final colour. The surfaces shall then be polished
with fine-grade sandpaper and brushed to remove the dust.
7.11.3.4 Application of Materials
Electrical wall plates, metal pieces of frames, handles, locks etc. fixtures and
fixings shall be removed before painting. These items shall be carefully stored,
cleaned and replaced to their proper position at the end of the painting work. The
cleaning of metal parts should not be attempted with solvents that may harm
their permanent enamel. Items that cannot practically be removed shall be
covered.
Grills, caps and inspection covers of electrical and mechanical equipment shall
be removed and painted separately. Bare pipes, conduits, junction boxes, special
supports, collars and brackets shall be primed and painted.
All conduits and electrical equipment exposed within painted areas shall be
painted if judged necessary. The colour and the texture shall match those of the
adjacent surfaces. The equipment, conduits, cables and in general any exposed
network shall be painted according to colour codes required by the relevant
technical specifications. This work also includes arrows indicating the direction
of flow, inscriptions with names of identification, numbering, etc. The colour
codes used shall be in agreement with the relevant specifications.
7.11.3.5 Fire Protection
All buildings, including workshops, operational and utility buildings should be

protected against fire hazard in accordance to Indian Regulations.

7.12 Landscaping
7.12.1 General
Prior to commencement of any landscaping work, the Contractor shall submit to

the Engineer for approval his detailed proposals for landscaping including the
proposed species of grass, trees and shrubs.
7.12.2 Material
7.12.2.1 Top Soil
Existing top soil stripped from the site and stored in heaps adjacent to the works
may be reused provided it has not become contaminated and is free of rubble and
debris. Where insufficient site top soil is available additional humus shall be
imported from an approved source. Where the upper layer of natural soil is poor
in organic matter, it shall be improved to a minimum depth of 250 mm by adding
either clay or sand or silt to create a loamy soil texture consisting of 40% sand
(size > 0.05 mm), 30% silt (size 0.05 - 0.002 mm) and 30% clay (size < 0.002
mm).
7.12.2.2 River Sand
River sand for use on the site shall be obtained from an approved source.
7.12.2.3 Grasses
Type of grasses shall be proposed by the Contractor and approved by the

Engineer.
Where the topsoil shall be sown with grass seed, the top 75 mm of the topsoil
shall be brought to a fine tilt suitable for seeding, and sowing shall be carried out
as soon as practicable after completion of top soiling having due regard to the
season and the weather conditions. After the seed has been sown uniformly, they
shall be raked and lightly rolled into the surface. The young grass shall be kept
free from weeds and any bare patches shall be re-seeded until an even close turf
is established. The grass shall be watered and rolled as required and maintained
in good condition.

7.12.2.4 Trees and Shrubs
Trees and shrubs shall be of the species proposed by the Contractor and
approved by the Engineer and shall be of the best quality and free from disease.
They shall be young stock or in the case of shrubs may be established seedlings
or cuttings. All must be sufficiently mature to survive transplanting from the
supply nursery. The rood systems of all plants shall be maintained intact in the
soil in which they have been grown and may be supplied in containers.
7.12.2.5 Gravel
Gravel for use on the site for landscaping shall be of 28 mm nominal size.
7.12.3 Existing trees
7.12.3.1 Inspection of Retained Trees
All trees and shrubs to be retained shall be inspected jointly by the Engineer and
the Contractor at the commencement of the Contract and a list of trees to be
retained shall be agreed. Any tree found to be diseased, dead, dying or unsafe
shall be felled and uprooted subject to the prior approval of the Engineer.
7.12.3.2 Tree Felling
Existing trees and shrubs where directed by the Engineer shall be cut down and
all stumps and main roots shall be grubbed up. All planting thus dealt with shall
be either burnt in situ or removed from the Site. The removed trees place should
be transported to the place by the Employer.
7.12.3.3 Protection of Retained Trees
During execution of works existing trees and shrubs that are to be retained shall
be adequately protected from all operations and from animals. Small trees and
shrubs generally shall be surrounded by adequate temporary fencing to safeguard
trunks and foliage. Large trees shall have suitable screening round trunks, and
low branches shall be protected by temporary fencing or barriers to prevent
damage. Construction materials shall not be stored close to or within the branch
spread of any tree or shrub. Existing ground levels shall be maintained.

7.12.3.4 Maintenance of Retained Trees
Retained trees and shrubs shall be maintained during the Contract and pruned at
completion having due regard to the appropriate time of year for such work to be
carried out. Maintenance shall include removing snags, dead wood and fronds,
sealing cavities and irrigating as required to ensure the continued health of
existing planting.
7.12.3.5 Replacement of Damaged Trees
Should any retained tree or shrub be damaged as a result of the building

operations then it shall be replaced by the Contractor by an equivalent mature
tree or shrub of the same variety.
7.12.4 Implementation of landscaping
7.12.4.1 Preparation of Ground
The areas to be landscaped shall be brought to final ground levels less the depth
required for top soil or other surfacing and all surplus material shall be disposed
of offsite.
7.12.4.2 Cultivation of Ground
The Contractor shall relay 250 mm thick topsoil. Any deficiency in the topsoil
shall be made up with imported top soil. Prior to replacing topsoil areas of the
Site which are to be prepared for grass planting shall be thoroughly broken up by
deep raking and cross raking to a depth of 450 mm. Retained topsoil may be
used as filled to final ground level subject to the approval of the Engineer being
first obtained. Imported top soil shall be used if the existing top soil is
insufficient or unsuitable. Where new and replacement trees or shrubs are to be
planted in agreement with the Engineer, holes 1 m deep below final ground level
shall be excavated in each case. These shall be filled with sweet and topped with
250 mm of top soil. Sand filling shall be thoroughly mixed with 10 kg manure
before placing.
7.12.4.3 Time for Planting
In programming the planting work the Contractor shall take due regard of the
accepted seasons for planting.

7.12.4.4 Top Soil Dressing
Top soil ready to receive planting shall be given a dressing of manure at a rate of
5 kg/m².
7.12.4.5 Supply of Plants
All trees, shrubs, grasses and other plants shall be supplied by the Municipality
based on the Landscape design to be prepared by the Contractor and approved by
Engineer.
7.12.4.6 Planting of Trees and Shrubs
Prior to planting, holes for trees and shrubs shall be prepared and filled twice
with water. Plants shall be watered in their containers so that the soil and the
roots are kept in a moist condition. Plants shall then be removed from their
containers and their root ball complete with soil set in place and the holes
backfilled and the plants firmly trodden in. Soil shall not be allowed to rise
above the original container level and the ground level around the trunk or stem
shall be set below adjacent ground to retain irrigation water.
7.12.4.7 Irrigation
After planting of native tree and shrub species they shall only be irrigated twice
and thereafter only as required. Non-indigenous species shall be irrigated
regularly until handover to the Employer. Grassed areas shall be irrigated
immediately after planting and regularly thereafter until handover.
7.12.4.8 Maintenance
All new plants and grassing shall be maintained after planting. This shall take the
form of irrigation, restacking, pruning, weeding, tilling, etc. to ensure sufficient
growth is achieved by all. Once grassed areas are sufficiently established they
shall be kept cut or mown to provide a uniform depth of growth. Edges of
grassed areas shall be trimmed as necessary. All new plants and grassed areas
shall be protected to prevent damage from workmen, builders’ plant, equipment
and animals, by the use of temporary fencing or other suitable means.
7.12.4.9 Replacement
Any trees, shrubs or areas of grass which fail to satisfactory growth or wither and
die shall be replaced. The responsibility for the irrigation and maintenance of

these replacement plants shall remain with the Contractor until such time as they
exhibit satisfactory growth.
7.12.5 Plan requirements
Areas of the site not occupied by treatment units, buildings, roads or footpaths
shall be evenly graded to a uniform surface.
The landscaping scheme shall be prepared as part of the Final Design and shown
in a plan at a scale of 1:1000.

8. Sewerage System
Sewer pipes are to be laid in accordance with this chapter and following the
Contractor’s design. A possible Layout based on the Detailed Project Report
(DPR) of the Sewer network is attached to this Chapter as Annex 1.
8.1 Pipe Specifications
Except as otherwise specified in these specifications, the Indian/International

Standards and Codes of Practice in their latest version shall be adhered to for the
design, manufacturing, inspection, factory testing, packing, handling and
transportation of product. Should any product be offered conforming to other
standards, the equipment or products shall be equal to or superior to those
specified and the documentary confirmation shall be submitted for the prior
approval of the Project Manager.
8.1.1 RCC Pipe
The manufacturing / supplying, laying and jointing of all Reinforced Cement

concrete (RCC) pipes shall be done in accordance with Standard Specifications.
The pipes shall be spigot and socket type and jointing of RCC pipes shall be
done using rubber gaskets confirming to IS 5382. All the pipes shall be
manufactured as specified in IS 458 and laid in trench as per IS 783. All the tests
as specified in the Standard Specifications shall be performed by the Contractor
at manufacturer’s place in presence of Project Manager’s representative and/or
by third party inspector. The bedding below the pipeline and back filling shall be
provided as per the pipe bedding standard drawing. After the work for laying and
jointing of RCC sewer pipes is completed, the entire section of sewer line shall
be proved by Contractor to be water tight by filling in pipes with water to the
level of 2.50 m. above the top of the highest pipe in the stretch and heading the
water up for the period of one hour, and leak test at work site shall be as per
clause 15.1.12 of Standard Specifications. The sewer line should be tested within
one week time of laying of sewer line.
8.1.2 Double Wall Corrugated Pipes
This specification covers the requirements for manufacturing, supplying,

transportation, handling, stacking, installation, jointing, and testing of Class SN
8 Structured Double Wall (Non-Smooth External Annular Corrugated wall &
Smooth Internal wall) Polyethylene Piping System for non-pressure underground
Sewerage & Drainage Applications herein after called the DWC PE Piping
System.

The manufacturing, testing at factory, supplying, transportation, handling,

stacking, installation, jointing, and testing at sites shall comply with all currently
applicable National statutes, standards & codes. If requirements of these
specifications are at variance with any other standards, this particular document
shall be governed by the proceedings of:
IS 16098 (Part 2) Structured Wall Plastics piping Systems for non-pressure drainage and sewerage-
2013 Specification
Part 2: Pipes and fittings with non-smooth external surface, Type B
ISO 9001 2008 Quality Management Systems
Other Indian standards which are integral part of above standard as normative
references form a significant portion of this specification document.
The DWC Pipes of stiffness class designation SN 8 shall be with BIS mark as
per the Indian standard IS 16098(Part-2) 2013 and shall be configured as per the
indicative Cross-sectional & Profile Drawings annexed herewith.
Each pipe shall be with on line Socket for ID 250mm and above sizes and
with/without online Socket below 250mm (not inclusive) and spigot type along
with elastomeric rubber sealing ring.
DWC Pipes of SN8 grade shall be black outside (mandatory) and orange or black
inside. No other colour shall be permitted.
The Material, Physical, Mechanical Characteristics and the Performance
requirements shall be governed by above IS code and the other relevant IS
standards that has been mentioned within.
The sizes of DWC pipes shall be:
Pipe ID Pipe OD
100 120
135 160
150 180
170 200
200 238
250 290
300 345
400 480
all dimensions are in mm

Performance tests:
The Contractor shall be responsible for the performance tests at the
Manufacturer’s place in presence of the Design-Build Engineer or the authorized
representative(s) of the owner and/or by the authorized ‘Third Party’ deployed
by the owner.
The DWC PE Pipe Manufacturer shall produce all necessary test certificates
related to relevant Material Characteristics of PE Material in Granular Form for
each lot of Pipes as specified in the IS code. At the time of inspection, before
supply of the designated lot to the contractor, such certificates from the
manufacturer, duly supported by the purchaser’s invoices shall be made available
to the Owner with proper endorsement from the third party (if any).
The Owner reserves the right to inspect the Pipe Manufacturer’s unit if required
to evaluate the capacity/ capability/ Quality Assurance before extending their
clearance to the contractor towards procurement of pipes.
Field Sample Inspections:
The Owner/Third party ( if any deployed by the Owner) reserves the right to test
Pipe samples of Pipe & Fittings picked up at random from project site stack
yard/storage for performance test at any NABL accredited Testing Laboratories.
Transportation:
The arrangement of loading the pipes in a telescopic manner is advised, i.e.
smaller diameters inserted into the next higher sizes of pipes. While loading the
pipes onto the truck, care should be taken that the coupler- end should be
arranged alternatively in the corresponding layers so as to avoid the damage to
the coupler/ socket ends.
Handling:
Following Recommendations shall be followed while handling the pipes:
 Adherence to National Safety requirements
 Pipes to be smoothly lowered to the ground
 Pipes should not be dragged against the ground to avoid the damages to the
Coupler/pipes
 800mm and larger diameter pipes are carried with Slings at two points
spaced approximately at 3 Meters apart
 For smaller diameters (400mm – 800mm) one lift point shall be sufficient
& can be handled either manually or mechanically
 Do not use a loading Boom or Fork Lift directly on or inside pipe.
Pipe Storage at Site:
 Stockpiling shall be done temporarily on a Flat Clear Area as per Fig. 1 &
2.
 For avoiding collapse of Stacks, use Wooden Posts or Blocks
 Stacking shall not be higher than 2.5 Meters

 While stacking, alternate the socket/coupler ends at each row of stacked

pipes as shown in Fig. 2.
Fig 1 Fig 2
Lowering, Laying & jointing of Pipes

The width of a Sewer Trench depends on the soil condition, type of side
protection needed and the working space required at the bottom of Trench for
smooth installations. Increase in width over required minimum would unduly
increase the load on pipe and cost of road restoration. Considering all above
factors, the Minimum Trench Width is specified as per Table below:
Table 35 Indicative Trench Widths

Indicative Trench Widths**
Pipe Diameter (mm) Trench Width (m)
75-200 0.6
250 0.7
300 0.8
400 0.9
**
In actual practice the trench width shall be kept as narrow as possible but shall
be adequate to allow the workmen to execute the Lowering, Laying & Jointing
job satisfactorily.
The pipe segment between two manholes shall be laid in a straight line without
any vertical undulations (at prescribed Gradient). The piping system shall rest
on the carefully prepared bedding portion of the Backfill Envelope and at
appropriate jointing locations the trenches shall be excavated deeper to
accommodate the bulges of coupler-spigot joints. However, special care shall be
ensured as mentioned below:
 Excavation of trenches shall be carried out in accordance with the drawing
& specifications and as directed by the field engineer as well.
 The piping system shall be laid and jointed in true to gradient with the help
of sight rails and boning rods as detailed in CPHEEO, MoUD, GoI Manual
on Sewerage and sewerage treatment. The levels need to be checked with
calibrated modern Levelling Instrument. Specific care shall be taken to
prevent entry of sand / mud /slush/ any other foreign material etc into the
system during the installation operation.

The structural property of the system suggests that a minimum cover of 500 mm
is adequate even for maximum quantum of superimposed (live) load.
In case of wider trenches than required (above table), the permission of the
competent authority shall be necessary.
The bedding area is an essential portion of Back fill Envelope and shall be
constructed with proper bedding material as computed in accordance with
appropriate national code of practice for structural bedding design mentioned in
the list of normative references under IS 16098-2.The bedding shall be laid to
specified thickness and gradient with proper manual compaction of the
aggregate.
The moulded on-line coupler (or separate coupler integrated to the pipe in case
of lower sizes) will have a suitable internal surface to push-fit the said end over
the spigot end of the next pipe. On first valley of the corrugation of said spigot
end (destined to receive the pushed coupler), the sealing rubber ring of standard
quality (as specified in relevant BIS Code) shall be placed so that the coupler end
of the pipe smoothly but tightly slides over the sealing ring for making an
absolute watertight joint. Similar system is also used for fabricated accessories or
moulded fittings required such as Tee, Bends, Elbows, Reducer end caps for the
purpose of installation of the system related to drainage/sewerage.
For connections the following steps are to be ensured, failing which the
performance aspects are to be severely compromised:
 The non-coupler (socket) end needs to be thoroughly cleared and shall be
free from any foreign material
 Clean and lubricate the coupler end of the pipe, if required.
 Lubricate the exposed Gasket in the same manner, if required.
 Keep the non-coupler end free from dirt, backfill material, and foreign
matter so that the joint integrity is not compromised.
 Push the coupler onto the non-coupler end and align properly. Always push
coupler end onto non-coupler end.
For smaller diameter pipes simple manual insertion shall be sufficient. It should
be ensured that the coupler end is adequately ‘homed’ on non-coupler end to
ensure installation and tight joining seal. Therefore prior to insertion always
place a ‘Homing Mark’ on appropriate corrugation of the ‘Non-Coupler End’.
For pipes to be cut on site, manufacturer shall provide extra coupler that shall
match the dimensions of the products (at cost).
Construction of backfill envelope and final backfilling of the trenches
DWC Piping System with well compacted Backfill Envelope along with the
bottom and sides of trench (native soil) work together to support soil overburden
and superimposed (traffic) loads. The carefully constructed Backfill Envelop has
three distinct but non-isolated stages. The construction need to be done stage by
stage as per the sequence stated below:
 Bedding portion

 Up to Haunch level
 Remaining portion
The material for backfill envelop shall be in accordance with the structural
design of flexible buried conduit as per relevant National code in meticulous
consultation with ISO 21138-1 &3 :2007 and all other referred International
Codes such as BS EN 1295-1 that forms an integral part of the said ISO
Specifications. The material for the backfill envelope shall be sand or fine
gravel depending on the effected Design Load [Overburden + Superimposed
(Live) load]. However, in no circumstances, the flexible pipe should not be
embedded in cement concrete (un- reinforced or reinforced) which invariably
induces undesired rigidity in the system. The Manufacturer may also be
consulted to provide for the necessary module for the Structural Design of the
‘Backfill Envelope’.
The remaining portion of backfilling which do not contribute to the structural

integrity of the system may be suitable excavated material or imported material.
These materials shall consist of at least clean earth and shall be free from large
clod or stone above 75 mm, ashes, refuse, degradable material, and other
injurious materialsThe remaining portion of backfilling which do not contribute
to the structural integrity of the system may be the materials that were removed
in the course of excavation or any other foreign material as may be required to
suit the particular site condition. These materials shall consist of at least clean
earth and shall be free from large clod or stone above 75 mm, ashes, refuse and
other injurious materials.
After completion of bedding portion of the Backfill envelop and subsequent
lying of pipes, etc, first the haunch portion & then upper portion of Backfill
Envelope shall be constructed as per design around the pipe. Voids must be
eliminated by knifing under and around pipe or by some other indigenous tools.
The compaction, by hand rammers or compactors with necessary watering to a
possible maximum level of proctor density shall be ensured.
Remaining portion of the Construction of ‘Backfill Envelope’ (above the
Bedding Portion) & subsequent final Backfilling of the Trench shall start only
after ensuring the water tightness test of joints for the concerned sewer segments.
However, partial filling may be done keeping the joints open.
Precautions shall be taken against floatation (if at all necessary) as per the
specified methodology and the minimum required cover.
Granular bedding material for rigid pipes shall consist of free draining, hard
broken stone or gravel, free of dirt and dust. The material shall pass through a 25
mm sieve but be retained on a 5 mm sieve. For pipes of 300 mm diameter and
less, the material shall pass through a 12 mm sieve but be retained on a 5 mm
sieve. In order to prevent silt intrusion in wet, fine-grained soils, one part of
coarse sand shall be added to two parts of the above or alternatively a free-
draining all-in material of equivalent grading may be provided.

Granular embedment material for flexible pipes shall comply with the above
specification for rigid pipe bedding material and in addition shall have a
compaction fraction value not exceeding 0.10.
Selected fill shall comprise approved material selected from excavated material
on the site. The material shall be reasonably uniform and completely free from
clay lumps retained on a 75 mm sieve, from stones etc., retained on a 25 mm
sieve and from all vegetable matter, building rubbish and metals. Material to be
used for bedding and surrounding unprotected concrete pipes shall neither
contain more than 0.3% sulphate expressed as sulphur trioxide nor shall it be
obtained from a site where the ground water contains more than 0.01 % sulphate
without approval.
Surface boxes
Cast iron surface boxes for valves, hydrants etc. shall comply with the
requirements of the relevant Indian.
Gully covers and frames

Gully covers and frames shall be manufactured of cast iron as per European
Standard and tested in accordance with any standard approval certificate and
have a minimum size of 400 x 400 mm.
Continuity Test /Hydraulic Testing

Since the entire application pertains to Non-pressure (gravity flow) domain, on-
field pressure testing of the installed system is not necessary. As per the relevant
IS Code, each of the supplied pipe assembly needs to be pressure tested at
manufacturer’s end for ensuring its leakage proof status as per the IS 16098 (Part
2):2013.
However, for on-field acceptability, a segment wise continuity test shall be
performed by the contractor in the same methodology as depicted in the
CPHEEO, MoUD, GoI Manual on Sewerage and Sewage Treatment to the
fullest satisfaction of the Owner/Department/Authorized Third Party (if any).
The contractor shall arrange the water at his own cost for testing and other
requirements.
Notwithstanding the satisfactory completion of the continuity test, if there is any
discernible leakage of water from any pipe or joint, the Contractor shall, at his
own cost, replace/repair the pipe or re-make the joint and repeat the hydraulic
test again.

Criteria for DWC Pipe manufacturer:

Following shall be considered for DWC Pipe manufacture from whom material
is proposed to be procured during execution of work.
General:
The manufacture should have BIS License as per IS 16098 - Part-2 : 2013 for
Manufacturing of DWC / Structured wall PE Pipe since past 3 years or more.
The manufacture should have accreditation of ISO 9001: 2008.
Technical:
The manufacturer should have required Plant, machinery and equipment to
produce DWC pipes having Stiffness class SN-8 of minimum DN/ID up to
400mm.
The manufacturing unit should have minimum annual installed capacity of
10000 tons to produce DWC pipes specified in the bid document.
The manufacturing unit should be well equipped with complete testing facilities
as per IS 16098:2 in house to demonstrate vital tests like Ring flexibility test,
Ring Stiffness test, Creep Ratio test, Water tightness test, Tensile strength test,
Melt Flow Index test, Impact test, Oxidation Induction time test etc.
8.2 House Connections
Sewer connections from inspection chambers to manholes are in the scope of

work of the contractor. These inspection chambers will be constructed along the
road side, as close to the house property lines as possible. The work involves the
laying of HDPE pipes from the property boundaries/roadside chamber to the
street manhole as per drawings, site layout and as instructed by the Engineer in
order to facilitate house sewer connections. Laying of HDPE pipes with required
bedding either directly or through roadside chambers to street manhole shall be
done as per drawing.
Based on the road width this work is classified into two types:
Type I - with construction of roadside chamber. A roadside chamber shall be
constructed close to the property boundaries and on both sides of the road, inside
the road width. The proposed location of the roadside chamber shall be such that
it shall be possible to connect at least two properties to the roadside chamber
with minimum length of pipes. Provision for extra connections into the roadside
chamber may be kept as directed/ approved by the Engineer. Roadside chambers
are not to be provided for road widths (between facing property boundaries) less
than 4.0 m.

Type II - without construction of roadside chamber but with connecting sewer

(sewer leading from property boundaries to the street manholes) laid up to the
property boundaries.
The granular bedding of Type A as per standard drawing shall be provided for
the HDPE pipes. Pipe is to be plugged with end cap and concrete post near the
property boundaries and/or as directed by the Project Manager.
For details to the house connections please refer to the Annex 2 of this chapter
8.2.1 House Connections Inside the Property
House connections inside the property, i.e. connections from inside the
individual house to the road side inspection chambers are within the scope of
work of the contractor. The contractor shall ensure that the all necessary
provisions are made so as to collect the grey water and black water of the
household. The contractor shall present a plan for approval for each property
connection showing the existing situation and works to be performed.
(a) House Sewer Connections to Proposed sewers
(i) In case of house sewers which are to be connected to the existing sewers,
connections are not recommended with Y or T connections as per the Sewerage
Manual. It is recommended to be done by either of the following methods, in
conventional system.
By directly connecting house sewer to the manhole when it is very near to the
property line of the house.
By making one roadside inspection chamber amongst 2 or 3 house connections
nearer to the existing manhole and then connects it to the manhole.
(ii) In Small Bore system, the inlet to the distribution chamber or interceptor
tank shall be connected to the manhole/network system.
(b) House having twin pit toilets
(i) In conventional system, the houses which are having twin pit latrine, the
distribution chamber of the latrine should be connected with the nearby manhole
chamber.
(ii) In Small Bore System the inlet to the distribution chamber or interceptor
tank shall be connected to the manhole/network system
(c) House having septic tank
In case of conventional sewer or small bore sewer if the house is having existing
septic tank, then the inlet of the septic tank will be connected with the nearby
manhole
The following procedure for house connection will be adopted.

8.2.2 Process of Providing House Service Connections in Sewerage Projects
The ‘final connection’ of house service connections shall only be made

following the completion and Pre-commissioning tests in accordance with
Section 3.7.2.
8.3 Ground Water Table
The project area is within the vicinity of major river—River Narmada; there is a
chance of rise of water table during monsoon period. Since the sewer lines are to
be laid at these areas, infiltration has been considered. So there would be a
ground water infiltration problem at the working site.
Therefore, Contractor is to explore the details of water table at and around
working site and if any infiltration due to ground water or sullage water flow or
the water from any other sources shall be taken in to consideration by the
Contractor in his proposed method of working and the Contractor would be
responsible for dewatering and of any damage caused to work or utilities. The
water removed from excavations shall be piped to an approved discharge point.
The discharge of sullage water on the road or open areas shall not be permitted.
Dewatering in low lying areas and marshy areas will be of a continuous nature,
and the contractor has to make special provision to dewater the trenches during
construction. No extra payment would be made to the contractor on account of
such dewatering. Contractor is advised to see site conditions before quoting.
8.4 Manholes
The manholes shall be circular or rectangular and constructed in Brick masonry

or RCC depending on the site conditions. The construction shall be in as per the
IS code of sewer and ancillaries structures for the manholes. The brick masonry
work shall be in general as per Standard Specifications. The manholes shall
generally conform to I.S. 4111. The manhole spacing in general shall be a
maximum of 30m. Manholes shall be provided at every junction, change in
direction or change in diameter of pipe. The Manhole dimensions and other
details shall be as per the drawings given in Annex 2. The Contractor, while
constructing the manholes, shall suitably provide one or two (one each on either
side) HDPE pipe piece/s for the house sewer connection to prevent the undue
breaking of brick masonry/RCC, as directed by the Project Manager.
The manhole cover and frame shall be heavy duty Steel Fiber Reinforced
Concrete (SFRC) and shall be capable of withstanding Class AA loading as per
IRC, and shall conform to IS 12592 (Part I & II).
The inspection and testing of manhole frames and covers shall be done at factory
in presence of Engineer or his representative and the cost shall be borne by the
Contractor.

The entire height of the manhole shall be tested for water tightness by closing
both the incoming and outgoing ends of the sewer and filling the manhole with
water and drop in water level not more than 50 mm per 24 hours shall be
permitted. The Contractor at his own cost shall arrange the required water for
testing and other requirements.
Testing of the sewer network is described in the General Technical Specification
“Civil Works”.
An As-built documentation has to be proved by the Contractor at the end of the
Construction Phase.
Contractor shall take the necessary precautions to avoid the damage to other
services such as water supply lines, telephone cables, electrical cables, storm
water drains etc. In case of any damages to any of the services, Contractor shall
be responsible for restoring the facilities in bare minimum time at his own cost.
The other utility services and traffic shall be maintained in their original shape.
8.5 Setting out of Works
Bench Marks: Before starting any work, the contractor shall erect a permanent
benchmark reference line and check profiles at convenient positions approved by
the Project Manager. The benchmark shall be 20 cm x 20 cm x 60 cm with 40
cm embedded underground and 20 cm above ground. The top surface of the
benchmark shall be truly horizontal and plane. The works B.M. with RL shall be
conspicuously carved and painted on the benchmark. The reference line shall be
comprised of a base line properly marked on the ground by number of masonry
pillars suitably spaced. The check profiles shall be of such materials and shall be
located at such places as to ensure execution of all slopes. Steps and elevation to
the profiles or profiles indicated in the approved drawings as directed by the
Project Manager.
Accuracy of lines, level and grades: The various works shall be done true
to line, level and grade. The periodical checking of these by the department shall
not absolve the contractor or his responsibility regarding the accuracy. In case of
any deviation or discrepancy in line, level and grade the contractor shall make
good the discrepancy at his own cost and without any extra compensation for the
additional work involved.
8.6 Selection of Diversion Work
The contractor shall construct and maintain all necessary temporary Diversion
arrangements and other protection works. The contractor shall also furnish
maintain and operate all necessary pumping and other equipment for dewatering
the various parts of the work and for maintaining the foundation pump, drainage
system, grouting system and other parts of the work and as required for
inspection and safety installation by the Design-Build Engineer even after any

part of the work is completed. The contractor shall pump all water from
foundation and other apartment works and shall keep the foundation free of
water while excavating, preparing the foundations and while placing concrete,
laying reinforcement or as otherwise, required for completing the work. The
contractor shall be entitled to no claim for damages or additional compensation
or payment by reason of any amount of water that may leak through under or
around cofferdams or other diversion and protective works.
The general plan and arrangements of the diversion as required for work
mentioned above shall be prepared beforehand. The contractor shall submit
within one month of the issue of the work order or such period as may be
specified by Design-Build. His plans for the temporary diversion care and
maintenance during the construction for approval of the Project Manager and
once they are approved he shall follow the same.
Approval of the plans for the temporary diversion works by the Design-Build
Engineer shall not relieve the contractor of the responsibility for the adequacy
and efficiency thereof and pumping plant or from furnishing all equipment,
labour and materials necessary for dewatering the foundations and keeping the
work areas free of water at all times necessary within the scope of the contract.
Any changes, modifications or alterations required to suit the conditions during
construction shall be borne by the contractor without extra charge. Any damage
cause by failure or partial failure of his temporary diversion works during
construction period shall be repaired by the contractor at his own expenses
without extra charge on the department.
It will be the responsibility of the contractor to maintain all his diversion work in
good order. He shall also be responsible for providing and maintaining necessary
barriers, fencing, lighting, warning signs, signals and boards, watching and
patrolling and all other safe guards necessary to ensure safety of human and
animal lives and vehicular, pedestrian and animal traffic.
Dewatering shall be carried out as per approval of the Project Manager to enable
inspection, final preparation of surfaces providing anchor bars, grouting, laying
of foundation concrete, laying of reinforced concrete, laying of reinforcement
and all other construction activities.
Electric driven pumps of requisite capacity shall be installed in order to handle
the dewatering. The switchgears and pumping sets shall be maintained in
satisfactory condition to avoid loss of energy. Circuits for pumping set shall be
isolated from any other electric installation.
8.7 Blasting Operations
Blasting operations wherever so certified by the Project Manager may be

resorted to on works for rock excavation or for quarry operations. In conducting
blasting operations, proper precaution shall be taken by the contractors for the
protection of persons, the work and property. The planning of works should be

such that no blasting is required close to structures already erected or foundation

already filled. All Govt. laws and regulations relating to the design and location
of magazines, the transportations and handling of explosives and other measures
enacted for the prevention of accidents and abstracted in appendix 103 of M.P.
PWD manual volume II shall be observed. Warning signs shall be displayed on
all powered magazines.
Blasting in foundation shall be permitted only if the contractor guarantees that
such operations shall not pose any threat or damages to the existing rocks below
and around the proposed units.
I. The excavation of rock requiring blasting shall be done with explosive of
such quantity and moderate power as will not open seams, crack or
damages the rock outside the prescribed lines of excavation. Whenever
blasting is likely to injure the rock upon or against which concrete is to
be placed the use of explosive shall be discontinued and excavation
completed by wedging, chiselling, barring or other suitable method. No
blasting that might injure the rock will be permitted and any damage
done to the rock by the blasting including shattering of material beyond
the repaired at the excavation lines shall be repaired at the expense of and
by the contractor in a manner satisfactory to the Project Manager.
II. Similar restriction on blasting as above shall be placed if required by
Project Manager to prevent any damages to adjacent structure of works
existing or under construction.
III. Use of some silent explosive like Acconesees cement shall be preferable
for such delicate blasting purpose.
In case of accident in blasting operation whether due to the negligence of the
contractor or his workman the contractor shall be responsible for all damages
and claims arising out of the workmen compensation act.
8.8 Disposal of Excavated Material
Before an excavation is started the deposition of soil should be carefully planned.

The excavated material shall be deposited sufficiently clear of the edges of
excavation permitting ample space for railway paths and movements of vehicles
and other machine installation or lifting and dewatering machines, stacking
construction material etc. The excavated material shall be transported to various
works or stacked in piles, in forming stacks in separate areas with reference to
the nature of the material. The material from rock excavation which is fit for use
will require special attention and should be preserved in defined areas. Similar
materials for use as chips or broken stones should be placed in an adjacent pile.
The material from rock excavation will be issued to contractor @ Rs255 per m³
and amount will be deducted from the contractor’s bill. Steps should be taken to
keep the material clean as subsequent cleaning will be difficult and imperfect.
All other excavated materials shall be disposed in permanent spoil banks or other
approved locations, which don’t interfere with the natural flow of the- river, the
flow or water to and from the spillway or outlet works. The disposal shall follow

the requirements of Environmental Management Plan provided in Annex 6,

regulatory requirements of Government of India, Government of Madhya
Pradesh and safeguard policies of KfW. The waste piles shall be levelled and
piles trimmed to reasonably regular lines. Excavated materials shall not be
carelessly thrown over the premises position so far as consistent with proper
execution of the work. Excavated material could be used by the contractor with
the prior written permission of the Project Manager.
8.9 Investigations
The contractor will have to conduct investigation, planning and layout for the
various components. The contractor should himself satisfy about the site
conditions and have to carry out all necessary geological tests like bearing
capacity of rocks, porosity, permeability etc. to find out the suitable type of
foundation after necessary treatment i.e. grouting etc. if required. The contractor
shall solely be responsible for the structural soundness of the whole structure
including its foundation. The depth of the foundation shall extend to the depth of
at least 0.60 meter in hard rock. The contractor shall be deemed to have full
knowledge of actual site condition whether they carry out investigation, test or
not.
All the subsurface explorations shall be carried out by the contractor in
accordance with IS 4453- 2012.
8.10 Pumping Stations Specifications
Two Intermediate Pumping Stations (IPS) and one Main Pumping Station (MPS)
are foreseen.
Vertical Submersible pumps of reputed make and conforming BIS mark having
discharging against total head as per design including all necessary electrical and
other allied works installation shall be supplied, laid, installed, tested and
commissioned.
The work includes the following sub work:
i. Investigation and testing for foundation.
ii. Design and drawing of the structure.
iii. Construction as per approved designed and drawing.
iv. Providing and fixing of pipes, valves and other appurtenances.
v. Testing of the structure for the water tightness and stability.
All materials required for satisfactory completion of the work such as cement,
steel, pipes, specials and valves shall be procured by the contractor himself. The
water required for construction shall be arranged by the contractor.

8.10.1 General Requirements
• The foundation of the structure should be taken down sufficiently below

the average ground level for safe transfer of load to undisturbed formation. The
strata chart of test pit, taken at this should be carried out by the contractor
through Govt. Engineering collage or any other recognized laboratory to
ascertain safe bearing capacity of the soil for design purpose.
• The type of foundation should be suiting to the determined safe bearing
capacity of the soil and shall be designed accordingly. The excavation shall be
done in all sort of strata and if blasting is required, the contractor shall obtain
permission from the competent authority and all rules regarding safety shall be
followed.
• The outlet level should be kept minimum 0.15m above the tank floor level.
A free board of 0,5m should be provided below the lowest surface of the roof
slab or beam. The inlet level should be 0.10m above the full tank level. The
scour level should be kept flush with the floor slab.
• Cast iron step irons with corrosion protection, from the manhole in the roof
slab to floor slab, inside of the tank to facilitate inspection and cleaning.
8.10.2 Pipes and Fittings
The inlet, outlet, over flow and scour pipes for the tanks shall be cast iron double
flanged class A as per IS : 7181-186 all these pipes shall be independent of each
other and shall be fixed in vertical position rigidly by bolting and clamping
properly.
Appropriate size of inlet and outlet pipes, overflow pipes in SUMPWELL shall
be used.
Cast iron bell mouths as per Appendix **2 of CPHEEO manual conforming to
IS 1538-1976 shall be provide on the top end of all pipes. These pipes shall have
CI puddle collars properly embedded in the floor slab at the time of concerting to
provide monolithic joint. Cast iron strainer shall be provided don the top of
outlet and scour pipes,. Cast iron duck foot bends shall be fixed over cement
concrete bed block, to support vertical pipes. The bed blocks shall be designed to
take the load of pipes and the water column indecently. The double flanged Duck
foot shall be provided. 1.2m below average ground level at site.
Cast Iron Double flanged sluice valves with spur gear and hand wheel class PN
1.0 confirming to IS : 14846 with all revision up to date issued of NIT shall be
provided and fixed minimum 3.0 m away from the ground level bracing, along
with necessary C.I.D.F. pipes. The size of the valves shall be appropriately
suitable to the pipes.

The overflow pipe shall be left open at minimum 3.00 m distance from bracing
CIDF pipes shall be provided between Duck foot bends and D.F. sluice. The
contract will limit up to fixing of DF values.
8.10.3 Appurtenaces
8.10.3.1 Ventilators
Mosquito proof ventilators, of suitable design shall be provide on the roof slab of
tank to facilitate discharge of dissolved gases of water and to keep the inside of
tank odour free.
8.10.3.2 Man Hole
An opening of 0.75x0.75m or 0.9m dia size shall be provided in the roof slab fo
tank for access inside the tank for inspection and cleaning. The opening shall
have CI/MS cover with locking arrangement.
Lightening Arrestor:
Aluminium lightening arrester as per relevant B.I.S. shall be above highest point
and 30 mmx4mm size strip connected to earth electrode shall be provided. The
earth strip shall be secured rigidly to concrete surface.
8.10.4 Finishing and Painting
8.10.4.1 Form Finish
All external surfaces on the structure shall have form finish. However all uneven
surface and small defects shall be made even immediately after removal of forms
with 1:1 cement mortar. The inside surface of the tank shall be rendered even
and water proof by cement plaster in 1:2 portion.
8.10.4.2 Painting of Concrete
The outside surface of the Sump shall be painting with 2 coats of IS marked
cement colour of approved make. The colour shade shall be decided by the
Engineer-in-Charge.
8.10.4.3 Painting of Pipes etc.
Cast iron pipes, valves and fittings, shall be painted with 2 coats of black
bituminous paint.

8.10.4.4 Painting of MS Ladders and MH Cover
As the MS ladder inside of the tank and manhole cover shall be subjected to
corrosive action of chlorinates water they shall be coated with epoxy paint
8.10.5 Testing of Sumpwell
In addition to the structural test as given in IS 456-1978 revised and amended up

to date the Sump well shall also be tested for water tightness at maximum water
level in accordance with clause **1.1 of IS 3370 (part-I0 1965. The tanks shall
be filled more than 0.25m per day and the settlement of foundation of foundation
shall be measured accurately before each filling. Any defect of any sort affecting
the strength, durability, appearance of usefulness of the structure noticed during
testing shall be completely removed to the satisfaction of executive Engineer
with in the specified time for completion of work.
8.10.6 Reinforces Concrete Works
It shall be strictly as per IS 456 & IS 3370 (part (i) to (iv), IS 11682 and other
relevant specification revised up to date for RCC structure s.
01. Minimum strength of concrete:
Minimum strength of concrete for components of elevated tank shall be as
below:
Columns, staging - M25 (250kg/sqm.cm)
Tank including roof - M-30 (300kg/sqmc.m)
02 Minimum cement content:
From durability considerations minimum content shall be as below:
Concrete MK-25 - 350mg/cum
Concrete M-30 - 400kg/cum
03 The cover of concrete:
The minimum cover shall be 40mm all the reinforcement & for foundation this
cover shall be 60mm.
04. Cement Grade:
Grade 43of cement should be used for columns and grade 53 for the tank portion,
including the top dome cover only fresh cement should be used in the tank. It is
advisable to use cement, manufactured by major plant and reputed firms OPC or
blast furnace slag cement should be used.
05 Water cement ratio

Water cement ratio shall not be more than 0.45. This means 22.5 litres of water
per 50kgt beg of cement.
06. Use of Chemicals
When the water cement ratio is less his strength and durability of concrete of
concrete is good. It is advisable to use plasticizers in concrete and reduce water
cement ratio up to 0.4 plasticizers manufactured by reputed combines are
recommended.
(i) Sika Qualcretae 24-B park street, Calcutta, 7000 16 CM Bauchemie PVT
Vardhman chambers sector 17 Vashi new Mumbai 400703
(ii) Rioffe, 12 c Vikascenter, S.V. Road Betul, Creuze, West Mumbai 400054.
(iii) Fos Rock India Ltd. Hafeea Chambers 2nd floor 111/74 K.H. Road
Bangalore 560027.
(iv) Shallmar tar products, construction Additive division 16 NGN Vaidya
Marg, bank street Mumbai. 400023.
Proportion of plasticiser to be used shall be as per the instruction manual
supplied by the manufactures.
8.10.7 Minimum Dimension and Shapes
Minimum Dimension shall be as below:

Circular 400mm
Tank wall 200mm
Bottom slab 150mm
Top slab 125mm
Note: If a dome is provided at the top, the thickness can be limited to 100mm
rectangular square columns are not allowed and circular shafts are also not
allowed. In respect of horizontal braces corners shall be chamfered by 40x40mm
Form
01 The contractor shall provide form that will produce correctly aligned
concrete.
02 The centering shall be true and rigid and thoroughly based both horizon
tally and diagonally. The forms shall be sufficiently strong to carry the dead
weight of the concrete without defection and tight enough to prevent leakage of
mortar.
03 For exposed interior or exterior concrete surface of columns and walls,
steel or other approved corrosion resistance devices shall be used.
04 Rigid care shall be exercised that all columns are in plum and true &
thoroughly cross braced to keep them so.

05 All floor and beam concreting shall be crowned not less than 6mm in all
direction for every 4.8 meter span.
06 Bevelled strains shall be provided in form, angles and in corners of column
and beam boxes for chamfering of corners where shown in drawings or as
directed.
07 The inside of forms shall be coated with approved oil thoroughly wetted oil
shall be applied before reinforcement is placed.
08. Temporary openings for cleaning and inspections shall be provided at the
base of vertical forms and at other places when they are necessary.
8.10.8 Minimum Steel
Design requirements as set out in relevant codes in respect of steel shall be full
satisfied. However, following minimum steel should be provided
a) Vertical steel in column 0.8% of cross sectional area actually required
& 0.3% when larger section than actually required is provided.
b) Horizontal links in columns not less than 8mm dia at 200mm c/c or 10mm
dia not more than 300mm c/c.
c) Exposed RCC Surface On both faces when thickness is 150mm or
more.
2 kg/sqm in one direction.
2 kg/sqm in perpendicular direction.
The above requirement is satisfied if.
8mm bars @ 200mm c/c OR
10mm bars @ 300mm c/c are provided.
Even if design steel is less than above, the above minimum shall be
provided.
d) Steel in tanks As per provision of IS 3370 subject to minimum as set out
in (c) above.
8.10.9 Minimum Spacing of Reinforcement
Maximum spacing of main reinforcement in slab or walls shall not be more than
150mm centre to centre. The spacing of secondary bars, such as distribution steel
of vertical bars in columns shall not be more than 300 mm centre to centre.

8.10.10 Type of Reinforcing Steel
The grade of reinforcing steel shall be Fe 415 TMT.
8.10.11 Exposed Surface
01 Imperfect surfaces where strength is not impaired may be patched and

rubbed smooth with carborundum brick.
02. Fins and projection shall be removed and the concrete surface affected
there by shall be rubbed smooth.
03. Small voids shall be filled with 1:3 mortar pressed into holes and floated
smooth.
04. Plastering and steel trawling of surface shall not be allowed.
05 Honey comb concrete shall be repaired by removal and replacement of
member.
06. Forms shall be filled tightly so as to minimize fins joints shall be finished
with bevels strips as directed by the Engineer-in-charge.
8.10.12 Curing of Concrete
01. It is extremely important to make arrangement for supply of sufficient

water at the construction site for curing of the concrete. Continuous and efficient
curing is extremely important for development of good compressive strength in
any concrete structure.
02. After finishing concreting, curing shall be done by damping concrete at
least for one week after placing. Floor & vertical surfaces shall be covered with a
layer of old gunny bags or similar absorbent material and kept constantly wet.
Curing operations shall begin as soon as the concrete has attained initial set. All
materials and facilities for curing concrete shall be on hand and ready for use
before concrete is placed.
03. Concrete shall be kept wet and moist for at least two weeks.
8.10.13 Floor Finish
Tank wall and floor finish shall be monolithic bonded.

8.10.14 Removal of Form
01 In no circumstances forms shall be struck until the concrete reaches

strength of at least twice the stress to which the concrete may be subjected at the
time of striking.

02. In normal circumstances i.e. at temperature 21 C forms may be removed at

the following minimum times which will be subject to the Engineer's
requirement.
Wall 02 days
Columns 03 days
Beams soffits (sides) 05 days
Bottom of beams up to 6m span 14 days
Bottom of beams above 6m span 21 days
Slabs 125mm thick or less, up to 4.6m span 07 days
Slabs 125mm thick or less, above 4.6m span 14 days
Slabs over 125mm thick or, up to 4.6m span 18 days
Slabs over 125mm thick or above 4.6m span 14 days
04 All concrete shall be inspected for quality before forms are removed.
05. When struck by a carpenter's hammer it shall ring like stone.
06. Upon removal of forms the contractor shall place adequate precautions to
prevent injury to the concrete by construction loads.
07. The contractor shall be responsible for safe removal of forms and for
placing adequate precaution.
8.10.15 Approval of Material
Before use, samples of all materials shall be got tested from recognized
laboratory by the contractor at his own cost and the test certificate shall be
furnished to the Project Manager & no material shall be used until it has been
approved.
8.10.16 Proposed Pumping Stations
8.10.16.1 Pumping Stations For Barwani
Table 36 IPS 1
Design Flow (year 2033) 1.50 MLD

Minimum Retention Time: 3.75 minutes minimum at peak flow
No. of pumps: (1W+1S 1DWF), (1W-2DWF) and (1W-3DWF) or as per
combination of Pumps given in CPHEEO Manual
Type of pumps: Submersible type non-clog design
Solid passage size through: 100 mm max

Insulation: Class F
Protection: IP-68
Wet well Specific Requirement, Material of Construction and Accessories:
i. Number of Units (1) One designed for peak flow

ii Material of Construction RCC Wet well / Sump
Table 37 IPS 2

Insulation: Class F
Protection: IP-68

Table 38 MPS

Insulation: Class F
Protection: IP-68

8.10.17 Sump and Pumps
Sewage enters into wet well of the pumping station after screening. The wet well
shall be circular/rectangular in shape and shall be designed for an average flow.
The capacity of the wet well should be kept such that the detention time in the

wet well shall be minimum 5 minutes of peak flow and the maximum detention
time shall not exceed 30 minutes at average flow. Following criteria's shall be
considered to size the sump:
1 That the pump of the minimum duty/ capacity would run for at least 5
minutes considering no inflow or
2 The capacity of the sump is to be so kept that with any combination of
inflow and pumping the operating cycle for any pump will not be less than
5 minutes and
3 The arrangement of the submersible pumps as per pump manufacturer's
data i.e. spacing between pumps, minimum space between pump and wall
etc.
4 The side water depth (live liquid depth) shall be minimum 2.5 meter. In
addition to the above liquid depth an additional depression shall be
provided to ensure adequate submergence of the pump as per the
manufactures recommendations Pumping station should have a room
adequate for installing electrical panels. Suitable arrangement should be
provided for lifting of pumps.
5 The effective liquid volume shall be provided below the invert level of the
screen chamber after leaving provision for a minimum of 0.3 m.IS: 3370
and IS: 4111 (part 4) shall be followed for the design and construction of
wet well. Pumping machinery shall be designed for average flow and a
peak factor as per CPHEEO Manual. The pumps shall be Submersible raw
sewage pumps with centrifugal, non-clog type design. The speed of pump
shall not be more than 1500 rpm. The impeller should be of a non-clog
design with smooth passage and solid handling capability of 100 mm size.
The pumps will have automatic coupling arrangement at discharge end for
removal and a guide pipe and chain in SS 304 will be provided for removal and
lowering of pumps. Pump shall run smooth without undue noise and vibration.
Vibration shall be limited as per BS 4675 Part I.
The motor shall be squirrel cage type, suitable for three phase supply continuous
duty with class `F' insulation. Motor shall have integral cable parts and the cable
entries shall be sealed. Complete rotor shall be balanced dynamically.
The size of the sump shall be suitable to accommodate the number of pumps
required for operation with easy manoeuvrability.
The Pump House shall be suitably sized to house the Electrical Control Panel,
space for spare parts and a maintenance area, etc. and be complete with the
following accessories:
i. Hoist - comprising of I-Girder and a 11/2 ton or more chain pulley (the
chain pulley block capacity to be 11/2 Ton or 1.5 times the maximum
single unit/ weight that may be required to be removed for maintenance)
with horizontal travel on the I-beam.

ii. The room shall be covered from sides to protect it from the natural
elements. Ventilation in the sheds shall be as per NBC norms specified in
the Civil Construction manual.
iii. The room shall be suitably designed to avail of natural lighting and
ventilation.
iv. Internal Illumination at levels suitable for proper lighting.
8.10.18 Testing of Pumps at Manufacturers Premises
a) Hydrostatic Testing : All pressure parts of pumps prior to assembly, shall be

subjected to hydrostatic tests to the satisfaction of Project Manager at 1.5
times the maximum pressure obtained with the delivery valve closed and
suction pressure at maximum, or twice the working pressure whichever is
higher for a duration of 10 minutes.
b) Balancing Test: Impeller and pump rotating assembly shall be dynamically
balanced.
c) Performance Test: Each pump shall be tested for full operating range
individually to BS: 5316: Part 2. Test shall be carried out for performance at
rated speed with minimum NPSH as available at site.
d) Pump performance shall be within the tolerance limits specified in BS: 5316:
Part 2.
8.10.19 Electrical, Instrumentation and Control
The scope of works and services shall include everything that is required for the
pumping stations ready for automatic operation.
It is not limited to the process but also includes building services and everything
necessary to ensure proper operation and safe work even if it should not be listed
or specified in here. Qualified, testing, start-up and documentation is obligatory.
The control of the pumping stations must communicate with the STP SCADA
and ensure full operability and diagnosis from the control room of the STP.
The demands on the electrical system of pumping stations conforms to the
electrical specifications of the STP and electrical works. If an aspect should not
be meaningful to adopt of these chapters, an appropriate solution has to be
suggested by the contractor.

9. Road Construction Specifications
9.1 Reinstatement of roads
The road restoration/ reinstatement shall be carried out after completion and
necessary testing of all the Works and only after approval of the Project
Manager. However, the contractor is required to do temporary road restoration
within 48 hours of the pipe laying or when he finished laying of a section of
pipes with a maximum length of 100m.
Contractor shall make good of the road surface to the original grade, level and
specifications as per Bill of Quantities. Trenches shall be back filled in layers as
per clause mentioned in this section, well-watered and well compacted before
road restoration to avoid settlement of restored strip. In case any settlement of
the road restoration strip, the Contractor has to rectify the surface by redoing the
restoration work at no extra cost to the owner as per Bill of Quantities.
Permanent Road restoration shall be done as per the requirements of applicable
IRC guidelines and as directed by the Project Manager. The replacement of road
structures shall be carried out as soon as practicable and in conformity with IRC
guidelines after backfilling has been completed. Suitable excavated road
pavement which complies with the requirements of the Project Manager may be
used at the sub-base levels. Compaction shall be carried out with approved
mechanical compacting equipment.
The edges of the trench shall be cut to form a straight line consistent with fixed
width of trench. A vertical joint shall be formed between the new work and the
existing road surface and shall be painted with hot bitumen or rich cement slurry
as the case may be, as approved by the Project Manager. The joint between the
base course and wearing course shall be stepped 75 mm. The finished levels of
the completed reinstatement shall conform to the adjoining carriage way surface.
Reinstatement of the wearing courses shall match as nearly as practicable the
colour or other characteristics of the existing surface.
9.2 Water Bound Macadam Sub-Base/Base
This work shall consist of clean, crushed aggregates mechanically interlocked by

rolling and bonding together with screening, binding material where necessary
and water laid on properly backfilled pipeline and manhole trenches and finished
in accordance with the requirements of these specifications and as directed by the
Project Manager.
The scope involves Providing, laying , spreading and compacting stone
aggregates of specific sizes to Water Bound Macadam specification including
spreading in uniform thickness, hand packing, rolling with 3 wheeled
steel/vibratory roller 8-10 tones in stages to proper grade and camber, applying
and brooming requisite type of screening/binding materials to fill up the
interstices of coarse aggregates, watering and compacting to the required

density with all lead & lifts etc. complete with the following two layers of
materials each compacted to 75 mm thick,
a) Materials (Refer table 400 - 7, 8 & 9) Using Screening Crushable type such
as Moorum or Gravel Grading-II (Clause: 404 of MORT & H).
b) Material (Refer table 400 - 7, 8 & 9) Using Screening Crushable type such
as Moorum or Gravel Grading-III (Clause: 404 of MORT & H).
9.2.1 Materials
a) Coarse aggregates - Coarse aggregates shall be either crushed or broken

stone, crushed slag, over burnt (Jhama) brick aggregates or any other
naturally occurring aggregates such as kankar and laterite of suitable
quality. Materials other than crushed or broken stone and crushed slag shall
be used in sub-base courses only. If crushed gravel / shingle is used, not
less than 90 per cent by weight of the gravel/shingle pieces retained on
4.75 mm sieve shall have at least two fractured faces. The aggregates
shall conform to the physical requirements set forth in Table 400-6. The
type and size range of the aggregate shall be specified in the contract or
shall be as specified by the Project Manager. If the water absorption value
of the coarse aggregate is greater than 2 per cent, the soundness test
shall be carried out on the material delivered to site as per IS: 2386 (Part
5).
b) Crushed or broken stone - The crushed or broken stone shall be hard,
durable and free from excess flat, elongated, soft and distinguished
particles, dirt and other deleterious material.
Table 39 Physical requirements of coarse aggregates for water bound

macadam for sub– base courses.
Test Test Method Requirements
1 * Los Angeles Abrasion value IS:2386 40 percent (Max.)
Or
*Aggregate impact value IS:2386 (Part-4) or IS;5640** 30 percent (Max.)
2 Combined Flakiness and Elongation IS:2386 (Part - 1) 30 percent (Max.)
indices
(Total)***
* Aggregate may satisfy requirements of either of the two sets.

** Aggregates like brick metal, kankar, laterite etc. which get softened in
presence of water shall be tested for Impact value under wet condition in accordance
with IS:5640.
*** The requirement of flakiness index and elongation index shall be enforced only
c) (c) Crushed slag - Crushed slag shall be made from air-cooled blast furnace
slag. It shall be of angular shape, reasonably uniform in quality and density

and generally free from thin, elongated and soft pieces, dirt or other
deleterious materials. The weight of crushed slag shall not be less than 11.2
KN per m3 and the percentage of glossy material shall not be more than 20.
It should also comply with the following requirements:
(i) Chemical stability: To comply with requirements of appendix of BIS:
1047
(ii) Sulphur content: Maximum 2 per cent
(iii) Water absorption: Maximum 10 per cent
d) Over-burnt brick aggregates -Brick aggregates shall be made from over

burnt bricks or brick bats and be free from dust and other objectionable and
deleterious materials.
e) Grading requirement of coarse aggregates - The coarse aggregates shall
conform to one of the Grading given in Table 400 – 7 as specified,
provided; however, the use of Grading No. 1 shall be restricted to sub-base
courses only.
Table 40 Grading requirements of coarse aggregates

Gradation Size range I.S. Sieve designation % by weight passing
1 90 mm to 45 mm 125 mm 100
90 mm 90-100
63 mm 25-60
45 mm 0-15
22.4 mm 0-5
2 63 to 45 mm 90 mm 100
63 mm 90-100
53 mm 25-75
45 mm 0-15
22.4 mm 0-5
3 53 to 22.4 mm 63 mm 100
53 mm 95-100
45 mm 65-90
22.4 mm 0-10
11.2 mm 0-5
Note: The compacted thickness for a layer with Grading 1 shall be 100 mm while for layer with
other grading i.e., 2 & 3, it shall be 75 mm.
f) Screenings - Screenings to fill voids in the coarse aggregate shall generally

consist of the screen material as the coarse aggregate. However, where
permitted, predominantly non-plastic material such as murrum or gravel
(other than rounded river borne material) may be used for this purpose
provided liquid limit and plasticity index of such material are below 20 and

6 respectively and fraction passing 75 micron sieve does not exceed 10 per
cent.
Screenings shall conform to the grading set forth in Table 400-8. The
consolidated details of quantity of screenings required for various grades of
stone aggregates are given in Table 400 – 9. The table also gives the
quantities of materials (loose) required for 10 m2 for sub-base base
compacted thickness of 100/75 mm. The use of screenings shall be
omitted in the case of soft aggregates such as brick metal, kankar, laterites,
etc. as they are likely to get crushed to a certain extent under rollers.
Table 41 Grading for screenings
Grading classification Size of Screenings IS Sieve designation % by weight passing the IS sieve
A 13.2 mm 13.2 mm 100
11.2 mm 95-100
5.6 mm 15-35
180 mm 0-10
B 11.2 mm 11.2 mm 100
5.6 mm 90-100
180 mm 15-35
The following table shows the approximate quantities of coarse aggregates and
screenings required for a 100 / 75 mm compacted thickness of water bound
macadam (WBM) sub-base / base course for 10 m2 area.
Table 42 Approximate quantities of coarse aggregates and screenings

Screenings
Crushable type such as murram or
Stone screening
Compact thickness gravel
Classification Size Range
Loose Qty.
Grading For WBM sub-base/ Grading
classification and base course (loose classification and Loose Qty.
size Qty) size
Grading -1 90mm to 45mm 100 mm Type A 0.27 to 0.30 m3 Not Uniform 0.30 to 0.2 m3
1.21 to 1.43 m3 13.2 mm
Grading -2 63mm to 45mm 75 mm Type A 0.12 to 0.15 m3 - do - 0.22 to 0.24 m3
0.91 to .7m3 13.2 mm
- do - - do - - do - Type B 0.20 to 0.22 m3 - do - - do -
11.2 mm
Grading -3 53mm to - do - - do - 0.18 to 0.21 m3 - do - - do -
22.4mm

g) Binding material - Binding material to be used for water bound macadam as

a filter material meant for preventing gravelling, shall comprise of a suitable
material approved by the Project Manager having a Plasticity Index (PI)
value of less than 6 as determined in accordance with IS : 2720 (Part 5).
The quantity of binding material where it is to be used will depend on the
type of screenings. Generally, the quantity required for 75 mm compacted
thickness of water bound macadam will be 0.06 – 0.09 m3 / 10m2 and
0.08 – 0.10 m3/ 10 m2 for 100 mm compacted thickness.
9.2.2 Construction Operations
(a) Preparation of base - The surface of the sub-grade /sub-base/base to the

specified lines and cross fall (camber) shall be made free of dust and other
extraneous material. Any ruts or soft yielding places shall be corrected in an
approved manner and rolled until firm surface is obtained if necessary by
sprinkling water. Any sub-base /base / surface irregularities, where predominant,
shall be made good by providing appropriate type of profile corrective course
(levelling course) to applicable clause of these specifications.
As far as possible, laying water bound macadam course over an existing thick
bituminous layer may be avoided since it will cause problems of internal
drainage of the pavement at the interface of two courses. It is desirable to
completely pick out the existing thin bituminous wearing course where water
bound macadam is proposed to be laid over it. However, where the intensity of
rain is low and the interface drainage facility is efficient, water bound macadam
can be laid over the existing thin bituminous surface by cutting 50 mm x 50 mm
furrows at an angle of 45 degrees to the centre line of the pavement at one meter
intervals in the existing road. The directions and depth of furrows shall be such
that they provide adequate bondage and also serve to drain water to the existing
granular base course beneath the existing thin bituminous surface.
(b) Inverted choke - If water bound macadam is to be laid directly over the sub-
grade, without any other intervening pavement course, a 25 mm course of
screenings (Grading B) or coarse sand shall be spread on the prepared sub-
grade before application of the aggregates is taken up. In case of a fine sand or
silty or clayey subgrade, it is advisable to lay 100 mm insulating layer of
screening or coarse sand on top of fine grained soil, the gradation of which will
depend upon whether it is intended to act as a drainage layer as well.
As a preferred alternative to inverted choke, appropriate geo-synthetics/ Jute
geotextile performing functions of separation and drainage may be used over the
prepared subgrade as directed by the Project Manager. Section 700 shall be
applicable for use of geo- synthetics/ Jute geotextile.
(c) Spreading coarse aggregates - The coarse aggregates shall be spread
uniformly and evenly upon the prepared sub-grade/sub-base/base to proper
profile by using templates placed across the road about 6 m apart, in such

quantities that the thickness of each compacted layer is not more than 100 mm
for Grading 1 and 75 mm for Grading 2 and 3, as specified in specifications
above. Wherever possible, approved mechanical devices such as aggregates
spreader shall be used to spread the aggregates uniformly so as to minimize
the need for manual rectification afterwards. Aggregates placed at spread in
one or more layers by any approved means so as to achieve the specified results.
The spreading shall be done from stockpiles along the side of the roadway or
directly from vehicles. No segregation of large or fine aggregates shall be
allowed and the coarse aggregate as spread shall be of uniform gradation with no
pockets of fine material.
The surface of the aggregates spread shall be carefully checked with templates
and all high or low spots remedied by removing or adding aggregates as may be
required. The surface shall be checked frequently with a straight edge while
spreading and rolling so as to ensure a finished surface as per approved drawings.
The coarse aggregates shall not normally be spread more than 3 days in advance
of the subsequent construction operations.
(d) Rolling - Immediately following the spreading of the coarse aggregate,
rolling shall be started with three wheeled power rollers of 80 to 100 KN
capacity or tandem or vibratory rollers of 80 to 100 KN static weight. The type
of roller to be used shall be approved by the Project Manager based on trial run.
Except on super-elevated portions where the rolling shall proceed from inner
edge to the outer, rolling shall begin from the edges gradually progressing
towards the centre. First the edge/ edges shall be compacted with roller running
forward and backward. The roller shall then move inward parallel to the centre
line of the road, in successive passes uniformly lapping preceding tracks by
at least one half width.
Rolling shall be discontinued when the aggregates are partially compacted with
sufficient void space in them to permit application of screenings. However,
where screenings are not to be applied, as in the case of crushed aggregates like
brick metal, laterite and kankar, compaction shall be continued until the
aggregates are thoroughly keyed. During rolling, slight sprinkling of water may
be done, if necessary. Rolling shall not be done when the sub-grade is soft or
yielding or when it causes a wave-like motion in the sub-grade or sub-base
course.
The rolled surface shall be checked transversely and longitudinally, with
templates and any irregularities corrected by loosening the surface, adding or
removing necessary amount of aggregates and re-rolling until the entire surface
conforms to desired cross fall (camber) and grade. In no case shall the use of
screenings be permitted to make up depressions.
Material which gets crushed excessively during compaction or becomes
segregated shall be removed and replaced with suitable aggregates.
(e) Application of screenings - After the coarse aggregate has been rolled to as
per above specification, screenings to completely fill the interstices shall be

applied gradually over the surface. These shall not be damp or wet at the time
of application. Dry rolling shall be done while the screenings are being spread
so that vibrations of the roller cause them to settle into the voids of the coarse
aggregates.
The screenings shall not be dumped in piles but be spread uniformly in
successive thin layers either by the spreading motions of hand shovels or by
mechanical spreaders, or directly from tipper with suitable grit spreading
arrangement. Tipper operating for spreading the screenings shall be so driven as
not to disturb the coarse aggregate.
The screenings shall be applied at a slow and uniform rate (in three or more
applications) so as to ensure filling of all voids. This shall be accompanied by
dry rolling with mechanical brooms, hand-brooms or both. In no case screenings
shall be applied fast and thick as to form cakes or ridges on the surface in such a
manner as would prevent filling of voids or prevent the direct bearing of the
roller on the coarse aggregate. These operations shall continue until no more
screenings can be forced into the voids of the coarse aggregate. The spreading,
rolling, and booming of screenings shall be carried out in only such lengths of
the road which could be completed within one day’s operation.
(f) Sprinkling of water and grouting - After the screenings have been applied,
the surface shall be copiously sprinkled with water, swept and rolled. Hand
brooms shall be used to sweep the wet screenings into voids and to distribute
them evenly. The sprinkling, sweeping and rolling operation shall be continued,
with additional screenings applied as necessary until the coarse aggregate has
been thoroughly keyed, well-bonded and firmly set in its full depth and a grout
has been formed of screenings. Care shall be taken to see that the base or sub-
grade does not get damaged due to the addition of excessive quantities of water
during construction.
In case of lime treated soil sub-base, construction of water bound macadam on
top of it can cause excessive water to flow down to the lime treated sub-base
before it has picked up enough strength (is still “green”) and thus cause damage
to the sub-base layer. The laying of water bound macadam layer in such cases
shall be done after the sub-base attains adequate strength, as directed by the
Project Manager.
(g) Application of binding material - After the application of screenings in
accordance with the above clause, the binding material where it is required
to be used shall be applied successively in two or more thin layers at a slow
and uniform rate. After each application, the surface shall be copiously
sprinkled with water, the resulting slurryswept in with hand brooms, or
mechanical brooms to fill the voids properly, and rolled during which water
shall be applied to the wheels of the rollers if necessary to wash down the
binding material sticking to them. These operations shall continue until the
resulting slurry after filling of voids, forms a wave ahead of the wheels of the
moving roller.

(h) Setting and drying - After the final compaction of water bound macadam
course, the pavement shall be allowed to dry overnight. Next morning hungry
spots shall be filled with screenings or binding material as directed, lightly
sprinkled with water if necessary and rolled. No traffic shall be allowed on the
road until the macadam has set.
The Project Manager shall have the discretion to stop hauling traffic from using
the completed water bound macadam course, if in his opinion it would cause
excessive damage to the surface. The compacted water bound macadam course
should be allowed to completely dry and set before the next pavement course is
laid over it.
9.2.3 Reconstruction of Macadam
The finished surface of water bound macadam shall conform to the tolerance of
surface regularity as prescribed in the relevant IS standards. However, where the
surface irregularity of the course exceeds the tolerances or where the course is
otherwise defective due to sub-grade soil mixing with the aggregates, the course
to its full thickness shall be scarified over the affected area, reshaped with added
material or removed and replaced with fresh material as applicable and re-
compacted. In no case shall depressions be filled up with screenings or binding
material.
9.2.4 Arrangement for Traffic
During the period of construction, the arrangement of traffic shall be done by the
Contractor in accordance with the applicable clause of this section.
9.3 Priming of Base Course with Bituminous Primers
This specification relates to the operation of priming an absorbent base course,

preparatory to a subsequent bituminous treatment, through application of a low
viscosity bituminous material by spraying. The specification is intended to
indicate what is considered to be a good practice for priming and shall apply
unless modified by special provisions to take into account any unusual
conditions.
The scope involves, Providing and applying primer coat with bitumen emulsion
on prepared surface of granular Base of low porosity such as WBM including
clearing of road surface and spraying primer at the rate of 0.75 kg/sqm using
mechanical means. As per MORTH specification clause No. 502 complete in
all respects with all lead & lifts etc. complete.

9.3.1 Materials
The bituminous primer to be used should be such that it can penetrate into
the base course to perform its intended function.
Table 43 3 Types of primer

Type of Surface Emulsion Cut-back Road tar
Low porosity Not suitable MC-0 RT-1 or RT-2
Medium porosity SS or MS MC-1 or SC-1 RT-2 or RT-3
MC-2 or SC-2
High porosity MS MC-3 or RC-1 RT-3 or RT-4
The primers shall conform to IS: 8887 – 1978 (for cationic emulsions), IS: 217-
1961 (for cut-backs), and IS: 215-1981 (for road tars), as applicable.
9.3.2 Viscosity
For selecting the appropriate type of primer out of the materials indicated in
Table 1, the atmospheric temperature during application should be given
consideration. Also, within the range of viscosity specified, the primer for use
may be selected keeping in view the level of porosity of the surface to be treated.
9.3.3 Quantity of Primer
The primer shall be applied at the rate of 0.75 kg/m².
9.3.4 Construction
a) Weather and seasonal limitations: Cut-back and road tar primers shall not
be applied on wet surface or during dust storm or when the weather is
foggy or rainy. Bitumen emulsion can be applied on wet surface.
However, emulsions shall not be applied during dust storm or when it is
actually raining. Atmospheric temperature during priming should be above
10oC.
b) Equipment: All equipment required for the execution of work should be in
good working condition at site.
c) Preparation of base course surface: The base course surface to be primed
shall be swept clean and free from dust. All loose materials and other
foreign matter on the surface shall be removed completely, if necessary by
using power blowers or sweepers.

Large irregularities, potholes, depressions, etc. shall be repaired prior to

priming. Minor depressions may be ignored until the surface is primed.
After which these might be patched with a suitable premixed material
prior to the subsequent bituminous treatment. The underlying surface shall
be dry prior to priming. Except that in the case of bitumen emulsions, it
may be desirable to dampen the surface slightly in order to obtain better
penetration of the primer.
Pre-wetting should be done by water spraying, using equipment capable of
uniform application of water over the entire surface. The spraying may be
taken up 2 to 12 hours before priming, in such quantity that the surface
during priming is damp but not saturated with water. Traffic shall be kept
off the prepared areas prior to priming.
d) Application of primer: After the base to be primed has been prepared as
described above, the primer shall be uniformly applied over the surface
using mechanical sprayers. Rate of application of primer shall correspond
to the quantities given in specifications unless specified otherwise.
The spraying should preferably be carried out using sprayer mounted on
distributor truck or with hand sprayer using mechanical pump. The use
of hand-held containers such as watering cans, perforated buckets etc., is
unacceptable and should not be permitted under any circumstances.
Quantity should be checked periodically using Tray Coating Test or any
other suitable means.
Temperature of application of primer should be high enough to permit the
primer to be sprayed effectively through the jets of the spray bar and to
cover the base course surface effectively.
e) Curing: The primed surface shall be allowed to cure fully. No traffic
shall be allowed over the primed surface during this period and in any
case not before 24 hours if the primer is a cut-back bitumen and 6 hours in
the case of bitumen emulsion. Any pool of excess cut- back primer, which
has not been completely absorbed by any part of the base course surface
during the curing period, should be carefully swept over the adjacent
surface, and then a light sand blotter course applied. The amount applied
should be just sufficient to blot up the excess bitumen and prevent it being
picked up under traffic. If an excess of bitumen residue is found on the
primed surface after bitumen emulsion has broken, a very light sand
dusting may be applied to soak up the surplus material.
All loose sand should be swept from the base course surface prior to any
subsequent bituminous treatment.
9.3.5 Tack Coat
Providing and applying tack coat with bitumen emulsion using emulsion
pressure distributor at the rate of 0.375 kg/m² on the prepared granular surface

cleaned with mechanical broom such as WBM surface as per MORTH

specification clause No. 503 complete in all respects with all lead & lifts etc.
complete for old surfaces at vertical and horizontal joints.
9.4 Single Coat Bituminous Surface Dressing
This specification is intended to indicate what is considered to be good practice

for construction of single coat bituminous surface dressing and shall apply
unless modified by special provisions to take into account unusual conditions.
The work specified consists of a wearing surface composed of a single
application of bituminous material covered with one application of cover
material of size as specified below, applied on a previously prepared base or
pavement.
The specific scope involves, Providing, laying and rolling of open-graded
premix surfacing of 20 mm thickness composed of 13.2 mm to 5.6 mm
aggregates either using penetration grade bitumen 80/100 or cut-back or
emulsion to required line, grade and level to serve as wearing course on a
previously prepared base, including mixing in suitable plant, laying and rolling
with a smooth wheeled roller 8-10 ton capacity, finished to required level and
grades. Mechanical method using Penetration grade Bitumen and HMP of
appropriate capacity, as per MORTH specification No.511 complete in all
respects. (Bitumen 1.46 kg/m². Metal = 0.027) with 40-60 TPH hot mix with all
lead & lift etc. complete.
9.4.1 Materials
a) Bituminous materials - The bituminous materials shall be of grade 80/100

or cut-back conforming to the requirements as specified and provided for
in the proposal and satisfy the related specification, issued by the Indian
Standards Institution (vide I.S.I Standards 73-1961,215-1961,217-1961 and
454-1961).
b) Cover materials
(i) General requirements - The cover material shall consist of crushed
stone, crushed slag crushed gravel (shingle) or other stones, as specified,
and shall have clean, strong, durable, and fairly cubical fragments free
from disintegrated pieces, salt, alkali, vegetable matter, dust and adherent
coatings. The aggregate shall preferably be hydrophobic in nature and of
low porosity.
(ii) Physical requirements - The aggregate shall satisfy the requirements
given in Table below.
Sl. Property Value Method of test
No.

1 Abrasion value, using Los Angeles IS: 2386 (Part IV)

Machine or Max. 35%
Aggregate impact value Max. 30% - do -
2 Flakiness index Max. 25% IS: 2386 (Part I)
3 Stripping value Max. 25% IS: 6241
4 Water absorption (except in case of slag) IS: 2386 (Part III)
Max. 1%
5 Soundness: Loss with sodium sulphate – 5 IS: 2386 (Part V)
cycles (in case of slag only)
Max. 12%
6 Unit weight or bulk density (In case of slag Min.1120kg/ m3 IS: 2386 (Part III)
only)
Where all these conditions cannot be satisfied, it is left to the Project

Manager to allow reasonable tolerances.
Size - The size of chippings to be used shall depend on whether the treatment is
for the first coat or for the subsequent or renewal coat and shall be as per the
size specified below. For single application of the aggregate, it is desirable to
keep the grading of the various sizes as specified in Table below.
Sieve designation nominal size of aggregate Specification

I For surfacing water-bound macadam - 100% passing through 20 mm
first coat square mesh sieve and retained on 10
mm square mesh sieve
II For subsequent or renewal coats 10 mm 100% passing through 12.5 mm square
mesh sieve and retained on 6.3 mm
square mesh sieve.
Note – It is essential to sieve the aggregates through proper size sieves to ensure the size
stipulated in the specifications. The sieve sizes indicated above are as per IS: 460 – 1962.
9.4.2 Construction Methods
a. Weather and seasonal limitations - Preferably, the surface dressing

work shall be carried on only when the atmospheric temperature in shade is
28.30°C or above. No bituminous material shall normally be applied when the
surface or the cover material is damp, when the weather is foggy or rainy or
during dust storm, except, in case of emulsions, the surface should be slightly
damp.
b. Equipment - All equipment necessary for the proper construction of work
shall be on the site of the work in good condition.
c. Preparation of road surface - The underlying course on which surface
dressing is to be laid shall be prepared, shaped and conditioned to a uniform

grade and section as specified. Any depressions or pot-holes shall be properly

made up and thoroughly compacted sufficiently in advance. The
defective parts should be clearly cut out and the patches of new material put in,
and not put on the existing surface.
Where the existing surface shows signs of "fatting-up", such position should be
rectified. It is important that the surface be dry and thoroughly cleaned
immediately before applying the binder. The surface should be swept clean free
of caked earth and other foreign matter cleaned first with hard brushes, then with
softer brushes and finally blowing off with sacks or gunny bags to remove the
fine dust. The base shall be applied with Tack coat uniformly preferably by a
mechanical sprayer.
d. Application of bituminous material - After the surface to be treated has
been prepared, as specified above; bituminous material shall be sprayed
uniformly over the dry surface preferably using mechanical sprayers. The
binder shall be applied at a temperature appropriate to the type of binder and
equipment used. The premix open graded surfacing consisting of aggregates
13.2mm to 5.60mm shall be applied to an uniform thickness as per applicable IS
standards to get the final compacted thickness of 20mm.
e. Rolling cover materials - Immediately after the application of the
cover materials as described, the entire surface shall be rolled with a 8 to 10 ton
smooth wheeled road roller. The rolling shall begin at the edge and proceed
lengthwise, over the-area to be rolled lapping not less than one third of the
roller tread and proceed towards the centre. When the centre is reached, the
rolling shall then start at the opposite side and again proceed towards the centre.
In the super-elevated portions, the rolling should proceed from the inner to the
outer edge. While the rolling is in progress, additional aggregate shall be
spread by hand in whatever quantities may be required to fill irregularities and to
prevent picking up of the aggregate by the roller. Rolling shall be continued
until the particles are firmly embedded in the bituminous materials and present a
uniform closed surface. Excessive rolling which results in the crushing of the
aggregate particles shall be avoided.
f. Finishing - The finished surface shall be uniform and conform to the
lines, grades and typical cross sections shown in the specifications.
g. Opening to traffic - When straight run bitumen or road tar is employed as
the binder, the finished surface shall be thrown open to traffic on the following
day but if in special circumstances, the road is required to be opened to
traffic immediately after rolling, speed of the traffic shall be limited to 28.30
km per hour till the following day.
Where cutback bitumen and emulsion is employed, the finished surface shall
be kept closed to the traffic until it has sufficiently cured to hold the cover
aggregates in place. Controlling of traffic shall be done by some suitable
device, such as barricading and posting of watchmen, etc.

9.4.3 Seal Coat
The scope of work involves Providing and laying seal coat sealing the voids in
bituminous surface laid to the specified levels, grade and cross fall using
Type A seal coat as per MORTH specification clause No. 513 complete in all
respects with all lead & lift etc. complete.(Bitumen = 0.98 kg/m², Metal =0.009).
9.5 Construction of Concrete Roads
This is intended to indicate what is considered to be good practice for the

construction of cement concrete road pavements, including preparation of the
subgrade and sub -base underneath these pavements. This does not however
cover the requirements of fully mechanized constructions.
The scope involves providing specified thickness of 1:3:6 proportion cement
concrete as base course and specified thickness of 1:1.5:3 proportion cement
concrete as wearing course as per approved construction drawings and
specifications.
9.5.1 Materials
a. Ordinary Portland Cement/ PPC/PSC- This should comply with the

requirements of IS – 8112/IS-1489-part-1/IS-455 with latest revisions
b. Aggregates
General - Aggregates should comply with IS - 383 -1970 "Specification for
Coarse and Fine Aggregates from Natural Sources for Concrete (Second
Revision)" with special reference to the additional requirements stipulated for
use in road works excepting in the case of Los Angeles Abrasion Test limit.
The Los Angeles Abrasion Test limits shall be not more than 35 per cent and 50
per cent for concrete wearing course and sub -base course respectively. ln
addition, the limits of deleterious material shall not exceed the requirements set
out in IS - 515 -1959 “Specification for Natural and Manufactured Aggregates
for Use in Mass Concrete." Weathered rock should not be used. In order to make
good concrete, it is important to avoid crushed aggregate of poor shape. Very
angular, flaky, elongated or splintery aggregates give a harsh mix of low
workability. Maximum size of aggregate should not exceed l/4 of the pavement
slab thickness. In case of pavements having reinforcement, maximum size of
aggregate should also not exceed l/4 of minimum clear spacing between
reinforcing bars.
c. Coarse aggregates
Continuous grading- Continuously graded coarse aggregate should be
furnished in at least two separate sizes with separation at 20 mm I.S. sieve when

combined material graded from 40 to 4.75 mm is specified, and at 25 mm I.S.

sieve when combined material graded from 50 to 4.75 mm is specified.
d. Fine aggregate - Fine aggregate shall preferably be natural sand. Crushed
stone sand may also be used satisfactorily in concrete. The fine aggregate shall
conform to IS: 383 -1970, the permissible percentage passing limits on 300 and
150 -micron sieves shall be 15 -55 per cent and 0 -20 per cent respectively
instead of 15 -50 percent and 0 -15 per cent as stipulated in IS Specification.
Crushed sand is usually more angular in shape than naturally occurring sand,
and for this reason may tend to make the mix a little harsher. In some cases, it
may prove advantageous to use a mixture of naturally occurring sand and
crushed stone sand if the former is not obtained in adequate supply or where its
grading is poor. Bulking due to presence of moisture in the fine aggregate should
be accounted for when volumetric batching is employed.
e. Water - Water used in mixing or curing of concrete shall be clean and free
from injurious amounts of oil, salt, acid, vegetable matter or other substances
harmful to the finished concrete. It shall meet the requirements stipulated in
clauses of IS: 456 -2000 "Code of Practice for Plain and Reinforced Concrete".
Potable waters are generally considered satisfactory for mixing or curing.
f. Dowel and tie bars - Dowel and tie bars shall be plain round steel bars
conforming to the requirements of IS: 432 -1966.
g. Pre-moulded joint filler – Pre-moulded joint filler shall be of the thickness
shown on the drawings within a tolerance of 1.5 mm. It shall be 25 mm less
in depth than the thickness of the slab, within a tolerance of 3 mm and of the
full width between road forms. Holes to accommodate dowel bars shall be
accurately bored or punched out. The joint filler shall comply with the
requirements of IS: 1838 -1961 "Specification for Preformed Fillers for
Expansion Joint in Concrete, Non -extruding and Resilient Type (Bitumen -
impregnated Fiber)."
9.5.2 Water Content and Workability
The water content per batch of concrete should be maintained constantly except
for suitable allowances to be made for free moisture and absorption by
aggregates determined from time to time during construction. Adjustments for
workability shall be made by variations in the ratio of the coarse to fine
aggregate or improving upon their grading without change in cement content or
water -cement ratio. The slump of the concrete mix for pavements compacted by
vibration should not be more than 25 mm, preferably between 0 and 12 mm, and
that by manual compaction not more than 50 mm. No price adjustment would be
permissible for variations in the gradations of the aggregates or in the ratio of
coarse to fine aggregates necessitated from adjustment at site.

9.6 Tools, Equipment and Appliances
9.6.1 Tools
All tools, equipment and appliances necessary for proper preparation of sub-
grade, laying of sub -base and batching, mixing, placing, finishing and curing
of concrete shall be at the project site in good working condition and shall have
been inspected by the Project Manager before the paving operations are
permitted to start. Throughout the construction of the project, the construction
agency shall maintain all necessary tools, equipment and appliances in first class
working condition to ensure proper execution of the work. Arrangements shall
also be made for requisite number of stand -by units in the event of break -downs
during construction.
List of tools, equipment and appliances
A list of tools, equipment and appliances required for the different phases of
concrete road construction is given below.
This list pertains to semi -mechanized type of construction only, as practiced
most in this country.
(a) Subgrade and sub -base compaction
(i) Compaction equipment (three wheeled or tandem roller, pneumatic
roller, vibratory roller or sheep -foot roller), (ii) Watering devices (water
lorries, water carriers or watering cans),
(b) Preparation of sub -bass for concreting and formwork
(i) Scratch templates or strike boards, (ii) Bulk –heads, (iii) Pick axes,
shovels and spades, (iv) Formwork and iron stakes
(c) Concrete manufacture
(i) Shovels and spades, (ii) Sieving screens, (iii) Weigh batcher, (iv)
Aggregate measuring boxes (only where volume batching of aggregates is
permitted as a special case), (v) Water pump, (vi) Water measures, (vii)
Concrete mixer
(d) Transportation, laying and compaction of concrete
(i) Wheel barrows/iron pans, (ii) Wooden bridges, (iii) Spades, (iv)
Concrete vibrators (both internal and screed board types) (v) Wooden hand
tampers

(e) Finishing operations - surface and joints

(i) Wooden bridges, (ii) Floats (longitudinal and long -handled wooden
floats) (iii) Templates, (iv) Three -meter long straight edges including one
master straight edge, (v) Graduated wedge gauges, (vi) Mild steel sections
and blocks for making joint grooves, (vii) Edging tools including double -
edging tools, (viii) Canvas belts, (ix) Long handled brooms, (x) Diamond
cutter (when making saw -cut joints), (xi) Grinder (for grinding local high
spots),
(f) Curing
(i) Hessian cloth burlap or polyethylene sheeting, (ii) Watering devices as
in a (iii) (for ponding operation)
(g) Cleaning and sealing of joints
(i) Iron raker, (ii) Coir brush, (iii) Cycle pump/pneumatic air blower, (iv)
Kerosene stove, (v) Thermometer, (vi) Transferring pot, (vii) Painter's
brush, (viii) Pouring kettle, (ix) Scraper
9.6.2 Sub –base
Plain cement concrete of 1:3:6 proportion for specified thickness as in

construction drawing shall be laid in accordance with the respective specification
in Bill of Quantities and the surface finished to the required lines, levels and
cross -section.
9.6.3 Steel Forms
Steel forms - All side forms shall be of mild steel unless use of wooden
sections is specially permitted. The steel forms shall be mild steel channel
sections of depth equal to the thickness of the pavement. The sections shall
have a length of at least 3 m except on curves of less than 45 m radius, where
shorter sections may be used. When set to grade and staked in place, the
maximum deviation of the top surface of any section from a straight line shall
not exceed 3 mm in the vertical plane and 5 mm in the horizontal plane. The
method of connection between sections shall be such that the joint formed
shall be free from difference in level, play or movement in any direction.
The use of bent, twisted or worn -out forms will not be permitted. At least three
stake pockets for bracing pins or stakes shall be provided for each 3 m of form
and the bracing and support must be ample to prevent springing of the forms
under the pressure of concrete or the weight or thrust of machinery operating
on the forms.
The supply of forms shall be sufficient to permit their remaining in place for
12 hours after the concrete has been placed, or longer if necessary in the opinion

of the Project Manager. Wooden forms - Wooden forms may be used only
when specifically permitted in the drawing with the exception that their use is
herein approved for all curves having radii of less than 45 m. Wooden forms
shall be dressed on one side. They shall have minimum base width of 100 mm
for slab thickness up to 200 mm and a minimum base width of 150 mm for
slabs over 200 mm thick. Their depth shall be equal to the thickness of the
pavement. These forms when used on straight shall have a minimum length
of 3 m. Forms shall be held by stakes set at intervals not exceeding 2 m. Two
stakes, one on each side, shall be placed at each joint. The forms shall be firmly
nailed or secured to the side stakes, and securely braced at joints, where
necessary, so that no movement will result from the pressure of the concrete or
the impact of the tamper and during finishing work. Wooden forms shall be
capped along the inside upper edge with 50 -mm angle iron well recessed and
kept flush with the face of the wooden forms.
Setting of forms - The forms shall be jointed neatly and shall be set with
exactness to the required grade and alignment. Both before and after the forms
are placed and set the sub grade or sub -base under the forms shall be thoroughly
tamped in an approved manner. Sufficient rigidity shall be obtained to support
the forms in such a position that during the entire operation of compacting and
finishing of concrete they shall not at any time deviate more than 3 mm from
a straight edge 3 m in length. Forms, which show a variation from the required
rigidity or alignment and levels shown in the drawing, shall be reset or
removed, as directed. The length and number of stakes shall be such as to
maintain the forms at the correct line and grad -e. All forms shall be cleaned
and oiled each time before they are used. Forms shall be set for about 200m
ahead of the actual placing of concrete.
9.6.4 Joints
General - The location and type of joints shall be as shown in the drawing. The
edge of the slab at all joints shall be rounded off with an edging tool. The
concrete along the face of all joints and around all tie bars and dowels shall be
compacted with an internal vibrator inserted in the concrete and worked along
the joint and around all tie bars and dowels to ensure a concrete free from
honeycombing.
Types of joints - There are three general types of joints. These are:
Expansion joint - Such joint provides the space into which pavement can
expand thus relieving compressive stresses due to expansion and inhibiting any
tendency towards buckling of concrete slabs.
Contraction joint - Such joint relieves tensile stresses in the concrete and
prevents formation of irregular cracks due to restraint in free contraction of
concrete. Contraction joints also relieve stresses due to warping.

Warping joint - Such joint relieves stresses due to warping. These are
commonly used for longitudinal joints dividing the pavement into lanes.
In addition, construction joints are provided whenever construction operations
require them. These are full depth joints and may belong to any of the above
types.
All joints shall be carefully installed in accordance with the location and details
given on the plans.
9.6.5 Transverse Joints
General - Transverse joints can be expansion, contraction or construction joints

and shall be placed as indicated on the drawing. They shall make a right angle
with the centre line of the pavement and surface of the sub -base/subgrade.
Contraction and expansion joints shall be continuous from edge to edge of the
pavement through all lanes constructed at the same or different times.
a. Transverse expansion joints - These shall extend over the entire width of the
pavement. They shall be of the dimensions and spacing as shown on the
construction drawing.
Dowel bars (see Supplementary Note N. 4) as per dimensions, location and
spacing shown on the drawing are required at expansion joints to transfer
wheel loads to the adjacent slab. For slabs of thickness less than 150 mm no
dowel bars may be provided (IS: 6509 -1972). The pre-moulded expansion joint
filler, a compressible material used to fill the gap between adjacent slabs at
expansion joint shall conform to IS: 1838 -1961. The height of the filler board
shall be such that its top is 25 mm below the surface of the pavement. The
dowel bars shall be held accurately in position during the placement,
compaction and finishing of concrete at and near the expansion joint. This
and the protection of the joint groove during construction may be achieved by
means of sufficiently strong bulkheads (as per IRC: 43 -1972) with holes
drilled along the centre line to accommodate the dowel bars and a mild steel
section (as per IRC - 43 -1972) respectively. The latter shall be oiled or
greased before placing in position to avoid bonding with concrete. The top
and bottom edges of the bulkheads and mild steel section shall be shaped to
correspond to the camber of the pavement at the joint. If considered
convenient, two -piece split bulkheads may also be used. When dowel bars are
provided, bulkheads shall be used in pairs, one at the joint location, and the
other some distance away to hold the projecting ends of the dowel bars to
maintain their alignment. For cases where dowel bars are not provided, one
single bulkhead without holes will be adequate. The bulkheads shall be securely
staked in place at right angles to the centre line and surface of the pavement with
sufficient stakes to hold them in the specified position.
After the concrete has sufficiently hardened the mild steel metal section shall be
removed carefully without disturbing the edges. The edges shall then be rounded

with an edging tool. For facilitating removal of the mild steel section as well as
edging operation, the top of the section may be flared on both sides with the
required curvature of a rounded edge.
Under no circumstances shall any concrete be left above the expansion joint
filler or across the joint at any point. Any concrete spanning the ends of the
joint next to the forms shall be carefully cut away after the forms are removed.
b. Transverse contraction joints - These shall be placed as shown on the
drawing and shall be of the weakened plane or "dummy" groove type. They
shall be constructed byforming in the surface of the slab a slot not less than 6
mm wide and having a depth equal to one -third to one -fourth the depth of
the pavement at the thinnest part of its section. This slot may be formed in a
manner approved by the Project Manager such as by pushing into the
concrete a flat bar or the web of a "T" bar using a suitable vibratory device,
removing the bar, and keeping the slot open. It shall be ensured that no spalling
of concrete occurs while removing the bar. The edges of the joint shall be
rounded with an edging tool before the concrete hardens.
c. Transverse construction joints - These shall be placed whenever placing of
concrete is suspended for more than 30 minutes. Excepting in the case of
emergency, construction shall always be suspended at the regular site of
expansion or contraction joints. If the construction joint is located at the site of
an expansion joint, regular expansion joint shall be provided; if at the site of a
contraction joint or otherwise, the construction joint shall be of butt type with
dowels.
At all construction joints, bulkhead shall be used to retain the concrete and care
shall be taken in striking off and finishing the surface to the top face of the
bulkhead. When work is resumed, the surface of concrete laid subsequently,
shall conform to the grade and cross -section of previously laid pavement, and a
straight edge 3m in length shall be used parallel to the centre line, to check any
deviation in the surface of the two sections. Any deviation from the general
surface in excess of 3 mm shall be corrected.
9.6.6 Longitudinal Joints
These shall be of the plain butt type and shall be formed by placing the concrete
against the face of the slab concreted earlier. The face of the slab concreted
earlier, shall be painted with bitumen before placing of fresh concrete.
Tie bars shall be used at longitudinal joints and they shall be of the dimensions
and at spacing shown in the construction drawing. Tie bars shall be supported so
as not to be displaced during construction operations. Tie bars shall be bonded
in the slabs across longitudinal joints, and whilst casting the first slabs, they
may be bent so that one end of them lies along the forms. After removal of the
forms, bars shall be straightened so that they extend into the concrete placed on
the other side of the joint.

9.6.7 Construction
a. Storage and handling of cement

Cement shall not be stored for a long time and should be used normally
within six months of its date of receipt. Even during this period of storage it
is essential that cement shall be protected from moisture by storing it in
suitable sheds. Storage shed with a concrete floor laid on a well -drained
foundation may be satisfactory. Cement in bags shall be stored on boards raised
above the floor level for the purpose of ventilation, and the bags shall not touch
the walls of the shed. Different consignments should be separately stacked
and used in order in which they have been received. When bulk supply
cement is used, special storage facilities such as covered hopper bins will be
required. Supply of cement should be co-coordinated with its consumption so
that it is not stored right through the rainy season, when normally concreting is
discontinued. Cement having lumps which have been caused due to improper
storage or by pressure due to over -loading of bags shall not be considered for
use unless these lumps can be easily powdered with pressure between fingers.
Before such cement is used, representative sample containing also the lumps in
fair proportion shall be taken and tested as per IS - 269 -1976, 8112 -1976,
1489 -1976, 455 -1967 or 8041E -1976 as the case may be, to fulfil the
minimum requirements.
b. Storage and handling of aggregates
The location and preparation of sites, minimum size of stack and the methods
adopted for dumping and stacking to prevent segregation of coarse and fine
material shall be subject to the approval of the Project Manager. Aggregates
from different sources and/or of different grading shall not be stacked
together. Each separate size of coarse aggregate shall be stacked separately.
The storing of aggregates upon the carriageway or shoulders shall not be
permitted.
If aggregates are stored in conical stacks, segregation will be increased by the
rolling of the coarser particles down the sides of the stacks. To avoid this, stacks
should be built up in approximately horizontal layers. Dry fine aggregate
segregates and gets blown away easily it may be helpful to moisten it. To
assist in controlling the water/cement ratio, large fluctuations in the moisture
content of aggregates may be reduced by storing the bulk of the material well
in advance of use. For this purpose, all washed aggregates shall be stacked for
draining at least 12 hours before being batched. It is also a good practice to
reserve the bottom 150 -300 mm or so of the stacks as a drainage layer. Where
this cannot be done, the aggregates should not be placed on the ground. In such
case, somewhat raised planks, metal sheets or concrete base should be provided
and laid to slopes.
The aggregates shall be handled from the stacks and fed into the mixer in such a
manner as to secure the stipulated grading of the material. Aggregates that have

become mixed with earth or other foreign material shall not be used. They shall
be washed clean before use.
c. Batching of materials
All batching of materials shall be by weight or volume as approved by the
Project Manager. The proportion of ingredients shall be as specified in the item
of work in Bill of Quantities, The Project Manager may permit the use of
fractional bags of cement provided they are accurately weighed and are handled
in a manner meeting with his approval. Water may be measured by volume. It
should, however, be borne in mind that weigh batching is definitely much more
desirable than volume batching. If batching by volume is permitted, as a special
case, separate measuring boxes shall be provided for the different aggregates.
The boxes shall be of strong construction provided with handles for convenient
lifting and loading into the mixer. They shall be of such size that it should be
possible to measure out the requisite quantity of aggregate per batch in whole
box or by multiples thereof and capable of being lifted by two men. Each box
shall be provided with a straight edge of required length for striking off after
filling. If so directed by the Project Manager, improved facilities such as tipping
boxes of accurate capacity working on run - out rails arranged for direct delivery
into the hopper of the mixer shall be provided by the construction agency. In
volume batching, suitable allowance shall be made for the hulking of fine
aggregate due to the presence of water. For this purpose the bulking shall be
determined as per relevant Indian Standard Specification.
d. Mixing
General - The mixing of concrete shall be done in a batch mixer of approved
type, which will ensure a uniform distribution of materials throughout the mass,
so that the mix is uniform in colour and homogeneous. All concrete shall be
mixed in quantities for immediate use.
The mixer shall be equipped with approved water -measuring device capable of
accurate measurement of water required per batch. The mixer shall preferably be
equipped with a mechanically operated pump for filling the mixer tank.
The mixer, if so specified, shall be equipped with an approved timing device
which will automatically lock the discharge lever during the full time of mixing
and release it at the end of the mixing period; the device shall also be equipped
with a ball, adjusted to ring each time the lock is released. If the timing device
gets broken, the mixer will be permitted to be used while the same is being
repaired, provided an approved time -piece equipped with minute and second
bands is provided. Each batch shall be mixed for at least one and a half
minutes. Spilling of the materials at either end of the mixer shall be corrected by
reducing the size of the batch and in no case shall the volume of the mixed
material per batch exceed the manufacturers guaranteed capacity of the mixer.
The type, size and number of mixers shall be so chosen as to provide the
required output without overloading. The mixing speed of the drum shall not be
less than 15 revolutions per minute nor the peripheral speed of the drum greater
than 60 m per minute. The batch of cement, fine aggregate and coarse aggregate

shall be fed into the mixer simultaneously with the water being introduced either
at the same time or before the dry materials. The entire contents of the drum
shall be discharged before any materials are placed therein for the succeeding
batch.
The skip shall be so maintained and operated that each batch will be completely
discharged into the mixing drum at the loading of the mixer. The mixer shall be
cleaned at suitable intervals while in use.
Pick -up and throw -over blades in the drum of the miner which are worn down
20 mm or more in depth shall be replaced with new blades.
Time of mixing - The mixing of each batch will continue not less than one
and half minute after all the materials are discharged into the mixer.
Re-tempering - The re-tempering of concrete i.e. remixing with or without
additional cement, aggregate or water shall not be permitted.
9.6.8 Control of Workability and Strength
a. Work ability of concrete - The workability of concrete shall be checked by

performing "slump test" or "compacting factor test" in accordance with IS ; 1199
-1959 “Method of Sampling and Analysis of Concrete." The frequency of
testing shall be one test per 10 m3 of concrete and the permissible tolerances
from the specified value for workability shall be -
Slump ± 12 mm
Compacting factor ± 0.03
Where variations beyond the permitted tolerances are observed, necessary
adjustment shall be made keeping the water cement ratio same.
b. Strength of concrete - The strength of concrete shall be determined either by
compressive or flexural strength tests (preferably the latter, since concrete
pavements are designed on the basis of flexural strength of concrete) depending
on the facilities available. For this purpose, during the progress of the work,
cube/beam samples shall be cast for testing at 7 and 28 days. Sampling and
testing shall be done in accordance with IS - 1199 -1959 “Method of Sampling
and Analysis of Concrete" and IS - 528.30 -1959 "Method of Test for Strength
of Concrete" respectively. The minimum frequency of samples shall be 3
cube/beam samples for each age of 7 and 28 days for every 30 m3 of concrete.
On a paying job, the strength of concrete should be continuously monitored to
ensure that the desired strength is achieved. In certain -cases, because of
change in the source ofcement or control or climatic factors, the strength
may show some variations, which would require re -designing of the mix.

9.6.9 Transporting and Placing of Concrete
The concrete shall be mixed in quantities required for immediate use and shall be
deposited on the sub -base to the required depth and width of the pavement
section, in successive batches and in continuous operation without the use of
intermediate forms or bulk -heads between joints. Care shall be taken to see that
no segregation of materials results whilst the concrete is being transported
from the mixer to the place where it is deposited. The usual method of
transport of concrete in India is in pans as head loads or in small wheel barrows.
The spreading shall be as uniform as possible to avoid re- handling of the
concrete. Where, however, a certain amount of re -distribution is necessary, it
shall be done with shovels and not with rakes. While being placed, the concrete
shall be tamped with suitable tools for slab thicknesses of 12.5 cm and less so
that formation of voids or honeycomb pockets is prevented. The concrete shall
be particularly well placed and tapped against the forms and along all joints, for
higher thicknesses an internal vibrator shall be employed in lieu of rodding of the
concrete. To effect adequate compaction, the concrete shall be placed with
appropriate surcharge over the final slab thickness. The amount of surcharge
will depend on the mode of placement of concrete and shall be determined by
trial. In general, the required surcharge is about 20 per cent of the required slab
thickness. Any portion of the batch of concrete that becomes segregated while
depositing it on sub-grade shall be thoroughly mixed with the main body of the
batch during the process of spreading. In case of unavoidable interruption, a full
depth transverse joint shall be made at the point of stoppage of work provided
the section on which the work has been suspended is about 2 to 3 hours long. In
placing of concrete for two course construction, necessitated by either
positioning of the reinforcement, a richer mix for the wearing surface, or when
thickness of the concrete is beyond 20 cm, the bottom layer of concrete shall be
struck off to the required levels by a vibrating screed working on the side forms
with notches corresponding to the depth of the top course of concrete.
The vibrating screed should have a vibrating unit mounted on it similar to that of
the screed used for compaction of the final surface of concrete. The time lag
between laying of the two courses shall not exceed the initial setting time of
cement.
9.6.10 Placement of Steel
a. Reinforcement - Reinforcing steel shall be free from dirt, scale or other

foreign matter and rust of such degree or development as to impair bond of the
steel with the concrete. The width of fabric sheets or bar mats shall be such that
when properly placed into the work the extreme longitudinal bars or wires of the
sheets or mats will be located not less than 50 mm and not more than 100 mm
from the edges of the slab. Except for dummy joints, the length of fabric sheets
or bar mats shall be such that when properly placed into the work, the
reinforcement will be clear of transverse joints by not less than 50 mm and not

more than 100 mm as measured from the centre of the Joint to the ends of
longitudinal bars or wires of the sheet or mat.
While overlapping the sheets or mats in either direction, the overlap shall be
at least equal to the spacing between the bars or wires in the respective direction
or 40 times the diameter of the bar or wire, whichever is more.
Whilst using reinforcement in one layer, the concrete shall be placed in two
stages. Theinitial layer shall be uniformly struck off to a depth corresponding to
the reinforcement shown in the drawings and lightly compacted by a screed to
obtain uniform levels. The reinforcing fabric sheet or bar mat shall then be
placed on the compacted layer of concrete and remaining depth shall be filled
in with concrete thereafter.
In doing this operation, the initial layer of concrete shall be struck off to the
entire width of the slabs and of sufficient length to permit sheet or mat of
reinforcement to be laid full length without further manipulations of the
reinforcement. Displacement of the reinforcement during concreting operations
shall be prevented.
b. Load transfer devices - dowels - Transverse expansion joints shall be
equipped with dowels of the dimension and at the spacing and location indicated
on the drawing. They shall be firmly supported in place, accurately aligned
parallel to the sub-grade/sub -base, parallel to each other and parallel to the
centre line of the pavement, by means of appropriate dowel supports. The dowel
supports shall ensure that the dowels are not displaced during construction. The
permissible tolerances in dowel bar alignment in both vertical and horizontal
directions shall be 1 mm in 100 mm for dowels of 20 mm and smaller
diameters and 0.5 mm in 100 mm for dowels of diameter greater than 20 mm.
One -half of each dowel shall be painted with a thin film of bitumen and
equipped with a tight fitting metal sleeve of the dimensions shown on the
drawing to provide space for the dowel when pavement expands and the join
closes. This sleeve shall be partly filled with cotton waste to prevent it being
pushed too far on the dowel during construction.
These sleeves are not required on dowels, if used, in dummy contraction or
construction joints.
c. Tie bars - Tie bars provided in longitudinal joints of plain butt type to prevent
opening of such joints shall be bonded to the adjacent slabs on both sides of the
longitudinal joint. They are installed by providing appropriate (drilled) holes in
the side forms depending on the size and spacing of bars. They are bent aside
temporarily to avoid obstruction to construction traffic and straightened later at
the time of laying of slab in the adjacent lane.
9.6.11 Compaction and Finishing
Compaction - The pavement shall be compacted either by means of a power-

driven pavers-cum -finisher or by a vibrating screed along with internal vibrators

where the slab thickness is more than 12.5 cm. For lesser thicknesses vibrating
screed may be supplemented with manual rodding. For areas where the width
of the slab is very small as at the corner of street junctions, etc. compaction with
wooden hand tampers may be adopted subject to the approval of the Project
Manager. In no case, however, hand compaction shall be permitted for slab
thicknesses beyond 10 cm. All compaction shall be done in accordance with the
following requirements:
(i) Where hand tamping is permitted as a special case.
(ii) Concrete with surcharge, as soon as placed, shall be struck off uniformly
and screeded, to such level above the base that when compacted and finished, the
pavement shall conform to the grade and cross -section indicated by the plans.
The entire surface shall then be tamped and the tamping operation continued
until a close knit dense surface is obtained.
(iii) The tamper shall rest on the side forms and shall be drawn ahead with a
sawing motion, in combination with a series of lifts and drops alternating with
lateral shifts, the aim of this operation being compaction and screeding to the
approximate level required. Subsequent tamping should advance about 75 mm
at a time in the direction in which the work is proceeding, and in the final
stages tamping should be closer, about 12 mm at a time until a level and dense
surface is obtained.
(iv) Segregated particles of coarse aggregate which collect in front of the
tamper or screed shall be thrown outside the forms or thoroughly mixed by hand
with the uncompacted mass of concrete already placed. Under no circumstances
shall such segregate particles be carried forward and pushed on to the base in
front of the mass.
(v) Compaction by tamping or screeding shall be carried on till the mortar in
the mix just works up to the surface. Care shall be exercised and the operation of
tamping so controlled as to prevent an excess of mortar and water from being
worked on to the top. Repeated operation other than to secure the necessary
compaction and to eliminate voids shall be avoided.
(vi) Immediately after the tamping or screeding has been completed and before
the concrete has hardened, While the concrete is still in a plastic stage, the
surface shall be inspected for irregularities with a profile checking template and
any needed correction made by adding or removing concrete followed by further
compaction and finishing.
Floating - As soon as practicable after the concrete has been compacted, its
surface shall be smoothened by means of a longitudinal float, operated from a
foot -bridge. The longitudinal float shall be worked with a sawing motion, while
held in a floating position parallel to the carriageway centre line and passed
gradually from one side of the pavement to the other. Movements ahead along
the centre line of the carriageway shall be in successive advances of not more
than one half the length of the float.

Straight-edging –After the longitudinal floating has been completed and excess
water has disappeared, but while the concrete is still plastic, the slab surface
shall be tested for trueness with a 3 m straight edge. The straight edge shall be
held in successive positions parallel to the road centre line in contact with the
surface and the whole area gone over from one side of the slab to the other.
Advance along the road shall be in successive stages of not more than one -
half length of the straight edge. Any area of depression found shall be
scooped to a depth of 4 -5 cm, filled immediately with freshly mixed concrete,
struck, compacted, and re-finished. High areas shall be cut down and refinished.
The straight edging and re-floating shall continue until the entire surface is found
to be free from observable departures from the straight edge and the slab has the
required grade and camber.
The slab surface shall be retested for trueness, before the concrete begins to set,
with the 3 m long master straight edge and the graduated wedge gauge.
The straight edge shall be placed on the surface in successive positions, parallel
to the carriageway centre line. Irregularities shall be measured with the help
of the wedge gauge moved transversely at various points until it touches both
the straight edge and the concrete surface.
At any point tested the concrete shall not show a departure greater than 3 mm
from the true surface. If at any place the departure exceeds this value not more
than 3 passes of the vibrating screed shall be allowed and the surface tested
again in the specified manner. If the irregularity still exceeds the limit aforesaid,
the concrete shall be removed to a depth of 50 mm or up to the top surface of the
reinforcement, if any. The area of concrete to be removed shall be demarcated by
the length of the straight edge in the position of measurement across the full
width of the slab. Where the point of measurement in default is less than 4.5m
from the nearest transverse expansion joint, the whole area up to the joint
shall be removed to the required depth. The concrete so removed shall not be re -
used in the carriageway. Fresh concrete shall be placed, compacted and
finished in the manner already described in these specifications and shall again
be subject to test for accuracy of finish.
The foregoing procedure shall be adopted at each shifting of the straight edge
and the whole area shall be gone over from one side of the slab to the other. The
straight edge shall advance longitudinally in successive stages of not more than
one -half the length of the straight edge.
No extra payment shall be made for the removal of the rejected concrete and or
laying fresh concrete.
Although the concrete may be removed immediately following measurement of
the irregularity and while it is still wet, this shall not mean any waiver from
complying with the requirements of this clause, if for any reason the concrete to
be removed has already hardened.
After straight edging of the surface, it shall be finished by brooming in the
manner described as mentioned in the following paragraphs.

Brooming - After belting and as soon as surplus water if any has risen to the
surface, the pavement shall be given a broom finish with an approved long
handled steel or fiber broom conforming to the stipulations laid down in JRC -
43 -1972. The broom shall be pulled gently over the surface of the pavement
from edge to edge. Adjacent strokes shall be slightly overlapped. Brooming shall
be perpendicular to the centre line of the pavement and so executed that the
corrugations thus produced will be uniform in character and width, and about
5mm deep. Brooming shall be completed before the concrete reaches such a
stage that the surface is likely to be torn or unduly roughened by the operation.
The broomed surface shall be f r e e f r o m p o r o u s or rough spots,
irregularities, depressions and small pockets, such as may be caused by
accidentally disturbing the particles of coarse aggregate embedded near the
surface.
Curing of concrete - Immediately after the finishing operations have been
completed, the entire surface of the newly laid concrete shall be covered against
rapid drying and cured. Failure to provide sufficient cover material of the
stipulated type or inadequate supplies of water for curing shall be adequate
cause for immediate suspension of concreting operations.
Initial curing - After completion of the finishing operations, the surface of the
pavement shall be entirely covered with wet hessian cloth, burlap or jute mats.
The coverings used shall be of such length (or width) that when laid will extend
at least 500 mm beyond the edges of the slab, shall be so placed that the entire
surface and both the edges of the slab are completely covered. They shall be
placed as soon as the concrete has set sufficiently to prevent marring of the
surface. Prior to their being placed, the coverings shall be thoroughly wetted
with water and placed with the wettest side down. They shall be so weighed
down as to cause them to remain in intimate contact with the surface covered.
They shall be maintained fully wetted and in position for 24 hours after the
concrete has been placed, or until the concrete is sufficiently hard to be walked
upon without suffering any damage. To maintain the coverings wet, water shall
be gently sprayed so as to avoid damage to the fresh concrete. If it becomes
necessary to remove the coverings for any reason, the concrete slab shall not be
kept exposed for a period of more than half an hour.
Worn coverings or coverings with holes shall not be permitted. Coverings
reclaimed from previous use other than curing concrete shall be thoroughly
washed prior to use 'for curing purposes, if the covering is furnished in strips, the
strips shall be laid to overlap at least 150 mm.
Covering shall be placed from suitable wooden bridges (IRC -43 -1972).
Walking on freshly laid concrete to facilitate placing coverings shall not be
permitted.
Final curing- Upon the removal of the covering the slab shall be thoroughly
wetted and then cured by one of the following methods of final curing -
Curing with wet earth - Exposed edges of the slab shall be banked with a
substantial berm of earth. Upon the slab shall then be laid a system of transverse

and longitudinal dykes of clay about 50 mm high, covered with a blanket of

sandy soil free from stones to prevent the drying up and cracking of clay. The
rest of the slab shall then be covered with sufficient sandy soil so as to produce
a blanket of earth not less than 40 mm depth after wetting. The earth covering
shall be thoroughly wetted while it is being placed on the surface and against
the sides of the slab and kept thoroughly saturated with water for 14 days and
thoroughly wetted down during the morning of the 15th day and shall thereafter
remain in place until the concrete has attained the required strength and
permission is given to open the pavement to traffic. When such permission is
granted, the covering shall be removed and the pavement swept clean. If the
earth covering becomes displaced during the curing period, it shall be replaced to
the original depth and re -saturated,
Removing forms - Forms shall not be removed from freshly placed concrete
until it has set, or at least 12 hours, whichever is later. They shall be carefully
removed in such a manner that no damage is done to the edges of the pavement.
After the forms have been removed, the slab edges shall be cleaned and any
limited honey -combed areas pointed up with 1 -2 cement sand mortar, after
which the sides of the slab shall be covered with earth to the level of the top of
the slab for final curing Slabs with excessive honey - combing as a result of
inadequate compaction shall be removed between nearest transverse joints.
Concreting during monsoon months - When concrete is being placed
during monsoon months and when it may be expected to rain, sufficient supply
of tarpaulins or other waterproof cloth shall be provided along the line of work.
Any time when it rains, all freshly laid concrete, which has not been covered for
curing purposes, shall be adequately protected by means of tarpaulins or other
waterproof cloth. Any concrete damaged by rain shall be removed and replaced.
Concreting in hot weather - As placing of concrete in air temperatures above
40°C, or above 35°C combined with relative humidity below 25 percent and/or
wind velocity higher than 10 km/hour, is attended with defects like loss of
workability through accelerated setting, formation of plastic shrinkage cracks,
etc., it is recommended that unless adequate precautions are taken, no
concreting shall be done in conditions more severe than the above. The
procedures recommended for adoption in case of hot weather concreting is given
in IRC - 61 -1976 “Tentative Guidelines for the Construction of Cement
Concrete Pavements in Hot Weather." Brief details of the procedure are given
below -Aggregates, cement and water shall be protected from the direct sun and
mixing operations shall also be carried out in shade. In addition portable
shelters shall be provided to protect the concrete during placing and finishing
operations. This may be in the form of gable frames to cover the full length of
the concrete pavement laid in a day. The surfaces of the formwork and sub grade
coming in contact with concrete shall be moistened prior to placing of the
concrete to prevent absorption of mixing water.
Since the setting time of concrete is considerably reduced under such
temperatures, labour force shall be reinforced to minimize the time between

mixing and placing of concrete. The protective cover shall be adequate to

exclude exposure of the concrete directly to the sun and also eliminate contact
with drying winds. Prior to removal of the portable shelters, the hardened
concrete shall be covered with wet hessian or burlap or the like followed by
one of the usual methods of curing like ponding, etc. In addition, the moist
curing period shall be extended to 4 weeks.
Work on gradients - The progress on gradient of all operations of placing,
compacting and finishing of concrete should proceed from the lower to the
higher reaches. The concrete mix shall be stiffer than that used on level reaches.
Protection of concrete - Suitable barricades shall be erected and maintained and
watchmen employed to exclude traffic from the newly constructed pavement for
the period herein prescribed, and these barriers shall be so arranged as not in any
way to interfere with or impede traffic on any lane intended to be kept open and
necessary signs and lights shall be maintained clearly indicating any lanes open
to the traffic. Where, as shown on the plans or indicated in the special
provisions, it is necessary to provide for traffic across the pavement, suitable and
substantial crossings to bridge over the concrete shall have to be provided. Such
crossings, as constructed, shall be adequate for the traffic and approved by the
Project Manager.
Any part of the pavement damaged by traffic or other causes occurring prior to
its final acceptance shall be repaired or replaced in a manner satisfactory to the
Project Manager. The pavement shall be protected against all traffic usage
including that of construction - traffic.
Sealing of joints - After the curing period is over and before the pavement is
opened to traffic, the temporary seal and all other intruded materials in the
transverse expansion and contraction joints as well as longitudinal joints shall be
removed completely and the groove; filled with the approved joint sealing
compound as per IRC - 57 -1974 "Recommended Practice for Sealing of Joints
in Concrete Pavements”. The joint opening shall be thoroughly cleared of all
foreign matter before the primer followed by sealing material is placed. If
necessary, the foreign matter shall be blown out by compressed air pressure. All
contact faces of the joint shall be cleaned with a wire brush to remove loose
material and shall be surface dried before the primer is applied.
Opening to traffic - In general, traffic shall be excluded from the newly
constructed pavement for a period of 28 days where Ordinary Portland Cement,
Portland Blast Furnace Slag Cement and Portland Pozzolona Cement are used, or
for a period of 7 days where Rapid Hardening Cement is used. In all cases,
before the pavement is opened to traffic it shall be cleaned and the joints shall
be sealed.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE AGREEMENT

Volume 4
Operations and Maintenance Agreement
OPERATE AND MAINTAIN THE BUILT SYSTEM UNDER SEWAGE COLLECTION

NETWORK AND SEWERAGE TREATMENT SCHEME FOR BARWANI TOWN FOR 10
YEARS
(TO COME INTO FORCE IMMEDIATELY AFTER THE COMPLETION OF
SUCCESSFUL TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF SEWAGE COLLECTION AND
TREATMENT SCHEME OF BARWANI TOWN UNDER THE MAIN CONTRACT)
1

FORM OF AGREEMENT
THIS CONTRACT is made and entered into this ____ day of _______, 2018
Between Managing Director, Madhya Pradesh Urban Development Company Limited,
Madhya Pradesh, a company incorporated under the laws of India and having its principal place of
business at 8, Arera Hills, Bhopal (hereafter the “Owner”)
– and –
[Name of Contractor Company] incorporated under the laws of [place of in Council] with its
principal place of business at [Address of the Contractor]
(hereafter the “Contractor”)
– and –
[Name of the Contractor’s Parent Company or any other entities the Owner may be required to be
parties to the Contract]
WHEREAS:
1. The Owner has the jurisdiction to enter into the Contract pursuant to the Applicable Law;
2. The Owner has received all requisite approvals necessary and has conformed with all
requisite laws in accordance with the Applicable Law to permit the Owner to enter into the Contract;
3. The Owner desires to engage the Contractor to OPERATE AND MAINTAIN THE SYSTEM
BUILT FOR SEWAGE COLLECTION NETWORK AND SEWERAGE TREATMENT OF
BARWANI NAGAR PALIKA, MADHYA PRADESH (under Design Build Agreement) FOR 10
YEARS and ensure the effectiveness and viability of the BARWANI Sewage Collection and
Treatment scheme.
4. The Contractor has represented to the Owner that it has the skills and ability to OPERATE
AND MAINTAIN THE BUILT SYSTEM FOR 10 YEARS in an economical and effective manner
and agrees to do so upon and subject to the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents;
5. The Contractor responded to the Bidding Documents dated ______________organized by the

MPUDC and was selected as the recommended Contractor to fulfill the Design-Build and Operating
Services set out in the Technical Standards Appendix;
6. The Contractor has the corporate capacity and authority to enter into the Contract; and
2

7. The Contractor has guaranteed the Agreements as provided in the Contract;
NOW THEREFORE, in consideration of the mutual covenants and Agreements hereinafter set forth,
the Owner and the Contractor agree as follows:
WHEREAS:
A. MPUDC has appointed the Contractor to operate and maintain the Sewage Collection and
Treatment assets for the Sewage Collection and Treatment scheme specified in the First
Schedule (the Sewage Collection and Treatment Area). On top of that the Contractor has to
organize an environmentally sound sewage sludge disposal;
B. Following a process of competitive tendering MPUDC has requested the Contractor to
undertake the operation and maintenance of Sewage Collection and Treatment services within
the Sewage Collection and Treatment Area in accordance with this Operation and
Maintenance Services Agreement (OMSA);
C. The Contractor, having represented to the Owner that it has the required managerial,
technical, scientific, engineering and operational skills and competencies in respect of the
design, construction, operation and maintenance of the Sewage Collection and Treatment
system, has agreed to be responsible for the operation and maintenance of the Sewage
Collection and Treatment system as described in this Agreement and based on existing
standards in the sector and reflecting service delivery reliability and quality.

3

THE PARTIES AGREE AS FOLLOWS:

1. INTERPRETATIONS
1.1 In this OMSA, unless the context otherwise requires:
(a) Owner means the MPUDC
(b) Sewage Collection and Treatment system means the piped Sewage Collection and
Treatment system in the Sewage Collection and Treatment area including STP, IPS, MPS,
collection network and all components including the meters installed, service connections and
flushing arrangements in BARWANI Municipal Area
(c) Commencement Date means the date as specified by the Owner after successful
completion and commissioning of the system and components including service connections
existing at the time of commissioning.
(d) Operation and Maintenance Contract means the clauses and provisions contained in
the agreement that relate to Operation and Maintenance of Sewage Collection and Treatment
system.
(e) Generally Accepted Accounting Principle” means the generally accepted accounting
principles prescribed by the Institute of Chartered Accounted of India.
(f) Sewage Collection and Treatment Area means the Municipal limits of BARWANI.
(g) Project Manager shall be the Project Manager of PIU of MPUDC.
2. COMMENCEMENT OF THIS OMSA

This OMSA shall come into effect on the Commencement Date
3. DURATION OF THIS OMSA

This OMSA shall continue in force for a period of ten [10] years ending on the [tenth] anniversary of
the Commencement Date.
4. NOTICE UNDER THIS OMSA

Any notice, instruction, direction, request or permission to be given or made under this OMSA shall
be in writing and signed by:
For the Owner: ________________________________
Engineer-in-Chief, MPUDC authorized by and acting on behalf of the MPUDC;
For the Contractor: ________________________________
4

The Contractor or any person authorized by and acting on behalf of the Contractor. Such
authorizations shall become OMSA Documents
Such notice, instruction, request or permission under sub-clause 4.1 shall be deemed to be duly given
or made when it shall have been delivered by hand or mail at the address of the party concerned as
specified below:
For the Owner:
………………………………………………………………….
………………………….………………………………………
………………………………………………………………….
For the Contractor:
………………………………………………………………….
………………………………………………………………….
5

5. APPOINTMENT AND RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR

5.1 The Owner hereby appoints the Contractor to be the sole and exclusive manager of the
Sewage Collection and Treatment system in the Sewage Collection and Treatment Area for
the duration of this OMSA.
5.2 The Contractor shall, in such manner and at such times as it shall in its absolute discretion,
use all its skills and knowledge to manage, administer, conduct, maintain and develop the
Sewage Collection and Treatment system in the Sewage Collection and Treatment Area in an
efficient and professional manner, in the best interests of the Owner, and in accordance with
Good Industry Practice and Applicable Law. In particular but without prejudice to the
generality of the foregoing, Contractor shall carry out the duties and obligations set out in this
Agreement to ensure that the performance of the Sewage Collection and Treatment system is
in compliance with the terms and conditions of this Agreement and meets the Performance
Standards specified in Schedule 4.
5.3 The qualification and experience of the key staff as identified in the Bid for the Operations
and Maintenance Period is attached in Schedule 7 to this OMSA. The Contractor shall
confirm the key staff being available and ready to start work in the Sewage Collection and
Treatment Area at least 3 months prior to the commencement of the operation and
maintenance Period. In case the Contractor is required to change any of the identified key
staff due to unavoidable circumstances, such change will be subject to approval from the
owner in justification provided by the Contractor. The proposed replacement shall have to be
of equivalent or higher qualification and experience specified in the above referred schedule
for the respective key staff.
5.4 All other personnel deployed by the Contractor for the provision of services under this
Agreement shall hold relevant qualifications and appropriate training and shall have sufficient
relevant experience to ensure the operation and maintenance of the Sewage Collection and
Treatment system is in compliance with the terms and conditions of this Agreement.
5.5 Notwithstanding Clause 5.1, the Contractor may sub-contract the day to day management of
the piped Sewage Collection and Treatment system and Assets in the Sewage Collection and
Treatment Area, or sections of the Sewage Collection and Treatment Area or any part of the
system or Assets to any person or entity subject to compliance with the following
requirements:
(a) the Contractor shall not sub-contract the performance of any of its obligations under this
OMSA without first informing the Owner in writing, providing such information about
the sub-Contractor as the Owner may require, and obtaining the Owner's written consent
(not to be unreasonably withheld);
(b) the Contractor shall remain liable under this OMSA for the performance of any
obligations sub-contracted by it under this Clause; and
(c) failure by the Contractor to inform the Owner and to obtain the Owner’s written consent
to any purported assignment of any of its obligations under this OMSA shall invalidate
6

the sub-contract as well as constitute a ground for termination of the OMSA by the
Owner under Clause 22 of this OMSA.
6. SAFEGUARD, USE, MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL OF ASSETS

6.1 The Owner reserves the rights in the assets comprising the system in sub-clause 5.1 as set out
in the Third Schedule to this OMSA at all times.
6.2 The Contractor shall have access to, the right to use, and the duty to safeguard, manage and
control the assets referred to in sub-clause 6.1, to carry out its duties and obligations or
executing its rights under this Agreement, for the term of this Contract.
6.3 The Contractor shall maintain in good working condition, throughout the term of this OMSA,
the assets referred to in sub-clause 6.1 and shall ensure that adequate control is maintained
over assets owned by, or in the custody of the Contractor.
6.4 The Contractor shall not dispose of or create any lien, charge or proprietary interest of any
nature whatsoever in favor of the Contractor or a third party in the assets referred to in sub-
clause 6.1, except on the express written instruction of the Owner.
6.5 The Contractor shall comply with any directions of the Owner to use or dispose of any asset
or any money or other consideration to which the Owner becomes entitled as a result of
disposing of any asset referred to in sub-clause 6.1.
6.6 The payment to the Contractor during the operation and maintenance period shall be governed
by the payment mechanism defined in Schedule 4.
7. OBLIGATIONS OF THE CONTRACTOR

7.1 During the term of this Agreement, the Contractor shall be responsible for operation and
maintenance of all components, including and without limitation the Sewage Collection and
Treatment system, sludge disposal and including ancillary equipment, in compliance with the
terms and conditions of this Agreement to meet the Performance Standards specified in
Schedule 4. This will include all systems supporting the provision of services including
installed SCADA system, customer grievance redressal system, and any other works included
under the contract
7.2 The Contractor shall procure grants, licenses and renewals of, and keep up to date, all
Applicable Permits to enable the Contractor to perform the Services throughout the term of
the Agreement other than those Applicable Permits that are to be applied for by MPUDC
7.3 If and as required, the Contractor shall provide assistance to MPUDC or agencies/advisors
nominated by it to liaise with other Governmental agencies in any interface in the operation of
the Sewage Collection and Treatment system;
7

7.4 The Contractor shall provide house sewer connections as per customer demand. This
comprises the works on the public ground as well as the connection inside the private
property and shall include both grey and black water.
7.5 The Contractor shall fully set into operation the Customer Grievance Redress System through
establishing and maintaining two (2) Customer Service Centers in identified locations for
each of the two Sewage Collection and Treatment Areas (made available by NP B+S) for
customer grievances and recording and keep them open between 0800 hours and 1900 hours,
for a minimum 5 days a week. At each such office, make arrangements for recording of
complaints (through website or register) from Customers /citizens. Additionally, operate and
maintain at least one centralized call center, online web based system complaint registration
systems which shall be accessible on 24 X 7 basis.
7.6 The Contractor shall undertake calibration of the metering devices for SPS and STP, so as to
ensure that the meters operate within an acceptable range of accuracy not exceeding [±5%];
calibration shall be undertaken in the presence of a representative of MPUDC.
7.7 In discharging the duties and obligations referred to in sub-clauses above, the Contractor
shall:
(d) exercise due diligence, efficiency and economy in accordance with generally accepted
professional conduct and practice, and shall employ sound management practices and
appropriate technology in the best interests of the Owner;
(e) comply with:
(1) Codes of workmanship prescribed by the legislation of India and Madhya
Pradesh
(2) the service standards specified or referred to in the Fourth Schedule to this
Operations and Maintenance Agreement
(3) provisions of all relevant laws relating to the duties and obligations
referred to in sub-clause 7.1, including as relating to occupational health
safety of employees, to the environment, to the collection and payment of
taxes and to any other matter whatsoever.
(4) the terms of any water or waste discharge permit granted to the Owner.
(5) any notice, instruction or direction issued in accordance with clause 4
(f) familiarize himself and be in confirmation with the terms of the Indian legislation for
Sewage Collection and Treatment and any statutory clearances for the Sewage
Collection and Treatment system and shall perform the Service in conformity with all of
the conditions of these consents.
8

(g) pay all taxes, rates, charges, fees, and penalties and provide all returns, files and
documents required of it under applicable tax laws or other laws and discharge all
obligations imposed on it by such laws
Failure by the Contractor to comply with the foregoing provisions shall amount to a
breach of this OMSA, subject to clause 21 at the discretion of the Owner.
8. SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND IMPROVEMENT

8.1 One month prior to the commencement of the operation period, the Contractor shall prepare
and provide MPUDC a plan containing its proposed operating strategy and programme of
preventive maintenance and other scheduled maintenance for the first year of operations
(Draft Operations and Maintenance Plan). Subject to approval by the MPUDC, the plan shall
comply with the operation and maintenance manual and safety requirements. The Draft O &
M Plan shall include
(a) implementation plan for effective operations and maintenance, and customer services
and emergency repairs.
(b) minimum essential spare parts and chemicals, and their quantities needed for one year
(c) required and proposed extensions or additions to the Sewage Collection and Treatment
systems, along with the justification and the cost implications. Investment costs shall be
paid by ULB (=Urban Local Body) according to the Tripartite Implementation
Agreement (TPIA).
(d) other information that the Contractor may consider appropriate or that may be specified
by the Owner
(e) propose a sound system for sewage sludge disposal. The proposed sludge handling and
sludge quantity and quality expected by the Contractor for his systemshall be in
conformity with the prevailing local regulations and take into consideration local
conditions. A justified proposal shall be presented to the Owner for approval.
Upon approval by MPUDC, or expiry of 30 days from submission, the Draft O & M
Plan shall be implemented by the Contractor.
8.2 The Plan shall be prepared and submitted for approval annually before the start of any year of
operations.
8.3 The Contractor shall be responsible, at its own cost, for managing all preventive maintenance
and normal repairs, major maintenance or replacements (if any required) to the system as per
the O & M Plan, including rectifying damage to the system due to any act of negligence in
performance of its functions, deemed necessary to maintain the value of the assets included in
the Third Schedule and ensure operations in compliance with the Performance Standards in
the Fourth Schedule. This responsibility extends to Sewage Collection and Treatment system
for 10 years.
9

8.4 If the Contractor is of the opinion that matters have arisen that may prevent, or significantly
affect the implementation of the O & M Plan, the Contractor shall immediately notify the
Owner of its opinion and the reasons thereof.
8.5 In case of occurrence of an insurable event, the Contractor shall be responsible for informing
the insurance agency about the event, complete any survey, follow-up with the insurance
agency for insurance claim settlement and repair/replacement of assets affected by the
insurable event. The expenditure on repair/replacement shall be certified by the Project
Manager. In the event the expenditure on repair/replacement of assets due to insurable event
is more than the insurance claim settlement, the difference would be borne by the Owner.
9. BILL GENERATION AND DISTRIBUTION

9.1 During the Operation and Maintenance Period, the responsibility of bill generation and
distribution to customers lies with the NP (B+S). Contractor shall not be responsible for
generation of bills and delivery of bills to customers.
9.2 The responsibility for collections remains with NP (B+S). Notwithstanding this, the
Contractor shall not accept customer payments.
9.3 The records for billing and collections of charges shall be updated in real time in the financial
management system and customer data base of the NP (B+S).
10. CONTRACTOR FEE

10.1 Subject to the provisions of this Contract and in consideration of the Contractor accepting the
rights under this Contract, and undertaking to perform and discharge its obligations in
accordance with the provisions of this Contract, the MPUDC agrees and undertakes to pay to
the Contractor Fees in accordance with Schedule 4.
10.2 The payment of Contractor Fee for services shall be on basis of quarterly invoices specified in
Schedule to this Agreement.
10.3 The Contractor Fee payable shall be subject to meeting Performance Standards and adjusted
in the manner provided in Schedule 4.
10.4 The Contractor should raise invoice within 15 days of completion of a quarter for services
relating to the previous quarter and submit the same to PIU of MPUDC. The MPUDC shall
certify and approve the payment of the invoice within 45 days of submission of the invoice.
10.5 The Owner shall be responsible for making quarterly payment to the Contractor for services
provided.
10

10.6 During the Operations Period, all requests for new house sewer connections will be submitted
to the Contractor, but require to be authorized and approved by the NP (B+S) . The Contractor
shall provide such house connections as are approved by the NP (B+S) within a period of 15
(fifteen) days from the receipt of an intimation from the NP (B+S). In case of extensions of
network, the contractor shall provide the connection within 15 days for authorization by
NP(B+S), provided that the extension has been authorized and approved six months prior to
such properties requesting connections.
10.7 The Contractor shall be reimbursed by MPUDC the actual cost of providing a new
connection. The PIU shall estimate the cost of providing a new connection, which may
include pipe, material, labor, road cutting and repair, and other relevant expenses, (except
supervision) every year based on the prevailing Schedule of Rates.
10.8 The Contractor shall not be paid any separate fee for supervision of activities related to
providing a new connection.
10.9 The Contractor shall continuously update the existing customer database to incorporate new
house sewer connections installed, disconnections (as may be) and reconnections.
10.10 The Contractor should provide in his bid two prices per m3 for sludge disposal. One price for
use as fertilizer in the agriculture; the other one for disposal on a certified landfill.
11. TO MAINTAIN AND KEEP RECORDS
11.1 The Contractor shall keep proper and adequate accounts and records of the transactions and
affairs of the Sewage Collection and Treatment and shall keep records that are necessary to
explain the financial operations and financial position of the system.
11.2 During the O&M Period the Contractor shall keep a computerized database of customer’s
record. Collection information would be updated based on actual collection information for
each customer as available with the accounting system of NP(B+S). The contractor shall be
given access to the sewage charge collection accounts of NP(B+S). The Contractor shall keep
a record in an electronic format using simple office management software. There should be
suitable controls to prevent unauthorized access to these records. The Contractor shall be
required to allow inspections of these records to the owner or his authorized representatives.
11.3 The Contractor shall develop and maintain an adequate budgeting and accounting system. The
Contractor shall develop and maintain an adequate internal accounting control system.
11.4 The accounting period of the Contractor shall coincide with the accounting period of the
Owner.
11

11.5 Without detracting from sub-clause 11.1, the Contractor shall keep the records referred to in
the Fifth Schedule of this Operations and Maintenance Agreement and shall retain those
records for the period prescribed in the Schedule.
11.6 Except as provided below and specified otherwise in any other clause, all records are
confidential to the Contractor and the Owner.
(a) Any customer or former customer of the Contractor may apply to the Contractor for a
copy of all records held by the Contractor concerning that customer, in such a form as
may be prescribed by the Owner.
(b) The Contractor shall provide a customer or former customer under sub-clause 11.6 (a)
with a copy of the relevant records, but may impose a reasonable charge to cover the
costs to the Contractor of making the copy available in accordance with clause 11.6 (a).
12. REPORTING REQUIREMENTS
12.1 The Contractor shall, in respect of each quarter of a financial year and not later than 15
calendar days after the end of such quarter, prepare a report to the Owner containing:
(a) information about, and an analysis of, its operations for the quarter and cumulatively for
the year to date; and
(b) Financial statements in accordance with Generally Accepted Accounting Principles for
the quarter and cumulatively for the year to date.
12.2 The report referred to under sub-clause 12.1 shall:
(a) be prepared in a form acceptable to the Owner;
(b) contain the information specified in the Fifth Schedule of this Operations and
Maintenance Agreement and any other information determined by the Contractor to be
appropriate; and
(c) Contain any other information reasonably required byte Owner.
12.3 The financial statements referred to under sub-clause 12.1 (b) shall:
(a) contain information determined by the Owner to be appropriate;
(b) include an assessment of the cost of carrying out any other obligation that is imposed on
the Contractor under this OMSA and that requires the Contractor to act otherwise than
in accordance with normal commercial practice;
(c) be prepared in a manner and form approved by the Owner; and
(d) Present fairly the results of the financial transactions of the Contractor during the
financial period to which they relate and the financial position of the Contractor as at
the end of that period.
12

12.4 The Contractor shall, in respect of each calendar month, and no later than 5 days after the end
of such month, prepare a report to the Owner containing:
(a) the information of customers;
12.5 The Owner may require and the Contractor, when notified, is obliged to appear in meetings of
the Owner convened to discuss the affairs of the Owner. The Owner may request the
Contractor to make such presentations, reports, demonstrations or take such actions as the
Owner may deem necessary with reasonable prior notice.
12.6 Failure of the Contractor to comply with the provisions of this clause shall amount to a breach
this OMSA, subject to clause 22 at the discretion of the Owner.
13. INSPECTION BY THE OWNER

The Contractor shall allow the Owner and/ or any person representing the Owner, access at
any time to:
(a) any land owned or occupied by the Owner;

(b) any assets renewed, acquired or constructed by the Owner;
(c) any assets under the contract owned by the Contractor;
(d) inspect any land, works, buildings or any other assets;
(e) make any tests, take any measurements or take any samples;
(f) take any photographs or make any plans or drawings; and
(g) inspect and, if necessary, make any copies of any records or documents referred to in
clause 10 in order to ascertain whether the Contractor is complying in every respect
with this OMSA.
14. INDEMNIFICATION
Provided that the Contractor, their servants and employees shall use diligence and care in
carrying out their duties hereunder, neither they nor any of their servants and employees shall
be liable for any damage to persons or property arising out of any information, advice or
service supplied to the Owner or act performed for the Owner or otherwise in the course of
their duties hereunder. The Owner shall indemnify the Contractor and every such person
against all claims, demands, losses, liabilities, actions, lawsuits, costs and expenses arising
directly or indirectly out of or in consequence thereof or in the implementation of this OMSA.
13

15. DUTIES, RIGHTS AND OBLIGATIONS OF THE AUTHORITY

Without detracting from any duties, obligations and rights imposed on or conferred upon
(whether expressly or by implication) the Owner by this Operation and Maintenance
Agreement, or implied by law or commercial custom on persons similar to the Owner, the
Owner shall have duties obligations or rights in the following:
16. ADJUSTMENT OF TARIFFS, FEES, RATES AND CHARGES

The Owner shall have the right and obligation to set and adjust the tariffs, fees, rates and
charges to be charged under clause 9, subject to the provisions of the Second Schedule.
17. RECOGNITION OF THE CONTRACTORS RIGHTS TO CHARGE TARIFFS AND

CONNECTION FEES
The Contractor has no right to charge individual users connected to the piped Sewage
Collection and Treatment system in the Sewage Collection and Treatment Area in accordance
with Clause 9.
18. AUDITING OF ACCOUNTS
18.1 The Owner shall have the right to appoint an auditor to examine the accounts, books and
records of the Contractor.
18.2 The Owner shall pay the costs of any auditor engaged under sub-clause 18.1.
19. NON-INTERFERENCE WITH OPERATIONS

The provisions in this OMSA notwithstanding, the Owner shall not interfere with the day to
day operations of the Contractor. In particular, the Owner shall not:
(a) issue instructions to the Contractor regarding operational decisions or actions except by
way of the Owner’s approved business plan or amended business plan or as required by
the law;
(b) Withhold payments due to the Contractor on account of the Contractor refusing or
failing to comply with instructions issued in contravention of this clause;
(c) Contravention of this clause by the Owner shall constitute a breach of this OMSA
subject to termination of the OMSA under clause 22.
14

MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
20. WAIVER
20.1 A failure, delay or indulgence on the part of either party in exercising any power or right
under this OMSA does not waive that power or right.
20.2 Any single exercise of a power or right under this OMSA does not preclude any other or
further exercise of it or the exercise of any other power or right under this OMSA.
21. AMENDMENT OR VARIATION

This OMSA may be amended or supplemented, at any time, in writing signed by both parties.
22. SUSPENSION AND TERMINATION

As per provisions in Article 11 of the General Conditions
23. TRANSFER
23.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for transfer of all assets, equipment, customer records and
other material created or maintained by the Contractor for the smooth operation and
maintenance of the Sewage Collection and Treatment system.
23.2 At least three months before expiry of the O&M Agreement, the Project Manager shall assess,
with assistance from PMC, if required, the useful life of the assets pertaining to the NPH
which are part of Sewage Collection and Treatment Area. If the remaining useful life of assets
is substantially less than what it should be if these were operated as per prescribed
methodology, the Contractor shall be responsible for undertaking any refurbishment or
replacement as required before handover of the system at the end of O&M Period. If the
Contractor fails to undertake such refurbishment or replacement, such reasonable amount as
may be recommended by the Project Manager can be deducted from any payments due to the
Contractor including termination payment or Performance Security.
23.3 At the time of handing over, the contractor is required have in stock spares and chemicals for
one year, in confirmation to the Operation Manual/ Operation and Maintenance Plan
approved by the owner.
24. TRAINING TO OWNER’S STAFF
24.1 24.1 The Contractor shall train the Owner’s selected staff for on job training during the last
6 months of O & M period. A maximum of Fifteen (15) staff of Owner will be trained.
15

FIRST SCHEDULE
SEWAGE COLLECTION AND TREATMENT AREA
Sewage Collection and Treatment Area under this contract is the area under the jurisdiction of
NAGAR PALIKA BARWANI as on the bid submission date and as specified in the Appendix 4. The
Contractor shall, for the full term of the Operation and Maintenance Agreement, have obligations to
provide services in compliance with the terms and conditions of this Agreement to the entire Sewage
Collection and Treatment Area.
16

SECOND SCHEDULE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE SERVICES
The Contractor shall operate and maintain:
• The new assets constructed under the Design Build Contract in the delimited Sewage
Collection and Treatment Area, for the duration of, and under the terms defined in the Operations and
Maintenance Contract.
1 Technical Requirements
1.1 Sewerage systems

1) The Contractor shall ensure that sewer network is in proper functioning status.
For this:
• the Contractor shall aim at keeping the entire Sewerage systems in working condition.
He shall make his own assessment of equipment and works to be part of the project to ensure
such requirements – including requirement of power supply to ensure efficient and effective
Sewerage system operation during the entire contract period.
2) The Contractor may temporarily interrupt sewerage facilities referred to above whenever:
• the Contractor reasonably wishes to examine, alter, repair, maintain or construct
works, and has advised customers likely to be affected, at least 48 hours in advance of the
date and time of such interruption; or
• there is, or is reasonably likely to be, a risk that would endanger human life or any part
of the environment, or compromise the health or safety of any person, or the safety of any
works of the Authority, or would prevent or disrupt the operation of a water treatment plant.
3) The Contractor shall not be deemed to have failed to comply with the provision above
whenever an interruption to supply occurs, because of:
• the action of a third party;
• failure of the national grid electricity supply system for more than 12 hours at any of
the Contractor’s head works, treatment works or pumping stations, where no stand-by
generator is installed; or an act of God (force majeure)
1.2 Quality of Treated Sewage
The Contractor shall treat all waste water in accordance to the norms laid down by the Central
Pollution Control Board of India and should consider the threshold value for phosphorous as
agreed in between MPUDC and KfW.
The Contractor shall ensure that the quality of treated sewage throughout the Sewerage
17

Systems does not exceed the limits given in these standards.

The contractor shall carry out the sampling tests of raw sewage by themselves to ascertain
the raw sewage quality for treatment process, further a periodic testing (every three
months) from a NABL certified lab will be carried out by contractor for the presence of
heavy metals. MPUDC will not be responsible for the above and no relaxation will be
given to the guarantee conditions of desired treated effluent quality. For design purposes
the lower parameters than the above mentioned parameter will not be allowed.
1.3 Sludge Disposal (Format)
The Contractor should carry out analysis of the sewage sludge if use as fertilizer in the
agriculture is a feasible option for sludge disposal. If that is not the case – according to the
Indian regulations – the sludge has to be disposed off on a certified waste dump.
1.4 Function of Sewerage systems
The Contractor shall ensure that the sewerage systems should work as per norms specified in
Indian Manual on Sewerage and Sewage Treatment (third edition - revised and updated) by
Ministry of Urban development, New Delhi, 2013:
• To ensure self-cleaning velocity.
1.5 Service Coverage
The Contractor shall ensure that all houses within the Sewerage systems area are covered and
waste water is collected from each of them.
1.6 Maintenance and Repairs
The Contractor shall on all works covered under the Operation and Maintenance agreement:
• maintain and keep the works in good repair and working condition;
• ensure that the Sewerage Systems operates effectively at all times; and
take appropriate action as per Schedule 4 in case of any failure in any part of the Sewerage
Systems being discovered by it, or brought to its attention (Schedule 4, Efficiency in
Addressing Customer Complaints).
1.7 Prevention of Pollution
The Contractor shall comply with all state and national legislation in relation to discharges or
disposal of any matter for which a waste discharge permit is required.
2 Customer Services
a) The contractor shall make arrangements to receive complaints 24 hours a day. In

addition, representatives of the Contractor shall be available at each of the Customer
Service Centers, which shall be kept open between 0800 hours and 1900 hours for a
18

minimum 5 days a week to receive complaints from users who wish to make enquiries
or submit complains during the O&M Period.
b) The Contractor shall not sublet / subcontract any part of work without prior approval
of Owner.
c) The Contractor shall maintain the system on a continuous basis, 365 days a year.
d) The Contractor shall bring his own tools and tackles, site-testing equipment required
for normal maintenance of the system.
e) Contractor shall make his own transport arrangement and accommodation of his staff.
f) Contractor shall provide at his expenses all materials / spares / services necessary for
rectifying/repairing of equipment during maintenance period.
19

THIRD SCHEDULE
ASSETS UNDER MANAGEMENT OF THE CONTRACTOR

Type of Assets Initial; Assets (to be Assets to be constructed under
operated and maintained by D(R)BO Agreement (to be
the Contractor) operated and maintained by the
Contractor)
Civil Structures Sewer Network and manhole
Raw water Pump houses 2+1 no
Sewage treatment plant 9 MLD)
Miscellaneous Raw sewage pump and motors
SCADA
Electrical transformer
Substations
House Sewer Connections
Upon termination of contract the management of the above assets shall be transferred to the Owner.
20

FOURTH SCHEDULE
PERFORMANCE STANDARDS, CONTRACTOR FEE AND INCENTIVES
1. Contractor Fee:
1.1 The Contractor Fee shall comprise the following components during the term of the
operation and maintenance period:
‐ Fixed O&M Fee: Fixed O&M Fee shall be paid as a lump sum. The amount of Fixed
O&M Fee payable will be subject to the Performance Linked Adjustment as provided in
Para 3.3 of this Schedule.
Variable O&M Fee shall be paid for energy consumption. The contractor is required to
provide his fees for energy consumption on the basis of INR 5 per KwH. In case, the cost
per unit exceeds Rs 5, the same will be reimbursed to the contractor. However, the increase
in consumption of energy will have to be borne by the contractor. The payment of the Fixed
O&M Fee and the Variable O&M Fee shall commence from the start of the operations and
maintenance period. The payments collectively hereinafter are referred to as “Contractor
Fee”
2. Fixed O&M Fee & Performance Standards during Operations Period

(i) The Contractor Performance in a quarter shall be measured as per the Performance
Standard stipulated in 2.1 below, and shall be rated in accordance with 2.2 below;
(ii) Each Performance Standard has a weightage provided for in 2.2 below.
2.1 Performance Standards
1. Parameter Providing house sewer connection requests within specified time

Measured By Percentage of house sewer connections provided within 15 days of
clearance received from NP (B+S)
Monitored The electronic registry of dated requests for HSCs received, cleared by NP
By (B+S) and connected within 15 days of clearance, as per the signed report
of the Consumer
Allowable Delays on account of the Consumer as recorded in the electronic registry
Exclusions
Benchmark 100% of all requests received and cleared by NP(B+S)
2. Parameter Continuity in operations of STP
Measured By Percentage of hours that the STP is operating for the period under review
Monitored An electronic registry of the PLC log data of operating time of sewage
21

By pumps for the period under review maintained by the Operator; the registry
shall include detailed database and summary tables.
Allowable i. Planned maintenance periods not exceeding 12 hours each once in a
Exclusions quarter.
ii. Third party causes
iii. Inadequate inflow
Benchmark 100% (at all times)
3 Parameter Efficiency in addressing customer complaints
Measured By Percentage of total number of complaints responded to within 24 hours and
resolved within the allowable period (as per table below) during the period
under review over the total number of complaints received during the
period under review.
Complaints relating to blockages and overflows at 24 hrs
manholes and in collection network
Complaints relating to stolen or broken manhole 48 hrs
covers
Complaints related to delay in providing 72 hrs
connection, change in customer database, other
complaints connected to customer database
Monitored An electronic registry maintained by the Operator which shall include
By detailed database and summary tables and including:
 Time and Date
 Complaint number
 Customer name
 Consumer Identification Number
 Nature of complaint
 Action Taken Report
 Time and Date of resolution of complaint
Benchmark 80% of complaints received during the period under review
4 Parameter Achieving Effluent Parameters
22

Measured By Daily composite sample, made out of 24 hourly samples collected from the
outlet of the CCT of the STP shall be tested in the in-house lab; and results
obtained converted into an electronic register.
Percentage of samples complying to individual parameter standard for the
following parameters:
S.No. Parameter Parameter limits
1 pH 6.5 to 9
2 BOD (mg/l) not more than 10
3 COD (mg/l) not more than 50
4 TSS (mg/l) not more than 20
5 NH4-N (mg/l) not more than 5
6 N-total (mg/l) not more than 10
7 P-total (mg/l) not more than 10
8 PO4-P (mg/l) not more than 2 mg/l
9 Faecal Coliform less than 230
(MPN/100ml)
Average of percentages for all parameters to be within benchmark
Monitored  An electronic registry maintained by the Operator from the laboratory

By results received. The registry shall include detailed database and
summary tables indicating Time and Date
 Sample number
 Details of laboratory results
 Details of remedial actions taken in case of quality problem
 Time and date of resumption of service level
 State Pollution Control Board (every six months), at the cost of
contractor (The owner will get the effluent checked from the SPCB
every six month).
Benchmark 95%
5 Parameter Level of Siltation in Vulnerable sections of the network
Measured By Standard Ball Test in vulnerable sections of the network as identified by the
owner and contractor at the design stage
Percentage of sections that clear the test
Monitored MPUDC
By
Benchmark 100%
2.2 Weightage of Performance Standards
23

The performance of the Contractor under each of the Performance Standards would be
allotted a weightage, in accordance with the following table
S.No Performance Parameter Weightage
1. Meeting House Sewer Connection requests within 20%

specified time
2. Continuity in Operations of STP 10%
3. Efficiency in Addressing Customer Complaints 20%
4. Achieving Effluent Parameters 30%
5. Level of Siltation in Vulnerable sections of the network 20%
3. Performance Linked Revenue Adjustment during Operations and Maintenance Period
3.1 The Fixed O & M Fee payable for each Performance Parameter will be calculated using the
weightages in section 2.2. A maximum of Fifty percent (50%) of the Fixed O & M Fee
payable for each Performance Parameter will be deducted for default in meeting
Performance Benchmarks listed in 3.1 above.
3.2 Starting from the second quarter of the Operations and Maintenance Period, the Fixed O&M
Fee payable for each Performance Parameter during each month shall be reduced if the
achievement under any Performance Parameter is below the Benchmark stipulated in 2.1
above.
The Fixed O & M fee payable for each performance parameter will be reduced as follows.
The reduction will be 0% if the Benchmark is achieved. For each 1% default below the
Benchmark, the reduction in the Fixed O & M Fee will be 5% subject to a maximum
reduction of 50% of the Fixed O & M Fee payable for that Performance Parameter.
S. % Default below Reduction in Reduction in Rs for that

No Benchmark for any Performance particular Performance
Performance Linked Fee (%) Parameter
Parameter
1 0% 0% Rs 0
2 10% (or higher) 50% RsCTF x PW x 50%
3 For any value Proportionately Proportionately between Rs 0
24

between 0% and and Rs CTF x PW x 50%

10%
Where CTF = Contractor Fixed Fee for the month

PW = Performance Weightage for that particular parameter
Thus, the total Fixed O & M Fee payable for the month would be the aggregate of
Fixed O & M Fee payable for each Performance Parameter reduced as above.
25

FIFTH SCHEDULE
REPORTING FORMAT
During the operation period the Contractor shall prepare Quarterly, Annual and final reports.
All reports shall be prepared in English and Hindi in hard and electronic version for
submission to the Owner.
Quarterly Reports
Throughout the assignment the Contractor shall submit Quarterly Reports to the owner by the
fifteenth day of the following month. Each report will show events and summary operations
for the Contractor’s activities for each of the main tasks.
The quarterly progress reports should be short and whenever possible prepared in a tabular
format for easy reference and comparison. A format for this report will be submitted by the
Contractor for approval by the Project Manager.
I Number of House Sewer Connections: The section will present
(d) the percentage of the population in the Sewage Collection and Treatment Area
having direct House Sewer Connections (HSCs)
(e) the number of new HSCs the period, and also specifying the number of new /
additional HSCs operationalized in every quarter under this Operations and
Maintenance Agreement since Commencement Date
(f) The electronic registry of dated requests for HSCs received during the period; date
of clearance by NP(B+S) and date of connection, as per the signed report of the
Consumer
(e) the total number of House Sewer Connections under various categories
(b) The number of unscheduled stoppages at SPSs and at the STP lasting more than 12
hours
II Quality of Service –Effluent Quality and Redressal of Customer Complaints
This section will present information on
(a): quality of effluent treated waste water
(b): Efficiency in Addressing Customer Complaints, indicating (i): Total complaints received
during the reporting period (ii): type of complaints (iii) Time and date of resolution of
complaint
III Investments
This section will present a summary of the capital works carried out and the investment
incurred during the period, with a breakdown of type of investments. The repair and
maintenance works undertaken during the reporting period will be presented separately
indicating the type of repair and maintenance work undertaken.
IV Financial Performance: This section will present (all relevant information required will
be procured from NP (B+S)
(a) an audited summary balance sheet prepared in accordance with Generally Accepted
Accounting Principles.
26

(b) an audited income statement prepared in accordance with Generally Accepted

Accounting Principles. The income statement will be at a level of detail, which
provides the following details: (a): Revenues and (b): Recurrent Costs (distinguishing
between staff costs, Repairs and maintenance, electricity, Chemicals, Interest costs
and Other costs).
V Final report
The Contractor will prepare a draft of Final report and hand it over to the owner one month
prior to the end of the Operation and Maintenance Period. The report will present a review of
the Contractor’s major obligations under the Contract, as undertaken and completed /
delivered and include the necessary conclusions. Upon receipt of the owner’s comments and
suggestions, the Contractor will prepare the finalized version of the report
27

SIXTH SCHEDULE
TARIFFS AND TARIFF CHANGES
The billing and collection is not in the scope of works of the contractor.
28

SEVENTH SCHEDULE
LIST OF KEY STAFF FOR O&M PERIOD
(As identified by the Operator in the bid in response to contract requirements. List, with all
relevant information, to be appended herewith)
29

Bid Document 122

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Bid Document 122

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Madhya Pradesh Urban Development Company Limited

E-PROCUREMENT BIDDING DOCUMENT

NIT No. MPUDC/KfW/ 2018/2646 Dated 13-06-2018

SURVEY, REVIEW THE DESIGNS, REDESIGN WHERE NECESSARY AND

First Floor, MP Rajya Krishi and Gramin Sahkari Bank,

INVITATION FOR BIDS (IFB)

M.P. URBAN DEVELOPMENT COMPANY LIMITED, BHOPAL, M.P.

MADHYA PRADESH URBAN SANITATION AND ENVIRONMENT

SURVEY, REVIEW THE DESIGNS, REDESIGN WHERE NECESSARY AND

E-Procurement Notice/Invitation for Bids (Bid No. 122)

NIT No. MPUDC/KfW/ 2018/2646 Dated 13-06-2018

1. The Government of Madhya Pradesh (GoMP) through Government of India has

2. Bidding will be conducted through International Competitive bidding

3. Engineer-In-Chief, M.P. Urban Development Company Limited invites Bids in

Package Name of Work Bid Security Cost of Bid Period of

MADHYA PRADESH URBAN SANITATION AND ENVIRONMENT PROGRAMME

Invitation for Bids under International Competitive Bidding

NIT No. MPUDC/KfW/ 2018/2646 Dated 13.06.2018

Section 2. The Bidding Documents 11

Section 3. Preparation of Bids 15

Section 4. Submission of Bids 24

Section 5. Bid Opening and Evaluation 25

Madhya Pradesh Urban Sanitation and Environmental Programme Page 2 of 98

Section 6. Award of Contract 28

Section 7. Bid Data Sheet 33

Annex A– BIDDER’S BID FORMS 45

Annex B – THE DRAFT CONTRACT 82

Annex C – CONTRACT PRICE SCHEDULE 90

Madhya Pradesh Urban Sanitation and Environmental Programme Page 3 of 98

Madhya Pradesh Urban Sanitation and Environmental Programme Page 4 of 98

Madhya Pradesh Urban Sanitation and Environmental Programme Page 5 of 98

1.4 Qualification (A) General

Madhya Pradesh Urban Sanitation and Environmental Programme Page 6 of 98

subcontractors and sub-consultants and a record of their

Madhya Pradesh Urban Sanitation and Environmental Programme Page 7 of 98

stated in BDS within the period stated in the respective

Madhya Pradesh Urban Sanitation and Environmental Programme Page 8 of 98

The Bidder shall supply general information on the management

1.5 Joint Ventures (A) Eligibility

Madhya Pradesh Urban Sanitation and Environmental Programme Page 9 of 98

(a) Financial soundness as stated in ITB 1.4 F (1)

Madhya Pradesh Urban Sanitation and Environmental Programme Page 10 of 98

Section 2. The Bidding Documents

Madhya Pradesh Urban Sanitation and Environmental Programme Page 11 of 98

(ii) Appendices to the General Conditions,

Madhya Pradesh Urban Sanitation and Environmental Programme Page 12 of 98

submission. Description of clarification sought and the response

Madhya Pradesh Urban Sanitation and Environmental Programme Page 13 of 98

questions received late, but questions and responses will be

Madhya Pradesh Urban Sanitation and Environmental Programme Page 14 of 98

Owner and its advisors, employees, consultants and agents shall

Section 3. Preparation of Bids

Madhya Pradesh Urban Sanitation and Environmental Programme Page 15 of 98

(iii) the Bid Security required by ITB Section 3.5;

Madhya Pradesh Urban Sanitation and Environmental Programme Page 16 of 98

required by ITB Section 1.4 (G)

Madhya Pradesh Urban Sanitation and Environmental Programme Page 17 of 98

Specifications to the General Conditions.

Madhya Pradesh Urban Sanitation and Environmental Programme Page 18 of 98

consulting set out in ITB 1.3.

Madhya Pradesh Urban Sanitation and Environmental Programme Page 19 of 98

ITB Section 6.5.

Madhya Pradesh Urban Sanitation and Environmental Programme Page 20 of 98

be reasonably inferred from the Bidding Documents in respect of